Miss-Stake by IRS: Proof-of-Stake’s Underinclusive Regulatory Guidance

Death and taxes are the two certainties of life, and for some, the former may be more conceptually pleasant than the latter. To allay some of that unpleasantness, this Note uses the IRS’s guidance (or lack thereof) on the taxation of new types of digital currencies to provide a basic conceptual understanding of how tax law is formed. “Staking rewards,” which is income derived from new types of digital currencies, have sparked debate over when it should be taxed. However, such ambiguity has failed to elicit a clear response from the IRS.

It is understandable why this area of law feels convoluted to many. Unlike other disciplines, tax law is not judge-made law. Therefore, tax law often lacks clear natural-language holdings from case law. Instead, it is applied either statutorily (under the Internal Revenue Code) or administratively (through regulations, notices, and letters from the IRS). This Note illustrates that in many instances, our tax system is not as convoluted or ambiguous as it is appears.

This Note looks at the IRS’s non-response up until the Revenue Ruling on July 31, 2023, to argue that such silence regarding income from staking rewards was not only deliberate but also necessary, at least during that time. This argument analyzes the taxation of staking rewards in three parts. Part I explains the background and mechanics of staking rewards and how those traits factor into questions of how it should be taxed. Scholarship on taxing staking rewards is growing yet scarce, and typically published either by advocates or adversaries of digital currencies. Accordingly, Part I of this Note also provides a consolidation of arguments and analyses from both sides of the debate. Part II outlines what is left unclear by the Internal Revenue Code, the IRS, and case law. Part III explains what the IRS had ruled up until the recent Revenue Ruling, and what guidance may be expected to follow. Here, in Part III, is this Note’s novel contribution. Part III uses the debate on staking rewards as a lens to justify non-guidance by the IRS to balance the risk of stifling innovation in new technology sectors and avoid commitment to “unfair” tax guidance. These considerations draw on tort law to illustrate the need to allow for development of a sufficient “background of experience” before regulating developing technology into the ground.

INTRODUCTION

Digital assets, cryptocurrency, and blockchain are areas of rapid growth in the legal field and are consequently raising new questions about their legal and tax implications and treatments. The Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) has provided some guidance on the taxation of a few mechanisms, such as proof-of-work (“PoW”), Mining, Hard Forks, and transfers to investors and service providers.1Charles R. Zubrzycki, Tax and Accounting Aspects of Virtual Currency, LexisNexis, https://

plus.lexis.com/document/openwebdocview/Tax-and-Accounting-Aspects-of-Virtual-Currency/?pddoc
fullpath=%2Fshared%2Fdocument%2Fanalytical-materials%2Furn%3AcontentItem%3A62PH-S571-JB7K-23MY-00000-00&pdcomponentid=500749&pdmfid=1530671&crid=eac337b2-6033-4b53-ad74-f9b9a36ae1f0 [https://perma.cc/46NG-ESGP] (last updated Nov. 30, 2023).
However, newer applications to blockchain systems, namely proof-of-stake (“PoS”) consensus mechanisms, have highlighted the ambiguities in the existing guidelines. This Note will address two main questions: first, what are the different ways a statutory analysis may qualify the timing and character of staking rewards as assets or income, and second, whether and how the IRS may choose to provide guidance for interpreting and applying the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”). This Note will only provide a high-level, normative assessment of what “should” be the approach to taxation of staking rewards. It will serve as a roadmap by compiling and interpreting the (limited) guiding authority that has been obscured for a variety of reasons, including writing on the topic, which is primarily the conjecture of staking advocates and cryptocurrency skeptics. This roadmap will explain why Congress and the IRS had, for so long, declined to clarify their intentions to regulate and interpret the reporting requirements of staking rewards, with a focus on why such ambiguity was and is justified for the developing nature of digital currencies under our tax system. More broadly, this Note should be used to understand how and why the IRS finally issued Revenue Ruling 2023-14 on July 31, 2023 stating its opinion that staking rewards should be taxed at receipt.2Rev. Rul. 2023-14, 2023-33 I.R.B. 484, https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-drop/rr-23-14.pdf [https://perma.cc/P6WL-FVAX]. While there are some arguments that the recent ruling does not necessarily impose tax on all staking rewards, it is premature to explore such edge cases before the IRS’s opinion (which is not binding on courts) is interpreted by a court.3Matthew Dimon, David Forst & Sean McElroy, IRS Issues Revenue Ruling 2023-14 on Staking, JD Supra (Aug. 1, 2023), https://www.jdsupra.com/legalnews/irs-issues-revenue-ruling-2023-14-on-5931377 [http://perma.cc/69VK-3QQB] (noting that the ruling was issued three days after oral arguments in the Jarrett case’s appeal).

I.  BACKGROUND

A.  What Is a Blockchain?

Another more descriptive name for blockchains is “distributed ledgers.” Information is shared among participants on the blockchain (“purveyors”), and transactions are constantly appended to the ledger, and then redistributed to users. Once a majority of those users agree that the new ledger is valid, it becomes the standard for all future transactions. The utility of the blockchain is that every user is incentivized to republish only validated ledgers because to publish an invalid ledger would conflict with the “distributed” version propagated by all the other users and cause the party publishing the invalid ledger to lose credibility and consequently, lose the ability to record its own transactions on the ledger.

If the utility of organizing data like this is not immediately clear, consider a typical property law topic: recording acts. Different jurisdictions have different ramifications for failure to properly record, or check the recording of, a real estate transaction in indices that are maintained by a county clerk. So, prompt recording and diligent record checking are important (but sometimes insufficient) to prevent title disputes in land transactions. For example, imagine purchasers A and B are both interested in purchasing Blackacre from seller X, in a state with a “notice” recording act. Here, A purchases Blackacre from X in year 1, and B “purchases” Blackacre from X in year 2 and records the deed of sale on the same day (before A had recorded her deed). So long as B is a bona fide purchaser, and she did not have notice of A’s transaction, her claim to the property would prevail. Blockchain systems are designed to solve exactly this type of problem. Through use of a “consensus mechanism,” each subsequent transaction is validated before it is added to the ledger, which maintains the integrity of frequently updated data sets. Had Blackacre’s state used such a consensus mechanism, the automatic validation of A’s transaction would generate notice to other buyers like B, not only cementing A’s deed, but also saving B from accidentally buying Blackacre from an unscrupulous seller. This illustrates how seamlessly this kind of technology can promote fair function of law without any change needed to our laws or regulations. While some people are still skeptical of “new blockchain applications,” in 2018, Burlington, Vermont, contracted with a blockchain startup, “Propy,” to provide exactly this kind of blockchain-supported recordkeeping for the County’s recording of land transactions.4Vermont Blockchain Legislation and Propy: Things You Need to Know, Propy (Mar. 28, 2019), https://propy.com/browse/vermont-blockchain-legislation-and-propy-things-you-need-to-know [http://perma.cc/7Y2K-GFK6]; see Office of the Vt. Sec’y of State, Blockchains for Public Recordkeeping and for Recording Land Records 21 (2019), https://sos.vermont.
gov/media/r3jh24ig/vsara_blockchains_for_public_recordkeeping_white_paper_v1.pdf [http://perma.
cc/ZKH6-G2L3].

B.  What Are Consensus Mechanisms and Staking Rewards?

A consensus mechanism is the way in which a blockchain validates transactions of cryptocurrency; the validation itself is carried out through cryptography (encryption or decryption).5Pete Ritter, Joshua Tompkins & Hubert Raglan, Early Signs from Treasury on the Scope of Digital Asset Cost Basis Reporting, The Tax Adviser (June 1, 2022) [hereinafter Ritter, KPMG Article], https://www.thetaxadviser.com/issues/2022/jun/treasury-scope-digital-asset-cost-basis-reporting [https:

//perma.cc/F4DK-V9EK].
Consensus mechanisms used are either PoW or PoS. PoW is the older mechanism (launched by technologies like Bitcoin), which is why it is more familiar to the IRS. PoS mechanisms are newer, and accordingly, enjoy much less tax guidance from the IRS, specifically with respect to “staking rewards” (discussed below). A PoS consensus mechanism expands its ledger and confirms transactions by selecting users to “verify that a transaction is legitimate and add it to the blockchain,” rather than have every user assess the accuracy of each newly published ledger.6E. Napoletano, Proof of Stake Explained, Forbes (Aug. 25, 2023, 1:27 PM), https://www.forbes.com/advisor/investing/cryptocurrency/proof-of-stake [http://perma.cc/N9S7-TW5L] (quoting Marius Smith, head of business development at digital asset custodian Finoa). Those who verify transactions are called “validators,” which is a desirable role because validators who successfully confirm a transaction receive a reward in the blockchain’s native cryptocurrency—a staking reward.7Id. Prospective validators must “stake” some of their own native cryptocurrency (or cryptocurrency that has been “delegated” to them by “stakers”) as a form of collateral to ensure that they will not verify fraudulent transactions. However, should they “improperly validate bad or fraudulent data, they may lose some or all of their stake as a penalty.”8Id. (describing what a “slash” is). Validators receive a fee in the native currency, called “gas,” which they will use to pay staking rewards to the participants who delegated/staked tokens to them.9A Comprehensive Guide on Crypto Staking Taxes, ZenLedger (Mar. 23, 2022), https://www.zenledger.io/blog/crypto-staking-taxes [http://perma.cc/3JCS-SLKT]. Network participants also hope to be selected as validators because they desire to support the good function of the blockchain.10David Rodeck, Crypto Staking Basics, Forbes (Aug. 2, 2022 11:16 AM), https://www.forbes.com/advisor/investing/cryptocurrency/crypto-staking-basics [http://perma.cc/7GA4-4NQA]. This type of “skin in the game” means that the larger a stake, the more likely the network is to deem the person as a provider of trustworthy consensus votes, increasing the chance that the person will be selected as a validator.11Id. This mechanism causes the participants holding only a small amount of native currency to pool their coins or delegate them to a validator (rather than trying to be a validator themselves) and receive staking rewards in return on a pro rata basis, similar in some respects to a partnership.12Id. Tokens received as staking rewards are not distributed from a preexisting fund. Instead, they are actually created through the validation.13K. Peter Ritter & Joshua S. Tompkins, Proof of Stake—What’s Really at Stake on the Tax Front?, 19 J. Tax’n Fin. Prods. 25, 28 (2022) [hereinafter Ritter, Journal Article]. This may lead to novel and unique tax treatment based on ambiguities of asset character or uncertainties in the timing of their receipt or credit.14Napoletano, supra note 6. After an explanation of income, this Note will outline some difficulties in applying traditional timing rules for inclusion of income to staking rewards.

C.  How to Measure Income

Defining what is income is a chronic question in the world of tax law, and for purposes of this Note, it is necessary to understand how to measure and identify income before we can decide if/when such income is “taxable income.” The Haig-Simons definition of income is widely accepted and illustrative of a non-statutory measurement of income: “Personal income may be defined as the algebraic sum of (1) the market value of rights exercised in consumption and (2) the change in the value of the store of property rights between the beginning and end of the period in question.”15Henry C. Simons, Personal Income Taxation: The Definition of Income as a Problem of Fiscal Policy 50 (1938) (modeling income as an individual’s change in wealth). This broad definition of income is constructed to measure a person’s change in wealth (∆W) by comparing the inflow and outflow of their assets. For example, Consumer B has $10 of wages per week, $100 in savings (S), and every week his only consumption (C) is purchasing groceries. To illustrate, assume two scenarios: in scenario 1, he consumes $5 this week (increasing his savings by $5) and in scenario 2, he consumes $15 (decreasing his savings by $5). In both scenarios his income will be the same because he still received $10 of wages. To maintain equivalency of income, the Haig-Simon algebraic sum compensates for the different consumptions by factoring in B’s change in savings (∆S). In scenario 1, B was underbudget, so his change in savings (∆S) was +$5, but in scenario 2, B went overbudget, which required spending $5 of his savings, generating a negative change in savings of -$5. The variables for this income definition are change in wealth (∆W), consumption (C), and change in savings (∆S), which are related as the following equation dictates.

Going forward, the relevant variable for questions of income from staking rewards is the change in savings (∆S) because it is a broader model for income, representing a taxpayer’s purchasing power, rather than just net receipts.16Michael J. Graetz, Deborah H. Schenk & Anne L. Alstott, Federal Income Taxation: Principles and Policies 566–67 (8th ed. 2018) (illustrating that income, especially capital income, should only be recognized from real gain that elevates a taxpayer’s purchasing power).

D.  Unique Tax Nature of Staking Rewards

Two fundamental aspects of measuring income are tax-free recovery of capital and determining when income is sufficiently concrete such that it should be taxed.17Id. at 38–40. Here, “capital” is the amount invested in an asset, the “recovery” of which is not taxed at the asset’s “disposition.”18See James Chen, Disposition: Definition, How It Works in Investing, and Example, Investopedia, https://www.investopedia.com/terms/d/disposition.asp [https://perma.cc/8SAQ-9LYM] (Aug. 22, 2022); see generally I.R.C. § 904(f)(3)(B)(i) (defining “disposition” as “a sale, exchange, distribution, or gift of property”). To note, § 904 is not relevant here. The amount invested in an asset (“basis”) is typically determined to be the amount paid for the asset (“cost basis”).19See I.R.C. § 1012. For example, if Investor X buys Z stock for $100 in year 1, and in year 2 it has a fair market value (“FMV”) of $200, X has then realized $100 in gain (the $200 FMV less the $100 cost basis); however, because Investor X did not sell the asset, that gain is not seen as sufficiently concrete, and she does not recognize any taxable income. If instead our tax system treated X as recognizing her amount realized (that is, even though she had not sold the Z stock), she would owe taxes on the full $100. Additionally, there would be another problem if the system taxed the full FMV of $200. X bought stock Z with “post-tax dollars,” money that had already been taxed when it was first received. Now she is being taxed on that same $100 again, despite such value not reflecting any real gain. Commissioner v. Glenshaw Glass defined the test for recognition of real gain under I.R.C. § 61 as “accessions to wealth, clearly realized, and over which the taxpayers have complete dominion.”20Comm’r v. Glenshaw Glass Co., 348 U.S. 426, 431 (1955) (emphasis added). The previous focus on measurements of ∆S or purchasing power flows from the emphasis that the Glenshaw Glass test puts on accessions to wealth.

1.  New Property

The fundamental reason that the taxation of staking rewards is unclear is because of the meaning of “recognition.” If X had sold the Z stock for dollars, it would be clear (1) that she had realized gain and (2) how to measure amount of gain. However, because she continues to hold Z stock, it is harder to determine if she has experienced an accretion to wealth and how much that accretion is.

Application of our tax system is not always limited to strict statutory interpretation. In such gaps of explicit authority, the spirit of the law assumes that what an unrelated buyer is willing to pay X for an asset is an adequate estimated valuation from which the appropriate tax effect may be calculated. However, applying this question to staking rewards is not as simple as merely determining the market value of the reward because the tokens received are “newly minted”; therefore, there is no purchase or sale, and no third-party source has given up any tokens—even though the number of tokens held by a given person has increased.21Abraham Sutherland, Cryptocurrency Economics and the Taxation of Block Rewards, Part 2, 165 Tax Notes Fed. 953, 962 (2019) [hereinafter Sutherland, Block Rewards Part 2]. That said, determining gain when a taxpayer receives assets without any purchase or sale (and therefore no cost basis) is not wholly uncharted waters in tax law. For example, § 1221(a)(3) of the Code specifically excludes certain “self-created” assets from the definition of capital assets.22I.R.C. § 1221(a)(3). Further, analysis of the relevance of staking rewards being “new property” is explored later as part of the review of staking rewards as capital assets.

2.  Dilutionary Effect

The “dilutionary” characteristic of staking rewards is a result of their status as “created property” and is one of the main factors current cryptocurrency tax guidance fails to address. Recall that staking rewards are distributed because PoS consensus mechanisms provide participants with the opportunity to maintain the network.23See Abraham Sutherland, Cryptocurrency Economics and the Taxation of Block Rewards, 165 Tax Notes Fed. 749, 750 (2019) [hereinafter Sutherland, Block Rewards]. Additionally, because validators increase their frequency of opportunities to maintain the network by pledging more tokens, they are willing to pay staking rewards to participants who pledge tokens roughly proportionate to the size of each pledge.24See id. This is where issues of dilution can arise.

Abraham Sutherland, a professor at the University of Virginia School of Law and legal advisor to the Proof of Stake Alliance, explains that the amount of “true gains and losses” for stakers depends on two variables: the “staking rate” and the “token creation rate.”25Mattia Landoni & Abraham Sutherland, Dilution and True Economic Gain from Cryptocurrency Block Rewards, 168 Tax Notes Fed. 1213, 1215 (2020). The staking rate represents what percent of a network’s total tokens are actively staked, and the token creation rate represents the rate that tokens are created on the network through other means.26See id. at 1213–15 (explaining that tokens may also be created by the incumbent owners of a network outside of the staking process). Describing or creating useful models that account for the token creation rate is beyond the scope of this Note, so the following analyses will assume there is no alternative method of token production, setting the token production rate equal to zero. Sutherland goes on to illustrate that as the staking rate increases, the amount of true economic gain decreases.27See id. (explaining that once the staking rate reaches 100% there is no longer any true economic gain for staking). So, when enough participants on the network receive staking rewards in proportion to their initial holdings, they may hold more tokens, but that will not be indicative of a relative increase to their purchasing power (which is another measurement of “income”). Imagine if tomorrow every person in the world had their net worth doubled; the inevitable parallel result would be that the price of goods and services would also double. That is a simplistic illustration of Sutherland’s models of true economic gain on PoS networks and how applying IRS guidance intended for PoW mining income will result in the overstatement of income.28See id. at 1221.

Understanding dilution’s effect on income is easier through analogy to inflation. For such an analogy, it is helpful to apply a non-statutory definition (such as section 61 of the Code). Recall the Haig-Simons definition of income modeled by equation (1) below.29See Simons, supra note 15.

As explained above, tracking ∆S is necessary to ensure income correlates with purchasing power.30Graetz et al., supra note 16. For example, consider Investor X, who purchases $100 of stock B when the constant, annual rate of inflation is 10%. Inflation in this case, is “a rise in prices, which can be translated as the decline of purchasing power over time.”31Jason Fernando, Inflation: What It Is, How It Can Be Controlled, and Extreme Examples, Investopedia (Dec. 14, 2023), https://www.investopedia.com/terms/i/inflation.asp [http://
perma.cc/8LED-E4GU].
This means that for B’s stock to maintain its same purchasing power it must appreciate at a rate equal to the inflation rate, which would require stock B’s value rise to $110 by year’s end.3210% (rate of return equal to rate of inflation) multiplied by $100 (the principal value of stock B) equals $10 (appreciation of stock). Assume that B’s value does go up by $10. That change in savings would result in $10 of income despite X having no “real” income (“true income” in dilution explanation above) because inflation raised the prices of everything by 10%.33See Fernando, supra note 31. Similarly, if a holder of 100 tokens, representing 1% of total tokens on the network receives 1 token as a staking reward at a time when the quantity of tokens increases by 1%, that holder will continue to hold 1% of all tokens and will not have any more purchasing power. This illustrates how effects of dilution and inflation can be similar. Despite reductions in purchasing power caused by inflationary effects, there is no exception to the requirement that all of a taxpayer’s nominal gains must be included in the year of receipt.34See I.R.C. § 461. Dilution in the cryptocurrency context is similarly insufficient (by itself) to justify an exception from inclusion at receipt. It does, however, indicate a need for a better method of valuing the true economic income of taxpayers.35See Landoni & Sutherland, supra note 25 (detailing three possible methods of modeling and calculating true economic income from staking rewards).

Another real-world analogue is the taxability of stock dividends. A stock dividend is simply a payment from a corporation to its shareholders in the form of additional shares.36James Chen, Stock Dividend: What It Is and How It Works, with Example, Investopedia (June 30, 2023), https://www.investopedia.com/terms/s/stockdividend.asp [https://perma.cc/RW73-GNGS]. Receipt of stock qualifies as an “accession to wealth” under the Glenshaw Glass rule and would typically be includable as section 61 income.37Comm’r v. Glenshaw Glass Co., 348 U.S. 426, 431 (1955); I.R.C. § 61(a). But that was not the case in Eisner v. Macomber, in which a stock dividend was issued to all shareholders in proportion to the number of shares owned.38Eisner v. Macomber, 252 U.S. 189, 203 (1920). The Supreme Court justified the lack of income because of the non-change in positions of the corporation and the shareholders, based on the fact that the corporation’s “property [was] not diminished, and . . . . [t]he proportional interest of each shareholder remain[ed] the same.”39Id. Now partially enshrined by I.R.C. § 305, the lack of change to the shareholders’ position is the more relevant factor than the lack of disposition of property by the corporation.

This stock dividend is similar to dilution, which is why it is cited by some staking advocates. There are, however, two differences between the dilution effects and the stock dividends in Macomber. First, the distribution was pro rata, exactly proportional to the recipients’ holdings, and second, the distributed shares had a definite “source”: the corporation.40See id.

First, staking rewards were only distributed exactly pro rata in the above hypothetical where the staking rate was 100% and every participant either received rewards for maintaining the network as a validator or delegated their tokens to a validator and received a pro rata share of that validator’s income. The Court in Macomber leaned heavily on the fact that the distribution was pro rata to show that the shareholder’s “interests [were] not increased.”41See id. at 203; see also id. at 216 (citing other cases supporting the holding because the distribution was pro rata). The Court doubled down on the pro rata requirement for a stock dividend to be excluded from income in Koshland v. Helvering, in which the Court determined a stock dividend that “gives the stockholder an interest different from that which his former stock holding represented” is includable as income.42Koshland v. Helvering, 298 U.S. 441, 446 (1936).

For the second issue, tax law generally does not always know what to do with an ambiguity, such as a lack of source, because it makes it harder to confirm that the tax consequences adequately follow the economic reality of a transaction.43See Macomber, 252 U.S. at 203. Here, without a source like a donor or seller, there is nobody whose situation can be compared with the recipient. By confirming that the corporation’s “property [was] not diminished,” the Court illustrated that the corporation did not give up anything and reinforced the reasoning that a taxable event did not occur.44See id.

Proponents of preferential tax treatment for staking rewards point to the lack of source to support arguments varying from categorizing staking rewards as found property, created property, or even property entirely outside the scope of our tax system.45See Sutherland, Block Rewards Part 2, supra note 21, at 960 (discussing a range of potential classifications of staking rewards ranging from found property to self-created property). Conversely, opponents to preferential treatment for staking rewards point to the lack of source as an example of an ambiguity beyond the scope of reasonable speculation; the New York State Bar Association (“NYSBA”) even drafted a report requesting clear guidance to determine the source of the staking rewards.46N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, Report on Cryptocurrency and Other Fungible Digital Assets 9 (2022), https://nysba.org/app/uploads/2022/04/1461-Report-on-Cryptocurrency-and-Other-Fungible-Digital-Assets.pdf [https://perma.cc/37JP-XZDL] (“The government should provide clear guidance regarding the source of any staking rewards includable in gross income . . . .”).

Regarding staking income, the fact that the holder received additional tokens may not be determinative. In Macomber, the shareholder received additional stock from a “distribution,” which the Court qualified as essentially a stock split (a stock split is done by “splitting” outstanding shares that are in the hands of shareholders, which increases the stock issued while lowering the stock price in proportion to the number of shares into which each share was split).47See Adam Hayes, What a Stock Split Is and How It Works, with an Example, Investopedia (Oct. 31, 2023), https://www.investopedia.com/terms/s/stocksplit.asp [http://perma.cc/AY9Q-GVNC]. Stock splits are analogous to staking rewards because neither have a source. Additionally, per I.R.C. § 305 (which partially codified Macomber), stock splits are not includable as income.48I.R.C. § 305(b)(4). But for the difference that a stock split is virtually always exactly pro rata, Macomber and I.R.C. § 305 support the argument that staking rewards should not be included in taxable income at receipt.

3.  Lack of Explicit Guidance

In 2014, the IRS issued IRB Notice 2014-21 (the “2014 Notice”), and, despite such Notices not being law or even binding authority,49“IRS notices . . . do not constitute legal authority.” Stobie Creek Invs. v. United States, 82 Fed. Cl. 636, 671 (2008), aff’d, 608 F.3d 1366 (Fed. Cir. 2010). it remains one of the most informative pieces of guidance on taxing cryptocurrency, due in part to the scarcity of any guidance at all.50I.R.S. Notice 2014-21, 2014-16 I.R.B. 938. The 2014 Notice determined that income from cryptocurrency “mining” was taxable; its applicability to the newer PoS and staking consensus mechanisms, however, is disputed.51See Sutherland, Block Rewards, supra note 23, at 751 (arguing that the 2014 Notice was released primarily with Bitcoin in mind, which uses a Proof of Work consensus mechanism). While some tax professionals believe that the differences between mining and staking are insignificant and assume the reasoning applied by the IRS to mining should also apply to staking, the IRS itself showed that it was not prepared to make that assumption in/after Jarrett v. United States, after successfully having the case dismissed as moot (such dismissal was affirmed on appeal this past July).52Jarrett v. United States, No. 21-CV-00419, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 178743, at *13–14 (M.D. Tenn. Sept. 30, 2022); see also Jarrett v. United States, 79 F.4th 675 (6th Cir. 2023).

In Jarrett, taxpayers sued the IRS seeking a refund for taxes paid on staking rewards.53Nikhilesh De & Cheyenne Ligon, US Tax Agency Moves to Dismiss Lawsuit by Tezos Stakers Who Refused Refund, Demanded Trial, CoinDesk ] (May 11, 2023, 10:06 AM), https://
http://www.coindesk.com/policy/2022/03/03/us-tax-agency-moves-to-dismiss-lawsuit-by-tezos-stakers-who-refused-refund-demanded-trial [https://perma.cc/CV56-FDFL].
Not willing to offer a decisive ruling, the IRS decided to simply refund the taxes paid, and when the Jarretts declined the refund seeking a legal determination by forcing a case in federal court, the IRS (successfully) moved for dismissal for lack of subject-matter jurisdiction.54Brief in Support of Taxpayer Joshua Jarrett’s 1040-X Amended Return and Claim for Refund at 2, Jarrett v. United States, No. 21-CV-00419 (M.D. Tenn. Sept. 30, 2022). There are many possible reasons for the IRS’s refusal to provide clear guidance here; perhaps the IRS thought that an informed ruling was not yet possible because staking is too new, or the IRS could see material differences between mining and staking (mining requires computational “work” to receive mined tokens, which could liken it more to traditional income producing activities, while staking rewards are paid to holders who passively delegate their tokens to validators). This indeterminacy has split members of the tax and crypto community into two groups who disagree on the appropriate method of taxing staking rewards. The first group’s position, supported by the NYSBA, is that staking rewards should be immediately included as income.55N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46. The second group’s position, supported by groups like the Proof of Stake Alliance, is that taxes on staking rewards should be deferred until the disposition of the tokens.56See Abraham Sutherland, Proof of Stake Alliance, Tax Treatment of Block Rewards: A Primer 8 (2020) [hereinafter Sutherland, Primer], https://ssrn.com/abstract=3780102 [https://perma.cc/2V72-8B9R]. The arguments of each of these groups are analyzed in Sections II.B and II.C.

II.  WHAT HAS NOT YET BEEN DETERMINED

For PoS mechanisms, the two main questions regarding staking rewards are: (1) Character: What kind of income is it? and (2) Timing: When should it be taxed? The character analysis in this Note is only concerned with the effect capital asset status would have on the timing of inclusion in income.

A.  Character: What Makes it Capital?

One of the main factors in determining the taxes one owes is determined by the “character” of the underlying asset/transaction that resulted in gain or loss of income. Generally, the character of gains and losses is either “ordinary” or “capital.” Capital gains/losses result from transactions in assets that were or are held for investment, with most other income being ordinary.57Topic No. 409 Capital Gains and Losses, I.R.S., https://www.irs.gov/taxtopics/tc409 [https://perma.cc/QH8N-J69J]. While asset character can be nuanced, the factors used to determine whether an asset is capital should be the same for digital assets and traditional assets.

Courts and the IRS have been resolving character determinations of digital currencies since well before the inception of blockchains and cryptocurrencies. The main example is litigation on the taxability of “miles” provided by airlines. In Charley v. Commissioner, the Ninth Circuit approved a tax deficiency assessed against a taxpayer due to his failure to report his receipt of airline miles as income. 58Charley v. Comm’r, 91 F.3d 72, 74 (9th Cir. 1996). In this case, the court declined to comment on whether, “in the abstract” the receipt of airline credits was income, but the court did hold that here there was taxable income (that is, not capital gain) upon their redemption because the taxpayer (1) received the credits from his employer through his job, and (2) converted them to cash.59Id. However, six years later, the IRS provided an announcement that taxpayers who fail to report frequent flyer miles received through their business would not be pursued for a deficiency.60I.R.S. Announcement 2002-18, 2002-10 C.B. 621 (Mar. 11, 2002). This case and announcement illustrate the IRS’s familiarity with digital assets and its acknowledgment that determining the tax treatment of receiving digital assets is complicated. Unfortunately, it does not provide much guidance for staking rewards.

Whether an asset is capital or ordinary depends on multiple factors, like its intrinsic qualities, the nature of its use, and how it was acquired, among other factors.61I.R.C. §§ 1221, 1231. In the case of staking rewards, tax experts are unable to agree on a statutory determination under those factors for the character of staking rewards. Therefore, this Note first will look through a policy lens to assess whether staking rewards align with the justifications for preferential tax treatment of capital assets in the first place.

1.  Policy Supporting Preferential Treatment Applied to Staking Rewards

When determining the character of new classes of assets, people seem to jump straight to the statutory analysis despite the lack of precedent for how courts and the IRS will apply the Code to that new class of assets. Here, the IRS is in fact likely waiting to assess the character of these assets to determine where the Code may be applicable and where it may require an update to accommodate the crypto sphere. Before analyzing the statutory application or inferring how new statutory language may mimic existing code, a step back to the policy level should be taken. This is important because in the past, the IRS has denied valid textual applications of the Code in favor of interpretations that it believed better carried out the intent of Congress.62See, e.g., Ark. Best Corp. v. Comm’r, 485 U.S. 212, 219–21 (1988) (explaining why the “semantically” correct interpretation by the petitioner of § 1221 was not what they would rule); see also Corn Prods. Refin. Co. v. Comm’r, 350 U.S. 46, 52 (1955). Generally, arguments in favor of preferential treatment of capital assets are grouped under “lock-in effect,” liquidity, bunching, inflation, double taxation, and investment incentives.63Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 566–70 (defining these terms but also including arguments beyond the scope of this Note, such as questioning whether capital income even constitutes income in the first place).

Crypto investments are subject to the lock-in effect, which is where a holder avoids selling an asset that has appreciated in value because the holder will recognize taxes on the realized gain at the time of disposition, sale, or exchange. This externality is a transaction cost, which may cause the asset to be held when it otherwise would have been disposed of, absent the imposed taxation. Taxing cryptocurrencies such that transactions that otherwise would have occurred are prevented reduces market efficiency by slowing the flow of assets to the holder who most values that asset. The lock-in effect is especially prevalent for assets (such as crypto) which taxpayers may hold longer than they would have absent tax incentives (such as stepped-up-basis, which allows the elimination of gains in appreciated property inherited from a decedent).64Edward J. McCaffery, The Oxford Introductions to U.S. Law: Income Tax Law 12–15 (Dennis Patterson ed., 2012); I.R.C. § 1014.

A justification for preferential treatment related to lock-in is the liquidity problem. A reduction in liquidity impairs the mobility of capital.65Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 570. Liquidity is reduced when taxpayers realize gains on assets in excess of their income from other sources. For example, X has an income of $10,000 per year, and her most valuable asset is her house and the land it sits on, which are capital assets valued at $10,000. Absent preferential treatment for capital gains, if tomorrow some market force causes the fair market value of her home to jump to $100,000, she would owe taxes on $90,000 of appreciation. This would be consistent with the goal of tax law to track “accessions to wealth;” however, forcing taxpayers like X to satisfy her tax obligation by selling her home runs against the “efficiency” goals our tax system.66Id. at 29 (explaining that a tax, which changes peoples’ behavior in “bad” ways, is an efficiency cost). This treatment applies to assets like stock and securities too, and those same reasons also apply to crypto holdings.

“Bunching” is the recognition of lump sum gains all at once, which is the analogue to the lock-in effect. It results from the fact that we generally do not measure taxable gain “mark-to-market” (as value accrues), but rather only when the asset is sold. This means that gains accrued over many years may end up being recognized in a single year. In our progressive tax system, lower tax rates are applied to a taxpayer’s income up to a certain “bracket” threshold, after which a higher rate is applicable to each subsequent dollar earned. If instead, the gain was spread over a taxpayer’s holding period, they would normally enjoy the benefits of “running through the brackets” by having their first dollars earned each year enjoy the lower tax rates of the lower brackets. However, for a one time “lump” gain, the brackets are only “run through” once, and the excess gain is all taxed at the taxpayer’s marginal rate. The typical critique of this policy rationale is that bunching may not matter for most taxpayers, who already “run through the brackets” each year from other income. However, there is insufficient data on the average wealth of crypto investors, and accordingly, it is unclear if there is a need to counteract the bunching effect. Data is lacking because a feature of blockchains is the protection of anonymity. This illustrates potential support for delaying determinations about asset character until the IRS and Congress have sufficient information to inform their legislation.

Inflation (which this Note acknowledges above in Section I.D.2, does not warrant other tax benefits such as deferred reporting) is a concern for investment income across the board (regardless of whether measured in crypto or government legal tender—“fiat”). Taxes are supposed to correlate with “accessions to wealth” experienced by taxpayers. During times of inflation, an investor may see the nominal value of her assets rise, but not any faster than the costs of other goods did. This lack of “real economic gain” is why our tax system attempts to (partially) correct for taxing income that does not represent an accession to wealth. The two main ways our tax system addresses these issues are (1) by correlating (“indexing”) tax brackets to inflation67I.R.C. § 1(f)(3); I.R.S Rev. Proc. 2021-45, 2021-48 I.R.B. 764. and (2) by allowing preferential treatment on gains prone to reflect inflation. Crypto investments can face inflation just like fiat investments, and it is a particularly tricky question to answer for staking income. As mentioned above in Section I.B, PoS consensus mechanisms impose “gas” fees (paid in additional native coins) to process the validation. Depending on the cost of the gas relative to the staking reward, some exchanges may be more inflationary, and others may even be deflationary. If staking rewards cause inflation in their markets, that may further suggest that their nature warrants preferential tax treatment because they are prone to growth without an accession to wealth.68Note that inflation caused by gas fees is a separate but similar issue to dilution described above.

One of the most established reasons given in support of preferential treatment for capital assets is that it incentivizes investment, which in turn promotes economic development. While there is still some skepticism on the merit of cryptocurrencies, taxes should not control investment in this sphere. An “efficient” tax system is not supposed to excessively alter the behavior of taxpayers or harm the good function of our free market.69Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 29. Accordingly, tax incentives to invest in cryptocurrencies may be justifiable if there are substantial benefits derived from the development of cryptocurrencies, blockchain technologies like “web3,”70The Investopedia Team, Web 3.0 Explained, Plus the History of Web 1.0 and 2.0, Investopedia (Oct. 18, 2023), https://www.investopedia.com/web-20-web-30-5208698 [https://
perma.cc/35VS-CKKM] (defining Web 3.0).
or other future applications. It is in that way that investment in this sector is akin to traditional investing. Evidence of Congress’s concern that the potential benefits of capital asset treatment for cryptocurrencies could be lost by improper regulation is shown in a letter from members of Congress to Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen.

Digital assets could be impactful technological developments in certain sectors, and clear guidelines on tax reporting requirements will be important to those in this ecosystem. It will be important that we continue to work to provide further clarity, and to help ensure that the United States remains a global leader in financial innovation and development, while ensuring that this technology does not become a vector for illicit finance, tax evasion, or other criminal activity.71Letter from Rob Portman, Mark R. Warner, Mike Crapo, Kyrsten Sinema, Pat Toomey & Cynthia M. Lummis, Sens., to Janet Yellen, Sec’y, U.S. Dep’t of the Treasury (Dec. 14, 2021), https://www.warner.senate.gov/public/_cache/files/9/a/9a6b3638-1a81-4b70-80a3-98f239c34c3b/94715
01FAEB0E61BD2E5C1A5D11EC799.12.14.21-yellen-cryptocurrency-letter—final.pdf [https://perma.
cc/VAA5-HLN4].

Ultimately, taxes are imposed to sustain the federal government’s budget. The Treasury would obviously like to have as large a fund as it needs; however, increasing the government’s tax revenue is not as simple as raising taxes on taxpayers. At a certain point, excessive taxes will result in reasonable taxpayers opting to engage in different activities because the tax burden of the activity will have exceeded the benefit of that activity. To illustrate this kind of “tax elasticity,” imagine two taxpayers, A and B. A lives in State Y and B lives in State Z, but otherwise, they are identical, working the same job, and paying 30% of their income in taxes. If tomorrow, State Z decides to raise the tax rate for B’s profession by 60%, a likely result would be that B would decide to move to State Y, where she may enjoy the better tax treatment that A has.

In this (exceptionally oversimplified) hypothetical, State Z raised taxes to pad its budget, but instead, it lost a source of taxable income by causing B to move to Y (think Cayman Islands). This concept is illustrated by economist Dr. Arthur Laffer’s “revenue maximizing rate,” which is the theoretical ideal rate of taxation to apply that will be as large as possible, without being so excessive that whatever action the tax is targeting begins to be avoided by taxpayers.72See Lisa Smith, How the Ideal Tax Rate Is Determined: The Laffer Curve, Investopedia (Jan. 21, 2024), https://www.investopedia.com/articles/08/laffer-curve.asp [https://perma.cc/4TWT-WDBF]. Economists and tax professionals argue over what rate for capital gains would maximize revenue. However, there is a consensus that at some point, a marginal increase in tax rates will not raise the tax revenue to the Treasury. The key for taxing cryptocurrency, then, is to find that point.

Cryptocurrency investment has seen expansive growth and adoption, with many sources, including Coinbase, creating expectations among purveyors, without clear factual support, that growth to their assets will qualify as capital gains.73Coinbase, Understanding Crypto Taxes, Coinbase, https://www.coinbase.com/learn/crypto-basics/understanding-crypto-taxes [https://perma.cc/W36N-FV3D]. Perhaps a factor in causing this: 75% of Americans who invested in cryptocurrency indicated that they invested in cryptocurrency because they think “it is a good way to make money.”74Michelle Faverio & Navid Massarat, 46% of Americans Who Have Invested in Cryptocurrency Say It’s Done Worse than Expected, Pew Rsch. Ctr. (Aug. 23, 2022), https://www.pewresearch.org/
fact-tank/2022/08/23/46-of-americans-who-have-invested-in-cryptocurrency-say-its-done-worse-than-expected [https://perma.cc/9BUG-WDE7].
If so, many people are choosing to invest based on expectations on their return, and such purveyors may be very sensitive to tax burdens reducing their returns on investment. So, explicit removal of preferential treatment, even only in part, may result in an outsized withdrawal from the crypto sphere.

While typically an argument in favor of giving preferential treatment to certain capital gains, “double taxation” does not support such treatment for staking rewards. Double taxation occurs in the corporate setting. Companies are taxed on their profits, and then may distribute a portion of those profits to shareholders as “capital outlays” (like stock or dividends). These capital outlays are then included as taxable income for the shareholders. Because the “same” income is taxed twice, here, some argue that shareholders/corporations should enjoy a lower tax rate on their receipts. Staking rewards are not taxed prior to the receipt of the validator, however, because they are not derived from a corporation’s profits. In short, one of the reasons relied on to justify preferential treatment for capital gains on financial instruments, such as stock, is not applicable to staking rewards. However, as is the case for other capital gains (such as dispositions of real property), double taxation is not a requirement to receive capital gain preferential treatment.

2.  Statutory Determination of Capital Assets: Quality, Use, and Receipt

The following high-level statutory analysis is only intended to provide context for the inclusion of income analysis. The fundamental statutory authority on the matter is I.R.C. § 1221, with most character determinations starting or ending in § 1221(a), which lists assets that would otherwise be capital assets (“§ 1221 exceptions”).75I.R.C. § 1221. The main § 1221 exception that might apply to staking income is § 1221(a)(3), which covers self-created property (generally, self-created property is not taxed until it is sold, but at that point, it is taxed as ordinary income—with certain exceptions).76Id.; Ritter, Journal Article, supra note 13, at 33. Despite validators “making” rewards, some staking advocates argue that like the comparison to “new property,” this analogy is not applicable to the Code, which excludes from capital asset status any “patent, invention, model or design (whether or not patented), a secret formula or process, a copyright, . . . or similar property” held by “a taxpayer whose personal efforts created such property.”77I.R.C. § 1221(a)(3). The argument that the § 1221(a)(3) exception does not apply relies on the conclusion that staking rewards do not qualify as any of the explicitly listed property, nor would it qualify as “similar.”78Ritter, Journal Article, supra note 13, at 33. However, note that digital assets are pieces of “cryptography,” which can be imagined as a unique serial number, which at the very least one could argue is “similar property” to Intellectual Property such as a copyright. Arguments like these are beyond the scope of this Note but can be seen in the work cited here. The self-created property argument often analogizes a farmer’s crop or a mineral miner’s ore.79See, e.g., Sutherland, Primer, supra note 56, at 14–15. While these arguments can be pursued under a capital asset determination, this Note will not try to resolve disputes that tax experts have so far failed to resolve. Instead, this Note will revisit these arguments80See infra Section II.D.1 to illustrate the different methods for tax accounting as that question is more aligned with the timing of inclusion for staking rewards.

B.  Timing: When Is it Income?

Tax planning is a timing game of “pulling” benefits (like accelerating loss recognition) and “pushing” burdens (conversely, deferring gain recognition).81Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 313 (“The ability to accelerate deductions, and thereby defer tax, is of major advantage to taxpayers.”). This shifting of tax benefits and burdens can yield great value to a taxpayer, which is why taxpayers and the Treasury are so keen to determine when taxable gain/loss is recognized. Due to the time value of money, taxpayers derive benefit from pushing/deferring tax burdens, essentially getting the equivalent of an interest-free loan from the government.82Id. Reciprocally, deferrals taken by taxpayers reduce the government’s tax revenue, and such “tax expenditures” by the Treasury can sum to substantial burdens in funding the government.83Id. at 659. The Treasury seeks timely and consistent payment of taxes to maintain its budget, which is why the Treasury may not want to grant tax-timing benefits like permitting stakers to defer inclusion of their income (that is, until they sell the newly received tokens).84Id. at 42. This is further developed below in the context of tax accounting methods. Notwithstanding the time value of tax deferral, timing considerations (when a receipt should be taxed) are also important to ensure that taxes owed correlate to the taxpayer’s “ability to pay,” which is one of the main characteristics of a just tax.85Id. at 33.

Tax accounting is the method used by taxpayers to determine when receipts should be included for the purpose of “clearly reflect[ing] income.”86I.R.C. §§ 451, 446(b). The two main methods of accounting for income are the “cash method,” which includes income at receipt, and the “accrual method,” which includes income at the time it was earned.87Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 704, 720. Deference is given to taxpayers to select their method of tax accounting.88I.R.C. §§ 451, 461. Accordingly, most analyses of staking income apply the cash method, rather than the accrual method, because stakers have an easier time arguing the doctrine of constructive receipt than arguing that they never even nominally received the actual reward when new tokens were actually credited to their wallet.89Treas. Reg. §§ 1.61-14(a), 1.446-1(c)(1) (specifying that found property (“treasure trove”) income like that of cash found in a piano is includable in gross income in the taxable year in which it was reduced to undisputed possession).

The constructive receipt doctrine is used by stakers to argue that the amount received is an overstatement of their true economic income. Additionally, there may be grounds for a reduction in the amount of includable income based on the “cash equivalence doctrine,” which was added as a factor for determining constructive receipt. Constructive receipt is relevant because it requires an actual receipt of property or the right to receive property in the future.90Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 712. Recall that cryptocurrencies were deemed to be “property” for tax purposes under the 2014 Notice. When receipts, like staking rewards, lack sufficient determinacy as to what the “cash equivalent” is, an additional test may be applied to assess the kind of “economic benefit” received.91Id. at 709. Economic benefit can be a source of debate because “[a]lthough the courts are uniform in holding that a ‘cash equivalent’ is taxable on receipt, there is disagreement as to what types of property interests are cash equivalents.”92Id. So, a takeaway from this source of debate is that even though there may not be satisfactory legislation to inform stakers on when to include income, there are policy arguments that staking income should not be taxed on receipt. On the other hand, the failure of these accounting doctrines to produce a clear answer of when staking income must be included has supported arguments that immediate taxation is appropriate (such as the NYSBA’s suggestion that we should apply imperfect guidance like the 2014 Notice to staking income, even though staking income was not considered by the Notice at its time of announcement).93N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 45.

An investment vehicle similarly subject to a timing of receipt analysis is the taxation of Simple Agreements for Future Equity (“SAFEs”).94Lesley P. Adamo, Tax Treatment of SAFEs, Lowenstein Sandler (Jul. 12, 2018), https://www.lowenstein.com/news-insights/publications/client-alerts/tax-treatment-of-safes-tax [https://
perma.cc/24XL-62SM].
SAFEs are relevant because they are investment mechanisms promising to return some amount of stock to be determined at a future triggering event.95Id. The IRS has ruled that SAFEs, which do not specify a “substantially fixed amount of property” are not “forward contract[s]” and therefore do not satisfy the requirements of a constructive sale, nor is their conversion into preferred stock a taxable event.96Rev. Rul. 2003-7, 2003-1 C.B. 363; see also I.R.C. §§ 1001, 1259. Simply put, SAFEs are an example of how the IRS and the Code have previously distinguished actual receipt of rights to property from constructive receipt of value.

C.  Taxable at Time of Receipt

The IRS could resolve this issue by ruling that staking rewards will be treated the same way as mining rewards, taxing the rewards as gain at the time of receipt. This resolution would be easy to manage for the government and is justifiable because staking rewards appear to be income because the taxpayer actually received additional tokens. This is the position of the NYSBA, which argued in a 2022 report that there is not a significant difference between staking rewards and mining rewards (which the IRS has said is includable as gross income at receipt).97N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 45. However, the NYSBA did acknowledge that this is an area lacking regulation and that “[t]he government should provide specific guidance clarifying that staking rewards should be includable as gross income when received at their fair market value at such time.”98Id. at 9.

1.  Support for Taxation at Receipt

Taxation upon receipt would simplify the issue by bifurcating the timing and character determinations. Taxing the rewards at receipt may further simplify the determination of tax liability because without satisfaction of the § 1222 one-year holding period requirement, the gain would be taxed at ordinary rates whether or not the asset is a capital asset.99I.R.C. § 1222. (Per this code section, a taxpayer may only enjoy capital gain treatment if the duration that the asset was held by the taxpayer exceeds one year, regardless of the assets character otherwise.) There may be a future need to determine the character for a later disposition, but having already been taxed at receipt, the issue of basis determination will presumably have been resolved—allowing the established rules of capital asset character determination to apply.100I.R.C. §§ 1221, 1222. Lastly, this may be a palatable answer if legislators or the IRS are worried about tax evasion. The realization requirement is one of the greatest tax planning tools and by ruling that realization of income from staking rewards occurs immediately, the staker/validator would have no ability to manipulate the timing of tax liabilities to her benefit.101Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 149 (describing the function, utility, and limits on the realization requirement); see also 26 CFR § 1.1001-1. This plan also helps the Treasury by providing tax revenues earlier, which is the preference of the government because of the time value of money.

D.  Taxable at Time of Disposition

A key difference between crypto exchanges and fiat exchanges is that the market never “closes” for crypto currencies. Knowing the prices of stocks at the moment of receipt can be important for determining a purchaser’s cost basis, and that is possible because they are listed on nationally regulated exchanges.102I.R.C § 1012. This may seem unimportant because cost basis (in the most basic case) is set at the amount an investor paid for the asset. However, while that is the most familiar scenario for assets on a secondary market like the New York Stock Exchange or NASDAQ, staking rewards (like stock dividends) are different because they are comprised of freshly “minted” coins, which were actually created by the staking process.103See supra Sections I.D, II.A. Lacking a bona fide sale or purchase, our tax system must apply some other way to assess the reward’s fair market value, potentially even by deferring taxation until there is a disposition that makes the value clear. This raises logistical questions like whether an asset’s value should be some average of each crypto exchange’s sale price measured at the precise instant of sale. Assuming stakers would even be able to determine and track such information across hundreds of transactions, what kind of administrative practicality could the IRS hope to enforce in an audit? The speculative nature of a solution like exchange price averaging shows the lack of clear solutions without a better understanding of the scope of the problem at hand.

1.  Support for Taxation at Disposition

Immediate taxation of staking rewards generally benefits the government at the expense of taxpayers and the crypto industry. There are three main issues with this approach: (1) liquidity of taxpayers, (2) difficulty in valuation resulting in overstatement of income, and (3) the magnitude of the burden imposed by guidance.

First, the liquidity issue (defined above in Section II.A.1) is particularly problematic. Even if the IRS rules that staking rewards are recognized immediately, the taxpayer will not be able to use that income to satisfy her tax liability (because she cannot pay taxes with the cryptocurrency received). So, absent alternative income, she will not have the liquidity to pay her tax liability without selling her staked rewards immediately upon receipt.104Sutherland, Block Rewards Part 2, supra note 21, at 964 (“When the law is otherwise silent on the matter, creators of property are unlikely to think they’ve got income until they’ve converted the property to cash or something else of value.”). The illustrative example of this problem is a farmer’s crop harvest.105Id. at 965. In Schniers v. Commissioner, a cash basis farmer was found to have neither actually, nor constructively, received income until the sale of his raised cotton crop.106Schniers v. Comm’r, 69 T.C. 511, 516 (1977). The tax court stated, in relevant part:

The point is that income is not realized by a cash basis farmer from merely harvesting his crops. He realizes income only when he actually or constructively receives income from the sale of those crops. He is not required to sell the crops in the year in which he harvests them. He may decide not to sell them until the following year.107Id. at 517–18.

However, proponents of immediate taxation compare staking rewards to Cesarini v. United States, in which the plaintiffs were deemed to have recognized income of cash found in a piano after they purchased it.108Cesarini v. United States, 296 F. Supp. 3, 5 (N.D. Ohio 1969) (“[I]ncome from all sources is taxed unless the taxpayer can point to an express exemption.”). The flaw in this comparison is that the property creating income was actual cash, and while the court in Cesarini properly applied Regulation § 1.61-14, subsection (a) of that regulation stipulates that income from found property is includable “to the extent of its value in United States currency.”109Treas. Reg. § 1.61-14(a) (specifying that found property (“treasure trove”) income like that of cash found in a piano is includable in gross income in the taxable year in which it was reduced to undisputed possession). And while staking rewards are not really “found property” to begin with, the importance of being able to determine an equivalent value in U.S. dollars creates a second problem with respect to immediate taxation of staking rewards: valuation difficulties.

The second issue, valuation, is driven by three factors. First, crypto exchanges are volatile and do not have closing prices. Second, there are dilutionary effects of the distribution of staking rewards (discussed above in Section I.D.2); and third, there is an excessive burden for taxpayers to document their rewards. Such difficulties illustrate a shortcoming of the NYSBA’s position that “staking rewards should be includable as gross income when received at their fair market value at such time.”110N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 9 (emphasis added). Here, their suggestion takes for granted that the IRS can overcome the difficulty of determining fair market value in the first place. Additionally, there is no account for which of the multiple crypto exchanges (which often have different prices, unlike regulated stock markets) should be consulted for value determination, nor have they proposed a way to measure FMV factoring in dilution.111See OECD Paris, Taxing Virtual Currencies: An Overview of Tax Treatments and Emerging Tax Policy Issues 51–52, 55 (2020), https://www.oecd.org/tax/tax-policy/taxing-virtual-currencies-an-overview-of-tax-treatments-and-emerging-tax-policy-issues.pdf [https://perma.cc/PMC3-6X59].

Finally, the third factor is one that should be carefully considered before presenting guidance on staking rewards. In assessing burdens, the IRS will want to consider the magnitude of that guidance’s impact, which is directly related to the number of taxpayers or size of industry that will be affected. For example, the IRS should be cautious of yielding to groups like the NYSBA, which argue that processes like mining and staking are so similar that mining guidance (like the 2014 Notice) also covers new forms of crypto income like staking rewards.112See N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 45. The NYSBA’s argument fails to account for the difference in magnitude of effect that would result from regulating mining and staking identically—the 2014 Notice affects so few taxpayers because miners make up a small percentage of PoW network participants.113Sutherland, Primer, supra note 56, at 8 (affecting more taxpayers). By contrast, the effect of applying this guidance to PoS networks, such as Tezos (the underlying asset in Jarrett), would have a much higher magnitude because around 70% of network participants actively stake, and would therefore be affected.114Landoni & Sutherland, supra note 25. This would compound the harm done by potentially imperfect legislation because it would be unjust to more taxpayers, possibly to the extent that the imposed compliance burden pushes people away from PoS networks.115See Sutherland, Block Rewards, supra note 23, at 750–51. This raises three issues: compliance by stakers, administration by the IRS, and efficiency of the tax altogether.116Id. at 751–52; Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 29 (promoting efficiency in the tax system). Sutherland uses the Jarrett case to illustrate the excessive burdens of compliance and administration if stakers were required to follow the 2014 Notice.117Brief in Support of Taxpayer Joshua Jarrett, supra note 54, at 4; see also Sutherland, Block Rewards, supra note 23, at 755. Sutherland asserts that due to the frequency that staking rewards are distributed, even small stakers could have around 125 annual taxable events, each of which would need to be recorded for basis reporting purposes.118Sutherland, Block Rewards, supra note 23, at 755 He goes on to point out that administration would be practically infeasible too, as the IRS would need to pull excessive amounts of data to audit a staker.119Id.; see also OECD Paris, supra note 111, at 55.

III.  IRS RESPONSE

Tax law is typically seen as a discipline of well-defined and mechanical rules,120See Adam I. Muchmore, Uncertainty, Complexity, and Regulatory Design, 53 Hous. L. Rev. 1321, 1355 (2016); John A. Miller, Indeterminacy, Complexity, and Fairness: Justifying Rule Simplification in the Law of Taxation, 68 Wash. L. Rev. 1, 2–3 (1993). which is why the uncertainties of the application of the Code and the IRS’s legislative intent has generated confusion. Jarrett has become the (non)landmark case for exactly this type of uncertainty with respect to staking income.121Jarrett v. United States, No. 21-CV-00419, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 178743, at *13–14 (M.D. Tenn. Sept. 30, 2022), aff’d, 79 F.4th 675 (6th Cir. 2023).

A.  Governance So Far

The guidance provided prior to the recent Revenue Ruling was limited to the 2014 Notice,122I.R.S. Notice 2014-21, 2014-16 I.R.B. 938. Revenue Ruling 2019-24 (with an accompanying FAQ) (“Rev. Rul. 2019”),123Rev. Rul. 2019-24, 2019-44 I.R.B. 1004, https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-drop/rr-19-24.pdf [https://perma.cc/6HCH-6ZNA]. and expansion of I.R.C. § 6045.124I.R.C. § 6045; see also Ritter, KPMG Article, supra note 5 (detailing the expansion of § 6045 under the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act). These three pieces of guidance (hereinafter, the “Big Three”) do not make any mention of staking rewards or PoS networks, and only Revenue Ruling 2019-24 and § 6045 have the force of law.125Julia Kagan, Revenue Ruling, Investopedia (June 30, 2023), https://www.investopedia.

com/terms/r/revenue-ruling.asp [https://perma.cc/SBM7-4FY9].
The review of gaps in guidance below is not exhaustive and is intended to illustrate the types of issues caused by inadequate guidance.

1.  Ambiguities and Gaps in Guidance

In addition to not accounting for the implications of newer technology like PoS and staking rewards, much of the Big Three contains gaps and ambiguities resulting in variable interpretations. Section 6045 is particularly illustrative of this issue. This section’s recent updates (effective as of the start of 2024) primarily relate to the regulation of “digital assets” as securities and focus on transactions conducted by “brokers.”126I.R.C. § 6045. The characterization of cryptocurrencies as securities is beyond the scope of this Note (and regardless, determination of a crypto currency as a security by the IRS is mostly independent from similar determinations by the SEC). However, § 6045 is still referenced by tax analyses.127See N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 5–6 (relying on the definition of “digital assets” under § 6045(g)(3)(D) to provide a definition for cryptocurrency). Section 6045(g)(3)(D) defines a digital asset as “any digital representation of value which is recorded on a cryptographically secured distributed ledger or any similar technology as specified by the Secretary.”128I.R.C. § 6045(g)(3)(D). Without any distinction of the consensus mechanism, token type, or validation method, it is likely that this definition of “digital asset” was drafted with the intent of bringing cryptocurrencies under the applicable securities regulations, not to inform appropriate methods of taxation in general. Section 6045(c)(1)(D) was also expanded to include as “brokers,” those responsible for “effectuating transfers of digital assets on behalf of another person.”129Id. § 6045(c)(1)(D). This section defines brokers in order to require them to report cost basis of exchanged digital assets.130Id. § 6045. Some tax professionals are concerned with this requirement because the textual definition of a broker may now include miners and stakers if their activities were considered as “effectuating transfers of digital assets.”131Ritter, KPMG Article, supra note 5. In response to these concerns, Congress attempted to pass two poorly-formed and conflicting amendments to clarify that § 6045 should not be read to have that effect. Failing to pass either of them resulted in the drafters of the legislation writing a letter to Secretary Janet Yellen (quoted above in Section II.A.1).132Id.; Letter to Yellen, supra note 71. Review of such previous attempts to provide guidance can be incredibly informative, especially when viewed with a consideration of why they failed.133See Lauren Vella & Samantha Handler, IRS Crypto Broker Rules Are Months Overdue: The Delay, Explained, Bloomberg Tax (Aug. 3, 2023 8:31 AM), https://news.bloombergtax.com/daily-tax-report/irs-crypto-broker-rules-are-months-overdue-the-delay-explained [https://perma.cc/A4HN-XECA] (detailing the resulting delays in attempts to regulate “nascent” technologies).

The interpretations of the 2014 Notice and Rev. Rul. 2019 that followed demonstrate the problems with attempting to interpret legislative intent with respect to an application that essentially did not exist at the time of drafting.134Sutherland, Block Rewards, supra note 23, at 751. For example, the NYSBA points out in their report, the 2014 notice did not address whether virtual currencies fall under an existing asset class or are a new class of assets, which is necessary to apply the Code, further illustrative of the gaps of the 2014 Notice.135N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 3.

Lastly, Rev. Rul. 2019 does not cover staking rewards either; it covers income from “airdrop[s],” another type of token distribution, which follows something called a “hard fork.”136Rev. Rul. 2019-24, 2019-44 I.R.B. 1004; see generally Eric D. Chason, Cryptocurrency Hard Forks and Revenue Ruling 2019-24, 39 Va. Tax Rev. 279 (2019). However, Rev. Rul. 2019 is still referenced in the staking argument because it applies a rigid requirement to include income at the time of receipt even if “the airdropped cryptocurrency is not immediately credited to the taxpayer’s account.”137Rev. Rul. 2019-24, 2019-44 I.R.B. 1004. Although the related Q&A required an investor—but not an employee—to have “dominion and control” over the tokens—basically holding them on a network that allowed trading—so that people were not taxed on a receipt of which they were unaware. Recall the analysis of the constructive receipt doctrine in Section II.B to see how this is a divergence from the general rule of including income “in the taxable year during which it is credited to his account.”138Treas. Reg. § 1.451-2(a).

The IRS’s relative silence is understandable because any determination, announcement, or notice would fill the vacuum of existing authority and possibly assume greater weight than the IRS is prepared to put forth at this time. The motion to dismiss the Jarrett case, and avoidance of providing a ruling, illustrates the IRS’s reluctance to be “pinned down” in the future, and its desire to have taxpayers carry some of the uncertainty.139See Rev. Proc. 2022-1, 2022-1 I.R.B. 1. The question is what the intended purpose of this kind of uncertainty is, and whether it is effective in accomplishing that purpose.

B.  The Importance of IRS Action or Inaction

At a certain point, absent guidance from the IRS, the development of blockchain and cryptocurrency industries may be shaped by a reliance on continued non-regulation, or at least an expectation that potential future regulation will not be overly burdensome (or will be prospective). Cryptocurrency has a checkered reputation among many skeptics, and stories like the collapse of the world’s second largest crypto-exchange, FTX, do not help with that image.140Courtney Degen, FTX Bankruptcy Draws Increased Calls for Crypto Regulation, Pensions & Investments (Nov. 17, 2022, 2:41 PM), https://www.pionline.com/cryptocurrency/ftx-collapse-draws-increased-calls-cryptocurrency-regulation [https://perma.cc/S3LD-SR88]. And while the collapse of FTX is an issue of securities regulation, rather than tax-specific regulation, its effects were still hugely impactful to the market for cryptocurrencies as a whole, which indicates the possibility that more legislators will be calling for new swaths of legislation soon.

1.  Appropriate and Unavoidable Uncertainty in Tax

In practice, the IRS wants to let taxpayers carry some uncertainty, particularly when it comes to new legal ground.141See, e.g., Rev. Proc. 2022-1, 2022-1 I.R.B. 1. The IRS has good reason to avoid the creation of bright-line rules, especially in the case of emerging technologies. Taxpayers carrying uncertainty caused by a lack of regulation must act with a certain degree of reasonableness for fear of pushing the bounds of what is permissible too far. Once taxpayers know exactly when they trigger tax effects, they will often allow that limit to dictate their behavior, in some cases engaging in activities which they would not have done but for those tax effects. Take for example the annual gift tax exclusion. Each year, the IRS sets a limit on the size of a gift that one may make without paying taxes (for 2022 that amount was $16,000).142Instructions for Form 709, IRS (2023), https://www.irs.gov/instructions/i709#en_US_2022 [https://perma.cc/H4GE-FQ93]. A common practice among the wealthy is to gift their children this maximum amount each year.143Hayden Adams, The Estate Tax and Lifetime Gifting, Charles Schwab (May 18, 2023), https://www.schwab.com/learn/story/estate-tax-and-lifetime-gifting [https://perma.cc/5XDM-5Y79] (explaining the method in which large net worth taxpayers may capitalize on the gift tax exemption); Kate Dore, The Wealthy May Avoid $163 Billion in Taxes Every Year. Here’s How They Do It, CNBC (Sept. 20, 2021, 2:20 PM), https://www.cnbc.com/2021/09/20/the-wealthy-may-avoid-163-billion-in-annual-taxes-how-they-do-it-.html [https://perma.cc/8HET-4BFE] (illustrating the component that estate taxes play in tax avoidance by the wealthy). Naturally, this tax benefit is disproportionately enjoyed by the wealthy, and is an example of how our system fosters generational wealth among the rich. This shows how even if the IRS determines a “limit” which it is okay with, such bright-line rules can cause taxpayers to let tax effects change their behavior, which may be an efficiency cost if that behavior is bad.144Graetz et al., supra note 16, at 29 (defining efficiency cost). However, to note, the behavior (gifting money to a child) may only be an attempt to reduce future estate tax liabilities under I.R.C § 2001 (outlining the taxes imposed on estates transferred from a decedent) in which case the bright-line rule is not changing economically motivated behavior, but rather it is changing the tax motivated behavior of reducing future estate tax liability.

While clear guidance from Congress and the IRS may help address concerns that cryptocurrency transactions are underreported, such clear limits in tax law may cause taxpayers to try and game the system. This “gaming” can be particularly pernicious in the face of illogical or poorly planned rules. For example, consider the Cohan rule, which was intended to reduce the compliance burden of recording certain deductible expenditures by allowing taxpayers to approximate their total deductions.145Cohan v. Comm’r, 39 F.2d 540, 543–44 (2d Cir. 1930); Treas. Reg. § 1.274-5–T(c)(3); see also Rev. Proc, 83-71, 1983-2 C.B. 590. Taxpayers realized that the lowered burden of compliance made it nearly impossible to audit the accuracy of their “approximations,” resulting in increased abuse of the rule; this resulted in the amendment of § 274(d), which closed this loophole by imposing substantiation rules (requiring taxpayers to maintain adequate records).146I.R.C. § 274(d). So, if Congress or the IRS present illogical rules, they risk opening opportunities for tax arbitrage.

Congress and the IRS must therefore weigh the need for regulation now against the risk of providing regulation without enough information to do so as thoughtfully as is necessary.

2.  Risk of Stifling Innovation

Regardless of the public’s perception of cryptocurrency, it is a large part of web3, the next generation of the internet.147Akash Takyar, How Web3 in IoT Will Bring Digital Transformation, LeewayHertz https://www.leewayhertz.com/web3-in-iot [https://perma.cc/Z6ER-GRNN] (“Web3 aims to decentralize the internet and allow consumers to take back control of their data. IoT simultaneously aspires to connect nearly everything around us with the internet and eliminate the gap between the virtual and the real worlds.”). As the letter from members of Congress to Secretary Yellen shows, there is real reason/motivation to avoid inhibiting this development with poor regulation.148 Letter to Yellen, supra note 71. It is helpful to look outside of tax law to an area of law rich in considerations of how to balance regulation of new technology: tort law. For example, in Pokora v. Wabash Railway Co., Judge Cardozo limited another case, which required drivers to fully exit their vehicles to look down each side of a railroad before crossing, or else the drivers risked being found contributorily negligent if hit by a train.149Pokora v. Wabash Ry. Co., 292 U.S. 98, 102, 105–06 (1934). In his ruling, Judge Cardozo explained the risk of arbitrary and uninformed rule making:

Illustrations such as these bear witness to the need for caution in framing standards of behavior that amount to rules of law. The need is the more urgent when there is no background of experience out of which the standards have emerged. They are then, not the natural flowerings of behavior in its customary forms, but rules artificially developed, and imposed from without.150Id. at 105 (emphases added).

While Judge Cardozo ruled with respect to railway accident tort law, his reasoning was truly premised on the fact that (at the time) railroads were new and disruptive technology in some respects. Requiring drivers to fully exit their vehicle was a burdensome and often ineffectual (as was the case for John Pokora, who followed the regulation and was still hit by a train.)151Id. at 99, 105. Judge Cardozo’s reasoning was particularly sound, considering that trains were so fast that a perfectly compliant person, such as John Pokora, could still end up injured because a train could appear in the time it took a driver to turn around and reenter their car. Today, the clear answer is to retrofit crossings with gate arms that indicate when a driver may cross safely. At the time, such technology was not available. The point, however, is that prematurely creating rules that may have led to the public resenting the adoption of railways could have chilled the development of infrastructure that would inevitably become crucial to the economy of the United States. Regulations on cryptocurrencies and blockchains may have the same effect if those rules are not informed by a “background of experience,” which is still expanding.152Id. at 105. Previously advanced amendments have been conflicting, and sometimes, practically ineffective.153See Ritter, KPMG Article, supra note 5. This implies that we may still be waiting for the “crossing-gate arm” that the crypto space needs. Now, if you are convinced that the utility of railroads seems greater than that of blockchain technology, refer to the legislators in Boston (now a hub of the tech industry) who decided that computer sales was too risky of a business and therefore barred the purchase of Apple stock by individuals in Massachusetts when the company went public in 1980.

In Boston, state regulators said the offering is too risky and barred sale of the shares in the Bay State.

The decision affects individual investors, but doesn’t extend to financial institutions, which are presumed to be sophisticated. . . . 

Under the Massachusetts ruling, the Apple stock falls short of several provisions aimed at weeding out highfliers that don’t have solid earnings foundations.154Richard E. Rustin & Mitchell C. Lynch, Apple Computer Set to Go Public Today; Massachusetts Bars Sale of Stock as Risky, Wall St. J., Dec. 12, 1980, at 5, https://www.wsj.
com/public/resources/documents/AppleIPODec12_1980_WSJ.pdf [https://perma.cc/N3WL-BBJE].

Limiting regulation like Boston’s is especially frustrating when the opportunity was only withheld from individuals but not large entities, which is another illustration of the harm that may result from poorly informed regulation.

3.  Other Concerns the Treasury and IRS Must Consider

In general, the IRS wants to be careful when outlining rules. Putting aside the obvious concerns of allowing tax planning avenues conducive of tax evasion, whenever a bright-line rule is put forth, tax planners will now have a hard limit on what is permissible, and therefore may act in ways that take their tax saving right up to the edge of what may be permitted by the IRS (recall Section III.B.1 detailing the abuse of the Cohan rule).155Cohan v. Comm’r, 39 F.2d 540, 543–44 (2d Cir. 1930). This is exactly why the IRS tends to prefer taxpayers carry some of the uncertainty, which requires taxpayers to plan more carefully, and often, more reasonably. A sequential point for the IRS and Treasury to consider is related to the potential for stifling invention discussed above. Taxing PoS participants like PoW miners could have a large negative impact on the viability of PoS networks. By overburdening PoS networks with taxes that may push more people to PoW networks, and because PoW networks consume much more energy than PoS networks, there may even be a negative environmental impact based on applied taxes, which had not been considered.156N.Y. State Bar Ass’n Tax Section, supra note 46, at 4–5.

C.  Possible Points of Reference for Predicting Future IRS Action

There have been a multitude of other possible interpretations not explored by this Note, which may form the basis for future action by the IRS. For instance, Sutherland examined the argument that tokens on a PoS network should be treated as interests in a partnership, where the tokens are just used as a way of “voting” how the network should be maintained.157Sutherland, Block Rewards Part 2, supra note 21, at 962. If the IRS took that position, it would then be at least partially constrained by subsection K, the Code’s rules of partnership tax. It is also possible that the IRS will determine staking rewards are “new property,” warranting actual amendment of the Code. The “new property” argument is popular among staking advocates, and legal experts have already pointed out that the recent Revenue Ruling 2023-14 made no determination of whether or not staking rewards are “new property,” implying that the ruling may not cover every mode of receipt regarding staking rewards.158Dimon et. al, supra note 3. In any scenario, it is important to recognize that the IRS does not promulgate the Code; rather, it is “organized to carry out the responsibilities of the secretary of the Treasury under section 7801 of the Internal Revenue Code.”159The Agency, Its Mission and Statutory Authority, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/about-irs/the-agency-its-mission-and-statutory-authority [https://perma.cc/74XT-2NVF] (explaining how Congress promulgates tax laws of the I.R.C. under Title 26, and that it is the Secretary of Treasury’s responsibility to administer and enforce those laws, which was supported by the creation of the IRS under § 7803). Accordingly, before attempting to use past actions of the IRS to predict the trajectory of tax legislation over cryptocurrencies, one should remember that the IRS is not the legislating body (it only seems that way in the context of staking rewards due to the lack of actual legislation). As an arm of the government, it acts more like a computer, applying information to the Code and returning answers of “compliant” or “noncompliant.”

1.  Determinations Based on All Facts and Circumstances

Deferral of explicit guidance on staking income is not to say that the IRS may not adopt flexible regulation as we wait for a sufficient background of experience to develop. There are plenty of instances in the Code of overbroad rules intended to apply where individualized review is needed, but providing such review would be too difficult administratively. One such code section, possibly informative of additional future action by the IRS (albeit substantively unrelated to staking rewards), is the “loose” rule of § 302 relating to stock redemptions when corporations repurchase stock from its shareholders.160I.R.C. § 302. Section 302 is “loose” in two ways: first, it sets an apparently arbitrary threshold of 80% on what constitutes “substantially disproportionate” with respect to reduction in voting control by a shareholder following a redemption.161Id. § 302(b)(2)(C)(i). Second, the accompanying regulation § 1.302–3 requires that a “facts and circumstances” assessment should be used to smoke out any intent that indicates a “substantially disproportionate redemption.”162Treas. Reg. § 1.302-3(a)(2)–(3). The 80% threshold in § 302 seems “loose” for the lack of explanation of what materiality 80% holds. This implies that at one point the Treasury may have decided that precise measurements of control were too difficult to apply, so using a high precision test would not have resulted in a significantly more efficient application of the rule. Accordingly, it is not unreasonable to assume that the IRS could administer guidance similarly vague for staking rewards, which are incredibly burdensome to track as they stand. The second “looseness”—stemming from the facts and circumstances test in § 1.302-3—illustrates the Treasury’s willingness to apply flexible guidance that accounts for the unique aspects of different applications. In the face of calls for guidance, the Treasury may adopt similarly flexible approaches to staking rewards in an attempt to balance the importance of express rulings with its desire to avoid premature regulation.

CONCLUSION

Pressure on the IRS to provide guidance has waned after Revenue Ruling 2023-14, but there is still lingering uncertainty on the need for additional guidance,163Landoni & Sutherland, supra note 25, at 1214–15 (explaining that there is no single perfect method for addressing even dilution on its own). and many possible solutions risk replacing current uncertainties with new ones. Therefore, the IRS should consider Judge Cardozo’s concerns on premature regulation by observing whether the effects of this Revenue Ruling indicate that this guidance waited for PoS networks to develop a sufficient “background of experience” with which the IRS was equipped to provide informed guidance.164Pokora v. Wabash Ry. Co., 292 U.S. 98, 105 (1934). Such retrospection by the IRS will be important for any further guidance down the track, else we risk “shutting down the railroad” just because we have yet to invent the crossing-gate arm.165Id.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 537

Download

* Senior Submissions Editor, Southern California Law Review, Volume 97; J.D. Candidate 2024, University of Southern California Gould School of Law; B.S. Mechanical Engineering 2019, Tufts University. Thank you to my dad, John B. Duncan, and my academic success fellow, Tia Kerkhof, for each of their support. I would also like to thank Professor Edward McCaffery for his guidance. Finally, many thanks to all the Southern California Law Review members for their invaluable work on this Note.

Auditor Independence: Moving Toward Harmonization or Simplification?

INTRODUCTION

Auditor independence has been a priority for the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) under the leadership of both the Trump Administration and the Biden Administration. In 2020, former SEC Chair, Jay Clayton, pointed out that in the United States “auditor independence rules are far-reaching and restrictive,” which could have “unintended, negative consequences.”1Jay Clayton, Promoting an Effective Auditor Independence Framework, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n (Oct. 16, 2020), https://www.sec.gov/news/public-statement/clayton-promoting-effective-auditor-independence-framework-101620 [https://perma.cc/KZS5-WPMY]. Shortly thereafter, the SEC issued new regulation that lowered auditor independence requirements and brought the SEC’s independence rules closer to the rules set forth by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (“PCAOB”) and American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (“AICPA”), the other two regulatory entities responsible for auditor independence.2Press Release, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Updates Auditor Independence Rules (Oct. 16, 2020), https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2020-261 [https://perma.cc/4Q63-BQEW]. Meanwhile, the current chair, Gary Gensler, has signaled that auditor independence remains a “perennial problem area,” indicating that a tightening of the auditor independence requirements is soon to be seen.3Gary Gensler, Chair, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, Prepared Remarks at Center for Audit Quality “Sarbanes-Oxley at 20: The Work Ahead” (July 27, 2022), https://www.sec.
gov/news/speech/gensler-remarks-center-audit-quality-072722 [https://perma.cc/Y6QB-XJ4S].

While the future of auditor independence regulations remains up in the air, the problems associated with a lack of auditor independence continue. In 2019, the SEC alleged that PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, one of the “Big Four” accounting firms, had violated auditor independence rules in connection with nineteen service engagements for fifteen publicly traded companies by providing prohibited non-audit services that could have impaired the firm’s objectivity.4Press Release, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Charges PwC LLP with Violating Auditor Independence Rules and Engaging in Improper Professional Conduct (Sept. 23, 2019), https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2019-184 [https://perma.cc/MH4R-YR5Q]. Non-audit services are ancillary services, such as reviews of accounting software or tax advice, that do not assist in the goal of auditing, which is reviewing the financial statements for fraud or error. The SEC also alleged that another Big Four accounting firm, Ernst & Young LLP, had violated auditor independence standards, along with one of its partners and two of its former partners.5Press Release, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Charges Ernst & Young, Three Audit Partners, and Former Public Company CAO with Audit Independence Misconduct (Aug. 2, 2021), https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2021-144 [https://perma.cc/HE8Q-MG2A]. The Chief Accounting Officer for Ernst & Young’s client on this engagement was also allegedly involved with this misconduct, indicating how far-reaching auditor independence violations can be.6Id.

Auditor independence is governed by a self-regulatory model, in which the SEC, in partnership with the PCAOB, the specialized non-profit corporation created by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002,7Further discussion of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, including the sweeping reforms it encompassed, will be provided in Part I. provides oversight over the AICPA, which is a private industry professional organization charged with setting substantive auditor regulation. Despite the importance of auditor independence regulation in investor protection and the existence of this self-regulatory model, the regulatory framework in this area remains entangled.

While the SEC and PCAOB provide oversight over the AICPA, they also issue their own auditor independence regulation and have enforcement practices associated with auditors.8See infra Part III. Among the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA, each standard-setter has rules that overlap with the others in the same subject-matter and some rules that defer to the rules set by the other organizations.9See infra Part III. This leads to a waterfall effect, in which all three entities have to change their regulations any time one of the other two does, in order to ensure that the rules are not in conflict.10See, e.g., Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., PCAOB Release No. 2020-003, Amendments to PCAOB Interim Independence Standards and PCAOB Rules to Align with Amendments to Rule 2-01 of Regulation S-X 3 (Nov. 19, 2020), https://pcaob-assets.azureedge.net/pcaob-dev/docs/default-source/rulemaking/docket-047/2020-003-independence-final-rule.pdf [https://perma.
cc/NW28-LB49].
This effort has been called “harmonization,” and has the goal of ensuring that all regulatory frameworks in this area are made consistent with each other, to provide more certainty to the accounting firms and other stakeholders involved in audits, including public company boards of directors.11See, e.g., Deloitte & Touche, Comment Letter on the Proposed Revision of the SEC’s Auditor Independence Requirements Regarding Scope of Services (Sept. 25, 2000), https://www.sec.gov/
rules/proposed/s71300/deloit1a.htm [https://perma.cc/WS68-UCEQ].
However, an alternative solution to harmonization may be “simplification,” in which instead of expending effort to harmonize the regulation of the three entities each time one of them makes a change, the existing self-regulatory model could be streamlined so that the AICPA is the primary or sole standard setter, with the SEC and PCAOB providing government oversight.

To explore whether simplification is a compelling alternative to harmonization, this paper turns to federal judicial decisions by conducting a novel case study of all auditor independence cases decided after the passage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. These decisions indicate that the courts largely use AICPA standards and case law requirements in assessing auditor independence, rather than SEC or PCAOB standards. This new finding suggests that simplification of the regulatory framework by relying solely on AICPA rulemaking is a viable solution, given that the federal courts already rely on AICPA rules.12See infra Parts IV and V.

This paper will proceed as follows. First, Part I provides a brief summary of the business of public company audits to preview how the structure of the audit industry gives rise to unique incentivizes and pressures that may impact auditor independence. Next, Part II includes an overview of the impact of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 on the audit industry and highlights the debate over auditor independence, including the ways that various stakeholders have argued whether auditor independence is a worthy goal, or if auditors’ role as gatekeepers is unnecessary. Thereafter, Part III provides an overview of the self-regulatory model that governs auditor regulation, as well as regulations promulgated by the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA in the area of auditor independence, including a summary of recent efforts to harmonize the standards set by each entity. The core of the paper’s contribution to the literature on auditor independence regulation is in Part IV, which a presents a novel case study that examines which body of regulation, between the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA, is preferred by the federal courts when determining whether there have been auditor independence violations. This leads to the key finding that, in determining whether auditor independence violations have occurred, the federal courts rely almost exclusively on AICPA standards and case law requirements developed by the courts, rather than SEC or PCAOB standards. Accordingly, the paper then briefly examines in Part V whether this finding indicates that rule-making authority should be consolidated by giving the AICPA authority to set substantive auditor independence regulation, with the SEC and PCAOB providing oversight, given that there is already a self-regulatory model in place. Put differently, the paper concludes by considering whether the three regulatory frameworks should be simplified into that of the AICPA, the standard setter that is the most comprehensive, and the one that has been most acknowledged by the courts.

I.  THE BUSINESS OF PUBLIC COMPANY AUDITS

The role of auditors in public company financial reporting is to provide third-party reasonable assurance to investors that the financial statements of their client companies “are free of material misstatement, whether caused by error or fraud,” in the form of a formally issued audit opinion, which is appended to the clients’ public company SEC filings.13Auditing Standards § 1001.02 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2020). Audit opinions state whether the auditor believes that the financial statements included in the filings are free, in all material respects, from error or fraud.

Generally, auditors are viewed as “gatekeepers,” meaning individuals who are “reputational intermediaries who provide verification and certification services to investors.”14John C. Coffee Jr., Understanding Enron: “It’s About the Gatekeepers, Stupid,” 57 Bus. Law. 1403, 1408 (2002). As gatekeepers, auditors have incentives to signal to outsiders that they are credible because their reputation of trustworthiness is what allows them to attract future clients and remain in business by giving credibility to their audit opinions.15Ronald J. Gilson & Reinier H. Kraakman, The Mechanisms of Market Efficiency, 70 Va. L. Rev. 549, 607 n.166 (1984). The reputation of auditors is also partially what enables them to provide verification services because investors recognize that auditors have fewer  incentives than their clients’ management teams to mislead investors because the management teams are corporate insiders whereas auditors are objective third parties.16Coffee, supra note 14, at 1406. A traditional understanding of the audit profession puts forth the proposition that auditors are trustworthy because they are not incentivized to risk their reputation by assisting one client with fraud, which could lose them many additional clients and destroy their reputational capital.17Id.

Additionally, auditors have built up years of expertise that demonstrates to third parties that their services and opinions can be trusted.18Id. at 1408. The utility of auditors extends from the fact that they have specialized technical expertise in the area of accounting. Members of accounting firms that conduct audits are generally expected to hold state licenses as Certified Public Accountants, which give them both reputational capital and technical expertise.19See Auditing Standards § 1010 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2020). Additionally, these accounting firms are typically well staffed with local and global teams to address the audit needs of multinational companies that are listed on exchanges in the United States, despite the complexity and geographical scope of the audit procedures that may be required.20Pub. Oversight Bd., Panel on Audit Effectiveness, Report and Recommendations 157 (2000), https://egrove.olemiss.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi?article=1351&context=aicpa_assoc [https://
perma.cc/TH2E-YLG2] [hereinafter Panel on Audit Effectiveness].

It is widely known that auditing is part of an oligopoly, in which the “Big Four” accounting firms—PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”), Ernst & Young Global Limited (“Ernst & Young”), Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Limited (“Deloitte”), and KPMG International Limited (“KPMG”)—dominate the market. The Big Four were responsible for the audits of 88% of SEC large accelerated filers—which are companies with a public float of larger than $700 million that are required by the SEC to submit securities filings on a shorter timeline than other filers—and 44.7% of all public companies in 2022.21Nicole Hallas, Who Audits Public Companies – 2022 Edition, Audit Analytics (June 28, 2022), https://blog.auditanalytics.com/who-audits-public-companies-2022-edition [https://perma.cc/
4QSY-XMJ7; 17 C.F.R. §  240.12b-2(2) (2022).
There are several smaller players in the market as well, including RSM US LLP, BDO USA LLP, and Grant Thornton LLP; however, the largest of these entities produces less than a third of the revenue produced by the smallest Big Four accounting firm, leaving the market substantially dominated by the Big Four accounting firms, which have offices globally.22The 2021 Top 100 Firms, Acct. Today, https://www.accountingtoday.com/the-2021-top-100-firms-data [https://perma.cc/J5WV-7QVV].

Auditors for public companies are required to examine their clients’ financial statements and notes to the financial statements, which provide supplemental information. Auditors use a variety of mechanisms, including inspecting records, confirming balances with third parties, checking compliance with internal policies, and completing detailed tests of transactions to ensure the financial statements are free from material error or fraud.23See, e.g., Codification of Acct. Standards & Procs., Statement on Auditing Standards No. 110, § 318.79 (Am. Inst. of Certified Pub. Accts. 2006). Auditors also often test the robustness of management’s internal controls over financial reporting. Internal controls over financial reporting are policies and procedures surrounding accounting and reporting that are designed to limit the risk of fraud and error in the financial statements. All of this testing is done with an expectation of independence—that the auditors are not personally invested in the entity they are auditing, do not have conflicts of interests, and are reviewing the information with an air of “professional skepticism.”24See, e.g., Auditing Standards § 1015.07–09 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2020).

II.  THE DEBATE OVER AUDITOR INDEPENDENCE

When discussing auditor independence, much emphasis has been placed on the fact that each of the large public accounting firms have three lines of business: audit, tax, and consulting services. In the wake of the Enron scandal, debate over whether these three lines of business lead to inherent conflicts within public accounting firms that obstruct independence. Enron was a publicly traded energy company based in Texas that went bankrupt in 2001, partially as a result of a major decline in stock price after accounting irregularities were discovered at the company.25William W. Bratton, Enron and the Dark Side of Shareholder Value, 76 Tul. L. Rev. 1275, 1276, 1305–09 (2002). At the time, Enron was the seventh-largest company in the United States based on market capitalization, and its bankruptcy was the largest in United States history.26Id. at 1276. The accounting irregularities alleged were largely technical in nature, involving the use of (1) mark-to-market accounting, a practice that can lead to the overstatement of the value of assets by recording them at their current market value rather than their historical cost; (2) improper recognition of liabilities within “special purpose entities” that were owned by the company, which reduced the liabilities that were attributed to Enron; as well as (3) alleged improper payments to company officers, all of which were not in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (“GAAP”) that are set by the AICPA and required to be followed by public companies.27Id. at 1282, 1305–09, 1348. Arthur Andersen LLP (“Arthur Andersen”), the public accounting firm responsible for Enron’s audit, did not, however, note any of these issues with GAAP in the audit opinions it issued about the accuracy of Enron’s financial statements, which led to surprise when the company collapsed.28See, e.g., Enron Corp., Annual Report (Form 10-K) (Mar. 30, 2001).

In the wake of the Enron scandal, many stakeholders argued that one of the main contributing factors to Enron’s collapse was that the company’s auditor, Arthur Andersen, was receiving more revenue from its consulting engagement with Enron than it was from its audit engagement, to a factor of 1.08 times.29Jonathan D. Glater, Enron’s Many Strands: Accounting; 4 Audit Firms Are Set to Alter Some Practices, N.Y. Times (Feb. 1, 2002), https://www.nytimes.com/2002/02/01/business/enron-s-many-strands-accounting-4-audit-firms-are-set-to-alter-some-practices.html [https://perma.cc/WHJ3-4QC9]. Arthur Andersen received approximately $27 million in annual non-audit fees and $25 million in annual audit fees from Enron in 2000 and expected to grow the overall fees to approximately $100 million annually, which some alleged was why Arthur Andersen did not disclose Enron’s lack of compliance with GAAP.30Id.; Thaddeus Herrick & Alexei Barrionuevo, Were Enron, Anderson Too Close to Allow Auditor to Do Its Job?, Wall St. J. (Jan. 21, 2002, 12:01 AM), https://www.wsj.com/
articles/SB1011565452932132000 [https://perma.cc/8FF9-H6CV].
Arthur Andersen was exonerated of any liability; however, the court did not reach the issue of whether the firm was conflicted and what effect that may have had on the audit.31Arthur Andersen LLP v. United States, 544 U.S. 696, 708 (2005).

Enron was used as an example of how pressure on accounting firms to maximize revenue from consulting engagements prevents accounting firms from robustly auditing financial statements. Primarily, stakeholders worried that accounting firms would fail to report material misstatements or fraud in financial statements in order to preserve relationships with management of the companies they were auditing or to sell them consulting services; in extreme cases such as Enron’s, the concern was that this failure to report could collapse the company entirely and thus completely eliminate a revenue-generating client.32Herrick & Barrionuevo, supra note 30.

The furor and fallout over Enron and implications on the weaknesses of accounting firms was used as a major justification for Congress’s passage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, given that investors lost billions upon Enron’s collapse.33Jeff Lubitz, 20 Years Later: Why the Enron Scandal Still Matters to Investors, Inst. S’holder Servs. Insights (Oct. 20, 2021), https://insights.issgovernance.com/posts/20-years-later-why-the-enron-scandal-still-matters-to-investors [https://perma.cc/A2DS-L7KR]. Specifically, the social costs of the Enron collapse were high because pension funds that supported teachers, firefighters, and government employees were endangered from the losses, leading to outcries for reform.34Steven Greenhouse, Enron’s Many Strands: Retirement Money; Public Funds Say Losses Top $1.5 Billion, N.Y. Times (Jan. 29, 2002), https://www.nytimes.com/2002/01/29/business/enron-s-many-strands-retirement-money-public-funds-say-losses-top-1.5-billion.html [https://perma.cc/H728-T2P8]; Legislative History of Title VIII of H.R. 2673, 148 Cong. Rec. S7419–20 (daily ed. July 26, 2002). William Donaldson, the SEC Chair during the time of the passage of Sarbanes-Oxley, testified before Congress that Enron was a major event leading to the reforms that were implemented in Sarbanes-Oxley.35Implementation of the Sarbanes–Oxley Act of 2002 Hearing Before the S. Comm. on Banking, Hous. and Urban Affairs, 108th Cong. 33–47 (2003) (statement of William H. Donaldson, Chair, Securities & Exchange Commission).

Sarbanes-Oxley included sweeping regulatory changes designed, in part, to “restor[e] public confidence” in the accounting profession, emphasizing for the first time in Congressional legislation the importance of auditor independence.36Id. The Act created the PCAOB to inspect accounting firms and set auditing regulations, departing from the prior regulatory structure in which the accounting profession was almost entirely self-regulated by the AICPA.37Id. Sarbanes-Oxley also created a slew of additional auditor independence rules, such as requiring audit committees to pre-approve all audit and non-audit services provided by an auditor, reducing the consulting services that could be provided by an auditor, requiring that certain auditors rotate off an audit engagement on a regular schedule, requiring that independence concerns be raised to the audit committee when auditors identified them, and requiring disclosure to investors of non-audit and audit services provided by accounting firms.38Id. The stated purpose of these reforms was not only to “restor[e] public confidence in the independence and performance of auditors of public companies’ financial statements,” but also to “enhance the integrity of the audit process and the reliability of audit reports.”39Id.

While Sarbanes-Oxley seemed to significantly reduce the opportunity for accounting firms to provide both audit services and consulting services to their clients, there exists a gray area in which accounting firms are able to provide certain “non-audit services” to their audit clients.40Office of the Chief Accountant: Application of the Commission’s Rules on Auditor Independence, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, https://www.sec.gov/info/accountants/
ocafaqaudind080607#nonaudit [https://perma.cc/QC62-KZKF].
Accounting firms have found that these non-audit services can be a profitable substitute for revenue lost from consulting services, and according to a study that reviewed audit revenue as compared to non-audit revenue disclosures in annual proxy statements—which require public companies to disclose certain matters prior to their annual shareholder meetings—non-audit revenue represented 18% of the fees paid to auditors by public companies in 2021.41Nicole Hallas, Twenty Year Review of Audit & Non-Audit Fee Trends Report, Audit Analytics (Oct. 11, 2022), https://blog.auditanalytics.com/twenty-year-review-of-audit-non-audit-fee-trends-report [https://perma.cc/LT4F-32KW]. These non-audit services allow public company auditors to provide a number of ancillary services to their audit clients, such as, (1) audits over accounting and information systems, including payroll software and human resources software, (2) “carve-out” audits that evaluate portions of the business that are set to be divested, (3) tax services, (4) statutory audits, which are audits that comply with local governmental audit requirements, especially in foreign countries, and (5) employee benefit plan audits, typically meaning audits over pension plans. All of these services can be provided without impairing independence under the SEC, PCAOB or AICPA rules, and several of them are repeat, annual services, making them especially lucrative and enticing to accounting firms.42See Our Point of View on Non-Audit Services Restrictions, PricewaterhouseCoopers (2016), https://www.pwc.com/gx/en/about/assets/gra-non-audit-services-our-point-of-view.pdf [https://
perma.cc/PR9L-X8W2].

The oligopoly presented by the Big Four accounting firms also puts significant cost pressure on accounting firms to lower audit costs to attract and retain clients, while still maximizing revenue and market share.43Martin Gelter & Aurelio Gurrea-Martinez, Addressing the Auditor Independence Puzzle: Regulatory Models and Proposal for Reform, 53 Vand. J. Transnat’l L. 787, 798–99 (2020). This balance is primarily struck by the accounting firms in two ways.

First, the accounting firms can look to drive efficiencies in the audit process to lower the cost of annual audits to clients.44Id. at 803. This is often accomplished by retaining clients and using institutional knowledge gained over years of repeat audits to streamline audit processes and thus reduce hours and audit costs.45Id. at 808–09. However, this has the added effect of lowering auditor independence as auditors become entrenched in relationships with their clients over a number of years.46Richard L. Kaplan, The Mother of All Conflicts: Auditors and Their Clients, 29 J. Corp. L. 363, 367 (2004). For this reason, mandatory rotation of audit firms has been adopted in a number of foreign jurisdictions, including in Europe.47EU Audit Reform – Mandatory Firm Rotation, PricewaterhouseCoopers (2015), https://www.pwc.com/gx/en/audit-services/publications/assets/pwc-fact-sheet-1-summary-of-eu-audit-reform-requirements-relating-to-mfr-feb-2015.pdf [https://perma.cc/PY7R-9Q4D]. Some have also argued that mandatory audit firm rotations should be adopted in the United States, in addition to the existing United States requirement of rotation of the individuals who lead each audit project, known as audit engagement partners and who are usually equity partners in the accounting firms.4817 C.F.R. § 210.2-01(f)(7)(ii) (2023); see, e.g., Clive S. Lennox, Xi Wu & Tianyu Zhang, Does Mandatory Rotation of Audit Partners Improve Audit Quality?, 89 Acct. Rev. 1775, 1801 (2014).

Alternatively, accounting firms can look to increase revenue from ancillary, non-audit services.49Sean M. O’Connor, Strengthening Auditor Independence: Reestablishing Audits as Control and Premium Signaling Mechanisms, 81 Wash. L. Rev. 525, 559 (2006). This method of increasing revenue by cross-selling non-audit services along with public company audits is seen as a positive to many because efficiencies are driven by the institutional knowledge that auditors already have as a result of their financial statement testing, lowering the costs for both the audit and the non-audit services. For example, an accounting firm that is performing both a public-company financial statement audit and a report on internal controls for the same client can use some of the testing done for the financial statement audit to satisfy testing requirements for internal controls, thus lowering the costs for the combined services.50Auditing Standard § 2315.44 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2020).

Many argue that this bundling is a positive development, and given that audit services are fungible, lower transaction costs for companies in the form of reduced fees to accounting firms increase shareholder value.51O’Connor, supra note 49, at 542. Additionally, tracking independence over each and every ancillary service would increase transaction costs without providing shareholder value, given that some of these non-audit services can be provided without impairing auditor independence, and especially because some argue that accounting firms are already conflicted by virtue of the fact that they are paid for audit services provided.52Coffee, supra note 14, at 1411. Further, proponents of bundling argue that auditors are still incentivized to provide quality audits because despite the pressure to increase non-audit service revenue, auditors would not want to risk their reputational capital, which allows them to stay in business and attract other clients.53Gilson & Kraakman, supra note 15, at 607.

However, others argue that fee dependence on non-audit services poses the same problems as those that existed prior to Sarbanes-Oxley, in which instead of sacrificing audit quality to retain consulting revenue, firms are now sacrificing audit quality to retain other non-audit service revenue.54Paul Munter, The Importance of High Quality Independent Audits and Effective Audit Committee Oversight to High Quality Financial Reporting to Investors, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n (Oct. 26, 2021), https://www.sec.gov/news/statement/munter-audit-2021-10-26 [https://perma.cc/4P5E-UBX6]. This leads to concerns that auditor independence will be impaired in a way that increases costs to investors because material misstatements are less likely to be caught, and this outweighs the costs saved from efficiencies by the same accounting firm providing both audit and non-audit services.55Id.

While this paper reserves judgment on these questions of how non-audit services effect auditor independence, the primary view of auditor regulation since the accountings scandals of the early-2000s and Sarbanes-Oxley has been that auditor independence is of paramount importance to the audit industry in order to protect investors from fraud or inadvertent material errors from management.56Gensler, supra note 3. In the following Part, this paper will explore the existing regulation surrounding auditor independence, including identifying the many agencies and self-regulatory organizations that promulgate such regulations, and untangle the many requirements for independence as they have appeared over time.

III.  SELF-REGULATION AND THE TANGLED REGULATORY FRAMEWORK OF AUDITOR INDEPENDENCE

Modern third party audits have existed since approximately the 1920s and have varied widely in their form and requirements.57O’Connor, supra note 49, at 526–28. However, it was not until the Securities Act of 1933 that companies were required to have their financial statements certified by an independent accountant before they could register on the public markets.58Id. at 530, 535. This requirement was expanded with the passage of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, which mandated annual and quarterly financial reporting for public companies, as well as reporting on material events, all of which were required to be certified by “independent public accountants.”59Panel on Audit Effectiveness, supra note 20, at 109. The Federal Trade Commission and SEC subsequently passed rulemaking that defined “independent public accountants” as those who had neither served as officers or directors of the company to be audited, nor had a “substantial financial interest” in the company, which was defined as more than one percent of the auditor’s net worth.60Id.

While the SEC retained statutory authority over auditor independence regulations, eventually the AICPA formed its own auditor independence requirements and in 1977 created the Public Oversight Board (“POB”) to serve as a self-regulatory organization over the accounting profession.61About the POB, Pub. Oversight Bd., https://www.publicoversightboard.org [https://
perma.cc/WC69-ALWN].
The AICPA is independently funded by membership dues from members, which include individual accountants who are certified public accountants.62Bylaws and Implementing Resolutions of Council § 2.3.1, Am. Inst. of Certified Pub. Accts. (May 19, 2022), https://www.aicpa.org/resources/download/aicpa-bylaws-and-implementing-resolutions-of-council [https://perma.cc/A8QH-CTUU]. The AICPA is governed by a council consisting of AICPA members elected by their fellow members in each state, representatives of state CPAs, and members-at-large of the AICPA, among others.63Id. § 3.3.1. However, in the wake of the accounting scandals of the early 2000s, the SEC issued additional independence rules to move away from complete industry self-regulation by the AICPA and POB without public oversight, and these rules were then amended to coincide with the sweeping reforms passed by Congress in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.64Press Release, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Adopts Rules on Provisions of Sarbanes-Oxley Act (Jan. 15, 2003), https://www.sec.gov/news/press/2003-6.htm [https://perma.cc/QTX5-T8CB]. Sarbanes-Oxley required the formation of the PCAOB—a nonprofit corporation under the oversight of the SEC—but still allowed the AICPA to issue auditor independence standards.65See 15 U.S.C. § 7211(a). The membership of the PCAOB, which consists of a five person Board, is determined by appointment from the Chair of SEC and a vote of the five SEC commissioners.66The Board, Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., https://pcaobus.org/about/the-board [https://perma.cc/KP8Q-VJ2G]. The PCAOB is funded by mandatory fees from public companies who are subject to audit requirements under the Exchange Act as well as fees from brokers and dealers subject to SEC regulation.67Accounting Support Fee, Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., https://pcaobus.org
/about/accounting-support-fee#:~:text=The%20largest%20source%20of%20funding,audited%20by%20
PCAOB%2Dregistered%20firms [https://perma.cc/34FM-75AH].
As a result, since 2003, when Sarbanes-Oxley took effect, the accounting profession has been governed by three primary sets of auditor independence standards, those set by the SEC, PCAOB, and the AICPA.68See O’Connor, supra note 49, at 559. A summary of the interaction of the regulations set by the AICPA, SEC, and PCAOB is provided below and will be discussed further in the following sections:

Figure 1.  

A.  Self-Regulatory Models in United States Financial Regulation

The diffuse structure that contains SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA involvement in auditor independence regulation is not unheard of within United States financial services regulation. The SEC is involved in several self-regulatory models in which the SEC provides oversight to an industry organization that sets standards, and, in some cases, enforces those standards. For example, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) sets regulation for registered broker-dealer firms and registered brokers69Broker-dealer firms and brokers are organizations and individuals, respectively, who purchase and sell securities on behalf of their customers. and enforces those rules.70What We Do, Fin. Indus. Regul. Auth., https://www.finra.org/about/what-we-do [https://perma.cc/VX74-AZ7J]. The Exchange Act gives the SEC the authority to approve any rule changes made by FINRA7115 U.S.C. § 78s (b)(2). as well as revoke the authority of FINRA or issue sanctions against FINRA.72See id. § 78s (g)–(h).

The SEC is also part of self-regulatory frameworks with national securities exchanges.73National securities exchanges are exchanges for securities that have registered with the SEC under Section 6 of the Securities and Exchange Act of 1934. The self-regulatory framework between the national securities exchanges and the SEC works much in the same way as SEC’s oversight of FINRA, in which the SEC provides oversight over and approval of the rulemaking of each securities exchange and issues sanctions for violations of the Securities Act of 1933, the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, and the Investment Company Act of 1940.7415 U.S.C. § 78s(h)(2)(A).

The SEC also has a self-regulatory model with respect to credit rating agencies.75Under the Credit Rating Agency Reform Act of 2006, credit rating agencies are organizations that are engaged in the business of issuing an assessment of the creditworthiness of an obligor, using qualitative or quantitative models, and receiving fees for those services. Pursuant to Section 15E of the Securities and Exchange Act of 1934, each credit rating agency was required to set internal controls and policies to ensure accurate credit ratings,7615 U.S.C. § 78o–7(c)(3)(A). and the SEC was required to review such policies to ensure they were robust.77Id. § 78o–7(c)(1), (d)(1). Additionally, prior to the passage of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (“Dodd-Frank Act”), the SEC relied on credit agencies to provide a measure of credit-worthiness in SEC rules.78See U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, Report on the Review of Reliance on Credit Ratings 1–2 (2011), https://www.sec.gov/files/939astudy.pdf [https://perma.cc/A5RR-BF5P]. However, Section 939A of the Dodd-Frank Act required that the SEC remove such references to the credit agencies within its rules and instead create its own independent standards.79Id.; Dodd-Frank Act, Pub. L. No. 111-203, § 939A, 124 Stat. 1887 (2010).

Although the examples above illustrate that the self-regulatory model has been widely used, the model has also been subject to debate over its merits.80See, e.g., A Review of Self-Regulatory Organizations in the Securities Markets Hearing Before the S. Comm. on Banking, Housing, and Urban Affairs, 109th Cong. (2006), https://www.
govinfo.gov/content/pkg/CHRG-109shrg39621/html/CHRG-109shrg39621.htm [https://perma.cc/93P2-45PD].
Supporters of the model argue it is beneficial because the knowledge of industry participants enhances the usefulness of rulemaking,81Andrew F. Tuch, The Self-Regulation of Investment Bankers, 83 Geo. Wash. L. Rev. 101, 112–13 (2014). places the costs of enforcement on industry,82See, e.g., Accounting Support Fee, Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., https://pcaobus.org
/about/accounting-support-fee#:~:text=The%20largest%20source%20of%20funding,audited%20by%20
PCAOB%2Dregistered%20firms [https://perma.cc/34FM-75AH].
and is more adaptive than the state-driven model because industry entities have the experience and ability to focus on specialized regulations in a way that public entities with vast oversight responsibilities may not.83Tuch, supra note 81, at 112. However, others believe that the self-regulatory model is not as beneficial as the European state-driven model, in which public entities are the singular or primary regulators with little or no input from industry organizations, because the self-regulatory model can result in conflicts of interest in terms of funding and regulatory capture, given that individual standard setters may be members of the group facing regulation and may seek to avoid restrictions.84See Saule T. Omarova, Bankers, Bureaucrats, and Guardians: Toward Tripartism in Financial Services Regulation, 37 J. Corp. L. 621, 628–29 (2012). In response, proponents of self-regulation may argue that the oversight of the public entities is sufficient to mitigate these conflicts and harness the benefits of a specialized industry standard-setter working hand-in-hand with a public oversight agency, especially when safeguards such as individual term limits for regulators, or limitations on the ability of individual regulators to participate in a “revolving door” in which they rotate between industry and regulatory entity, are put in place.85See Revolving Door Rules, Fin. Indus. Regul. Auth., https://www.finra.org/
careers/alumni/revolving-door-rules [https://perma.cc/Y2QH-NQL7].

While the self-regulatory model is not unique to auditor regulation, what is somewhat distinctive about the auditor regulation self-regulatory model is that the SEC and PCAOB not only provide oversight over the AICPA, which is the industry organization run by accountants, but the SEC and PCAOB also have concurrent jurisdiction to set independence standards and have set their own standards for auditor independence in addition to those of the AICPA.86Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., Release No. 2020-003, Docket No. 047, Amendments to PCAOB Interim Independence Standards and PCAOB Rules to Align with Amendments to Rule 2-01 of Regulation S-X 2–3 (Nov. 19, 2020), https://pcaob-assets.azureedge.net/pcaob-dev/docs/
default-source/rulemaking/docket-047/2020-003-independence-final-rule.pdf?sfvrsn=43d58c7e_6 [https
://perma.cc/GGD3-LTLC].
While there are additional organizations that set auditor independence standards, including state boards of accountancy, state CPA societies, federal and state agencies, and the International Ethics Standards Board, the standards set by these entities are heterogeneous and are generally superseded by the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA rules.87Am. Inst. of Certified Pub. Accts., Plain English Guide to Independence 3 (2021), https://us.aicpa.org/content/dam/aicpa/interestareas/professionalethics/resources/tools/downloadabledocuments/plain-english-guide.pdf [https://perma.cc/N4AS-E3NG]. See generally O’Connor, supra note 49. Therefore, the regulation promulgated by these entities will not be examined in this paper. In order to assess the current landscape of auditor regulation, this paper will examine the regulations passed by the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA in Sections III.B–D.

B.  SEC Independence Rules

Under the current SEC independence rules:

The [SEC] will not recognize an accountant as independent . . . if the accountant is not, or a reasonable investor with knowledge of all relevant facts and circumstances would conclude that the accountant is not, capable of exercising objective and impartial judgment on all issues encompassed within the accountant’s engagement. In determining whether an accountant is independent, the [SEC] will consider all relevant circumstances, including all relationships between the accountant and the audit client.8817 CFR § 210.2-01(b).

The SEC independence rules then set forth a non-exhaustive list of instances in which an auditor would not be independent, primarily consisting of eight categories: (1) lack of financial independence, (2) client investment in the accounting firm, (3) employment by client, (4) non-audit services, (5) contingent fees,89Contingent fees are:

[A]ny fee established for the sale of a product or the performance of any service pursuant to an arrangement in which no fee will be charged unless a specified finding or result is attained, or in which the amount of the fee is otherwise dependent upon the finding or result of such product or service.

Id. § 210.2-01(f)(10). In the context of the audit, contingent fees are generally understood to be fees made conditional on the finding of an “unqualified” audit opinion, in which the accounting firm certifies that the financial statements are reasonably and fairly presented.
(6) improper partner rotation, (7) lack of audit committee approval,9015 U.S.C. § 78c(a)(58)(A). Audit committees are committees established by the Boards of Directors of public companies which are charged with the oversight of financial reporting and audits. and (8) improper compensation.9117 CFR § 210.2-01(c). Perhaps the most important of these rules are those defining financial independence because without financial independence, an auditor may have conflicts of interest that prevent them from conducting a robust audit.92Auditor Independence Matters, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, https://www.sec.gov/page/oca-auditor-independence-matters [https://perma.cc/8F2S-B7TB] (“Ensuring auditor independence is as important as ensuring that revenues and expenses are properly reported and classified.”). Accordingly, a summary of these rules is given below, along with a brief summary of the independence restrictions posed by the remainder of the SEC independence rules.

1.  Financial Interests

SEC Independence Rule 2-01 states that independence is impaired when (1) the accountant has a direct financial interest or material indirect financial interest in their client;9317 C.F.R. § 210.2-01(c)(1). (2) the accounting firm, a covered person in the firm, or any of the covered person’s immediate family members have a direct investment in the client, in which “covered person” includes individual accountants within a firm that provide services to a client;94Id. § 210.2-01(c)(1)(i)(A). (3) any partner or employee in the firm, including their close family, has more than 5% beneficial ownership of the client’s securities or controls the client;95Id. § 210.2-01(c)(1)(i)(B). or (4) the accounting firm, a covered person in the firm, or any of the covered person’s immediate family members have loans, savings accounts, checking accounts, broker-dealer accounts, insurance products, futures commission merchant accounts, consumer loans, or financial interests in investment companies that own the client.96Id. § 210.2-01(c)(1)(ii)(A)–(E).

In addition to the requirements of financial independence listed above, the SEC independence rules also prohibit the audit client from investing in the accounting firm or underwriting an accounting firm’s securities.97Id. § 210.2-01(c)(1)(iv). Moreover, the SEC independence rules place limits on accounting firm employees from being employed at the client both during and after the audit engagement.98Id. § 210.2-01(c)(2).

2.  Audit Conduct

The SEC independence rules also mandate certain conduct during the audit. For example, auditors are not allowed to provide non-audit services that could impair their independence, such as bookkeeping services, financial information systems design and implementation, appraisal or valuation services, actuarial services, management functions, human resources, investment advising, legal services, or expert services unrelated to the audit.99Id. § 210.2-01(c)(4)(i)–(x). Much of the intent behind this regulation is to reduce the types of conflicts discussed in Part II, in which auditors are incentivized to ignore errors in the audit in order to receive revenue for these non-audit services.100Paul Munter, The Importance of High Quality Independent Audits and Effective Audit Committee Oversight to High Quality Financial Reporting to Investors, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n (Oct. 26, 2021), https://www.sec.gov/news/statement/munter-audit-2021-10-26 [https://perma.cc/4P5E-UBX6]. Additionally, audit partners are required to rotate every five years if they are the lead partner on the engagement or every seven years otherwise, to avoid forming ties with clients that may impair independence.10117 C.F.R. § 210.2-01(c)(6)(i)(A)(1)–(2). Auditors are also not allowed to receive contingent fees or have partners compensated for any services other than audit services.102Id. § 210.2-01(c)(5). The audit engagement, typically including fees and non-audit services, must also be approved by the client’s audit committee to ensure independence.103Id. § 210.2-01(c)(7).

3.  Enforcement and Entanglement

The SEC’s enforcement mechanism for auditor independence violations is relatively straightforward. Under the SEC independence rules, the SEC can “censure a person or deny, temporarily or permanently, the privilege of appearing or practicing before [the SEC] in any way to any person who is found by the Commission after notice and opportunity for hearing”104Id. § 201.102(e)(1). to have “engaged in unethical or improper professional conduct.”105Id. § 201.102(e)(1)(ii). What is interesting about this mechanism is that it defers to “applicable professional standards” in determining whether there has been “unethical or improper professional conduct.”106Id. § 201.102(e)(1)(iv)(A), (e)(1)(ii). As a result, the SEC defers the determination of the standard for violations of independence standards to the body that sets the professional standards, which has often been interpreted, both by the SEC’s Administrative Law Judges and the federal courts, to be the AICPA.107For a discussion of cases that defer to AICPA auditor independence standards, see infra Part IV. This is one instance in which the auditor independence regulations are entangled between two different standard setters—the SEC and the AICPA.

One other instance in which the auditor independence rules are entangled between regulators is that although the SEC has delegated the authority to the PCAOB to set auditor independence standards, the SEC independence rules passed in the wake of Sarbanes-Oxley in 2003 are still effective.108O’Connor, supra note 49, at 565. Aside from some minor updates to debtor-creditor relationships passed in 2019, the SEC independence rules remained largely untouched until 2020,109Qualifications of Accountants, 85 Fed. Reg. 80508 (Dec. 11, 2020) (codified at 17 C.F.R. pt. 210). at which point the SEC, along with making minor updates to the independence rules, brought the PCAOB rules into harmony with the SEC rules where they conflicted, acknowledging that for several years there had been a period in which the SEC and PCAOB rules surrounding auditor independence were not consistent.110Id. This inconsistency is explored further in the sections below, including analyzing the frequency with which the courts used the SEC and PCAOB standards during this time, or the AICPA standards, which are defined in Part III.D.

C.  PCAOB Standards

The PCAOB sets forth “Ethics and Independence” standards for accounting firms and their associated persons.111Ethics & Independence, Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., https://pcaobus.org/oversight/

standards/ethics-independence-rules [https://perma.cc/WP6J-2LLD].
While several of these rules set forth additional requirements when compared to the SEC rules, several are similar or aligned with the SEC independence rules and AICPA standards.112See, e.g., Professional Standards, Rule 3521 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2006). First, accounting firms and their employees are required to “comply with all applicable auditing and related professional practice standards,” which implies that SEC and AICPA standards are binding.113Professional Standards, Rule 3100 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2003). However, in 2003, the PCAOB released a note to PCAOB Rule 3500T, which states that the “[PCAOB’s] Interim Independence Standards do not supersede the [SEC’s] auditor independence rules” and that in situations when the SEC Rules are more or less restrictive than the PCAOB rules, the more restrictive rule is to be followed.114Professional Standards, Rule 3500T (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2003). Additionally, the PCAOB explicitly requires that accounting firms and their employees comply with AICPA Code of Professional Conduct Rules 101 and 102, including any interpretations and rulings under these rules.115Id. Rule 3500T(a), (b)(1). Further analysis of the AICPA rules will be provided in Section III.C.

The PCAOB independence rules extend beyond the SEC independence rules in three areas: (1) limiting auditors’ ability to provide audit clients with tax services,116Professional Standards, Rule 3522 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2006); Professional Standards, Rule 3523 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2006). (2) requiring auditors to communicate with the client Board’s audit committee about certain independence-related matters,117Professional Standards, Rule 3524 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2006); Professional Standards, Rule 3525 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2007); Professional Standards, Rule 3526 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2008). and (3) requiring auditors to submit a form to the PCAOB that summarizes audit hours by partner (“Form AP”).118Professional Standards, Rule 3211(a) (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2016).

1.  Tax Services

Generally, the PCAOB rules extend beyond the SEC rules by maintaining that an accounting firm is not independent of its audit client if the firm provides “marketing, planning, or opining in favor of the tax treatment of” confidential transactions or aggressive tax position transactions, or if the firm provides “tax service to a person in a financial reporting oversight role” at the client, which generally prohibits providing tax advice or preparation services to management and finance employees of the audit client.119Professional Standards, Rule 3522 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2006); Id. Rule 3523.

2.  Audit Committee Communication

Further, the PCAOB goes beyond the SEC rules and requires accounting firms to seek audit committee pre-approval before the firms perform any permissible tax service or non-audit service related to internal controls.120Id. Rule 3524; Professional Standards, Rule 3525 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2007); Professional Standards, Rule 3526 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2008). Part of the intent of these rules is to present to the audit committee the ways that it might impair the accounting firm’s independence to provide both tax and non-audit services to the client.121See Professional Standards, Rule 3524(b) (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2006); Professional Standards, Rule 3525(b) (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2007). In line with this requirement, accounting firms are required to describe to the audit committees of their clients “all relationships between the registered public accounting firm . . . and the audit client or persons in financial reporting oversight roles at the potential audit client that . . . may reasonably be thought to bear on independence” both prior to beginning the audit and annually thereafter, including an annual affirmation of independence to the audit committee, which essentially requires accounting firms to disclose personal relationships that may impair independence.122Professional Standards, Rule 3526(a)(1) (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2008); Professional Standards, Rule 3526(b)(2)–(3) (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2008).

3.  Form AP Filing Requirements

Finally, the PCAOB requires that accounting firms file a “Form AP” with the PCAOB for each audit report it issues for a client.123Professional Standards, Rule 3211 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2016). The Form AP lists the lead engagement partner for the audit and notes the hours they have completed on the audit engagement, with the goal of providing users of financial statements information about the “independence of the specific individuals and firms that participate in the audit.”124Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., Supplemental Request for Comment: Rules to Require Disclosure of Certain Audit Participants on a New PCAOB Form A2–2 (2015), https://pcaob-assets.azureedge.net/pcaob-dev/docs/default-source/rulemaking/docket029/release_2015_

004.pdf [https://perma.cc/U3D4-2X49] .

D.  AICPA Standards

The AICPA promulgates what is the most rigorous standard of independence requirements for auditors, when compared to the SEC and PCOAB. The AICPA Code of Professional Conduct begins by setting forth a single independence rule: “A member in public practice shall be independent in the performance of professional services as required by standards promulgated by bodies designated by [the AICPA Governing] Council.”125Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts., Code of Professional Conduct, Rule 1.200.001.01. Stemming from this rule, the AICPA has then set forth hundreds of interpretations,126Id. Rule 1.200.001–1.298.010. which are binding on accounting firms and accountants performing “attest engagements,” which are any services to a client requiring independence from the client, including audits.127Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts., Plain English Guide to Independence 2 (2021), https://us.aicpa.org/content/dam/aicpa/interestareas/professionalethics/resources/tools/downloadabledocuments/plain-english-guide.pdf [https://perma.cc/N4AS-E3NG].

Given the complexity of the interpretations to the independence rule and the many scenarios effecting independence that they address, it would be impractical to describe all interpretations within this paper. However, to summarize, the interpretations to the independence rule cover a variety of situations regarding the independence of individual accountants, such as how to handle the employment of a family member at an audit client128Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts., Code of Professional Conduct, Rule 1.270.020.01–.03. and how to address whether an individual accountant’s financial investments in a client’s securities impair their independence.129Id. Rule 1.240.010.01–.03. The interpretations also cover more complex situations regarding the independence of accounting firms as a whole, such as how to maintain independence in situations in which a nonclient acquires a current client130Id. Rule 1.224.010.05–.08. or how “network firms” with multiple offices should each remain independent of each other’s clients.131Id. Rule 1.220.010.04.

In the absence of any relevant interpretation, accounting firms and accountants are expected to apply the AICPA’s “Conceptual Framework for Independence.”132Id. Rule 1.200.005.01. The Conceptual Framework for Independence requires that accountants evaluate whether a particular “relationship or circumstance” would lead a reasonable person “to conclude that there is a threat to . . . independence . . . that is not at an acceptable level.”133Id. Rule 1.210.010.01. The Conceptual Framework then lists potential “threats” to independence, such as holding an adverse interest from the client, advocating for the client, familiarity with the client, auditor participation in management of the client, self-interest, self-review, and undue influence by the client or a third party.134Id. Rule 1.210.010.10–.18. Following the potential threats, the Conceptual Framework identifies “safeguards” which can reduce threats to an acceptable level that will ensure independence, such as external review, competency requirements for professional licensing, analysis of an accounting firm’s revenue dependence on one client, and accounting firm policies for engagement quality control, such as external review.135Id. Rule 1.000.010.21–.23. By ensuring threats are low or nonexistent or by balancing them with safeguards, accounting firms and accountants can ensure compliance with independence standards under the Conceptual Framework in situations in which there is no authoritative interpretation set forth by the AICPA.136Id. Rule 1.210.010.07.

The AICPA also has a senior committee, the Auditing Standards Board, that sets forth Generally Accepted Auditing Standards (“GAAS”).137Clarified Statements on Auditing Standards, Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts. (Nov. 9, 2022), https://us.aicpa.org/research/standards/auditattest/clarifiedsas.html [https://perma.cc/7DN3-Q2CS]. GAAS sets forth specific testing requirements and procedures for auditors as they undertake audit engagements for clients.138Id. In addition to these audit testing requirements—which are largely technical in nature and outside of the scope of this paper—GAAS also sets for ethical requirements relating to audits of financial statements, stating that an “auditor must be independent of [a client] when performing an engagement in accordance with GAAS.”139Codification of Statements on Auditing Standards, AU-C § 200.15 (Am. Inst. of Certified Pub. Accts. 2012). GAAS then defers to the Code of Professional Conduct’s Conceptual Framework, which was discussed previously.140Id. § 200.17 (Am. Inst. of Certified Pub. Accts. 2012). GAAS is often referenced more frequently than the Code of Professional Conduct, as will be discussed in Part IV, because GAAS includes not only ethical requirements for auditors, but substantive guidance for how audits are to be conducted in practice.141Id.

Overall, there is significant overlap between the regulations set forth by the AICPA and the SEC and PCAOB.142See Plain English Guide to Independence, supra note 127. The AICPA standards set forth detailed guidance for accounting firms to ensure they comply with the broader standards set forth by the SEC and PCAOB. For example, while the SEC and PCAOB rules prevent auditors from receiving contingent fees from their clients, the AICPA rules state that same proposition and provide guidance that states contingent fees include finder’s fees, fees based on cost-savings achieved by the client, and exclude fees based on the results of judicial proceedings in tax matters.143Id. at 42. This level of detailed guidance means that practitioners often consult the AICPA standards, as they set forth a more restrictive set of guidelines and also a more informative set of interpretations that can be applied to specific circumstances. This delegation of substantive regulation to the private industry organization—AICPA—is also consistent with other self-regulatory models.

E.  Harmonization Efforts

In October 2020, the SEC issued updates to the auditor independence rules set forth in SEC Independence Rule 2-01.144Press Release, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Updates Auditor Independence Rules (Oct. 16, 2020), https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2020-261 [https://perma.cc/N4AS-E3NG]. These updates covered a variety of miscellaneous matters in the SEC independence rules, including refining the definition of affiliates of audit clients, amending the definition of an “audit and professional engagement period,” excluding some student loans from causing independence violations, and addressing inadvertent violations of the independence rules due to mergers and acquisitions, among other matters.145Id.

As a result, stakeholders raised concerns that the PCAOB rules, particularly those related to affiliates of audit clients, such as subsidiaries, were no longer consistent with the SEC independence rules.146Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd., PCAOB Release No. 2020-003, Amendments to PCAOB Interim Independence Standards and PCAOB Rules to Align with Amendments to Rule 2-01 of Regulation S-X 3 (Nov. 19, 2020), https://pcaob-assets.azureedge.net/pcaob-dev/docs/default-source/rulemaking/docket-047/2020-003-independence-final-rule.pdf [https://perma.cc/NW28-LB49]. In response, and to “provide greater regulatory certainty,” the PCAOB amended its rules to align with the SEC independence rule changes.147Id. Additionally, several of the PCAOB rules that needed realignment with the new SEC rules were those that the PCAOB adopted directly from the AICPA or had interpreted based on the AICPA rules.148Id. at 10. As a result, the AICPA issued a temporary policy statement as a stop-gap measure that stated to accounting firms and accountants that they would be considered in compliance with the AICPA Code of Professional Conduct if they complied with the updated SEC independence rules.149Temporary Policy Statement Related to Amendments of Rule 2-01 of Regulation S-X 4, Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts. (Dec. 21, 2020), https://us.aicpa.org/content/dam/aicpa/interestareas/
professionalethics/community/exposuredrafts/downloadabledocuments/2021/2021JanuaryOfficialReleaseTemporaryPolicyStatement.pdf [https://perma.cc/BJ8J-RRTT].
Soon thereafter, the AICPA put forth a proposal to change its rules and definitions to align with the SEC and PCAOB changes.150Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts., Proposed Revised Interpretations and Definition of Loans, Acquisitions, and Other Transactions 2–3 (2021), https://us.aicpa.org/content/dam/
aicpa/interestareas/professionalethics/community/exposuredrafts/downloadabledocuments/2021/2021-october-sec-loans-convergence.pdf [https://perma.cc/PR6C-9RJJ].
This proposal has not been adopted as of the time of this paper, but it seems likely that the AICPA will bring its standards into alignment with the current SEC and PCAOB independence rules.

Overall, this amendment waterfall that began with the SEC proposing changes in October 2020 that were then adopted by the PCAOB, and which still have not been adopted by the AICPA two years later, shows that the regulatory framework for auditor independence remains entangled. This entanglement may be occurring because the Sarbanes-Oxley Act created the PCAOB, which is allowed to pass audit regulations subject to the oversight of the SEC; and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act also allowed the SEC to become more involved in rule-setting for auditors, which had previously been handled entirely by the AICPA.15115 U.S.C. §§ 7211(a), 7233(a). While some argue that harmonization between these three entities is a worthy goal to disentangle regulations that are not consistent between the three entities,152See William D. Duhnke, Statement on Amendments to PCAOB Interim Independence Standards to Align with Amendments to Rule 2-01 of Regulation S-X, Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. (Nov. 19, 2020), https://pcaobus.org/news-events/speeches/speech-detail/statement-on-amendments-to-pcaob-interim-independence-standards-to-align-with-amendments-to-rule-2-01-of-regulation-s-x [https:
//perma.cc/7FDK-CWTT].
one might also consider whether harmonization is the answer, or rather whether simplification is a better goal, to avoid having to involve three regulatory agencies in rule changes, in order to ensure clear standards for accounting firms, clients, and stakeholders in the market. The following section of the paper will explore whether one regulatory entity is dominant over the others, and whether this agency should be favored for simplification that centers around focusing auditor independence on this agency and its rules exclusively, rather than the standards set across all three entities.

IV.  CASE STUDY

As discussed, the following case study will assess published federal court opinions in which auditor independence was at issue in a civil litigation to determine whether SEC, PCAOB, or AICPA standards were used in the courts’ reasoning.153For a full listing of cases reviewed, see infra APPENDIX. While a study of administrative law decisions from the SEC was considered, federal court decisions were deemed to be a more relevant indicator of which body of regulation is used in deciding civil matters because SEC administrative law decisions rely almost exclusively on a single, broad rule, SEC Rule 102(e)(1)(ii), which “censure[s] a person . . . after finding that a person engaged in improper professional conduct.”154See, e.g., Order Instituting Public Administrative and Cease and Desist Proceedings, In the Matter of Alan C. Greenwell, CPA, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n (Dec. 10, 2021), https://www.sec.gov/litigation/admin/2021/34-93750.pdf [https://perma.cc/44M7-22PR].

There were fifteen cases decided by federal courts in which auditor independence was at issue in civil litigation, and which were used to comprise the population for this case study.155For a full listing of cases reviewed, see infra APPENDIX. The population of cases includes only cases in which auditors were performing financial statement audits, and therefore excludes government and internal audit services, as these non-financial statement audits are typically not part of the debate over auditor independence because they involve different monetary incentives, risks for auditors and investors, and different auditing standards. Additionally, cases were only observed after May 6, 2003, which was the effective date of the Sarbanes-Oxley legislation, given that Sarbanes Oxley completely changed the landscape of auditor independence, giving the SEC broad authority to issue rulemaking in this area and effectively creating the PCAOB.156Strengthening the Commission’s Requirements Regarding Auditor Independence, Release No. 33-8183, 68 Fed. Reg. 6005 (codified as 17 C.F.R. §§ 210, 240, 249, 274 (2003)). Finally, cases that relied on state regulations over auditor licensing and independence were excluded, as they do not address the relevant issue of federal regulatory structure.157There was only a single case that relied on state professional licensing requirements, Rahl v. Bande, 328 B.R. 387 (S.D.N.Y. 2005). Given that this analysis is focused on federal regulation and this case is an outlier in that it is the only federal case that relies on state professional licensing regulation in its reasoning, it has been excluded from the population.

This case study aims to examine which body of regulatory law federal courts rely on in making determinations over whether auditors have breached their independence obligations. Each of the AICPA, SEC, and PCAOB have their own enforcement mechanisms to sanction auditors who do not adhere to independence requirements, and each enforcement division uses their own regulation as well as occasionally relies on the regulation of the other entities to sanction auditors.158See Professional Standards, Rules 5000­5501 (Pub. Co. Acct. Oversight Bd. 2004); Ethics Enforcement, Am. Inst. Certified Pub. Accts., https://us.aicpa.org/interestareas/
professionalethics/resources/ethicsenforcement [https://perma.cc/YDV6-X4S8]; Accounting and Auditing Enforcement Releases, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, https://www.sec.gov/
divisions/enforce/friactions.htm [https://perma.cc/YDV6-X4S8].
However, the civil courts do not have a requirement to adhere to the regulations of any particular standard-setter under the requirements of Sarbanes-Oxley or the Securities and Exchange Act of 1934. Given this lack of constraints, the standard used by the federal courts in determining independence violations has not been examined and is ripe for analysis to determine whether one set of standards (that is, those of the AICPA, SEC, or PCAOB) is preferred over the others. Therefore, this study will examine all fifteen federal court decisions to determine what standards have been used by the courts in the area of auditor independence as well as whether the result was in favor of the auditor or against the auditor in each scenario.

There are three major areas in which auditor independence has been examined by the federal courts. First, individuals who have been sanctioned by the SEC for violations of auditor independence standards can appeal to the federal courts for a review of the SEC’s decisions under a broad “abuse of discretion” standard to argue that the agency acted arbitrarily and capriciously in a way that requires the SEC’s decision to be overturned under 5 U.S.C. 706(2)(A).159Ponce v. U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, 345 F.3d 722, 728–29 (9th Cir. 2003).

Next, auditor independence is frequently at issue in Securities and Exchange Act Section 10(b) and SEC Rule 10b-5 claims, which are often brought as class-actions.160See, e.g., In re WorldCom, Inc. Sec. Litig., 352 F. Supp. 2d 472, 497 (S.D.N.Y. 2005). To prevail on these claims, plaintiffs must prove scienter, meaning that the defendant employed a “device, scheme, or artifice to defraud,” in addition to proving the elements of a material misstatement or omission, on which the plaintiff relied, and was the proximate cause of the plaintiff’s loss.16117 C.F.R. § 240.10b-5(a)–(c); 4 James D. Cox & Thomas Lee Hazen, Treatise on the Law of Corporations § 27:19 (3d ed. 2022). Plaintiffs often allege that auditors’ violations of independence rules are evidence of scienter for purposes of satisfying this element to bring a successful 10(b) or 10b-5 claim.162See, e.g., In re WorldCom, Inc., 352 F. Supp. 2d at 497. However, this practice has been complicated by the heightened pleading requirements for Section 10(b) and Rule 10b-5 claims established in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 (“PSLRA”), which was passed in part to reduce the number of non-meritorious securities class action claims raised by plaintiffs and requires that plaintiffs “state with particularity facts giving rise to a strong inference that the defendant acted with the required state of mind.”16315 U.S.C. § 78u-4(b). The PSLRA has resulted in different pleading standards for scienter among and within circuits, however, many courts find “scienter [is] plead with particularity by facts supporting a ‘motive or opportunity’ to commit fraud.” 164Cox & Hazen, supra note 161. As will be discussed in Section IV.B, this heightened pleading standard has reduced the circumstances in which courts have viewed violations of auditor independence rules to be sufficient to show scienter.

Finally, plaintiffs also bring state law claims—including negligent misrepresentation, professional negligence, and fraud suits—against auditors who have violated auditor independence standards, using the alleged violations of these standards as de facto evidence of a breach of duty.165See, e.g., New Jersey v. Sprint Corp., 314 F. Supp. 2d 1119, 1126, 1134 (D. Kan. 2004); In re Parmalat Sec. Litig., 501 F. Supp. 2d 560, 566 (S.D.N.Y. 2007); Newby v. Enron Corp. (In re Enron Corp. Secs., Derivative & ERISA Litig.), 762 F. Supp. 2d 942, 954 (S.D. Tex. 2010). In one instance, a plaintiff also attempted to bring a state law breach of fiduciary duty claim against an auditor who allegedly did not comply with auditor independence standards.166In re SmarTalk Teleservices, Inc. Secs. Litig., 487 F. Supp. 2d 928, 931 (S.D. Ohio 2007).

Given the heterogeneity of the claims within these cases, this paper examines the cases within these three groups—reviews of SEC administrative decisions, federal securities law claims, and state law tort claims—to identify developments in the case law regarding auditor independence and to examine when courts apply SEC, PCAOB, or AICPA standards in determining whether there has been an independence violation sufficient to warrant a judgment against auditors.

A.  Appeals of SEC Administrative Decisions

In Ponce v. SEC, the Ninth Circuit reviewed an appeal from a decision that the SEC made to bar a plaintiff accountant from practice, and the court acknowledged that as part of the SEC’s decision, the accountant had been held in violation of SEC Independence Rule 102(e)(1)(ii), which means he engaged in “improper professional conduct.”167Ponce v. U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, 345 F.3d 722, 739 (9th Cir. 2003). In order to determine whether there was truly “improper professional conduct,” the court turned to AICPA standards and ruled that the auditor failed to maintain his independence because he allowed his clients to run up a substantial balance of unpaid fees, which under AICPA guidance, resulted in a presumed lack of independence because the AICPA standards set forth that “independence is considered to be impaired if fees for all professional services rendered for prior years are not collected before the issuance of the member’s report for the current year.”168Id. at 728.

Similarly, in Dearlove v. SEC, the Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit used the same approach as Ponce, albeit six years after the decision169Dearlove v. U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, 573 F.3d 801, 804 (D.C. Cir. 2009). and six years after the implementation of Sarbanes-Oxley, including its resulting reform of SEC independence rules and the formation of the PCAOB. In Dearlove, the court concluded that “the appropriate standard of care . . . is supplied by . . . GAAS” when reviewing whether the SEC had abused its discretion in determining that an accountant violated SEC Independence Rule 102(e)(1)(ii) by failing to maintain independence from their audit client.170Id.

Ponce and Dearlove are indicators of how the federal courts have given credibility to the AICPA standards, including GAAS, in determining whether there has been a violation of auditor independence. The court’s opinion in Dearlove references SEC Independence Rule 102(e)(1)(ii), but it does so only to note that the SEC rule states “improper professional conduct” will warrant sanctions, before deferring to the AICPA GAAS standards to assess what improper conduct is.171Id. at 803–804. The court also stated that “the SEC need not establish a standard of care separate from the GAAS in order to give meaning to” what SEC Independence Rule 102(e)(1)(iv)(B)(2) describes as “unreasonable conduct,” showing further deference to AICPA standards.172Id. at 805–06. The fact that this decision came more than six years after the implementation of Sarbanes-Oxley, when the court had the ability to reference the updated SEC independence rules or PCAOB rules, but chose not to, shows even more significant reliance on the standards set by the AICPA.

B.  Determinations of Scienter in Securities Claims

Similarly, in In re WorldCom, Inc. Securities Litigation, defendants moved for summary judgment on the matter of whether Arthur Andersen, the auditors at the helm of both the Enron, and in this case, WorldCom accounting scandals, had the requisite scienter to be in violation of Section 10(b) of the Securities and Exchange Act and SEC Rule 10b-5 because they allegedly recklessly issued false audit opinions.173In re WorldCom, Inc., 352 F. Supp. 2d at 494–95. The plaintiff alleged that violations of the AICPA’s GAAS were sufficient to prove scienter, even under the heightened pleading standards required by the PSLRA, which required the plaintiffs to plead recklessness in order to avoid their claim being dismissed.174Id. at 495, 497. The court recognized the importance of violations of GAAS in proving scienter, but ultimately denied summary judgment due to conflicting expert reports on whether GAAS was violated.175Id. at 499–500. Although the claim survived the motion for summary judgment due to unresolved questions of fact, this case was another high profile example of the federal courts giving credence to AICPA standards in determining whether there was auditor wrongdoing.176Id.

In re WorldCom, Inc. Securities Litigation also included a Securities Act claim, in which the plaintiffs alleged that Arthur Andersen was in violation of Section 11 of the Securities Act, which states that a “preparing or certifying accountant . . . may be liable ‘if any part of the registration statement . . . contained an untrue statement of a material fact.’ ”177Id. at 490–91 (quoting 15 U.S.C. § 77k(a)). Arthur Andersen attempted to assert a due diligence defense, in which it claimed that it “had, after reasonable investigation, reasonable ground to believe and did believe, at the time . . . the registration statement became effective, that the statements therein were true,” and then moved for summary judgment.178Id. at 491–92. In deciding whether summary judgment was appropriate on this issue, the court issued an even stronger affirmance of the relevance of AICPA standards, concluding that a “reasonable investigation” that would support a due diligence defense, like that raised by Arthur Andersen, must be a “GAAS-compliant audit.”179Id. at 492. Because the plaintiff presented sufficient evidence to rebut the argument that the audit was “GAAS-compliant,” Arthur Andersen’s motion for summary judgment was denied. While this second issue is not directly related to auditor independence rules, it shows the courts’ general deference to the AICPA’s GAAS.

However, not all courts have agreed with the Southern District of New York’s decision in WorldCom, which may be in part due to differing interpretations of the heightened pleading requirements of the PSLRA. In In re Cardinal Health, Inc. Securities Litigations, the Southern District Court of Ohio ruled that Ernst & Young’s failure to adhere to the AICPA’s GAAS requirements for auditor independence did not establish the requisite scienter for a plaintiff’s claim to survive Ernst & Young’s motion to dismiss on a Rule 10b-5 claim.180In re Cardinal Health, Inc. Sec. Litigs., 426 F. Supp. 2d 688, 697–98 (S.D. Ohio 2006). The Court reasoned that while recklessness is generally sufficient to meet the pleading standard under the PSLRA, claims brought against auditors were subject to the even more heightened pleading standard of “a mental state ‘so culpable that it approximate[s] an actual intent to aid in the fraud being perpetrated by the audited company,’ ” which was not met in this case based merely on the alleged failure of Ernst & Young to adhere to AICPA GAAS requirements.181Id. at 763 (quoting Fidel v. Farley, 392 F.3d 220, 227 (6th Cir. 2004)) (internal quotations omitted).

Further, the court opined that an auditor’s past sanctions in SEC administrative proceedings were insufficient to prove scienter.182Id. at 778–79. In this case, the court also noted that SEC administrative decisions were not dispositive in determining scienter for Rule 10b-5 claims, perhaps suggesting that judicial interpretation of independence violations supersedes determinations by regulatory bodies.183See id. This is in line with existing administrative law doctrines that do not require federal courts to defer to the SEC’s interpretations of the Exchange Act.184U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n v. McCarthy, 322 F.3d 650, 654 (9th Cir. 2003).

Similarly, in In re Royal Ahold N.V. Securities and ERISA Litigation, the United States District Court for the District of Maryland ruled that alleged violations of AICPA’s GAAS standards on independence—in which the only allegations from the plaintiff were that auditor independence was impaired due to the auditor providing audit and non-audit services—were not sufficient to establish scienter for a Rule 10b-5 claim against an auditor.185In re Royal Ahold N.V. Sec. & ERISA Litig., 351 F. Supp. 2d 334, 390–92 (D. Md. 2004). However, the court did note that violations of AICPA’s GAAS can be sufficient to plead scienter when they are coupled with allegations that show that “the nature of the violations of those violations was such that scienter is properly inferred.”186Id. at 386. Likewise, in New Jersey v. Sprint Corp., a group of class action plaintiffs brought Rule 10b-5 claims against Sprint Corporation and Ernst & Young for filing false and misleading registration statements, prospectus supplements, and proxy statements that did not disclose that the company had considered dismissing their auditor, Ernst & Young, and that there were conflicts between executives at the company and the auditor, which resulted in auditor independence violations under AICPA’s GAAS.187New Jersey v. Sprint Corp., 314 F. Supp. 2d 1119, 1126, 1123, 1126, 1134 (D. Kan. 2004). The court relied on the AICPA’s GAAS to assess independence, noting that the plaintiffs did not plead sufficient facts to show that Ernst & Young lacked the independence in “mental attitude” required by GAAS, and even if sufficient facts were pled to show that Ernst & Young violated GAAS, this would not be sufficient under the PSLRA to establish scienter because the standard for scienter is recklessness, that is “so obvious that the defendant must have been aware of it” which goes beyond a mere violation of GAAS. 188Id. at 1134–35, 1147–48. Therefore, the motion to dismiss was granted in favor of Ernst & Young.189Id. at 1149.

While the varied interpretations in different jurisdictions over whether violations of the AICPA’s GAAS standards is sufficient to plead scienter persists, some courts have ruled that merely “articulating violations of GAAS and GAAP alone is insufficient” to satisfy the element of scienter under the PSLRA’s heightened pleading requirements and instead imposed additional requirements to plead scienter through case law.190Grand Lodge of Pa. v. Peters, 550 F. Supp. 2d 1363, 1372 (M.D. Fla. 2008). For example, the court in Grand Lodge of Pennsylvania v. Peters determined that in order to prove scienter, violations of GAAS must be accompanied by “red flags” that would put a reasonable auditor on notice that their client was committing fraud.191Id. at 1372. Therefore, the plaintiff’s allegations in this case that the auditor was conflicted by providing consulting services to the client in violation of GAAS were insufficient to establish scienter for a Rule 10b-5 claim.192Id at 1372–73. Additionally, the court in In re Williams Securities Litigation ruled that “GAAS violations must be coupled with evidence that the violations were the result of the auditor’s fraudulent intent to mislead investors,” in order to have a sufficient pleading of scienter.193In re Williams Sec. Litig., 496 F. Supp. 2d 1195, 1289 (N.D. Okla. 2007). This supports the idea that some courts grant credibility to the AICPA standards, however, they impose additional burdens on plaintiffs that are developed through case law.

This case law has developed in the years since the passage of the PSLRA. The Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals summarized the development of the additional requirements to prove scienter, other than GAAS violations, in New Mexico State Investment Council v. Ernst & Young LLP.194N.M. State Inv. Council v. Ernst & Young LLP, 641 F.3d 1089, 1097–98 (9th Cir. 2011). The court ruled that failing to “maintain independence in mental attitude during an audit,” in violation of GAAS and PCAOB standards, is not sufficient to prove scienter.195Id. at 1097. Rather, there should be “red flags” that a reasonable auditor would have investigated as well as a showing that there were violations that amount to more than “alleging a poor audit.”196Id. at 1098. New Mexico State Investment Council indicates how the courts’ reliance solely on AICPA standards has lessened slightly over the years, as the burden to meet additional case law requirements for scienter has increased due to the passage of the PSLRA and its heighted pleading requirements, which require that plaintiffs “state with particularity facts giving rise to a strong inference that the defendant acted with the required state of mind.”19715 U.S.C. § 78u-4(b)(2)(A).

While the discussion above indicates that courts have largely relied on violations of AICPA’s GAAS and case law requirements in determining whether auditor independence violations are sufficient to show scienter, other courts have discussed Sarbanes-Oxley in determining whether an auditor independence violation is sufficient to show scienter as an element of a Rule 10b-5 violation.198Brody v. Stone & Webster, Inc. (In re Stone & Webster, Inc., Sec. Litig.), 414 F.3d 187, 215 (1st Cir. 2005). In Brody v. Stone Webster, Inc., the First Circuit Court of Appeals examined whether scienter could be presumed on the part of PwC in connection with a 10b-5 claim because PwC allegedly turned a blind eye toward accounting irregularities to protect its accounting and consulting revenue from a client.199Id. The court determined that “turn[ing] a bind [sic] eye” to misleading accounting for a “profit motive” may have been a rationale for the passage of Sarbanes Oxley, but it is not enough in itself to prove scienter sufficient for a valid Rule 10b-5 claim under the PSLRA without specific allegations that the auditor ignored “red-flags” that were signs of fraud.200Id.

Courts have also been reluctant to find that scienter has been sufficiently pled in accordance with the PSLRA when plaintiffs allege auditor independence violations on the basis of general policy arguments against auditors depending on fees from clients.201See In re ArthroCare Corp. Secs. Litig., 726 F. Supp. 2d 696, 733 (W.D. Tex. 2010). In In re ArthoCare Corporation Securities Litigation, plaintiffs alleged that PwC was not independent in its audit because the firm had a longstanding relationship with its client and was dependent on the client’s audit fees.202Id. The United States District Court for the Western District of Texas found that general allegations based on a perceived lack of independence or violations of GAAS due to fee dependence or long-standing relationships, which are allegedly against public policy, are not sufficient to establish scienter on the part of auditors under the PSLRA.203Id. Similarly, in Ley v. Visteon Corporation, the Sixth Circuit determined that an allegation that Ernst & Young was not independent during an audit because it sought to preserve revenue from a client by not pointing out the client’s alleged accounting irregularities was not sufficient to plead scienter on the part of the auditors under the PSLRA’s requirements because it was merely an allegation of a “motive.”204Ley v. Visteon Corp., 543 F.3d 801, 815 (6th Cir. 2008).

On the whole, these cases show a broad trend of the courts giving credibility to the AICPA’s standards, as compared to SEC or PCAOB standards. As the case law has developed, violation of AICPA standards has been shown as one of the avenues plaintiffs can use to establish scienter for Securities and Exchange Act Section 10(b) and SEC Rule 10b-5 claims, when additional case law requirements are met. Notably, neither violations of the PCAOB independence rules nor the SEC independence rules have been used by the federal courts to assess whether there has been scienter for the purposes of a Section 10(b) or Rule 10b-5 claim that has been sufficiently pled in accordance with the PSLRA. Instead, the courts have relied on the AICPA rules as one factor for establishing scienter, and then have developed additional case law standards, such as finding “red flags” and alleging more than a poor audit, in order for plaintiffs to prevail on Section 10(b) and Rule 10b-5 claims against auditors. This focus on the AICPA rules is aligned with the deference given by the courts to AICPA standards in appeals of SEC enforcement decisions, discussed in Section IV.A.

C.  Fraud, Negligence, and Other State Law Causes of Action

In state law actions for fraud, courts have required a heightened standard for liability that extends beyond a violation of the AICPA’s GAAS independence standards in order to hold auditors liable. For example, in In re Parmalat Securities Litigation, plaintiffs pled that Deloitte aided an audit client with common law fraud.205In re Parmalat Sec. Litig., 501 F. Supp. 2d 560, 566 (S.D.N.Y. 2007). Given that this was a state law cause of action, the court applied the New York common law requirements for fraud, requiring the plaintiff to prove “that the defendant (1) made a material, false statement; (2) knowing that the representation was false; (3) acting with intent to defraud; and that plaintiff (4) reasonably relied on the false representation; and (5) suffered damage proximately caused by the defendant’s actions.”206Morris v. Castle Rock Ent., Inc., 246 F. Supp. 2d 290, 296 (S.D.N.Y. 2003). The court focused primarily on the intent to defraud and ruled that an auditor’s violation of GAAS does not by itself show intent, however “an auditor’s decision to take on non-audit work that threatens to compromise its duty of independence gives rise to a strong inference of . . . [fraudulent] intent . . . when . . . the auditor has a ‘direct stake’ in the alleged fraud.”207In re Parmalat, 501 F. Supp. 2d at 583–84. This heightened standard to show the intent element for common law fraud in New York, which includes not only a GAAS violation but also an auditor’s direct stake in the fraud, is in some ways analogous to the heightened standard to prove scienter on the part of auditors, as discussed in Section IV.B, because in both instances the courts have recognized a violation of the AICPA’s GAAS standards as helpful in showing intent, in addition to adding case law requirements to plead a valid claim.

However, some courts have not found it necessary to analyze auditor independence regulation when determining whether auditors were negligent in their review of their clients’ financial statements. In a consolidated action, insurance companies brought state law claims against Enron, Enron management, and Enron’s auditors, Arthur Andersen, in the wake of the Enron accounting scandal and resulting collapse.208Newby v. Enron Corp. (In re Enron Corp. Secs., Derivative & ERISA Litig.), 762 F. Supp. 2d 942, 954–55 (S.D. Tex. 2010). The plaintiffs specifically alleged that Arthur Andersen made negligent misrepresentations to investors and committed common law fraud in violation of Texas law.209Id. at 1021–22. In connection with the negligent misrepresentation claim, the plaintiffs were required to show (1) the defendant provided information (2) that was false, (3) the defendant did not exercise reasonable care or competence in obtaining or communicating the information, (4) the plaintiff justifiably relied on the information, and (5) the plaintiff suffered loss by justifiably relying on the information.210Id. at 980. In connection with the common law fraud claim under Texas law, the plaintiffs were required to show “(1) a material representation was made; (2) the representation was false; (3) when the representation was made, the speaker knew it was false or made it recklessly . . . (4) the representation was made with the intention that it be acted upon by the other party; (5) the party actually and justifiably acted in reliance upon the representation; and (6) the party suffered injury.”211Id. at 966. While the plaintiffs alleged that Arthur Andersen’s violations of AICPA’s GAAS standards showed the firm lacked independence, which they claimed was sufficient to show that Arthur Andersen did not meet the standard of care and competence as required by the negligent misrepresentation claim,212Id. at 1004. and that the violation of GAAS showed that Arthur Andersen made false representations about its independence sufficient for a common law fraud claim,213Id. at 1003–04. the court did not reach these issues, instead dismissing both claims because the plaintiffs could not show they relied on Arthur Andersen’s representations.214Id. at 1021–22.

Another area in which courts have assessed whether auditor independence gives rise to liability is in the area of state law claims for breach of fiduciary duties. In In re SmarTalk Teleservices, Inc. Securities Litigation, a trustee argued that PwC exceeded its normal role as an independent auditor, as defined by the AICPA’s GAAS, and therefore PwC owed a trustee fiduciary duties that the firm then breached by providing inadequate accounting and audit services.215In re SmarTalk Teleservices, Inc. Secs. Litig., 487 F. Supp. 2d 928, 931 (S.D. Ohio 2007). While the court did not reach the issue of whether there was a valid cause of action for breach of fiduciary duty, the court determined that whether PwC violated GAAS standards for independence was a genuine issue of material fact and denied the auditor’s motion for summary judgment on the breach of fiduciary duty claim, providing yet another example of the federal courts giving credence to the AICPA standards in determining auditor liability.216Id. at 935.

V.  IMPLICATIONS OF STUDY ON HARMONIZATION OR SIMPLIFICATION OBJECTIVES

In all three areas of the law covered by the case study, including appeals of SEC enforcement decisions, federal securities claims, and state law claims, the federal courts have preferred to use the AICPA standards, including GAAS, in their decision-making over auditor independence. In many instances when AICPA standards were used in federal securities actions, case law requirements were also supplied to determine whether there was sufficient evidence presented to plead scienter. But, notably, there were no cases found that apply PCAOB or SEC auditor independence rules.

On the whole, this paper does not aim to provide a normative proposal for auditor independence regulation. However, the case study presented in Part IV can shed light on the process of harmonization, which, as discussed in Section III.E, involves the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA each having to change their rules regarding auditor independence each time one of the other entities changes their independence rules, in order to ensure that the rules are not in conflict. Given that the case study indicates that AICPA standards are preferred by the federal courts, along with case law, in determining whether auditor independence has been violated, there is an argument to be made that the power to regulate auditor independence should be simplified into one regulatory framework run by a single entity—the AICPA. Under this proposal of “simplification,” the regulations set by each entity would not need to be harmonized each time one entity makes a change in auditor independence rules. Rather, given that the federal courts rely on AICPA standards, the substantive rule-making authority would be given to the AICPA alone. This is because the current framework has two entities, the SEC and PCAOB, whose frameworks are rarely applied in the federal courts or outside of internal enforcement actions and investigations.

As discussed in Part III, the AICPA, PCAOB, and SEC are involved in a self-regulatory model, in which the SEC provides oversight over the PCAOB, and the SEC and PCAOB have concurrent jurisdiction to set auditor independence standards as a federal regulatory agency and as a non-profit corporation subject to the oversight of the SEC, respectively. In this self-regulatory model, the SEC also provides oversight over the AICPA, which is a private industry organization run by accountants and which sets substantive auditor independence regulation. This self-regulatory model could be simplified to reflect other self-regulatory structures in United States financial services regulation so that rule-making authority is deferred entirely to the AICPA, with oversight by the SEC, in order to simplify the regulatory framework and reduce conflicts between the independence rules set by the AICPA, SEC, and PCAOB. This would be similar to the model between the SEC and FINRA, in which the SEC allows FINRA to set rules for national securities exchanges and provides oversight over that rulemaking, rather than having the SEC set its own detailed regulation over exchanges. Given that the AICPA sets forth the most comprehensive rulemaking and interpretations of auditor independence standards, and the federal courts rely on these standards, simplifying the regulatory framework for auditor independence by deferring to the AICPA seems like a possible solution.

Overall, the relative costs and benefits of self-regulation and the outsourcing of rulemaking to private industry are beyond the scope of this paper; however, the following arguments are meant to provide a brief summary of why simplification of rule-making authority regarding auditor independence regulations by giving authority to the AICPA and oversight to the SEC may or may not be beneficial.

There are valid reasons to argue against simplification that comes in the form of allowing the AICPA to be the only standard-setter in the area of auditor independence. Several critics have pointed out that self-regulation was one of the issues at the forefront of the Enron collapse and resulting scandal, and that the accounting profession needs an external regulator.217U.S. Gov’t Accountability Off., GAO-02-411, The Accounting Profession: Status of Panel on Audit Effectiveness Recommendations to Enhance the Self-Regulatory System 1 (2002); see also Reed Abelson & Jonathan D. Glater, Enron’s Many Strands: The Auditors; Who’s Keeping the Accountants Accountable, N.Y. Times (Jan. 15, 2002), https://www.nytimes.com/
2002/01/15/business/enron-s-collapse-the-auditors-who-s-keeping-the-accountants-accountable.html [https://perma.cc/D6DH-V59V].
However, others have argued that it was not self-regulation, but market failures and misaligned incentives over reputational costs that caused the accounting scandals during the early 2000s.218Coffee, supra note 14, at 1420–21. Further, self-regulatory organizations, such as FINRA, have successfully provided guidance to their respective stakeholders, with some oversight from the SEC, indicating that self-regulatory organizations with some administrative oversight can be successful.219Luis A. Aguilar, The Need for Robust SEC Oversight of SROs, Harv. L. Sch. F. Corp. Governance (May 9, 2013), https://corpgov.law.harvard.edu/2013/05/09/the-need-for-robust-sec-oversight-of-sros [https://perma.cc/D6DH-V59V].

Additionally, critics may argue that the AICPA relies on the SEC and PCAOB enforcement practices in addition to running its own enforcement program,220Ethics Enforcement, supra note 158. and to split up the enforcement and regulation practices could pose problems. However, given that the current system splits the enforcement burden between the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA, and each uses violations of the other’s regulations to bring sanctions, consolidating the regulations into one body would not have to change this framework.

CONCLUSION

This paper reserves judgment on the relative merits of self-regulation and instead notes that the current regulatory harmonization effort is not the only solution to disentangle the regulatory framework for auditor independence. Instead, this paper poses a new potential solution—simplification—to the problem of unwinding the tangled regulatory framework of auditor independence to promote efficiency in rulemaking and clarity for stakeholder accounting firms, regulators, and clients.

Given that the courts frequently defer to AICPA auditor independence standards—along with case law requirements for pleading federal securities law violations—rather than SEC and PCAOB standards, and having three regulatory frameworks that need to be continuously updated to align with each other is complex and costly, simplification is a worthy goal. However, it is just one solution of many. As the SEC, PCAOB, and AICPA continue to pursue harmonization,221Press Release, U.S. Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Updates Auditor Independence Rules (Oct. 16, 2020), https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2020-261 [https://perma.cc/4Q63-BQEW]. it is worth considering whether other alternative approaches to auditor independence regulation, such as simplification, exist.

APPENDIX

Appendix

Case Name and Citation

Procedural Posture

Body of Law Applied

Result in Favor of Auditor?

1

Ponce v. SEC, 345 F.3d 722 (9th Cir. 2003).

Appeal of Administrative Decision

AICPA and SEC

No

2

Dearlove v. SEC, 573 F.3d 801 (D.C. Cir. 2009).

Appeal of Administrative Decision

AICPA and SEC

No

3

New Jersey v. Sprint Corp., 314 F. Supp. 2d 1119 (D. Kan. 2004).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

4

Newby v. Enron Corp. (In re Enron Corp. Secs., Derivative & ERISA Litig.), 762 F. Supp. 2d 942 (S.D. Tex. 2010).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPAa

Yes

5

In re WorldCom, Inc. Sec. Litig., 352 F. Supp. 2d 472 (S.D.N.Y. 2005).

Motion for Summary Judgment

AICPA and SEC

No, on Securities Act Claim.

Yes, on SEC Rule 10b-5 claim.

6

In re Cardinal Health, Inc. Sec. Litigs., 426 F. Supp. 2d 688 (S.D. Ohio 2006).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

7

In re Royal Ahold N.V. Sec. & ERISA Litig., 351 F. Supp. 2d 334 (D. Md. 2004).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

8

Brody v. Stone & Webster, Inc. (In re Stone & Webster, Inc., Sec. Litig.), 414 F.3d 187 (1st Cir. 2005).

Motion to Dismiss

Sarbanes-Oxley

Yes

9

Ley v. Visteon Corp., 543 F.3d 801 (6th Cir. 2008).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

10

Grand Lodge of PA v. Peters, 550 F. Supp. 2d 1363 (M.D. Fla. 2008).

 

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

11

In re Williams Sec. Litig., 496 F. Supp. 2d 1195 (N.D. Okla. 2007).

Motion for Summary Judgment

AICPA

Yes

12

N.M. State Inv. Council v. Ernst & Young LLP, 641 F.3d 1089 (9th Cir. 2011).

Motion for Summary Judgment

AICPA

Yes

13

In re Parmalat Sec. Litig., 501 F. Supp. 2d 560 (S.D.N.Y. 2007).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

14

In re ArthroCare Corp. Secs. Litig., 726 F. Supp. 2d 696 (W.D. Tex. 2010).

Motion to Dismiss

AICPA

Yes

15

In re SmarTalk Teleservices, Inc. Secs. Litig., 487 F. Supp. 2d 928 (S.D. Ohio 2007).

Motion for Summary Judgment

AICPA

No

Note:  The plaintiffs pled a violation of AICPA standards, but the court did not reach the issue in this case before making its final determination.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 495

Download

* Executive Articles Editor, Southern California Law Review, Volume 97; J.D. Candidate, University of Southern California Gould School of Law, 2024; B.S., B.A., Boston College, 2017. Many thanks to Professor Jonathan Barnett for his feedback and guidance, as well as to the editors of the Southern California Law Review for their thoughtful suggestions. All mistakes are my own.

Corporate Social Responsibility Through Shareholder Governance

New approaches to corporate purpose have emerged in recent years that hold out the promise of addressing concerns about corporate social responsibility (“CSR”) through shareholder governance, rather than in spite of it. The seminal such approach—enlightened shareholder value—posits that treating other stakeholders well can ultimately redound to long-term shareholder value. However, two more recent proposals reconceptualize shareholder interests in more holistic ways and urge that it is shareholders’ welfare, not shareholder value per se, that managers should pursue. In particular, the “shareholder social preferences” view incorporates into the corporate objective the degree to which the firm’s operations align with the social views of shareholders. The “portfolio value maximization view,” in contrast, argues that corporate fiduciaries should maximize the value of diversified shareholders’ portfolios by considering the externalities of the firm’s operations on those portfolios.

Shifting to shareholder welfare as the corporate objective, however, would do little to improve corporate conduct and would entail substantial costs. The social preferences of shareholders are conflicted, muted, and often prefer less protection of stakeholder interests than provided by law. Shareholders’ portfolio value captures only a small portion of the externalities like pollution that its proponents hope to address and risks motivating anticompetitive conduct. And neither corporate managers nor shareholders would have the information and incentives needed to pursue these additional shareholder welfare considerations. On the contrary, by distracting management from their core competencies, shareholder welfarism would ultimately lower shareholder welfare.

The future of CSR, as with its past, is instead with enlightened shareholder value (“ESV”). But the existing law-and-economics literature on ESV has been stunted by key misconceptions, which we attempt to dispel. The increasing use by various actors in the corporate system of normative arguments that sound in ESV terms may lead to new pathways for achieving social progress.

INTRODUCTION

Corporate managers play crucial roles in our society, sitting as they do atop organizations in control of vast agglomerations of resources. A long-standing debate in American law concerns how corporate fiduciaries should conceive of their jobs—what objective should they pursue? The traditional understanding is that the fiduciaries of a business corporation should pursue shareholder value, and much of our corporate governance system is designed to that end. Pursuit of shareholder value, of course, can conflict with other interests in society. The classic alternative to the shareholder value maximization paradigm is some form of stakeholderism, in which shareholder wealth is but one of the ends to be sought by management, alongside the interests of workers, other suppliers, customers, and the broader community.

But stakeholderism has foundered due to two key problems. First, state corporation statutes give shareholders the right to elect the board of directors, which in turn holds legal power to manage the corporation.1See, e.g., Del. Code Ann. tit. 8, §§ 141(a), 211(b) (2023). Directors are naturally oriented toward serving the interests of their equity investor electorate, so that absent deeper reforms that would give other stakeholders board representation, shareholders’ interests are likely to continue to be treated as primary.2Leo E. Strine, Jr., Corporate Power Is Corporate Purpose I: Evidence from My Hometown, 33 Oxford Rev. Econ. Pol’y 176, 179 (2017); Lucian A. Bebchuk & Roberto Tallarita, The Illusory Promise of Stakeholder Governance, 106 Cornell L. Rev. 91, 146 (2020); Edward B. Rock, For Whom Is the Corporation Managed in 2020?: The Debate over Corporate Purpose, 76 Bus. Law. 363, 394 (2021). Second, stakeholder theorists have not congealed around any methodology to determine how corporate management should strike the inevitable trade-offs among the competing interests of different stakeholders, simply leaving it up to management to sort out as they see fit.3Margaret M. Blair & Lynn A. Stout, Director Accountability and the Mediating Role of the Corporate Board, 79 Wash. U. L.Q. 403, 408 (2001). Lacking any metric against which management performance can be judged, stakeholderism in practice risks reducing the accountability of management.4Frank H. Easterbrook & Daniel R. Fischel, The Economic Structure of Corporate Law 38 (1991); Michael C. Jensen, Value Maximization, Stakeholder Theory, and the Corporate Objective Function, 14 J. Applied Corp. Fin., Fall 2001, at 8, 14 (2001) (“By failing to provide a definition of better [and worse decision-making], stakeholder theory effectively leaves managers and directors unaccountable for their stewardship of the firm’s resources.”).

The debate about corporate purpose is old, dating back at least as far as the foundational exchange between E. Merrick Dodd Jr. and A.A. Berle Jr. in the pages of the Harvard Law Review in the early 1930s.5See generally E. Merrick Dodd, Jr., For Whom Are Corporate Managers Trustees?, 45 Harv. L. Rev. 1145 (1932); A.A. Berle, Jr., For Whom Corporate Managers Are Trustees: A Note, 45 Harv. L. Rev. 1365 (1932). Yet as early as that era, there were those who questioned the extent to which shareholder interests are actually incompatible with stakeholder interests. Mistreating workers, customers, and other firm patrons is not in general a recipe for long-term business success.6Jensen, supra note 4, at 16 (“[I]t is a basic principle of enlightened value maximization that we cannot maximize the long-term market value of an organization if we ignore or mistreat any important constituency.” (emphasis omitted)). As Dodd himself put it, “No doubt it is to a large extent true that an attempt by business managers to take into consideration the welfare of employees and consumers . . . will in the long run increase the profits of stockholders.”7Dodd, supra note 5, at 1156. While not embraced by Dodd,8Id. at 1156–57 (“[O]ne need not be unduly credulous to feel that there is more to this talk of social responsibility on the part of corporation managers than merely a more intelligent appreciation of what tends to the ultimate benefit of their stockholders.”). this so-called “enlightened” shareholder value view has historically represented the primary alternative to stakeholderism for those seeking to reorient corporate managers toward more socially responsible business practices.9See Dorothy S. Lund, Enlightened Shareholder Value, Stakeholderism, and the Quest for Managerial Accountability in Research Handbook on Corporate Purpose and Personhood 91, 94–99 (Elizabeth Pollman & Robert B. Thompson eds., 2021) (documenting embrace of ESV among corporate managers and investors).

But recent years have given rise to new perspectives on how corporate managers should understand shareholders’ interests that aim to weaken the grip of shareholder value on the hearts and minds of corporate managers and provide a new north star by which they could chart a more socially responsible course. The key to these innovations is the recognition that the shareholders of a business corporation in general care about more than just the return on the company’s common stock. For one, shareholders care about other stakeholders’ interests directly because of their own personal normative commitments (their “social preferences,” in the reductive parlance of economists). And even from just a financial perspective, each shareholder’s stake in the company is held as part of a broader portfolio. Some portion of the external harms that arise as by-products of the company’s pursuit of profits—to the environment, for example—will ultimately fall on other companies held in shareholders’ portfolios. Under this view, for corporate fiduciaries to further shareholders’ true interests, properly understood, they must eschew narrow shareholder value maximization and instead focus on shareholder welfare maximization, which incorporates these shareholder social preferences and portfolio effects.

In this Article we provide the first comprehensive analysis of these attempts, new and old, to pursue corporate social responsibility through shareholder governance. In Part I, we provide a brief overview of the traditional debate about the objective of a business corporation. In Part II, we dilate on the idea of enlightened shareholder value (“ESV”) as a way to pursue corporate social responsibility (“CSR”) within the traditional norm of shareholder primacy. In Part III, we outline the more recent attempts to improve corporate conduct by incorporating more holistic understandings of shareholder interests, one that focuses on shareholders’ social concerns and another that considers shareholders’ financial interests from a diversified portfolio perspective, which we refer to as the shareholder social preferences (“SSP”) view and the portfolio value maximization (“PVM”) view, respectively.

In Part IV, we turn to evaluating the extent to which these three competing approaches to pursuing CSR through shareholder governance—ESV, SSP, and PVM—are likely to induce public companies to incur costs on a voluntary basis in ways that further the interests of other stakeholders in the firm. We refer to such actions as engaging in CSR. We begin by analyzing the degree to which the corporate objective posited by each approach captures CSR concerns, ignoring the challenges to inducing managers to pursue each objective. While the long-term shareholder value objective of ESV does align to some extent with key stakeholder concerns, it falls short of resolving all social conflicts about corporate conduct, even if we put feasibility concerns to the side. But incorporating shareholders’ social preferences into the corporate objective offers little hope for improvement. For one, shareholder welfare puts far greater relative weight on long-term shareholder value than would a proper conception of social welfare. As well, shareholders’ insulation from the social and moral pressures that generate prosocial behavior at the individual level mutes their social preferences with respect to corporate conduct. Finally, conflicts among shareholders about social issues further dampen the role of social preferences in shareholder welfare.

Diversified shareholders’ portfolio value is even less normatively attractive as a corporate objective. It captures only a small portion of the externalities like pollution that its proponents hope to address. The type of externalities it does capture effectively are competitive effects on other firms—like competitors’ loss of business following a cut to the price of the firm’s output—the result of which is to motivate socially destructive anticompetitive conduct.

We then consider the feasibility of implementing each approach. While ESV is substantially feasible in terms of its information demands, management’s incentives are more mixed due to standard agency problems. Corporate short-termism is one type of agency cost that might result in management failing to engage in CSR that would benefit shareholders in the long-term. Overinvestment due to empire building in high-negative externality industries is another. In sum, in practice management will sometimes, perhaps often, fall short of the degree of social responsibility that is consistent with the shareholder value objective.

Adding shareholders’ social preferences to the corporate objective, however, would provide little by way of incremental incentives to act responsibly. For one, given that shareholders’ social preferences are in important part associative, the shareholders actually willing to hold the shares of the companies that pose the greatest social concerns will be those least concerned about the social issues implicated. As well, management faces significant information problems in gleaning the strength and content of the social preferences of their shareholder base. Indeed, diversified shareholders themselves, we submit, would struggle to formulate such preferences across the myriad social issues implicated by their portfolios. These information problems of the SSP approach in turn produce a fundamental incentive problem. With one far more important component of the objective for which managers have reasonably good information—shareholder value—and one far less important component for which they have little information—shareholders’ social preferences—the optimal incentive scheme focuses management squarely on shareholder value. Attempts to push management to attend to shareholders’ social preferences thus risk doing more harm to shareholder (and social) welfare than good by distracting management from their core competencies.

The story is much the same for PVM. Corporate managers are likely to be far better informed about how their business produces cash flows for the company and about competitive effects on other firms than about other externalities of the company’s business on other companies. Nor are institutional investors likely to be in a meaningfully better position to provide information on portfolio externalities to managers. The optimal incentive scheme for firm managers under PVM would thus also focus on long-term shareholder value of the firm. To the extent it would incorporate externalities, they would be largely of the competitive variety, leading to worse corporate behavior from a social perspective.

To be sure, one might seek to sidestep these managerial incentive and information problems by simply devolving greater corporate control to shareholders, and a number of prominent scholars have indeed advocated taking such a direct approach to implementing shareholder welfarism.10See infra Section IV.C. However, for publicly traded corporations at the center of these proposals, the basic economic logic of centralized management would continue to apply, suggesting any such departure from centralized management would entail sacrificing many of the efficiencies that have long justified this form of corporate organization. As well, recent work in economics suggesting that shareholders would act like social planners were they to have greater voting rights on operational decisions is based on strong assumptions and is in practice implausible. Devolving corporate control to shareholders would therefore offer little benefit in terms of more responsible corporate conduct and would entail substantial costs.

Shareholder governance does hold significant promise for improving corporate conduct, but this promise does not stem from any innovation in our basic understanding of shareholders’ interests along the lines of shareholder welfarism. Rather, the future of CSR, as with its past, is with ESV. The existing law-and-economics literature on ESV, however, has been stunted by two key misconceptions, which we attempt to dispel in Part V. The first is to frame ESV as an alternative to shareholder value as a corporate objective. This is a category mistake: ESV is best understood as a reform agenda targeting a particular class of agency costs that harm not only shareholders but also other corporate stakeholders. A second misconception is that the behavior of all the key actors in the corporate system is fully determined by their incentives and so ideas inspired by ESV cannot improve it. But we show that this determinacy paradox is a challenge for all normative arguments in corporate law scholarship. The generality of this analytic challenge for normative arguments in the field has not previously been recognized. Yet we also provide good reasons to think that this challenge can be surmounted in the case of ESV. We conclude by outlining a research agenda on ESV that would help illuminate the scope for further improvements to CSR through shareholder governance.

I.  THE TRADITIONAL DEBATE ABOUT CORPORATE OBJECTIVE

The traditional debate about the objective of a business corporation traces back to an influential exchange almost a century ago between Columbia Law School Professor Adolf A. Berle and Harvard Law School Professor E. Merrick Dodd that grappled with a fundamental question posed by the publicly traded corporation: Given the practical inability of dispersed shareholders to monitor managers, what maximand should managers pursue in exercising their resulting wide discretion over corporate affairs?11See Dodd, supra note 5, at 1147 (“Directors and managers of modern large corporations . . . are free from any substantial supervision by stockholders by reason of the difficulty which the modern stockholder has in discovering what is going on and taking effective measures even if he has discovered it.”).

A.  Shareholder Wealth Maximization

Berle’s solution was to turn to the law of trusts and argue that managers are trustees obligated to exercise their discretion solely for the benefit of the shareholders,12See A.A. Berle, Jr., Corporate Powers as Powers in Trust, 44 Harv. L. Rev. 1049, 1049 (1931). which he understood narrowly in terms of their interests in the corporation’s profits.13Berle, supra note 5, at 1367 (“Now I submit that you can not abandon emphasis on ‘the view that business corporations exist for the sole purpose of making profits for their stockholders’ until such time as you are prepared to offer a clear and reasonably enforceable scheme of responsibilities to someone else.”). It was this view of the corporation that was later reprised in Milton Friedman’s famous assertion that corporate executives’ “responsibility is to conduct the business in accordance with [shareholders’] desires, which generally will be to make as much money as possible while conforming to the basic rules of the society.”14Milton Friedman, A Friedman Doctrine—The Social Responsibility of Business Is To Increase Its Profits, N.Y. Times (Sept. 13, 1970), https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html [https://perma.cc/NSE6-ZBZU]. For Berle, this was a matter of managerial accountability. The only alternative he saw to the shareholder wealth maximization norm was to simply hand over “the economic power now mobilized and massed under the corporate form . . . to the present administrators with a pious wish that something nice will come out of it all.”15Berle, supra note 5, at 1368.

The shareholder wealth maximization norm has historically enjoyed broad support for several reasons. First, as a matter of economic theory, if markets are complete, firms are price takers, and there are no externalities not effectively addressed by government policy, corporate profit maximization results in a socially efficient outcome in the sense that there is no way to improve anyone’s well-being without making someone else worse off.16See Kenneth J. Arrow & Gerard Debreu, Existence of an Equilibrium for a Competitive Economy, 22 Econometrica 265, 265 (1954). By running the firm to maximize the value of the residual claims, the social pie is also maximized so long as government policy addresses externalities. Under the traditional shareholder value maximization view, then, externalities and distributive concerns are appropriately addressed by government policy, not by corporate managers assuming responsibility for them. Similarly, under these conditions, shareholders with conflicting preferences about the timing of consumption will nevertheless be unified in a corporate mandate to maximize shareholder wealth, since shareholders can satisfy their diverse consumption preferences by borrowing and saving.17See generally Steinar Ekern & Robert Wilson, On the Theory of the Firm in an Economy with Incomplete Markets, 5 Bell J. Econ. & Mgmt. Sci. 171 (1974)(explaining that with complete markets for borrowing and saving, it is in the interest of each shareholder to maximize firm value). Second, these theoretical arguments are complemented by the agency cost concerns articulated by Berle. Share value provides a simple metric by which to evaluate managers and to hold them accountable for the efficient deployment of corporate assets. Indeed, pioneering work on agency cost theory by Michael Jensen and William Meckling in the 1970s later formalized Berle’s central premise.18See Michael C. Jensen & William H. Meckling, Theory of the Firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Costs and Ownership Structure, 3 J. Fin. Econ. 305, 312 (1976). Lastly, the basic structure of corporate law reflects the shareholder value maximization norm, particularly in the key state of Delaware. While legal authority to manage the corporation is lodged in its board of directors, it is the stockholders who are entitled to elect directors.19See, e.g., Del. Code Ann. tit. 8, § 141(a) (2023); Model Bus. Corp. Act § 8.01(b) (2023) (establishing that business and affairs of corporations shall be managed by or under direction of board of directors); Del. Code Ann. tit. 8, § 211(b) (2023) (“[A]n annual meeting of stockholders shall be held for the election of directors on a date and at a time designated by or in the manner provided in the bylaws.”). Likewise, courts have defined the fiduciary duties that directors owe to the corporation as ultimately oriented toward stockholder wealth.20As summarized by Vice Chancellor Laster in In re Trados, Inc., “the standard of conduct for directors requires that they strive in good faith and on an informed basis to maximize the value of the corporation for the benefit of its residual claimants [that is, common stockholders] . . . not for the benefit of its contractual claimants.” In re Trados, Inc., 73 A.3d 17, 40–41 (Del. Ch. 2013). A broad range of complementary institutions has developed that further entrench shareholder interests as the primary end of the corporate system.21Dorothy S. Lund & Elizabeth Pollman, The Corporate Governance Machine, 121 Colum. L. Rev. 2563, 2575–78 (2021).

B.  Stakeholderism

In contrast to Berle, Dodd identified a trend in public opinion toward viewing the publicly held corporation as an “economic institution which has a social service as well as a profit-making function”22Dodd, supra note 5, at 1148. and believing that “business has responsibilities to the community.”23Id. at 1153. He viewed this trend in public opinion as desirable and likely to become the view of corporate managers, who would develop business ethics that would be “in some degree those of a profession rather than of a trade.”24Id. at 1161. Normatively he argued against the position of Berle that corporate fiduciaries have a legal responsibility just to stockholders in order to preserve the freedom of action necessary for management to fulfill their inchoate social obligations.25Id. The conceptualization of those to whom corporate managers owe these social responsibilities as stakeholders took off much later with an influential book aimed at corporate managers by Edward Freeman titled Strategic Management: A Stakeholder Approach.26R. Edward Freeman, Strategic Management: A Stakeholder Approach (1984). Freeman offered a capacious definition of stakeholders as “any group or individual who can affect or is affected by the achievement of the organization’s objectives.”27Id. at 46. Owing in part to the influence of Freeman,28Joshua D. Margolis & James P. Walsh, Misery Loves Companies: Rethinking Social Initiatives by Business, 48 Admin. Sci. Q. 268, 279 (2003) (“Freeman’s ideas provided a language and framework for examining how a firm relates to ‘any group or individual who can affect or is affected by the achievement of the organization’s objective.’ ”). the school of thought originally launched by Dodd has since become known as “stakeholder theory” or simply “stakeholderism.”29Bebchuk & Tallarita, supra note 2, at 94. Under this view, corporate fiduciaries should voluntarily advance not just the interests of shareholders but also the interests of workers, creditors, other suppliers, customers, and all others who are affected by the corporation’s activities. The term “corporate social responsibility” is generally used to refer to this view of a firm’s obligations to advance the interests of its stakeholders.

To organize the various types of social concerns that animate stakeholder theory, it is useful to distinguish between corporate stakeholders that transact with the firm—which we will refer to as firm patrons—and stakeholders that do not. One type of concern regarding the treatment of firm patrons stems from market failures that lead to inefficient outcomes. A primary source of such market failures is market power. A firm with market power in the labor market, for example, will depress workers’ wages in order to maximize its profits.30Efraim Benmelech, Nittai K. Bergman & Hyunseob Kim, Strong Employers and Weak Employees: How Does Employer Concentration Affect Wages?, 57 J. Hum. Res. S200, S201 (2022). Similarly, market power with respect to its customers can lead to inefficiently high prices for the firm’s output.31Robert S. Pindyck & Daniel L. Rubinfeld, Microeconomics 359 (6th ed. 2005). In both cases these deviations from competitive prices result in deadweight costs—inefficient reductions in transactions in the market. Market power also raises distributive concerns—a greater share of the social surplus generated in the relevant market goes to the firm rather than firm patrons. Distributive concerns can also arise even in the absence of market power when the relevant market is competitive and efficient. Stakeholderists might view the low wages in a competitive labor market, for example, as socially undesirable and advocate for the firm to pay its workers more.32See, e.g., Addie Stone, Improving Labor Relations Through Corporate Social Responsibility – Lessons from Germany and France, 46 Cal. W. Int’l L.J. 147, 150–51 (2016) (“Employees are key stakeholders, and their compensation is an important CSR issue. . . . [C]ompanies should focus their CSR efforts on providing a living wage to its employees.”).

Concerns about non-firm patrons, in contrast, typically involve externalities. Consider, for example, climate change. Firms’ operations inevitably entail some amount of greenhouse gas emissions, which contribute to the total stock of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere and in turn to the warming of the planet. The global scope of the climate change problem, in terms of both its causes and effects, means that essentially the entire global community is affected by every firm’s operations and hence can be considered a stakeholder of every firm. But many other externalities are much smaller in scale, resulting in a firm’s local community typically having a greater interest in the firm’s operations than those further afield.

Note that the basic normative claim at the heart of stakeholderism—that corporate fiduciaries should voluntarily advance the interests of all firm stakeholders and not just the interests of shareholders—presumes some sort of imperfection in current law and policy or in corporations’ responses to it. Stakeholderists argue, in effect, that current public policy is not sufficient to protect stakeholder interests, and so corporate managers should go even further on their own.33See David L. Engel, An Approach to Corporate Social Responsibility, 32 Stan. L. Rev. 1, 36 (1979) (“One cannot persuasively claim to have found an extra-profit goal that society wants corporations to pursue, unless one can offer at least a plausible explanation of why the legislature did not long ago enact liability rules, regulations, or other measures, to implement the goal in question quite independently of any management practice of social responsibility.”).

Notwithstanding the orientation of corporate law toward shareholder wealth maximization, certain core features of corporate law provide the managerial discretion that is necessary to implement stakeholderism. Director decision-making in the absence of financial conflicts of interest remains largely shielded from judicial scrutiny by the business judgment rule. As a result, corporate managers enjoy broad discretion to consider an array of stakeholder interests so long as their decisions can be justified as ostensibly in the interests of the corporation.34See, e.g., Shlensky v. Wrigley, 237 N.E.2d 776, 780 (Ill. App. Ct. 1968) (holding that, absent fraud, illegality, or conflict of interest, the decision of the Chicago Cubs not to hold night games was properly in the hands of the board of directors and the courts would not intervene). The court pointed out that the decision might in principle be justified based on the financial interests of the corporation, for example, because of the possible negative effect on the property value of Wrigley Field that a deterioration in the surrounding neighborhood might cause. Id. Moreover, many state legislatures have amended corporate statutes to increase the compatibility of corporate law with stakeholderism. For instance, so-called constituency statutes have been adopted in most states—but not Delaware—that make clear that corporate fiduciaries are not required to consider only shareholder interests to the exclusion of other stakeholders’ interests.35Margaret M. Blair, Ownership and Control: Rethinking Corporate Governance for the Twenty-First Century 218–19 (1995). The main motivation for these reforms was to prevent corporate takeovers on the ground that takeovers and their associated restructurings could be harmful to workers and local communities.36See, e.g., Eric W. Orts, Beyond Shareholders: Interpreting Corporate Constituency Statutes, 61 Geo. Wash. L. Rev. 14, 23–24 (1992). Even in Delaware, the case law evolved to endorse the prerogative of corporate directors to take action to fend off a premium acquisition offer that the shareholders are eager to accept in order to pursue directors’ long-term vision of what is in the corporation’s best interest.37See Paramount Commc’ns, Inc. v. Time Inc., 571 A.2d 1140, 1142 (Del. 1989) (upholding defensive measures by the Time, Inc. board motivated in part by a desire to preserve the company’s editorial integrity). More recently, the adoption of public benefit corporation statutes has been similarly grounded in a desire to enable business corporations to pursue stakeholderist objectives.38See Jill E. Fisch & Steven Davidoff Solomon, The “Value” of a Public Benefit Corporation, in Research Handbook on Corporate Purpose and Personhood 68, 68 (Elizabeth Pollman & Robert B. Thompson eds., 2021). These developments show that there is nothing inevitable about privileging the interests of investors in operating a commercial enterprise. Indeed, a wide variety of enterprises—such as consumer cooperatives, producer cooperatives, and nonprofits—have chosen to privilege a different set of stakeholders.39Cf. Henry Hansmann, The Ownership of Enterprise (1996) (developing an efficiency-based theory for the assignment of ownership rights to different classes of firm patrons).

II.  ENLIGHTENED SHAREHOLDER VALUE

Stakeholderism correctly identifies that shareholders’ interests in corporate profits can conflict with other interests in society. From a static, short run perspective especially, these conflicts can loom large. Squeezing suppliers and customers can increase corporate profits at their expense. Cutting back on greenhouse gas emissions will improve the environment but at a direct cost to the company’s bottom line. And so on and so forth—the list of such conflicts is endless. But taking a longer-term perspective on the company and its business may lessen the degree of conflict between stockholders and other firm stakeholders. More generally, for a range of reasons, considered in some detail below, it can be in shareholders’ interests for the company to incur costs to improve the well-being of the firm’s stakeholders. Or put more colloquially, companies can “do well by doing good.” This enlightened shareholder value perspective, while often dismissed by stakeholder theorists as insufficient40See, e.g., Dodd, supra note 5, at 1156–57; Colin P. Mayer, Prosperity: Better Business Makes the Greater Good 6–7 (2018) (“ ‘Doing well by doing good’ is a dangerous concept because it suggests that philanthropy is only valuable where it is profitable, and it converts charity into profit-generating entities . . . .”). and by shareholder value theorists as uninteresting41See, e.g., Einer Elhauge, Sacrificing Corporate Profits in the Public Interest, 80 N.Y.U. L. Rev. 733, 744 (2005); Bebchuk & Tallarita, supra note 2, at 110 (“Enlightened shareholder value is thus no different from shareholder value tout court.”). or even counterproductive,42Lucian A. Bebchuk, Kobi Kastiel & Roberto Tallarita, Does Enlightened Shareholder Value Add Value?, 77 Bus. Law. 731, 734 (2022). has gained increasing traction in recent years as a way to respond to the concerns of stakeholderism that is compatible with existing institutions that put shareholder interests first.43See, e.g., Lund, supra note 9, at 97–98 (arguing that concerns about corporate short-termism have led to a shift toward an enlightened shareholder value perspective); Jensen, supra note 4, at 9 (“Enlightened value maximization uses much of the structure of stakeholder theory but accepts maximization of the long-run value of the firm as the criterion for making the requisite tradeoffs among its stakeholders . . . . In so doing, it solves the problems arising from the multiple objectives that accompany traditional stakeholder theory by giving managers a clear way to think about and make the tradeoffs among corporate stakeholders.”); Michael E. Porter & Mark R. Kramer, Creating Shared Value, 89 Harv. Bus. Rev., Jan.–Feb. 2011, at 62, 64–65; Alex Edmans, Grow the Pie: How Great Companies Deliver Both Purpose and Profit 55–56 (2020).

Today the idea of ESV is more commonly referred to under the moniker “ESG,” which stands for “Environmental, Social, and Governance.”44See The Global Compact, Who Cares Wins, at 3 (2004). While ESG is a notoriously protean term, used for a range of different ideas,45For an illuminating discussion of the origins of and diverse meanings ascribed to ESG, see generally Elizabeth Pollman, The Making and Meaning of ESG, Harv. Bus. L. Rev. (forthcoming), https://papers.ssrn.com/abstract=4219857 [https://perma.cc/3JCD-LP55]. its origins are as a term that captures ways that investors can improve their risk-adjusted returns by incorporating environmental, social, and governance considerations into their investment process.46See id. at 11–13; The Global Compact, supra note 44, at i–ii (2004); Alex Edmans, The End of ESG, 52 Fin. Mgmt. 3 (2022). A key aspect of the standard rationale for the use of ESG factors to improve investment returns is the idea that such factors affect profitability at the level of the portfolio company.47The Global Compact, supra note 44, at 9; Robert G. Eccles, Ioannis Ioannou & George Serafeim, The Impact of Corporate Sustainability on Organizational Processes and Performance, 60 Mgmt. Sci. 2835, 2849, 2851 (2014) (finding high sustainability companies outperform low sustainability companies both in terms of stock market and accounting performance). Indeed, the notion that paying attention to ESG matters for firm financial performance has become part of the zeitgeist of recent years, with public companies increasingly discussing their ESG initiatives on quarterly earnings calls,48Goldman Sachs Equity Research, The Corporate Commotion – A Rising Presence of ESG in Earnings Calls 25 (2020), https://www.goldmansachs.com/insights/pages/gs-sustain-corporate-commotion-f/report.pdf [https://perma.cc/AUE3-3YTN]. hiring executives to oversee ESG reforms,49See Stavros Gadinis & Amelia Miazad, Corporate Law and Social Risk, 73 Vand. L. Rev. 1401, 1420 (2020). and tying executive compensation to ESG metrics.50The Conference Board, Linking Executive Compensation to ESG Performance 3 (2022), https://www.conference-board.org/pdfdownload.cfm?masterProductID=41301 [https://perma.
cc/Z2M6-7NCV] (reporting that 73% of S&P 500 companies tied executive compensation to some form of ESG performance as of 2021).
Another aspect of this rationale for ESG investing is the claim that the stock market misprices ESG factors.51See Max M. Schanzenbach & Robert H. Sitkoff, Reconciling Fiduciary Duty and Social Conscience: The Law and Economics of ESG Investing by a Trustee, 72 Stan. L. Rev. 381, 437 (2020) (“For an investor to be able to profit by trading on ESG factors, the market must consistently misprice them.”). To be sure, the term ESG is also used for practices that sacrifice investor returns in order to achieve benefits for stakeholders.52See id. at 397–98 (referring to this form of ESG as “collateral benefits ESG”). But in the main, much of the standard rhetoric around ESG, and its intellectual origins, reflect what we refer to as ESV.53See, e.g., United Nations Principles for Responsible Investment, A Blueprint for Responsible Investment 7 (2017), https://www.unpri.org/download?ac=5330 [https://perma.cc/
W4L7-9FPP] (“That environmental, social and governance factors each contribute to creating long-term value is a case well-understood by many, but remains new to many others – so it is a case we must continue to make.”).
As of 2022, some $8.4 trillion in assets under management in the United States are invested using an ESG approach.54US SIF Foundation, 2022 Report on US Sustainable Investing Trends 2 (2022).

ESV theorists typically describe the corporate objective as long-term shareholder value. The modifier long-term serves two purposes. First, it signifies that much of the financial value of the firm’s shares stems from cash flows it will produce well into the future. Second, it reflects the possibility that a company’s stock price might not fully reflect immediately the future cash flows that an action to sacrifice corporate cash flows today will ultimately produce.55See Jensen, supra note 4, at 17; Edmans, supra note 43, at 121. But the basic valuation framework underlying ESV is entirely conventional: the firm should be managed to maximize the net present value of the firm’s equity, calculated by discounting the cash flows available to equity holders using the appropriate risk-adjusted discount rate (however long it might take for the markets to catch up and price the company’s stock accordingly). In other words, ESV is not an alternative conception of corporate purpose—it retains the exact same corporate objective as standard shareholder value theory.56Analyses of ESV as a distinct normative standard for corporate decision-making thus largely miss the point of ESV. See generally, e.g., Bebchuk et al., supra note 42. We discuss critiques of ESV in some detail in Part V infra. Instead, ESV theory identifies a set of mechanisms through which firm managers can increase long-term shareholder value by behaving in a more socially responsible way.57For instance, a recent McKinsey Quarterly publication identifies five distinct channels through which more socially responsible corporate behavior can improve long-term profitability. Witold Henisz, Tim Koller & Robin Nuttall, Five Ways that ESG Creates Value, McKinsey Q., Nov. 2019, at 4.

With respect to the treatment of firm patrons, one mechanism posited entails a type of efficiency wage: treating a class of firm patrons better can induce reciprocal improved treatment of the firm by those firm patrons. For example, when a firm pays its workers better than their outside option—the market wage for similar labor—workers have greater incentive to perform their jobs well, in order to reduce the risk of dismissal, and the resulting increase in productivity can more than compensate for the firm’s increased wage bill.58See Carl Shapiro & Joseph E. Stiglitz, Equilibrium Unemployment as a Worker Discipline Device, 74 Am. Econ. Rev. 433, 433–34 (1984). Other accounts emphasize the importance of employee morale and perceptions of fairness: workers who are paid what they consider to be an unfair wage are likely to shirk or otherwise cut back on effort and vice versa.59George A. Akerlof & Janet L. Yellen, The Fair Wage-Effort Hypothesis and Unemployment, 105 Q. J. Econ. 255, 263 (1990). Similarly, a corporation that invests in promoting a diverse and inclusive work culture might boost employee motivation and performance60See Deloitte, Waiter, Is that Inclusion in My Soup?: A New Recipe To Improve Business Performance 4 (2013), https://www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/au/Documents/
human-capital/deloitte-au-hc-diversity-inclusion-soup-0513.pdf [https://perma.cc/5D8G-PHNA]; Jie Chen, Woon Sau Leung & Kevin P. Evans, Female Board Representation, Corporate Innovation and Firm Performance, 48 J. Empirical Fin. 236, 237 (2018).
and attract talented workers away from less enlightened competitors.61Gail Robinson & Kathleen Dechant, Building a Business Case for Diversity, 11 Acad. Mgmt. Exec. 21, 25 (1997). Consistent with this view—and with the stock market underpricing the benefits of favorable treatment of workers—the shares of companies identified as among the “100 Best Companies to Work For in America” earned significant excess returns from 1994 to 2009.62Alex Edmans, Does the Stock Market Fully Value Intangibles? Employee Satisfaction and Equity Prices, 101 J. Fin. Econ. 621, 621 (2011) [hereinafter Edmans, Does the Stock Market Fully Value Intangibles?]; see Alex Edmans, The Link Between Job Satisfaction and Firm Value, with Implications for Corporate Social Responsibility, 26 Acad. Mgmt. Persp. 1, 11 (2012) [hereinafter Edmans, The Link Between Job Satisfaction and Firm Value].

A related mechanism stems from the value of inducing firm-specific investments from firm patrons. A firm’s contracts with its patrons are often long-term and, in important respects, implicit.63See Oliver E. Williamson, The Economic Institutions of Capitalism: Firms, Markets, Relational Contracting 194 (1985). Workers, for example, invest in human capital that is to some extent specific to the firm and less valuable elsewhere. In order to induce workers to make such costly investments, the firm promises in return to pay them a share of the surplus generated by their increased productivity. For such relational contracts to work, however, firm patrons must be able to trust the firm to perform its end of the bargain down the line. Breaching that implicit contract by cutting wages, say, can ultimately harm shareholders by destroying the firm’s reputation for trustworthiness.64Andrei Shleifer & Lawrence H. Summers, Breach of Trust in Hostile Takeovers, in Corporate Takeovers: Causes and Consequences 33, 37–38 (Alan J. Auerbach ed., 1988). Implicit contracts and the value of the firm’s reputation can also provide reasons for the firm to act in a socially responsible manner with respect to its customers. Consider a car insurance company that can increase its profits in the short run by engaging in various practices that slow down or limit the payment on policyholders’ claims. Such short-term financial benefits, however, might be swamped by the future costs of lost customers from the resulting harm to the firm’s reputation as a reliable insurer that treats its policyholders fairly.

The ESV perspective also posits a set of mechanisms through which incurring costs to treat non-patrons well can ultimately create net financial benefits to shareholders. Consider, for example, an energy company’s decision of how much to invest in exploring for oil. The optimal level of investment if one takes a myopic view and assumes that the current market demand for oil will continue indefinitely might be much higher than if one instead adopts a more realistic forecast of the coming transition to a low-carbon economy due to future policy changes and technological developments. The idea is that putting one’s head in the ground and investing based on a naïve assumption of continuing demand, even if it generates increased profits in the short- to medium-term, risks the eventual incurrence of large losses on stranded assets.

The social preferences of one class of firm patrons can also produce financial incentives to treat other classes of firm patrons and non-patrons well.65The social views of Millennial and Gen Z workers and customers might produce greater incentive for firms to engage in more socially responsible behavior than in the past, given their evidently greater willingness to express those views in their decisions about where to work and shop. See Michal Barzuza, Quinn Curtis & David H. Webber, The Millennial Corporation, 28 Stan. J.L. Bus. & Fin. 255, 259–61 (2023). For instance, given consumer demand for environmentally sustainable products, investment in these products can result in increased profits as well as an improved environment.66Stephanie M. Tully & Russell S. Winer, The Role of the Beneficiary in Willingness to Pay for Socially Responsible Products: A Meta-Analysis, 90 J. Retailing 255, 265 (2014).

While the foregoing identifies conceptually coherent mechanisms through which incurring costs to further stakeholder interests can ultimately redound to the financial benefit of stockholders, we do not mean to suggest that all corporate decisions ostensibly justified on that basis are in fact in stockholder interests. Indeed, ESV arguments might be advanced strategically by stakeholderists for actions that in fact will reduce long-term shareholder value. Similarly, ESV might be used as cover by management for actions taken to further management’s interests at the expense of stockholders.67Jonathan Macey, Why Is the ESG Focus on Private Companies, Not the Government?, Bloomberg L. (Aug. 19, 2021, 1:01 AM), https://news.bloomberglaw.com/esg/why-is-the-esg-focus-on-private-companies-not-the-government [https://perma.cc/C8ZM-4Y3Q] (“Managers like ESG investing because the concept is so complex and multi-faceted that almost any action short of theft or outright destruction of corporate property can be defended on some ESG ground or the other.”). We return to the information and incentive problems posed by ESV in Part IV below.

III.  SHAREHOLDER WELFARISM

The ESV view posits considerable alignment between the financial interests of shareholders in the long-term and the interests of other firm patrons and the broader society. It thus provides one avenue to pursue CSR through shareholder governance. We now consider an alternative approach to doing so that is newer to the scene, which we refer to as shareholder welfarism. It posits that corporate management should seek to maximize shareholder welfare, not just share value, by incorporating a more complete understanding of how the corporation affects the well-being of shareholders. There are two primary strands of shareholder welfarism in the literature—the shareholder social preferences view and the portfolio value maximization view—which we take up in turn.68A third version of what we call shareholder welfarism focuses on the direct effects of corporate externalities on the well-being of shareholders—for example, shareholders’ health may be harmed by corporate pollution. See Michael Simkovic, Natural-Person Shareholder Voting, 109 Cornell L. Rev. (forthcoming 2024) (manuscript at 4), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=4180982# [https://perma.cc/H52C-ZAV3]. We view this as a less significant component of shareholder welfare, in part because the wealth generated through share ownership may enable shareholders to avoid exposure to many corporate externalities. Id. Moreover, much of our analysis of SSP and PVM apply to the direct effects component as well, so we omit treatment of this version in the interest of brevity.

A.  Shareholder Social Preferences

The shareholder social preferences (“SSP”) version of shareholder welfarism begins with the commonsense observation that public company shareholders care about more than just their own wealth—they also have ethical and social concerns. Many shareholders care about the environment, inequality, and racial justice, to give just a few examples, based on their own personal normative commitments. There is of course a wide range of views on such social issues. But while public company shareholders might not be perfectly representative of the entire population, there is no reason to think that corporate shareholders, unlike others in society, are narrowly self-interested and lack any social preferences.

Many shareholders would thus presumably often prefer that company management sacrifice share value in order to further their social preferences, at least to some extent. Consumer markets provide a useful analogy. Consider fair trade coffee, which is sold in major grocery chains across the United States. Fair trade goods are marketed to consumers at a premium price on the basis that the greater markup is passed on to poor producers. This is intended to appeal to consumers with ethical concerns about the treatment of such producers. Such a consumer might be willing to pay more for goods that promise better outcomes for the producers, a hypothesis confirmed by experimental evidence.69The leading study found that replacing a generic product label with a Fair Trade label increases sales of coffee by almost 10%, with higher demand holding steady at up to an 8% price premium. Jens Hainmueller, Michael J. Hiscox & Sandra Sequeira, Consumer Demand for Fair Trade: Evidence from a Multistore Field Experiment, 97 Rev. Econ. & Stat. 242, 253 (2015). Suppose those same consumers are also shareholders of a corporation that sources coffee beans. The SSP view posits that those same social preferences would also lead them to be willing to sacrifice investment returns as shareholders in order for the corporation to pay producers more.70There is some evidence, however, that individuals are less willing to pay to advance social concerns in investment decisions than in consumption decisions. See Scott Hirst, Kobi Kastiel & Tamar Kricheli‐Katz, How Much Do Investors Care About Social Responsibility?, 2023 Wis. L. Rev. 977,  1011. Under the SSP view, corporate fiduciaries should manage the corporation not to maximize shareholder wealth but rather to maximize shareholder welfare, incorporating shareholders’ social preferences.71Oliver Hart & Luigi Zingales, Companies Should Maximize Shareholder Welfare Not Market Value, 2 J.L. Fin. & Acct. 247, 263 (2017).

To be sure, in some cases, shareholder welfare so conceived is in fact maximized by simply maximizing shareholder wealth. Corporate charitable contributions provide an example. Tax complications aside, the goal of furthering shareholder social preferences provides no basis for such corporate philanthropy since the corporation could instead pay those funds out to shareholders, who in turn could donate directly to charity. Oliver Hart and Luigi Zingales—prominent proponents of the SSP view—characterize this as a case in which the social concern is “separable” from the company’s business.72Id. at 249. But Hart and Zingales argue convincingly that social concerns and moneymaking by the company are often inseparable.73Id. They offer as an example shareholder concerns about mass shootings. Walmart might much more effectively advance those shareholder social preferences by no longer selling high-capacity magazines than by contributing the profits from doing so to charity.74Id. Indeed, it seems plausible that for virtually every major CSR concern there are important aspects of the problem that are not completely separable from the businesses of the corporations involved.

The extent to which shareholders are willing to sacrifice their wealth to address various social concerns of course varies from shareholder to shareholder. Hart and Zingales propose that such heterogeneity be handled through voting by shareholders.75Id. at 260–61. The board of directors of the corporation could be required to periodically poll shareholders about corporate policies that implicate social concerns so that the median shareholder’s views on the issue (on a share-weighted basis) prevail. Implicit in this voting-based approach is that the “shareholder welfare” objective weights each shareholder’s preferences by the number of shares they own.76It is not entirely clear how companies with multiple classes of stock with different voting rights and cash flow rights should be handled under the SSP view. One natural approach would be to calculate shareholder welfare by weighting each shareholder’s preferences by the cash flow rights they hold. This would align most closely with the approach taken under the traditional shareholder value view of the corporate objective.

A further wrinkle is that most corporate shares today are held by institutional investors.77Amil Dasgupta, Vyacheslav Fos & Zacharias Sautner, Institutional Investors and Corporate Governance, Founds. & Trends Fin. (forthcoming) (manuscript at 4), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/
papers.cfm?abstract_id=3682800 [https://perma.cc/3KG8-MW3Q].
Under the SSP view, it is the social preferences of the underlying investors in those institutions that corporate management should seek to advance. Institutional investors would thus have to channel their investors’ views in voting the stock in their portfolio companies in order for corporate voting to accurately reflect shareholder welfare. Hart and Zingales envision asset managers segmenting the market based on the social views the asset manager will seek to advance in voting shares of its portfolio companies, so that individual investors can simply sort themselves to the appropriate asset manager.78Hart & Zingales, supra note 71, at 265–66. One might wonder whether SSP and shareholder wealth maximization might yield similar results with regard to CSR given the valuation effects of shareholders’ buying and selling stocks according to their social preferences. For instance, if shareholders divest from a dirty company based on their social preferences, the resulting decrease in the company’s stock price might arguably induce wealth-minded managers to turn clean in the name of maximizing shareholder wealth. See Robert Heinkel, Alan Kraus & Josef Zechner, The Effect of Green Investment on Corporate Behavior, 36 J. Fin. & Quantitative Analysis 431, 432–33 (2001). Eleonora Broccardo, Hart, and Zingales argue against this result given that any fall in prices among dirty firms is likely to be muted by marginal investors who purchase the newly discounted shares on account of the lower weight these investors place on their social preferences. See Eleonora Broccardo, Oliver Hart & Luigi Zingales, Exit Versus Voice, 130 J. Pol. Econ. 3101, 3117–20 (2022). Empirical evidence also suggests that divestment from dirty companies produces only modest price declines. See Jonathan B. Berk & Jules H. van Binsbergen, The Impact of Impact Investing 2–3 (L. & Econ. Ctr. at George Mason Univ. Scalia L. Sch., Research Paper No. 22-008, 2021), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=3909166 [https://perma.cc/VJ9N-5Q56]. We discuss sorting of shareholders into firms according to their social preferences infra Section IV.B.2.i.

B.  Portfolio Value Maximization

The portfolio value maximization (“PVM”) strand of shareholder welfarism, in contrast, retains the focus on shareholders’ financial interests from the traditional shareholder value approach but considers their financial interests from a portfolio perspective. Most shareholders in public companies are highly diversified and increasingly so with the ongoing shift from active management to passive investment vehicles.79Vladyslav Sushko & Grant Turner, The Implications of Passive Investing for Securities Markets, BIS Q. Rev., Mar. 2018, at 113, 115. From this perspective, the actual interests of a firm’s shareholders lie in the value of their diversified portfolios, not just in the value of the firm’s shares. Accordingly, corporate fiduciaries should seek to maximize the value of the firm’s shareholders’ portfolios, not their own firm value.

The main implication of the PVM approach concerns between-firm externalities, meaning ways that the decisions of one firm affect the value of other firms. Such spillover effects come in a variety of forms. One form stems from market competition. When a firm gains market share by cutting prices, competing firms often lose customers. Economists refer to this type of external effect as a “pecuniary externality.”80J.-J. Laffont, Externalities, in Allocation, Information and Markets 112, 113 (John Eatwell, Murray Milgate & Peter Newman eds., 1989). A quite different form—referred to as a “technological externality”—occurs when a production or consumption activity imposes costs or benefits on other producers or consumers and does not operate through the price system.81Id. at 112. For example, suppose a factory releases toxic chemicals that reduce agricultural productivity in the surrounding area. From the traditional shareholder value perspective, corporate managers should manage the corporation to maximize the value of its equity without regard to such spillover effects on the value of other firms or on consumers. But under the PVM view, the company’s shareholders would want firm managers to incorporate such external effects to the extent that they reduce the value of other securities held in shareholders’ portfolios.

The social desirability of such PVM behavior by firm managers depends critically on the nature of the externality at issue and the extent to which it is internalized in shareholders’ portfolios. In the case of pecuniary externalities, having firm managers take them into account would interfere with market competition. For example, if each firm in an industry were operated to maximize the total value of the industry, that would entail pricing their output above the competitive level, with all of the standard inefficiencies from monopoly pricing that would result. In recent years a burgeoning empirical literature claims that the growth of diversified institutional investors has in fact led to such anticompetitive outcomes in certain industries.82José Azar, Martin C. Schmalz & Isabel Tecu, Anticompetitive Effects of Common Ownership, 73 J. Fin. 1513, 1558–59 (2018). But a number of papers have raised methodological concerns with this finding. See, e.g., Patrick Dennis, Kristopher Gerardi & Carola Schenone, Common Ownership Does Not Have Anticompetitive Effects in the Airline Industry, 77 J. Fin. 2765, 2766 (2022); Andrew Koch, Marios Panayides & Shawn Thomas, Common Ownership and Competition in Product Markets, 139 J. Fin. Econ. 109, 111 (2021); Katharina Lewellen & Michelle Lowry, Does Common Ownership Really Increase Firm Coordination?, 141 J. Fin. Econ. 322, 324 n.7 (2021). The internalization of pecuniary externalities through the PVM approach is thus generally not socially desirable.

But for technological externalities, PVM offers hope that running the firm in the true interests of shareholders—maximizing the value of their diversified portfolios—would result in more socially responsible corporate behavior. For example, the portfolio value maximizing level of pollution emitted by a firm would take into account the portion of the costs of that pollution that fall on other firms in the portfolio.

These basic implications of running a corporation to maximize the value of diversified shareholders’ portfolios were worked out theoretically by economists decades ago.83See, e.g., Julio J. Rotemberg, Financial Transaction Costs and Industrial Performance 1–3 (Mass. Inst. of Tech. Alfred P. Sloan Sch. of Mgmt., Working Paper No. 1554-84, 1984), https://dspace.mit.edu/bitstream/handle/1721.1/47993/financialtransac00rote.pdf [https://perma.cc/4D
MX-CTC8]; Roger H. Gordon, Do Publicly Traded Corporations Act in the Public Interest? 21–22 (Nat’l Bureau of Econ. Rsch., Working Paper No. 3303, 1990), https://www.nber.org/papers/w3303 [https://perma.cc/KF5Q-VY57]; Robert G. Hansen & John R. Lott, Jr., Externalities and Corporate Objectives in a World with Diversified Shareholder/Consumers, 31 J. Fin. & Quantitative Analysis 43, 44 (1996).
They entered the legal literature when the growth of private and public pension funds, and their growing use of indexed investment strategies, led to calls for these so-called universal owners to exercise their shareholder rights in order to advance broader social interests with respect to corporate behavior.84See James P. Hawley & Andrew T. Williams, The Rise of Fiduciary Capitalism 1–29 (2000); Jeffrey N. Gordon, Systematic Stewardship, 47 J. Corp. L. 627, 632–33 (2022). See generally Robert A.G. Monks & Nell Minow, Watching the Watchers : Corporate Governance for the 21st Century (1996). More recently, Madison Condon has argued that attempts by asset managers to pressure their portfolio companies to combat climate change can be explained by their desire to maximize the value of the diversified portfolios they manage.85Madison Condon, Externalities and the Common Owner, 95 Wash. L. Rev. 1, 26–27 (2020).

The PVM literature has thus largely focused on arguments about how diversified institutional investors should or do exercise their ownership rights in order to change a portfolio company’s policies in ways that increase the value of their diversified portfolios even at the cost of the particular company’s own value.86Id. at 19–26; Gordon, supra note 84, at 658–66. But as Marcel Kahan and Edward Rock argue, responding to such shareholder pressures without changing the legal norm defining the purpose of a business corporation would conflict with the fiduciary duties of corporate officers and directors, which are based on the traditional shareholder wealth maximization norm.87Marcel Kahan & Edward B. Rock, Systemic Stewardship with Tradeoffs, 48 J. Corp. L. 497, 500 (2023); see also Roberto Tallarita, The Limits of Portfolio Primacy, 76 Vand. L. Rev. 511, 564–65 (2023). In what follows we thus focus our analysis on a more ambitious version of PVM that includes changing the legal definition of corporate purpose to encompass the internalization of externalities that fall on other firms held in their shareholders’ portfolios.88Such an approach to PVM is precisely what motivated a 2022 class action lawsuit against Meta Platforms (formerly Facebook, Inc.), which alleged that the directors of Meta had breached their fiduciary duties by choosing to maximize the value of Meta rather the financial interests of Meta’s diversified shareholders. In particular, the complaint alleges that the directors failed to consider that shareholders with diversified portfolios may be subject to net losses in their portfolios due to Meta’s pursuit of a business model that maximizes its advertising revenue without regard to the harms this conduct inflicts on public health and, by extension, the value of diversified portfolios. See Complaint at 2, 18, 72, McRitchie v. Zuckerberg, No. 2022-0890 (Del. Ch. Oct. 3, 2022).

* * *

The main appeal of shareholder welfarism, in both its shareholder social preferences and portfolio value maximization guises, is that it seems to hold the promise of addressing the two key problems with conventional stakeholderism. First, it retains the basic norm that shareholder interests are primary in the management of a corporation. As such, shareholder welfarism might be compatible with the standard norms and incentives governing corporate affairs that put shareholders first, which the recent growth of institutional shareholders has further entrenched. Second, each form of shareholder welfarism provides a conceptual framework through which corporate management could determine, at least in principle, how to trade off among competing stakeholder interests. These two key aspects of the appeal of shareholder welfarism are shared by the ESV view. It too is compatible with existing norms that privilege shareholder interests and provides a clear objective to guide corporate management in trading off current profits in order to further stakeholder interests: long-term shareholder value.

IV.  EVALUATING THE THREE APPROACHES TO CSR THROUGH SHAREHOLDER GOVERNANCE

We now turn to evaluating the three approaches to pursuing corporate social responsibility through shareholder governance—enlightened shareholder value (“ESV”), shareholder social preferences (“SSP”), and portfolio value maximization (“PVM”)—based on their potential to induce the management of public companies to incur costs on a voluntary basis in ways that further the interests of other stakeholders in the firm (that is, to engage in CSR). We divide our analysis into three parts. We first evaluate the normative attractiveness of the corporate objective posited by each approach, ignoring the practical challenges to inducing corporate managers to pursue each objective. We focus simply on the extent to which each proposed corporate objective captures various social concerns about corporate behavior. We then turn to the feasibility of each approach in terms of the extent to which managers would have the information and incentives needed to pursue the posited corporate objective, taking as given the centralization of control in corporate managers. Finally, we consider the extent to which implementing shareholder welfarism by simply devolving more control to shareholders might improve corporate conduct.

A.  Normative Attractiveness of Each Corporate Objective

To what extent do the corporate objectives of ESV, SSP, and PVM capture CSR concerns? Our analysis in this Section can be thought of as adopting the assumption of no information costs and no agency costs: we imagine a world in which public companies fully maximize the corporate objective function posited under each approach. The corporate objective posited by the ESV view is long-term shareholder value, meaning the net present value of the future cash flows paid on the company’s equity, discounted based on the firm’s opportunity cost of capital.89Jensen, supra note 4, at 9. Note that long-term shareholder value is also a major component of the corporate objectives posited by SSP and PVM. ESV and its long-term shareholder value objective thus form a key benchmark against which to judge SSP and PVM. We begin by qualitatively characterizing the extent to which the long-term shareholder value objective of ESV fails to capture CSR concerns so that even in a world in which management was perfectly successful at maximizing long-term shareholder value in an enlightened way, there would remain significant residual social concerns. We then turn to the SSP and PVM objective functions and consider the extent to which the further considerations they incorporate in addition to long-term shareholder value might capture CSR concerns beyond the ESV baseline.

1.  Enlightened Shareholder Value

We begin by repeating an observation we made in our discussion of stakeholderism in Part I: corporate behavior is significantly shaped by the constraints and incentives produced by law and public policy, much of which is intended to address market failures and distributional concerns that arise from corporate conduct. This forms an important starting point for thinking about how, in a world in which managers perfectly maximize long-term shareholder value, there might remain social concerns about corporate conduct. Those concerns are, by definition, those not addressed by current law and public policy.

One category of social concerns about corporate conduct that would persist in such a world is with respect to the treatment of firm patrons. First, the outcomes for firm patrons—especially workers—might raise distributive concerns. Competitive labor markets, for example, operating under current tax and transfer policies induce a particular distribution of income and welfare in which low-skilled workers, in particular, earn income that many find unfairly low.90Thomas Piketty, Capital in the Twenty-First Century 304–35 (Arthur Goldhammer, trans., 2014). As we discussed above, maximizing long-term shareholder value generates some incentive for firms to pay their workers more than they otherwise would based on the value of incentivizing effort or firm-specific investment, but this is true only up to a point. Indeed, for workers for which such incentive contracting concerns do not loom large, the shareholder-value-maximizing wage might be little more than the competitive wage in the relevant labor market. Furthermore, it seems likely that such cases will often involve workers with relatively low levels of human capital whose low incomes raise the greatest distributive concerns from a social perspective. Put simply, efficiency wages and the like are no panacea for the standard concerns about the income inequality produced by market economies.

Another limitation of this class of ESV mechanisms stems from last period concerns. Firms have incentives to perform on implicit contracts in order to preserve the going concern value of the firm, which relies on the trustworthiness of the firm as perceived by current and future patrons. Implicit contracting thus depends critically on the firm and its patrons having a long future ahead of them. But as the probability that the firm will cease to operate and be liquidated goes up—due to business setbacks, for example—the incentives produced by the value of the firm’s reputation for trustworthiness are attenuated.

Market power of firms raises additional social concerns. While efficiency wage and implicit contracting considerations might moderate to some extent the incentive of shareholder-value-maximizing firms to exploit their market power, in the main, the long-term shareholder value objective is better understood as the key cause of the social problems posed by market power rather than as their solution.

In a similar way, maximizing long-term shareholder value provides no universal cure for other sources of contracting failures between the firm and various classes of firm patrons.91Indeed, the basic thesis of Henry Hansmann’s The Ownership of Enterprise is that such contracting failures can result in the efficient assignment of ownership of the firm being to a class of firm patrons other than investors. Hansmann, supra note 39, at 1–2. A firm that possesses better information than its customers about the safety of its products, for example, might well succumb to the temptation to cut back on safety to save costs, correctly concluding that the reputational and other costs of doing so are outweighed by the short-run savings even when viewed through the lens of long-term shareholder value.

With respect to externalities on non-firm patrons, the limits of ESV are even easier to see. By definition, when production or consumption of a firm’s output generates a negative technological externality, running the firm to maximize long-term shareholder value will result in socially excessive levels of the activity (and the reverse is true for positive externalities). The mechanisms discussed in Part II through which ESV can incentivize firms to improve their treatment of non-patrons do not change this powerful implication of economic theory. When externalities exist that are not effectively addressed through taxation or regulation, the private costs and benefits of the activity that drive the maximization of long-term shareholder value diverge from the social costs and benefits of the activity.

In summary, ESV mechanisms under the corporate objective of long-term shareholder value only mitigate and do not resolve social conflicts with respect to corporate conduct. We turn now to SSP and PVM to consider the extent to which the objective function posited by each might go further than ESV in motivating CSR.

2.  Shareholder Social Preferences

The corporate objective under the SSP view is based on two key components of shareholders’ well-being: (1) the long-term value of the shares and (2) shareholders’ social preferences with respect to corporate conduct. The weight each shareholder puts on these two components depends on their own preferences. As well, the specific content of shareholders’ social preferences will vary from shareholder to shareholder. To calculate aggregate shareholder welfare, individual shareholders’ well-being levels are weighted by their share ownership and summed.

Because of heterogeneity across shareholders in the strength and content of their social preferences, aggregate shareholder welfare for a corporation will depend on who owns the shares of the company. In turn, the decisions of individuals to hold the shares may well depend on the conduct of the corporation and the social preferences of the individuals. For now, we adopt the simplifying assumption that all shareholders are fully diversified, so that there is no variation in the share-weighted social preferences of shareholders of different public companies.92We consider the sorting of shareholders across firms infra Section IV.B.2.i.

Under these assumptions, how would maximizing shareholder welfare, taking into account the social preferences of shareholders, change corporate conduct relative to maximizing long-term shareholder value? Consider first the weight that aggregate shareholder welfare would put on long-term shareholder value. This is an empirical question based on the share-weighted preferences of corporate shareholders. But we make three points that together point to the conclusion that aggregate shareholder welfare would be largely, perhaps even overwhelmingly, based on long-term shareholder value rather than shareholders’ social preferences.

To begin, it is useful to contrast shareholder welfare with overall social welfare. Social welfare does include as a component a firm’s long-term shareholder value—the well-being of the claimants to that value count, of course, in any appropriate measure of social welfare. But social welfare also includes the well-being of those who are not shareholders of the firm. In contrast, shareholder welfare would put weight on non-shareholders’ well-being based only on shareholders’ social preferences. Unless shareholders were perfectly altruistic in the sense that their preferences put as much weight on others as on themselves, this results in shareholder welfare putting greater relative weight on firm value than does social welfare. This effect alone means that maximizing shareholder welfare will generally not provide an incentive for managers to sacrifice profits to the extent required for the firm to behave appropriately as a social matter. Consider, for example, a profitable factory that emits such a large amount of pollution that, from a social welfare perspective, it should be shut down. Because shareholder welfare puts much more weight on firm profits than social welfare does, it will often not be in shareholders’ interests in such a situation to shut down the plant even including consideration of their social preferences.

Second, the shareholders of a public corporation are insulated from the social and moral pressures that generate other-regarding behavior at the individual level.93Elhauge, supra note 41, at 758–59. This is due in part to the complex governance structures that stand between individual shareholders and corporate decision-making that make shareholders anonymous to those who might impose social sanctions for harm done by the corporation as well as due to diversified shareholders’ basic lack of information about corporate affairs (ignorance is bliss).94Id. at 798. Einer Elhauge argues that this insulation will result in shareholders putting much more weight on corporate profits relative to social concerns than would sole proprietors, who are far less insulated.95Id. at 799. This is even more strongly the case with respect to shareholders who own interests in corporate shares through intermediaries like mutual funds and are therefore “double insulat[ed].”96Id. at 817. In sum, from a revealed preference perspective, the welfare of diversified shareholders might be understood as stemming overwhelmingly from shareholder value rather than from social preferences.

Finally, what little weight shareholder welfare does put on social concerns as opposed to shareholder value is further muted by conflicts among shareholders about social issues. Hart and Zingales introduce the idea of shareholder welfare in a simple model in which the social concern is about pollution that is a by-product of firm operations and shareholders’ preferences vary only in terms of the weight they put on environmental harm from the firm’s pollution versus on their own wealth.97Hart & Zingales, supra note 71, at 252–53. In this framework, aggregate shareholder welfare will be based on the share-weighted average of the weights individuals put on environmental harm relative to personal wealth.

But corporate activities typically pose trade-offs not just between profits and social concerns but also among competing social concerns. As a result, conflicts among shareholders in their views on social issues effectively further reduce the weight of shareholder preferences in determining what maximizes shareholder welfare. In some cases, these conflicts are direct. Consider abortion or affirmative action. Some socially minded investors want less of these things; some want more. In those cases, the competing social preferences of different shareholders cancel out to some extent so that, on net, shareholder social preferences get less weight in determining shareholder welfare.

But even for social issues that nobody is against per se, like clean air or good jobs, there are often indirect conflicts stemming from shareholders’ social preferences. Consider a manufacturing firm that causes pollution as a by-product of its production process but also provides jobs in a community with scarce economic opportunities.98See Alperen A. Gözlügöl, The Clash of ‘E’ and ‘S’ of ESG: Just Transition on the Path to Net Zero and the Implications for Sustainable Corporate Governance and Finance, 15 J. World Energy L. & Bus. 1, 4 (2022) (arguing that the transition to net-zero greenhouse gas emissions will result in certain regions suffering substantial employment losses). The choice of scale of the firm’s output poses trade-offs between environmental quality and jobs. As a result, a socially minded investor who cares about both might ultimately prefer a level of output little different from the profit-maximizing level of output. In contrast, shareholders who care more about the environment than jobs might prefer a lower level of output, and vice-versa for a shareholder more concerned about jobs. The median shareholder’s preferences might then be close to the profit-maximizing level of output. So these indirect conflicts about social issues also, in effect, further mute the role of social preferences in shareholder welfare and increase the role of long-term shareholder value.

Note as well that corporations do not generally face binary decisions—like either protect the environment or preserve jobs—but rather face a continuum of choices, as in the example of a firm’s choice of level of output. As a result, having a bare majority of shares held by shareholders who lean in one direction on such trade-offs—toward the environment, say—does not mean that the conflicting preferences of the remaining shareholders do not matter for determining the operational decision that maximizes shareholder welfare. For a firm facing a continuum, or at least a large number, of potential operational decisions, the presence of a significant minority of shareholders who care more about jobs than the environment will pull the shareholder-welfare-maximizing choice in the direction of preserving jobs and away from protecting the environment.99We put to the side here more profound complications posed by conflicts among preferences of individuals for aggregating those preferences to a social choice, for example, the possibility that majority voting over choices might fail to yield a stable outcome. See generally Kenneth J. Arrow, Social Choice and Individual Values (1951).

In light of these considerations, the social issues for which incorporating shareholders’ social preferences into the corporate objective might potentially make a meaningful difference, relative to the ESV baseline, in motivating CSR would generally be issues on which there is a broad and strong social consensus. But these are exactly the set of issues for which the residual social concerns left under the ESV approach after fully maximizing long-term shareholder value are likely to be minimal, for two reasons.

First, social issues for which there is a strong social consensus are much more likely to be effectively addressed by law and public policy. Federal and state law, for example, provide powerful controls on corporate conduct to address many social concerns raised by corporate operations, from the safety of motor vehicles, to the health consequences of tobacco consumption, to the emission of particulate matter by industrial activities. Our claim is most certainly not that the political process is perfect or that current public policy fully addresses all social concerns about corporate conduct. Rather, it is that the specific issues for which there is sufficient social consensus such that the social preferences of shareholders form a meaningful component of shareholder welfare are precisely the issues that are most likely to be effectively addressed by public policy. Indeed, corporate shareholders’ preferences put less weight on average on the social concerns raised by corporate conduct than does the overall polity, for reasons given above.  It thus seems likely that for many issues for which there is a strong social consensus, public policy will go well beyond what the company’s shareholders would prefer in reining in corporate conduct.100An example of this dynamic can be seen in the Rule 14a-8 campaign by environmentally oriented shareholders such as As You Sow against oil production companies between 2017 and 2019. These shhareholders sought to compel greater corporate disclosure regarding methane gas leaks arising from their oil production operations. See, e.g., Dominion Energy, Inc.: Request for Report on Methane Leaks, As You Sow (Jan. 31, 2018), https://www.asyousow.org/resolutions/2018/01/31/dominion-energy-inc-request-for-report-on-methane-leaks [https://perma.cc/XTR2-BU2Q]. Public polls at this time suggested that 74% of respondents “strongly support[ed]” or “somewhat support[ed]” regulations to reduce methane gas leaks, see Climate Nexus, National Poll Toplines (2021), https://climatenexus.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/09/Climate-Nexus-National-Poll-2021-Methane-Infrastructure-Toplines.pdf [https
://perma.cc/5X4H-UE2D], which may explain why the Biden-Harris administration implemented its Methane Emissions Reduction Action Plan in 2022, see Fact Sheet: Biden Administration Tackles Super-Polluting Methane Emissions (Jan. 31, 2022), https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/statements-releases/2022/01/31/fact-sheet-biden-administration-tackles-super-polluting-methane-emissions [https://
perma.cc/QFT9-8GCN]. Notably, despite the widespread public support for regulating methane leaks, shareholder support for 14a-8 proposals aimed at enhancing methane leak disclosures, while occasionally reaching 50% support, often drew far less than majority support. See Shareholders Are Plugging Methane Leaks Themselves, As You Sow (June 1, 2018), https://www.asyousow.org/blog/2018/6/1/shareholders-are-plugging-methane-leaks-themselves [https://perma.cc/9W2A-26N5].

Second, the broad social consensus we are supposing would include not just shareholders but also other classes of firm patrons, including its workers, managers, and customers. The social preferences of firm patrons can provide strong shareholder value reasons for the firm to act in ways that are consistent with those social preferences. Failing to do so risks inviting a backlash from these other classes of firm patrons that might have major financial consequences.101Barzuza et al., supra note 65, at 265. As BlackRock’s CEO Larry Fink put it in his 2022 letter to CEOs, “Employees need to understand and connect with your purpose; and when they do, they can be your staunchest advocates. Customers want to see and hear what you stand for as they increasingly look to do business with companies that share their values.” Larry Fink, Larry Fink’s 2022 Letter to CEOs: The Power of Capitalism, BlackRock (2022), https://www.blackrock.com/corporate/investor-relations/
larry-fink-ceo-letter [https://perma.cc/C82G-E8DM].

Consider, for example, explicit and open racism in a firm’s treatment of its customers. A recent episode involving Starbucks is instructive. In 2018, a Starbucks employee called the police after two Black men entered a Starbucks in Philadelphia and sat down without purchasing anything and, when store employees asked them to leave, declined to do so. The police forcibly removed the men, leading to national headlines, a public apology by the Starbucks CEO, and the hashtag #BoycottStarbucks trending on Twitter.102Matt Stevens, Starbucks C.E.O. Apologizes After Arrests of 2 Black Men, N.Y. Times (Apr. 15, 2018), https://www.nytimes.com/2018/04/15/us/starbucks-philadelphia-black-men-arrest.html [https
://perma.cc/FGK9-Z5AA].
No reference to Starbucks shareholders’ social preferences is needed to explain the decision by Starbucks management several days later to close 8,000 stores to conduct racial bias training of employees.103Rachel Abrams, Starbucks To Close 8,000 U.S. Stores for Racial-Bias Training After Arrests, N.Y. Times (Apr. 17, 2018).

In summary, under the SSP shareholder welfare objective, it is long-term shareholder value that is the key driver of decisions to incur costs to further stakeholder interests, not the social preferences of shareholders, which are conflicted, muted, and often prefer less protection of stakeholder interests than provided by law.104In contrast, Broccardo et al. argue that diversified shareholders, in casting votes about corporate issues, will put more weight on social concerns than a sole proprietor would since each shareholder bears only a fraction of the costs of the firm behaving more responsibility. See Broccardo et al., supra note 78, at 3103. We discuss Broccardo et al.’s model in more detail infra Section IV.C.

3.  Portfolio Value Maximization

The corporate objective under the PVM approach is diversified shareholders’ portfolio value. To evaluate its normative desirability, we maintain for now the simplifying assumption that all investors are fully diversified—that is, they hold the market portfolio of all investible risky assets with each asset weighted in proportion to its value. This is in fact a key assumption underlying the standard model of valuation managers are taught in MBA programs, which is based on the Capital Asset Pricing Model (“CAPM”).105See, e.g., Richard A. Brealey, Stewart C. Myers & Franklin Allen, Principles of Corporate Finance 185–99 (10th ed. 2011). CAPM provides the original intellectual foundations for the specific model of financial management by which managers are supposed to pursue long-term shareholder value. We begin by sketching how that model works in order to frame more precisely how the PVM approach proposes managers should deviate from it.

In the standard model of corporate decision-making, diversified shareholders want managers to follow the “NPV Rule”: invest in every project that has a positive net present value (“NPV”).106See id. at 101–03. The NPV of a project is calculated by converting (“discounting”) all of the future cash flows associated with the project to their present value and then summing those present values as follows:

,        (1)

where  is the net cash flow received from the project in period T and r is the risk-adjusted discount rate for the project.

The assumption of CAPM—that all investors are optimally diversified—plays a key role in the determination of the appropriate discount rate.107For a textbook treatment of CAPM, see id. at 185–203. To capture the cost to investors of bearing the risk of the project, a “risk premium” is added to the risk-free rate (typically taken to be the return on government obligations) to arrive at the risk-adjusted discount rate. But crucially, CAPM considers the risk of a project from a portfolio perspective. That is, a project’s risk is measured not in terms of the degree of uncertainty of the project’s cash flows considered in isolation but rather in terms of the increment in portfolio risk if the project were added to a diversified portfolio. This matters because one component of a project’s risks—the idiosyncratic component—disappears when the project is held in a diversified portfolio. A diversified investor only has to be compensated for bearing the risks that they actually have to bear, which is the undiversifiable, systematic component of a project’s risk. In CAPM, the only source of systematic risk comes from the correlation between a project’s cash flows and the overall market return, which is referred to as the project’s beta. The standard shareholder value approach thus already adjusts the denominators of the fractions in the above expression for NPV based on a portfolio perspective. So the idea that corporate managers should take a portfolio perspective on the interests of shareholders is actually an old one and entirely conventional. It forms a core component of standard shareholder value theory.

The PVM approach, however, pushes this portfolio perspective further. It incorporates into the cash flows of the project not just the cash flows received by the firm but also the increment in cash flows paid on any other securities in the market portfolio. This entails adjusting not only the denominators of the terms in the expression for NPV, but also their numerators. The resulting NPV expression under the PVM approach is:

        (2)

The numerators in the PVM-modified expression for NPV include both the expected cash flows from the project that will accrue to the instant corporation (the ’s) as well as the spillover expected cash flows for other securities resulting from externalities (the ’s), which could be on net either positive or negative in any given period. For most corporate decisions, the bulk of the cash flows at the market portfolio level in fact accrue to the securities issued by the corporation making the decision. The question we grapple with in this Section is the extent to which the consideration of the additional cash flows to other portfolio securities that the PVM approach requires—assuming no agency costs or information problems—will motivate CSR beyond that justified on the basis of maximizing long-term shareholder value under ESV. We reach an even more negative conclusion than the one we reached in evaluating the SSP objective function: the portfolio value objective will not only produce little additional motivation for CSR, but it will also provide new motivations for socially destructive corporate conduct.

First, taking a portfolio perspective on expected cash flows produced by corporate decisions captures only a small portion of the technological externalities of corporate conduct since the bulk of such externalities fall on interests that are not part of the market portfolio. These interests include the health and well-being of consumers as well as the interests of producers that are not owned in the market portfolio.108The aggregate portfolio of the stockholders of a public company would include some assets that are not public securities, and in principle the PVM objective function could include the value of those additional assets. However, we assume that for most investors in public companies, their portfolios are dominated by securities issued by publicly listed firms and other publicly available investments, like U.S. Treasury securities. For instance, even for an extremely diversified institutional investor such as CalPERS, well over half of its $462 billion of assets under management consists of global public equity and publicly offered investment securities such as investment grade debt and U.S. Treasury securities. See CalPERS, Trust Level Review 13, 34 (2023), https://www.calpers.ca.gov/docs/board-agendas/
202309/invest/item05b-01_a.pdf [https://perma.cc/98NR-PMPF]. As a result, the PVM objective function would largely fail to capture external effects on other kinds of assets.

To be concrete, consider the facts alleged in Aguinda v. Texaco, a class action filed on behalf of residents of certain regions of Ecuador and Peru to recover for property damage, personal injuries, and increased risk of disease allegedly caused by Texaco’s improper waste disposal practices in its oil extraction operations in Ecuador.109Aguinda v. Texaco, Inc., 142 F. Supp. 2d 534, 537 (S.D.N.Y. 2001). The plaintiffs alleged that Texaco engaged in a range of wrongful conduct, including dumping large quantities of toxic by-products of the drilling process into local rivers and landfills.110Jota v. Texaco, Inc., 157 F.3d 153, 155 (2d Cir. 1998) (consolidated on appeal with Aguinda v. Texaco, 945 F. Supp. 625 (S.D.N.Y. 1996)). Texaco allegedly did this to save money, netting additional profits of $500 thousand to $1 million per well.111Class Action Complaint at 19, Ashanga Jota et al. v. Texaco, Inc, No. 94 Civ. 9266 (S.D.N.Y. Dec. 28, 1994). The pollution released by Texaco poisoned the local ecosystem, causing environmental harm, economic losses to local fishermen and agriculture, and serious injuries and disease among local residents.112Id. at 5–13.

These allegations represent a paradigmatic case of socially harmful corporate behavior that CSR advocates hope to address. The harms suffered by local residents constituted negative technological externalities that were not effectively controlled through regulation or private law remedies.113The class actions brought seeking damages and equitable relief in U.S. courts were ultimately dismissed on the basis of forum non conveniens. Aguinda v. Texaco, Inc., 303 F.3d 470, 473–74, 480 (2d Cir. 2002). But they also illustrate a key limitation of the PVM approach: hardly any of these externalities would have manifested as reductions in expected cash flows to securities in the market portfolio. To be sure, the kinds of costs at issue in this example—costs to human health, ecosystems, and small-scale producers—might ultimately have second-order effects on companies in the market portfolio as, for example, the resulting shifts in supply and demand in various markets affect prices of companies’ inputs and outputs. But those effects on companies are de minimis and, for that matter, could be on net positive if, for example, the resulting fall in production by small-scale producers resulted in a reduction in supply of products sold by larger companies. To a first approximation, the ’s for this project would be zero, despite the sizable social externalities at issue.114A similar evidentiary challenge appears with regard to the McRitchie v. Zuckerberg class action. See Complaint, supra note 88, at 74. The technological externality at the heart of the case relates to the alleged costs of Meta’s pursuit of advertising revenue on public health and the rule of law and, by extension, economic growth. Even assuming Meta’s operations created these externalities, it is far from clear whether its actions would have adversely affected a diversified investor’s portfolio value, absent an express netting of the costs and benefits of Meta’s efforts to maximize the value of the company.

This is also true for larger-scale externalities. Consider climate change, which has been aptly described as “the mother of all externalities.”115Richard S. J. Tol, The Economic Effects of Climate Change, 23 J. Econ. Persps. 29, 29 (2009). Essentially every business project produces some amount of greenhouse gas emissions, the accumulation of which in the atmosphere leads to warming of the planet over time. Climate change is expected to cause a manifold set of impacts on human well-being. The most recent report by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (“IPCC”) provides a useful taxonomy of the ways climate change is expected to affect human systems:

  1. Impacts on water scarcity and food production.
  2. Water scarcity.
  3. Agriculture / crop production.
  4. Animal and livestock health and productivity.
  5. Fisheries yields and aquaculture production.
  6. Impacts on health and wellbeing.
    1. Infectious diseases.
    2. Heat, malnutrition and other.
    3. Mental health.
    4.  
  7. Impacts on cities, settlements and infrastructure.
    1. Inland flooding and associated damages.
    2. Flood / storm induced damages in coastal areas.
    3. Damages to infrastructure.
    4. Damages to key economic sectors.116IPCC, 2022, Climate Change 2022: Impacts, Adaptation and Vulnerability: Contribution of Working Group II to the Sixth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change 10 (H.-O. Pörtner, D.C. Roberts, M. Tignor, E.S. Poloczanska, K. Mintenbeck, A. Alegría, M. Craig, S. Langsdorf, S. Löschke, V. Möller, A. Okem & B. Rama, eds., 2022), https://report.ipcc.ch/ar6/wg2/IPCC_AR6_WGII_FullReport.pdf [https://perma.cc/
      8T33-BXXS].

While some of these categories, especially those under “[i]mpacts on cities, settlements and infrastructure,” would include substantial effects on companies in the market portfolio, this taxonomy reveals that the scope of the harms from climate change is far broader than those effects.

Indeed, the United Nations Environment Programme’s Finance Initiative (“UNEP FI”) developed a methodology for assessing the impact of climate change on the portfolios of institutional investors that illustrates the relatively small portion of the costs of climate change that affect the value of the market portfolio in May 2019.117United Nations Env’t Programme Fin. Initiative, Changing Course: A Comprehensive Investor Guide to Scenario-Based Methods for Climate Risk Assessment, in Response to the TCFD (2019), https://www.unepfi.org/wordpress/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/TCFD-Changing-Course-Oct-19.pdf [https://perma.cc/R5BD-7HFT]. The physical risks from climate change included in the analysis are limited to asset damage and business interruption from extreme weather events, a fairly small component of the myriad social costs of climate change identified by the IPCC.118Id. at 16. Physical risks are what economists would consider the social costs of climate change, including all effects on human society described in the IPCC 2022 report summarized above. Transition risks, on the other hand, refer to business issues raised by the shift from a high-carbon economy to a low-carbon economy induced by technological change and government policy. For example, the risk that an oil company’s proven reserves would fall in value due to the imposition of a carbon tax or fall in demand for oil would constitute a transition risk but should not be considered a social cost of climate change in an economic sense. The PVM approach aspires to induce companies to internalize the physical risks posed by greenhouse gas emissions. Tallarita, supra note 87, at 517. This reflects how limited a perspective the PVM objective function brings to the social costs of even large-scale externalities like climate change.

A similar issue concerns the geographic distribution of the social costs of climate change. Existing estimates show that the costs of climate change will be disproportionately borne by lower income regions. For instance, Africa and India are estimated to have aggregate climate damages as a percentage of GDP that are nearly 800% and 1,000%, respectively, greater than those estimated for the United States.119William D. Nordhaus & Joseph Boyer, Warming the World: Economic Models of Global Warming 91 (2000). Yet to the extent investors access the market portfolio by means of investing in public securities and private company debt, the market portfolio of these securities is tilted toward economic activity in North America and Europe. The standard measure of the extent to which a country’s economic activity occurs through public companies and private debt is the country’s market-cap-to-GDP ratio. In general, the GDP ratio is much higher for developed economies like those in North America and Europe that are relatively less exposed to the costs of climate change than the GDP ratio for the developing economies that face the largest risks.120See Martin Čihák, Asli Demirgüč-Kunt, Erik Feyen & Ross Levine, Financial Development in 205 Economies, 1960 to 2010, J. Fin. Persps., July 2013, at 1, 7. The authors include the value of both public equity and debt and private debt in the numerator of this ratio. Id.

This geographic mismatch problem also raises difficulties for one of the standard methodologies for estimating the degree to which reductions in carbon emissions would increase diversified investors’ portfolio values. For instance, in an influential paper in Nature Climate Change, Simon Dietz, Alex Bowen, Charlie Dixon, and Philip Gradwell estimate that, relative to a world without climate risk, investors can expect to lose $2.5 trillion due to the impact of climate risk on global financial assets.121Simon Dietz, Alex Bowen, Charlie Dixon & Philip Gradwell, ‘Climate Value at Risk’ of Global Financial Assets, 6 Nature Climate Change 676, 678 (2016). Madison Condon likewise estimates that if BlackRock could induce Chevron and Exxon to cut industrial emissions such that 1% of industrial emissions were removed each year through 2100, the global reduction in climate damages would have a net present value of $385 billion.122Condon, supra note 85, at 46 n.237. Given the size of BlackRock’s portfolio, she estimates that BlackRock would therefore avoid damages to its portfolio with a net present value of $9.7 billion, which would be sufficient to offset BlackRock’s losses in the equity values of Chevron and Exxon.123Id. But to arrive at these estimates, these scholars all utilize William Nordhaus’s Dynamic Integrated Climate-Economy (“DICE”) model to estimate the impact of climate change on global GDP growth.124See Dietz et al., supra note 121, at 677; Condon, supra note 85, at 46. They then assume that climate change will have a proportional effect on global financial assets given past research showing that aggregate financial returns generally track GDP growth.125See Dietz et al., supra note 121, at 676; Condon, supra note 85, at 46 n.237. A further problem with Condon’s analysis is that she uses the wrong denominator for the fraction of climate change impacts internalized by BlackRock’s portfolio under management. Formally, Condon first estimates the present value of the reduction in climate damages on global GDP and then assumes that the value of the damage reduction to BlackRock is based on BlackRock’s share of the global economy based on the ratio of BlackRock’s assets under management ($7.43 trillion) to global GDP (roughly $80 trillion). Condon, supra note 85, at 2 n.3, 46 n.237. Because global GDP is a measure of income, the relevant denominator for this purpose should be global financial assets or roughly $143.3 trillion according to Dietz et al. Dietz et al., supra note 121, at 678. Using the correct denominator, the estimated reductions in damages to Blackrock’s portfolio would decline from $9.7 billion to about $5.5 billion, which is less than the $6.5 billion that Condon estimates BlackRock would lose due to declines in the equity values of Chevron and Exxon. Condon, supra note 85, at 46. However, the DICE model integrates the heterogeneous effects of climate change on different countries to produce a single estimate of the effect of climate change on global GDP growth, ignoring the fact that the costs of climate change will not be shared equally across all countries. This methodology therefore overestimates the effect of climate change on the growth rate for the market portfolio, which is tilted toward economic activity in North America and Europe.

As noted by Roberto Tallarita, a related issue with the objective function of PVM is that it discounts future costs and benefits using the opportunity cost of capital.126Tallarita, supra note 87, at 548–54. But for costs and benefits that play out over long time scales that span generations, like those of climate change, economists typically apply a discount rate that is much lower than the opportunity cost of capital to account for intergenerational distributional considerations.127Moritz A. Drupp, Mark C. Freeman, Ben Groom & Frikk Nesje, Discounting Disentangled, 10 Am. Econ. J.: Econ. Pol’y 109, 112–13 (2018). This results in the PVM approach massively undercounting the costs of climate change, most of which will not accrue for many decades.128Tallarita, supra note 87, at 548–54.

To give a rough numerical sense for the magnitude of this issue, note first that the present value of the future costs of climate change, when using social discount rates in the range typically used for climate policy, stems largely from impacts that will occur beyond the year 2200.129Nicholas Stern, The Economics of Climate Change, 98 Am. Econ. Rev. 1, 20 (2008). For example, in Stern’s influential The Economics of Climate Change, 90% of the present value of the social costs of carbon emissions stem from impacts that occur after 2200. Id. To simplify, suppose that all of those impacts occurred in 2200, which is 177 years from the year 2023. Suppose that the right social discount rate to use to convert those costs to present value is 2%, a number often used by experts.130Drupp et al., supra note 127, at 128 (reporting that the median social discount rate recommended by experts is 2%). In a 2022 analysis of the social costs of carbon, the EPA similarly used 2% as its central discount rate target. See Env’t Prot. Agency, Supplemental Material for the Regulatory Impact Analysis for the Supplemental Proposed Rulemaking, “Standards of Performance for New, Reconstructed, and Modified Sources and Emissions Guidelines for Existing Sources: Oil and Natural Gas Sector Climate Review” 2 (2022), https://www.epa.
gov/system/files/documents/2022-11/epa_scghg_report_draft_0.pdf [https://perma.cc/P7C9-SW55].
At that social discount rate, each dollar of future climate change costs should be discounted by the factor 1/1.02177, which comes out to 0.03. A $1 trillion future climate change cost in 2200 would then be considered worth $30 billion in present value terms. But applying the 12% real discount rate typically used by corporate managers, the PVM approach would use a discount factor of just 1/1.12177 or 0.000000002. Under the PVM approach, that $1 trillion future social cost of climate change comes out to just $1,943 in present value terms. Or in different terms, the PVM approach would capture only the fraction (1/1.12177)/(1/1.02177) or 0.00000007 of the present value of the costs of climate change in 2200 (and even less of those beyond). Even if managers used a much lower discount rate of 7% under PVM, this fraction still comes out to just 0.0002. Discounting alone thus results in the PVM objective function internalizing only a trivial fraction of the social costs of climate change.

The UNEP FI report also illustrates another conceptual problem with the PVM approach: the methodology incorporates the positive business opportunities created by climate change for companies in the market portfolio.131United Nations Env’t Programme Fin. Initiative, supra note 117, at 44–45. The transition to a low-carbon economy and adaptation to a warming planet will require investment in technologies and infrastructure in a range of sectors. To give one example, consider a concrete seawall installed in New York Harbor to address storm surges caused by climate change. The Army Corps of Engineers has proposed the construction of such a barrier at a cost of some $119 billion.132Anne Barnard, The $119 Billion Sea Wall that Could Defend New York . . . or Not, N.Y. Times (Aug. 21, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2020/01/17/nyregion/the-119-billion-sea-wall-that-could-defend-new-york-or-not.html [https://perma.cc/PTK7-SE4A]. If such a seawall were built in order to deal with climate change, it would count as among the negative externalities of climate change—it is a real resource use caused by the warming of the planet. But from a PVM perspective, the construction of a seawall represents an enormous business opportunity. In other words, while the aspiration of the PVM approach is to incorporate such costs as negative adjustments to expected cash flows for business projects that contribute to climate change (that is, negative ’s in the PVM-adjusted NPV expression above), in fact faithful application of the PVM approach would incorporate them at least in part as positive adjustments since the construction of the seawall will produce profits for companies in the market portfolio (that is, as positive ’s).

A final problem with the PVM objective function’s treatment of technological externalities is with respect to its interaction with public policies designed to address such externalities. Consider, for example, a pollution externality caused as a by-product of a certain production process, and suppose the externality is addressed at the public policy level with a Pigouvian tax set at the marginal social cost of the externality. As a result, the private profit-maximization problem facing firms that emit that form of pollution mirrors the social problem of choosing efficient behavior. But consider what would happen if managers of the polluting firms were instead to set firm policy following the PVM approach. Those managers would consider not only the Pigouvian tax but also the portion of the externality that reduced the value of other firms in the portfolio so that a portion of the externality would be double counted. As a result, they would, at the margin, be over-deterred from producing pollution. In short, the PVM approach, unlike ESV, does not integrate well with public policy approaches to addressing externalities.133This problem could be mitigated, in principle, by calibrating the level of the Pigouvian tax to be equal to the portion of the externality that falls on interests other than securities in the market portfolio. However, it is not clear how policymakers could determine that amount.

In contrast to these failures with respect to technological externalities, the PVM approach is far better suited to capture pecuniary externalities. One reason is that pecuniary externalities largely involve a company’s competitors, a significant fraction of which are public companies. Consider the airline industry, which is dominated by public companies.134See Niraj Chokshi, Frontier Airlines I.P.O. Signals a Travel Industry Recovery, N.Y. Times (June 15, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/04/01/business/frontier-airlines-ipo.html [https://perma
.cc/W2N3-BCYT] (noting that as of 2021, the ten largest airlines in the U.S. are publicly listed).
When Delta Airlines cuts its fares on the D.C.-Boston route and gains market share, it reduces the value of its competitors on that route, which are largely public companies. As we noted above, however, this feature of PVM is really a bug. If companies fully maximized diversified investors’ portfolio value, the resulting reduction in competition would harm consumers and workers even as it benefited investors. The PVM objective function thus poses significant harms to firm patrons relative to the ESV baseline.

To summarize, the objective function under PVM is socially perverse. It fails to capture effectively much of the technological externalities produced by corporate activities while at the same time having the potential to produce a form of market power that would be socially destructive to firm patrons. By our lights the PVM objective function is unattractive as a normative matter.

B.  Feasibility for Corporate Managers

We now consider whether managers would have the information and incentives they would need to pursue the stated corporate objective under each approach. We begin by reiterating the insight that both SSP and PVM effectively build on ESV since long-term shareholder value is a primary component of both shareholder welfare and portfolio value. As such, we first evaluate the information and incentive problems that might confound implementing long-term shareholder value as the corporate objective under ESV. Having established these problems as a baseline, we then turn to analyzing SSP and PVM. In this section we take as fixed the centralization of management of the corporate form in the board of directors and hired professional managers. We analyze the extent to which changing the legal and business norm on the objective of a business corporation from the long-term shareholder value objective of ESV to either the SSP or PVM objectives would improve corporate behavior given the resulting incentives and information of corporate managers. We then consider in Section IV.C whether a structural change to corporate control that would give shareholders a greater say in operational decision-making, as some advocates of shareholder welfarism have urged, would be likely to improve corporate behavior.

1.  Enlightened Shareholder Value

i.  Information

The informational burden of ESV is considerable. Part of the challenge stems from the inevitable uncertainty with respect to contingencies far out in the future. As we have emphasized, ESV arguments for CSR often have a temporal structure in which the company incurs costs in the near term in order to achieve benefits to stockholders that play out over a long period into the future. Consider, for example, investing in renewable energy, shutting down a dirty factory, or auditing the supply chain for safe labor practices. To what extent would sacrificing corporate profits in those ways today enhance shareholder value over the long-term?

While these questions are no doubt complicated, we view the information gathering and analytic challenges posed by ESV as squarely in the wheelhouse of corporate management. First, the intertemporal structure typical of ESV is not unique but rather is standard fare in business management. Corporate managers face similar intertemporal challenges in many other aspects of business strategy unrelated to CSR. Should the firm expand production? Should it invest more in research and development? Does it have the optimal capital structure? Business schools train managers in analytic techniques—most prominently discounted cash flow analysis—to grapple with such ubiquitous trade-offs and uncertainties entailed by managing a business.

Today, the specific strategic issues raised by CSR under the ESV approach are part of the bread-and-butter of business school curriculums. New York University’s Stern School of Business, for example, currently offers no fewer than 33 courses under the “Sustainable Business and Innovation” specialization, including course titles such as “Corporate Branding & Corporate Social Responsibility,” “Sustainability for Competitive Advantage,” and “Sustainable Capitalism: A Longer Term Finance Perspective.”135Course Index, NYU Stern Sch. of Bus., https://www.stern.nyu.edu/programs-admissions/
full-time-mba/academics/course-index [https://perma.cc/725J-N7FH]. By comparison, a mere thirteen courses are offered at NYU under the “Real Estate” specialization. Id. Not to be outdone, UC Berkeley’s Haas School of Business maintains the Institute for Business and Social Impact which oversees three separate centers focused on corporate sustainability and curates the Michaels Graduate Certificate in Sustainable Business. Institute for Business & Social Impact, Berkeley Hass, https://haas.
berkeley.edu/responsible-business/curriculum [https://perma.cc/3ZSV-DM5B]. MBA students at Haas can choose from twenty-nine courses focused on corporate sustainability such as “Climate Change and Business Strategy,” “Business and Sustainable Supply Chains,” and “Strategic and Sustainable Business Solutions.” Id.
From the course catalogs alone, it is clear that ESV is a major part of the analytic tool kit and worldview imparted to MBA students. Indeed, business school professors are among the most vociferous proponents of ESV.136See, e.g., Edmans, supra note 43, at 55–56.

Stock prices provide an additional source of information for a manager trying to understand the long-term value generated by current corporate policies. Stock markets incentivize the production and aggregation of information about corporate value by stock traders. Even if a manager is concerned that stock prices do not fully reflect long-term value, stock prices surely provide some relevant information to management regarding how to maximize long-term value. For example, the fact that Tesla and General Motors trade today with price-to-earnings ratios of 70 and 4, respectively, must say something about the future of internal combustion engines.137Tesla Inc., Google Fin., https://www.google.com/finance/quote/TSLA:NASDAQ [https://
perma.cc/QLF5-T9J2]; General Motors Co., Google Fin., https://www.google.com/finance/quote/
GM:NYS [https://perma.cc/U7UP-KS5Z].

In summary, while maximizing long-term shareholder value under ESV puts a substantial informational burden on corporate management, there are good reasons to believe that managers are able to assemble and process a great deal of information about how best to further stakeholder interests so as to maximize long-term shareholder value.

ii.  Incentives

Although ESV strikes us as substantially feasible from an information perspective, the story is more complicated with respect to managers’ incentives. As discussed in Part I, one reason for optimism stems from the structure of corporate law, which is generally designed with the goal of incentivizing management to maximize long-term shareholder value. Furthermore, Delaware courts have required corporate boards to put in place information and reporting systems designed to safeguard against risks to the company’s stakeholders that might ultimately harm shareholder interests through, for example, sullying the company’s reputation.138See, e.g., Marchand v. Barnhill, 212 A.3d 805, 809 (Del. 2019)(declining to dismiss a complaint charging a company’s board with breaching its fiduciary duties by failing to implement a monitoring system for food safety and observing that the company could only thrive if its customers “were confident that its products were safe to eat”).

Executive compensation for senior officers also produces substantial incentives for managers to maximize shareholder value. Much of these incentives stem from the significant equity component of managers’ pay packages, which directly links the wealth of managers to the wealth of shareholders. For example, for the median CEO of an S&P 500 firm as of 2011, a 1% increase in the value of the company’s shares would produce an increase in the wealth of the CEO of about $500,000 due to their holdings of company stock and stock options.139Kevin J. Murphy, Executive Compensation: Where We Are, and How We Got There, in 2A Handbook of the Economics of Finance 211, 236–37 (George M. Constantinides, Milton Harris & Rene M. Stulz eds., 2013).

Yet, while corporate governance is very much oriented toward the long-term shareholder value corporate objective of ESV, by no means does our corporate system produce perfect incentives for corporate management to maximize long-term shareholder value. Perhaps most obviously, standard agency cost theory teaches that whenever managers do not own 100% of the firm’s residual claims their incentives are not perfectly aligned with those of shareholders.140Jensen & Meckling, supra note 18, at 312–13. Concern about this problem, of course, is as old as the business corporation itself. See Adam Smith, The Wealth of Nations 124 (P.F. Collier & Son 1902) (1776) (“The directors of such companies, however, being the managers rather of other people’s money than of their own, it cannot well be expected, that they should watch over it with the same anxious vigilance with which the partners in a private copartnery frequently watch over their own . . . . Negligence and profusion, therefore, must always prevail, more or less, in the management of the affairs of such a company.”). See generally Adolf A. Berle Jr. & Gardiner C. Means, The Modern Corporation and Private Property (1932) (analyzing agency problems generated by the separation of ownership from control in public companies). The literature on such incentive problems is vast, and we will not rehearse it all here. For present purposes we concentrate on the main incentive problems that result in failure to engage in forms of CSR that would benefit shareholders.

Perhaps the primary incentive problem related to ESV is corporate “short-termism,” in which management focuses myopically on short-run profitability at the expense of long-term shareholder value.141See, e.g., The Global Compact, supra note 44, at 5 (“The use of longer time horizons in investment is an important condition to better capture value creation mechanisms linked to ESG factors.”). A key premise of the standard short-termism argument is that the firm’s stock price does not fully reflect what management knows about the value of the firm, for example, because of information asymmetries between managers and investors.142See Jeremy C. Stein, Takeover Threats and Managerial Myopia, 96 J. Pol. Econ. 61, 62 (1988). Consider the following stylized example. Suppose that managers had private information that an expenditure of $80 (for example, additional investment in research and development) would increase expected revenues by $100. However, investors—because they lack managers’ private information—place only 50% probability on revenues increasing by $100 and 50% probability on revenues remaining the same from this investment.143This example draws on the formal model presented in Stein’s article. See generally id. As a result, investors would view the investment as having an NPV of -$30, whereas managers would view the investment as having an NPV of $20. In this fashion, the company’s stockholders might undervalue a change in a company’s operations that would increase long-term shareholder value.

For such market myopia to actually affect corporate decision-making, however, some sort of “transmission mechanism” must exist that induces corporate management to focus on increasing the company’s short-term stock price rather than long-term shareholder value.144Mark J. Roe, Corporate Short-Termism—In the Boardroom and in the Courtroom, 68 Bus. Law. 977, 985 (2013). One potential such mechanism is the corporate takeover market.145Stein, supra note 142, at 63; Martin Lipton, Takeover Bids in the Target’s Boardroom, 35 Bus. Law. 101, 109 (1979). In particular, managers might be concerned that if the market undervalues the long-term value of a particular strategy, a corporate raider might exploit the temporary mispricing in the company’s stock and acquire the company at a price that does not reflect the long-term value of the company, thus deterring managers from undertaking the strategy. In today’s corporate landscape, however, a more common version of this concern involves hedge fund activists who take only a minority stake in a target and then agitate for operational or financial changes that might increase the company’s share price even if the changes undermine long-term shareholder value.146Martijn Cremers, Saura Masconale & Simone M. Sepe, Activist Hedge Funds and the Corporation, 94 Wash. U. L. Rev. 261, 270–71 (2016). As with corporate takeovers, even just the threat of such activist interventions might produce managerial myopia more broadly by incentivizing management to pay excessive attention to short-term results for fear of the company becoming a target.147Robert Kuttner, The Truth About Corporate Raiders, New Republic, Jan. 20, 1986, at 14, 17; cf. Stein, supra note 142, at 63 (“In [takeover] cases, managers who boost their stock prices by inflating earnings may be attempting to act in the interests of stockholders by preventing them from being unfairly ‘ripped off’ by raiders.”). Even more directly, modern executive compensation packages generally make managers themselves short-term stockholders, and there is some evidence that vesting equity induces CEOs to cut back on long-term corporate investments148Alex Edmans, Vivian W. Fang & Katharina A. Lewellen, Equity Vesting and Investment, 30 Rev. Fin. Stud. 2229, 2231 (2017). and to engage in stock repurchases and corporate acquisitions that impair long-term shareholder returns.149Alex Edmans, Vivian W. Fang & Allen H. Huang, The Long-Term Consequences of Short-Term Incentives, 60 J. Acct. Rsch. 1007 (2022). Corroborating the hypothesis that short-termism might inhibit both firm performance and CSR investments is evidence that both firm performance and investments in stakeholder relationships increase as a result of reforms that improve executives’ long-term incentives.150Caroline Flammer & Pratima Bansal, Does a Long-Term Orientation Create Value?: Evidence from a Regression Discontinuity, 38 Strategic Mgmt. J. 1827, 1827 (2017). The extent of managerial short-termism remains controversial,151For a skeptical view, see generally Mark J. Roe, Stock Market Short-Termism’s Impact, 167 U. Pa. L. Rev. 71 (2018). Similarly, for a positive view of hedge fund activism, in terms of long-term shareholder value effects, see Lucian A. Bebchuk, Alon Brav & Wei Jiang, The Long-Term Effects of Hedge Funds Activism, 115 Colum. L. Rev. 1085, 1121–35 (2015). but it provides a coherent conceptual account for why corporate managers might sometimes fail to engage in CSR that would ultimately increase long-term shareholder value.

Other kinds of agency problems can also inhibit CSR under the ESV approach. For instance, managers might engage in empire building or otherwise overinvest in ways that harm long-term shareholder value. For firms that operate in high-negative-externality industries—fossil fuel production, say—such overinvestment can harm other interests in society as well. Alternatively, disloyal managers might claim to sacrifice short-term profitability to further stakeholder interests in the name of long-term value creation when in fact they are engaged in a form of self-dealing.

To summarize, management pursuit of ESV is neither hopeless nor a sure thing. We can expect corporate managers to be able to gather and analyze a substantial amount of the information needed to engage in CSR under the ESV approach and to have considerable incentives to do so, but their information and incentives will not be perfect.

2.  Shareholder Social Preferences

Consider now the extent to which changing the corporate objective from long-term shareholder value under ESV to shareholder welfare under the SSP approach is likely to make corporate conduct more socially responsible. For this reform to achieve its goal of increased corporate social responsibility, corporate managers need both information about their shareholders’ social preferences and incentives to act on that information.

i.  Sorting of Shareholders

A key premise of the SSP approach is that shareholders have social preferences that make them willing, in aggregate, to sacrifice shareholder value in order for the corporation to act more in line with their values. But as an initial matter, will socially minded investors actually be willing to hold the stock of companies whose operations raise the greatest social concerns? So far, we have maintained the simplifying assumption that all shareholders are perfectly diversified. In practice, however, shareholders’ incentives to hold the shares of a particular issuer will in fact depend on their social preferences. This is because shareholders’ social preferences are, at least in important part, associative. By associative we mean that shareholders prefer not to own shares in (or otherwise be associated with) companies whose business practices they find morally objectionable. One source of evidence for this stems from the portfolios of ESG mutual funds that are marketed to appeal to such investors, which are tilted towards companies with high ESG scores.152Quinn Curtis, Jill Fisch & Adriana Z. Robertson, Do ESG Mutual Funds Deliver on Their Promises?, 120 Mich. L. Rev. 393, 424 (2021). In turn, mutual funds marketed as socially responsible are disproportionately held by more prosocial investors.153Arno Riedl & Paul Smeets, Why Do Investors Hold Socially Responsible Mutual Funds?, 72 J. Fin. 2505, 2507 (2017). Individuals’ direct holdings of stock exhibit a similar phenomenon. In particular, individuals who vote in favor of shareholder proposals pressuring the company to act more responsibly are more likely to hold renewable energy firms and less likely to hold fossil-fuel producers. Jonathon Zytnick, Do Mutual Funds Represent Individual Investors? 39 (NYU L. & Econ., Research Paper No. 21-04, 2022), https://papers.ssrn.com/abstract=3803690 [https://perma.cc/X2MQ-ZHMD] (“[I]ndividuals who vote in favor of SRI proposals are more likely to own renewable energy firms and less likely to own fossil fuel producers.”). The result of such shareholder sorting is to further reduce the importance of shareholder social preferences in the shareholder welfare objective function for the very corporations for which there is the most at stake in terms of CSR. The shareholders that hold companies that raise the greatest social concerns will be systematically the investors least concerned about those social issues.154See Ľuboš Pástor, Robert F. Stambaugh & Lucian A. Taylor, Sustainable Investing in Equilibrium, 142 J. Fin. Econ. 550, 553–57 (2021) (developing a model of investing in an economy in which investors differ in their degree of concern about corporate social behavior and showing that, in equilibrium, dirty firms are disproportionately held by investors least concerned about corporate social behavior).

Hart and Zingales, in proposing the SSP approach, in contrast adopt a very different assumption about the form of investors’ social preferences and how they manifest in behavior. They assume that shareholders care about corporate behavior only at the point they are asked to make some decision about it—like voting on a shareholder proposal—and not before or after such a shareholder decision is made.155Hart & Zingales, supra note 71, at 253. They adopt the same approach in their later work on shareholder social preferences. See Broccardo et al., supra note 78, at 3103. Under their view, environmentalists would have no qualms about owning shares in a coal-mining company. Their social preferences would manifest only if they were asked to decide on some specific operational matter that would implicate their environmentalist views. If shareholders were asked to vote on whether the company should adopt a more environmentally responsible mining technique, say, that would lower shareholder returns to some extent, environmentalist shareholders might vote yes, depending on the weight they put on their environmentalist views and the extent of the lower shareholder return entailed. But under Hart and Zingales’s view they would not hesitate to invest in the first place, even if there were no prospect for them to influence the firm’s environmental practices. Hart and Zingales thus propose an invest and engage model of socially responsible investing. But if shareholders’ social preferences are strongly associative, as existing evidence suggests, then this model would work only for companies with operations that are already relatively socially responsible, substantially undercutting the potential of SSP to improve corporate conduct.156To be sure, it could be that the current practice of associative avoidance rather than invest and engage is a function of current corporate governance institutions oriented around shareholder value. Although we are skeptical, it is possible that moving to the SSP regime could cause shareholders to change their sorting behavior and adopt an invest and engage model of socially responsible investment. But such a shift would require that the SSP approach make a substantial difference in corporate behavior, and in what follows we provide further reasons to believe that it would not. See infra notes 159–175 and accompanying text.

ii.  Information

In order for the shift to shareholder welfare as the corporate objective to affect corporate behavior in the intended way, managers must have information about their shareholders’ aggregate social preferences. Relevant preference information would include shareholders’ willingness to pay, in terms of reduced shareholder returns, to further various social concerns as well as how shareholders view trade-offs among competing social concerns. A natural way to gather such information would be for corporate management to poll their shareholders.157See Hart & Zingales, supra note 71; Alex Edmans & Tom Gosling, How To Give Shareholders a Say in Corporate Social Responsibility, Wall St. J. (Dec. 6, 2020, 11:00 AM ET), https://www.wsj.com/articles/how-to-give-shareholders-a-say-in-corporate-social-responsibility-116072

70401 [https://perma.cc/5U8E-4BKW] (arguing in favor of periodic shareholder votes on “corporate purpose” as a way for management to elicit information about shareholders’ social preferences); Jill E. Fisch, Purpose Proposals, 1 U. Chi. Bus. L. Rev. 113, 128–55 (2022) (analyzing purpose proposals).

One version of this would be for management to poll shareholders for their views on concrete corporate operational matters that implicate various social concerns. As a preliminary matter, however, note that diversified shareholders generally lack the information and expertise needed to understand the trade-offs available between firm value and social concerns—this is the core economic logic of centralized management. Put simply individual shareholders are unlikely to know what corporate decisions would maximize their utility.

Consider, for example, the shareholders of a social-media company. Many of these shareholders might share a belief that the corporation should protect the privacy and data of its users, but they likely have little knowledge of the different corporate practices that could advance those interests and the trade-offs they would entail. In principle, shareholders could, with the help of management, inform themselves of the relevant options and their associated costs, but doing so would entail costs that would likely deter diversified shareholders from doing so.158Skepticism regarding whether shareholders are well-positioned to evaluate specific corporate policies also appears in the SEC’s policy of excluding 14a-8 proposals that seek “to ‘micro-manage’ the company by probing too deeply into matters of a complex nature upon which shareholders, as a group, would not be in a position to make an informed judgment.” Amendments to Rules on Shareholder Proposals, Exchange Act Release No. 34-40018, 63 Fed. Reg. 102, at 29109 (May 28, 1998).

Consider then instead the possibility that management might learn information just about the content and strength of shareholders’ social preferences rather than shareholders’ views about specific operational decisions. Even at this raw preference level, however, we are skeptical that shareholders have clear preferences in any meaningful sense about the relevant trade-offs, much less that management could realistically learn much about them. For example, consider again a social-media company. Another major social concern about social media is its role in the spread of disinformation. Suppose you, dear reader, were a shareholder of a social-media company that had been plagued by such problems in the past. How much return would you be willing to sacrifice in order to reduce this problem? If you are like us, you are having trouble even coming up with a coherent metric for expressing such a preference. Are you willing to sacrifice fifty basis points in return for a reduction of one . . . disinformation unit?

Put another way, shareholder voting provides information about the stated preferences of shareholders but not necessarily their revealed preferences. As a result, a risk exists that asking what any given shareholder prefers in terms of social issues and investment returns might result in the shareholder expressing a preference that is inconsistent with the policy the shareholder would adopt if forced to pay directly for the policy adoption.159Economists are traditionally skeptical of using stated preference methods for eliciting individuals’ valuations of public goods and the like as a guide for welfare analysis. After surveying the empirical literature documenting biases and inconsistencies in responses to surveys eliciting individuals’ valuations of various environmental amenities, Peter Diamond and Jerry Hausman conclude that the problems with such stated preference methods:

[C]ome from an absence of preferences, not a flaw in survey methodology. That is, we do not think that people generally hold views about individual environmental sites (many of which they have never heard of); or that, within the confines of the time available for survey instruments, people will focus successfully on the identification of preferences, to the exclusion of other bases for answering survey questions. This absence of preferences shows up as inconsistency in responses across surveys and implies that the survey responses are not satisfactory bases for policy.

Peter A. Diamond & Jerry A. Hausman, Contingent Valuation: Is Some Number Better than No Number?, 8 J. Econ. Persps. 45, 63 (1994).
As well, we might question whether preference elicitation is in the wheelhouse of corporate managers.

These informational challenges facing SSP are not much diminished when we consider intermediation by institutional investors. Hart and Zingales propose that such intermediaries might provide a means of lowering the cognitive load on diversified investors of expressing their social preferences over corporate conduct.160Hart & Zingales, supra note 71. Prosocial investors could simply invest in a prosocial mutual fund that will vote its portfolio company shares in order to advance the investors’ social preferences. But this essentially just moves the information problem down one level: How can the fund’s manager learn about the social preferences of its investors in order to relay that information to corporate managers?161In response to this challenge, one could, of course, require institutional investors to solicit the views of their investors and vote accordingly. See Jill E. Fisch & Jeff Schwartz, Corporate Democracy and the Intermediary Voting Dilemma, 102 Tex. L. Rev. 1, 48 (2023) (proposing “a system by which fund managers ascertain the preferences of their beneficiaries and incorporate those preferences into their voting and engagement practices”). Despite its appeal, such an approach would hardly be a mechanism for implementing SSP for several reasons. First, this form of polling would have to overcome the problem of investor passivity in corporate voting. See Alon Brav, Matthew Cain & Jonathon Zytnick, Retail Shareholder Participation in the Proxy Process: Monitoring, Engagement and Voting, 144 J. Fin. Econ. 492, 500 (2022) (finding only 11% of retail accounts cast votes at annual shareholder meetings). More importantly, soliciting investors’ general preferences on social issues would similarly suffer from its inability to capture investors’ revealed preferences on the concrete trade-offs implicated by specific voting proposals. Indeed, even advocates of this approach acknowledge the continuing need for institutional investors to engage in informed intermediation given that whatever preferences are expressed through such polling are likely to be “incomplete, inconsistent, or uninformed.” Fisch & Schwartz, supra, at 9. As such, there could be no assurance that the votes cast by institutional investors would, in fact, reflect the true preferences of a company’s beneficial owners.

One possibility, suggested by Hart and Zingales, is that investors can “vote with their feet” by sorting into funds that have a track record of voting that investors find attractive.162Hart & Zingales, supra note 71, at 265. Indeed, Michal Barzuza, Quinn Curtis, and David Webber argue that index-fund providers have become increasingly vocal about their voting records on ESG issues in order to compete for millennial investors, who they argue place a significant premium on social issues.163See Michal Barzuza, Quinn Curtis & David H. Webber, Shareholder Value(s): Index Fund ESG Activism and the New Millennial Corporate Governance, 93 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1243, 1265–68 (2020).

But empirical evidence provides little support for the idea that investors sort into mutual funds based on their voting policies. For instance, using a dataset that contains the voting records of both individual investors and the mutual funds in which they invest, Jonathon Zytnick examines whether mutual funds vote on CSR-related matters in the same way that their investors vote on CSR-related matters when these investors cast ballots as shareholders.164Zytnick, supra note 153, at 27–36. Overall, he finds little overlap between investor preferences and fund voting, especially within index funds.165Id. at 29. One exception is with respect to ESG funds, which typically vote in favor of CSR-related initiatives, which is consistent with how their investors cast ballots as individual shareholders. But note that ESG funds typically focus on screening out firms with poor ESG track records, reflecting our view that investors’ social preferences are to a large extent associational. Id. at 29–31. Zytnick attributes the overall lack of sorting to rational inattention: as in political voting, investors rationally choose not to investigate how an intermediary votes due to the small likelihood that their investment will cause the intermediary’s votes to be pivotal.166Id. at 19.

Hart and Zingales argue that the lack of investor sorting is due to current corporate governance rules that limit the scope of shareholder voting on CSR.167Hart & Zingales, supra note 71, at 264. State corporate law, for example, gives the board but not shareholders the legal authority to manage the business and affairs of the corporation. This norm prevents shareholders from restricting the board’s substantive decision-making authority by enacting bylaws that direct particular substantive outcomes in terms of CSR. See CA, Inc. v. AFSCME Emps. Pension Plan, 953 A.2d 227, 234–35 (Del. 2008). In turn, Rule 14a-8 of the federal proxy rules, which gives shareholders the right to put certain shareholder proposals on management’s proxy for the annual shareholder meeting, allows management to exclude proposals that are “not a proper subject for action by shareholders under the laws of the jurisdiction of the company’s organization.” 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8(h)(3)(i) (2022). However, even in the absence of such limitations, we question whether sorting among funds based on how they vote on social issues would provide meaningful information to managers about their shareholders’ social preferences. First, as we argued above, we doubt that investors have sufficiently well-formed preferences about corporate conduct such that it is even possible for sorting to convey information to corporate managers about those preferences. Second, it would remain prohibitively costly for shareholders to evaluate the stated policies of asset managers. It is not as simple as environmentally minded shareholders buying a “green” mutual fund. As we have emphasized, shareholders’ social preferences are heterogeneous, both in terms of their strength relative to wealth in their utility function and in terms of their content. Individual investors will often differ in how they evaluate the trade-offs entailed when a company implements specific CSR-related policies.

Consider, for example, a fund dedicated to carbon reduction. Across the range of policy interventions a company might take to reduce its carbon footprint, how will investors know which ones a Reduce Carbon Fund will pursue, or how it will evaluate the inevitable trade-offs implicated by each course of action? While some investors may adopt a hell-or-high-water (“hah”) approach to carbon reduction, others may condition their support on evidence that the intervention will enhance long-term shareholder value. These problems are further compounded in cases in which a corporate decision involves a trade-off between competing social values and not just between a single social issue and investment returns. Many shareholders, for example, might have concerns about the implications of a given carbon reduction policy proposal on other stakeholders, such as workers or communities who may be adversely impacted by it.168Indeed, BlackRock, which is the largest asset manager in the United States, announced a new program in January 2022 called “Voting Choice” whereby it will allow its clients to choose how to vote the portfolio securities of certain BlackRock funds managed on their behalf. Shareholder Rights Directive II — Engagement Policy, BlackRock (2022), https://www.blackrock.com/corporate/
literature/publication/blk-shareholder-rights-directiveii-engagement-policy-2022.pdf [https://perma.cc/
Y3N5-8JN3]. While the initial program includes only institutional clients, the firm has announced that it is “committed to a future where every investor—even individual investors—can have the option to participate in the proxy voting process if they choose.” Fink, supra note 101. On the one hand, these changes might be thought of as facilitating the SSP approach by enabling shareholders who invest through intermediaries to express their views on social issues. But we suspect that this emerging devolution of voting responsibility to beneficial owners reflects both the difficulties asset managers face in determining their investors’ preferences and the intractability of the conflicts among shareholders in their social preferences. These changes enable asset managers to sidestep these issues and push down the costs of becoming informed on the issues being voted on to their underlying investors, who lack incentives to bear them, ultimately undermining the feasibility of the SSP approach.

A final problem with using shareholder voting and similar mechanisms to convey social preference information to corporate management is that shareholders will express their overall preferences about corporate policy, not just the part concerning shareholder value and their social preferences. For diversified shareholders, those overall preferences would include the portfolio effects that PVM—and not SSP—envisions incorporating into the corporate objective. As a result, attempts to implement the SSP approach, to the extent they are successful in tilting corporate decisions toward what shareholders want, will in practice blur into pursuit of the PVM objective including the anticompetitive aspects of it that are socially destructive.

iii.  Incentives

As we argued above, shareholder value is a much more important component of shareholder welfare than shareholder social preferences, given heterogeneity and conflicts among shareholders regarding the relevant welfare trade-offs and sorting based on associative preferences. Our analysis also revealed that management has much better information about long-term shareholder value than it has about shareholders’ social preferences. In such a setting—with one far more important component of the objective function for which information is readily available and one far less important component for which information is not available—the best scheme for incentivizing corporate management to pursue shareholder welfare under the SSP approach focuses management attention squarely on the important and measurable component, long-term shareholder value, and thus is essentially identical to the ESV approach.

Our argument builds on insights from “multitask principal-agent problems” from contract theory.169Bengt Holmstrom & Paul Milgrom, Multitask Principal–Agent Analyses: Incentive Contracts, Asset Ownership, and Job Design, 7 J.L. Econ. & Org. 24, 25 (1991). These models entail a principal who hires an agent to perform several tasks or, similarly, a single task with multiple dimensions to it. A common problem in such an environment arises when performance on one dimension of the job is easily measurable while performance on another dimension is difficult to measure. Teacher performance is a classic example. Standardized tests can measure one dimension of teacher performance, but other aspects—promoting creativity or communication skills—are much harder to measure. In such a setting, the agent decides how to allocate effort across the dimensions of the job, and an increase in incentives on the more easily measurable dimension of their performance will result in the agent reallocating their effort toward that dimension and away from the others.

In a pathbreaking article working through the implications of such a setting for contract design, Bengt Holmstrom and Paul Milgrom argued that the optimal contract might entail very low-powered incentives, like a fixed wage, in order to avoid distorting the agent’s effort too much in the direction of the more easily measurable dimension of the job.170Id. at 35–38. In the application to teachers, the idea is that paying teachers based on a fixed salary would result in better overall teacher performance than paying them based on the performance of their students on standardized tests since the more balanced allocation of teacher effort across the different dimensions of their job that would result—based on teachers’ intrinsic motivations—is more important than the fall in overall effort from giving up on high-powered extrinsic incentives on the measurable aspect of their performance.

In our setting, a low-powered incentive contract in the spirit of Holmstrom and Milgrom’s analysis would entail giving up on providing managers high-powered incentives to maximize shareholder value in order to induce them to put some effort into measuring and furthering shareholders’ social preferences. For example, managers could be paid like bureaucrats, with fixed salaries and no equity-based component to their pay. But this is not the optimal contract here, for two reasons.

First, as we have explained, long-term shareholder value is a more important component of shareholder welfare than is shareholder social preferences—by far—and, in addition, managers have much better information about how to maximize shareholder value than about how to satisfy shareholders’ social preferences. As a result, managerial effort to maximize shareholder value is generally much more productive, in shareholder welfare terms, than is managerial effort to further shareholders’ social preferences. Consider, then, how shareholders would ideally want managers to allocate their finite time and attention across those two tasks. For the sake of argument, suppose that management were to focus exclusively on maximizing shareholder value and ignored shareholders’ social preferences. From this benchmark, would shareholders’ welfare increase if management were to divert some of its attention to figuring out how best to further shareholders’ social preferences? We think not. The resulting fall in shareholder value would matter more to shareholder welfare than whatever small improvement management could achieve in better aligning firm policy with shareholders’ social preferences.

Second, suppose we are wrong about that, and in fact shareholders would ideally want management to devote at least some attention to furthering shareholders’ social preferences. That alone is not sufficient for the optimal incentive contract for management to be one that avoids high-powered incentives to maximize firm value. The optimal design of incentives depends not only on the relative productivity of management’s efforts on the two tasks but also on management’s intrinsic motivation to pursue the tasks as well as on the availability of good incentive instruments to motivate managerial effort on each of the tasks.

In the application of the Holmstrom and Milgrom multitask model to the problem of incentivizing teachers, a fixed wage contract results in teachers’ effort being driven by their intrinsic motivation to help students learn. In the educational context, it seems plausible that teachers have substantial intrinsic motivation—presumably many teachers enter the profession not because the pay is high (it is not) but rather because they like teaching and care about students. As a result of their intrinsic motivations, the fixed wage contract for teachers results in substantial effort across both the measurable and nonmeasurable dimensions of their performance.

But in the corporate context, we think intrinsic motivations play a much smaller role relative to extrinsic motivations. As a result, giving up on extrinsic incentives would result in a substantial fall in managerial effort on maximizing firm value, and for little benefit; it is hard to see why corporate managers would have much intrinsic motivation to figure out shareholders’ social preferences and seek to further them.

In terms of the availability of incentive instruments, the key issue is whether there are good proxies for the agent’s performance to base their compensation on. When an agent is paid on the basis of some performance measure, they will have incentives to increase the performance measure, which might not produce the desired results. The basic analytic point here is captured evocatively in the title of a classic article in the management literature: On the Folly of Rewarding A, While Hoping for B.171Steven Kerr, On the Folly of Rewarding A, While Hoping for B, 18 Acad. Mgmt. J. 769 (1975). In the teacher context, there might not be great proxies even for the relatively measurable aspects of the job. Consider the practice of paying teachers based on their students’ test scores. The hope is that doing so will motivate teachers to teach better. But following the introduction of incentive pay based on test scores for teachers in Atlanta, ten teachers and administrators were caught helping students cheat on the test to inflate their scores.172Annie Murphy Paul, Atlanta Teachers Were Offered Bonuses for High Test Scores. Of Course They Cheated., Wash. Post (Apr. 16, 2015, 12:43 PM EDT), https://www.washingtonpost.com/post
everything/wp/2015/04/16/atlanta-teachers-were-offered-bonuses-for-high-test-scores-of-course-they-cheated [https://perma.cc/E5P5-PBEP].
Put simply: you get what you pay for.

The implication for the optimal design of incentives is that the fall in effort on the measurable dimension of performance from switching from a high-powered incentive scheme to low-powered incentives depends on how well the former dimension of performance can in fact be measured.173See George P. Baker, Incentive Contracts and Performance Measurement, 100 J. Pol. Econ. 598, 599 (1992) (“[T]o the extent that the performance measure does not respond to the agent’s actions in the same way that the principal’s objective responds to these actions, the firm will reduce the sensitivity of the incentive contract to the performance measure.”). In teaching, test scores are a potentially problematic measure even of the aspects of teacher performance they purport to measure, as the cheating scandal illustrates in extreme form. This measurement problem then reduces the benefit, in terms of student learning, of paying teachers based on the proxy. In contrast, in the corporate context, there are excellent performance measures available for shareholder value. The shareholder value component of shareholder welfare is ultimately revealed over time as the firm’s cash flows are realized. Executive compensation plans make use of that fact by employing equity-based pay and explicit bonus schemes tied to accounting measures of earnings to generate incentives to maximize shareholder value. We believe that equity-based pay can provide substantial alignment between management’s incentives and shareholder value. Giving up on those incentives would therefore result in a substantial loss in shareholder value.

Finally, we do not believe it is optimal to add explicit incentives for managers to further shareholders’ social preferences. The shareholder social preferences component of shareholder welfare is much harder to measure than shareholder value and remains largely hidden. Some crude proxy for shareholders’ social preferences, based on surveys of shareholders or the like, would have to be constructed to use as a performance measure in management’s compensation scheme. But the measurement challenges here reduce the productivity, from a shareholder welfare perspective, of trying to provide extrinsic incentives to management to take into consideration shareholders’ social preferences.

In sum, the optimal incentive scheme under the SSP view focuses squarely on shareholder value, so that the SSP approach would do little to improve corporate behavior relative to the ESV baseline. One response might be that there is no downside to changing the corporate objective to shareholder welfare under SSP and possible upside. If we are right, the argument goes, that the optimal incentive scheme would remain unchanged, then boards charged with pursuing shareholder welfare under SSP will ensure that management has incentives to stay focused on shareholder value. But it could be, the argument continues, that for some firms, the information and incentive problems we have identified with seeking to further shareholders’ social preferences are less severe. For those firms, changing the corporate objective to shareholder welfare under SSP could result in more socially responsible corporate behavior. But in our view, such a change to the legal and business norm about corporate purpose would inevitably result in substantial efforts by many corporate boards to induce the company’s senior managers to incorporate shareholders’ social preferences into their decision-making even when doing so in fact lowers shareholder (and social) welfare by distracting management from shareholder value.

3.  Portfolio Value Maximization

Evaluating the feasibility of PVM as an alternative corporate objective requires assessing whether corporate managers might have the information and incentives needed to incorporate the effects of the firm’s decisions on the value of their shareholders’ portfolios into their decision-making process, above and beyond how those decisions affect the long-term value of the corporation. We show here that there are good reasons to think they will not.

i.  Information

A first type of information managers would need under PVM is on the composition of the portfolios held by the company’s shareholders. A company’s shareholders are likely to vary widely in the investment portfolios that they hold. Indeed, the large number of investment products offered as mutual funds reflects the strong demand for a broad range of investment portfolios with varying investment objectives. As of November 2023, Morningstar lists over 1,800 investment funds as providing exposure to “U.S. Equity” and nearly 1,100 investment funds as providing exposure to “International Equity.”174For the list of U.S. Equity funds, see U.S. Equity Funds, Morningstar, https://www.morning

star.com/us-equity-funds [https://perma.cc/24N7-M6WJ]. For the list of International Equity funds, see International Equity Funds, Morningstar, https://www.morningstar.com/international-equity-funds [https://perma.cc/TZ5P-XGCT].
Moreover, the portfolios of these funds reflect a broad range of investment theses, such as funds focused on growth firms, small-capitalization firms, low-volatility firms, dividend-paying firms, or firms operating in particular regions or sectors. Note as well that it is not enough for managers to determine what institutional investors hold the company’s shares. Institutional investors serve as intermediaries for the underlying individuals on whose behalf they ultimately hold the company’s shares. In turn it is those individual investors’ portfolios that form the ultimate aggregate portfolio the company’s managers should be trying to maximize.

To keep things simple, however, suppose corporate management assumed that the company’s shareholders are fully diversified so that the PVM objective is just the value of the market portfolio. This simplifying assumption stacks the deck in favor of the feasibility of PVM, so if PVM is not reasonably feasible under this assumption, then it certainly is not feasible in the real world.

A second type of information a corporate manager would need to pursue PVM is on the expected cash flows that alternative decisions would generate, not only for the company itself but also for other securities in shareholders’ portfolios, which again for now we take to be the market portfolio. These expected cash flows to the company and to other securities in the market portfolio are the ’s and ’s, respectively, in the numerators of the terms in the PVM version of the expression for the NPV of a project in equation (2) above.

In general, corporate managers will have much better information about the cash flows to the company (the ’s) than they will about the portfolio externality cash flows (the ’s). The cash flows to the company are ultimately directly observable and of course directly implicate the business of the company, on which managers are hired to be experts. Externalities, in contrast, involve other businesses that the firm’s managers will have much less information about. The information challenges posed by technological externalities are particularly acute. It is not clear how a firm’s managers would be able to divine the extent to which pollution emitted by the company, say, would reduce the value of other public companies, which include a diverse array of sectors and industries.175To be sure, there might be some specific technological externalities for which these information problems are less substantial. Most notably, there are aspects of the climate change policy problem that make it more amenable to institutional investors and managers having the requisite information. A ton of CO2 emitted in the atmosphere results in the same marginal social costs regardless of where or how it is emitted, since each such ton contributes the same global stock of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere that in turn causes climate change. Accordingly, institutional investors could collaborate with government and other actors to analyze the portfolio effects of climate change, as the UNEP FI has attempted to do. See United Nations Env’t Programme Fin. Initiative, supra note 117, at 38–49. Yet even this setting, in which one can plausibly model the portfolio effects of producing a unit of an externality, ultimately illustrates the limitations of the PVM approach. As we have already noted, the offsetting positive effects of climate change for many publicly traded companies, along with the use of discount rates far above the social discount rate and the geographic mismatch between the market portfolio and the economic costs of climate change, means that the net physical costs of climate change on the market portfolio are likely to be de minimis. See supra notes 116–133 and accompanying text. In contrast, pecuniary externalities primarily affect the company’s competitors, about which firm managers are likely to have substantial information.

Nor are institutional investors likely to be in a meaningfully better position to provide this information to managers. Acquiring information about the ’s of a portfolio company would require a level of firm-specific engagement likely to be far more complex than acquiring information only about the ’s of the company by virtue of the diffuse ways a company’s operations can affect firms in the market portfolio. Yet even when it comes to firm-specific engagement on increasing a company’s ’s, both active asset managers and index-fund providers have strong incentives to refrain from active engagement.176For active managers, any action that increases the value of a portfolio company will be shared by all active managers holding a position in the company; therefore, the initiating manager will suffer a decline in relative performance to the other managers who will similarly benefit from the increase in the company’s value without having to incur the costs of engagement. See Ronald J. Gilson & Jeffrey N. Gordon, The Agency Costs of Agency Capitalism: Activist Investors and the Revaluation of Governance Rights, 113 Colum. L. Rev. 863, 891–92 (2013). Likewise, index providers compete for assets under management on the basis of their low fees, making the costs associated with such firm-specific engagement incompatible with their business model. See id. Rather, both types of institutional investors adopt a stance of “rational reticence”177Id. at 867, 889. in which they weigh in on a company’s operations only after an activist hedge fund—which has incentives to investigate how a company might increase its cash flows due to its concentrated investment position—proposes an intervention. Yet by the same token, the fact that an activist is undiversified also means it has little reason to invest in exploring how to reduce the ’s of a company. Indeed, to the extent an activist surfaces information on a company’s technological externalities, it will most likely relate to how they adversely affect the company’s cash flows—a point to which we return in Part V. As a result, managers cannot count on institutional investors to solve the critical information challenge posed by PVM.178Due to this challenge, Jeffrey Gordon suggests that, in the context of financial stability risk, institutional investors “ought to devote more firm-specific (and sector-specific) attention to financial firms precisely because (i) they cannot rely on some of the standard intermediaries and (ii) a single-firm failure can present a systemic threat.” Gordon, supra note 84, at 660. However, even assuming systemic risk of this sort was confined to preventing the failure of, say, any of the thirty firms listed by the Financial Stability Board as a Global Systemically Important Bank, see Fin. Stability Bd., 2022 List of Global Systemically Important Banks (G-SIBs) 3 (2022), https://www.fsb.org/2022/11/2022-list-of-global-systemically-important-banks-g-sibs [https://perma.cc/UF8J-7Q9T], we question whether active managers and indexers would view active engagement across even these thirty firms as cost justified, given their strong incentives for governance passivity. See Gilson & Gordon, supra note 176, at 891–92. More importantly, the 2023 banking crisis is a stark reminder that efforts to contain financial stability risk would require a far greater expenditure of resources given the interconnectedness of financial institutions. The crisis represents precisely the type of nondiversifiable financial stability risk at the heart of PVM; yet it was initiated by the failure of just three regional banks (Silicon Valley Bank, Silvergate Bank, and Signature Bank). As of December 31, 2022, the Federal Reserve listed 2,214 banks on its list of “large commercial banks” operating in the United States. Large Commercial Banks, Fed. Rsrv. (Dec. 31, 2022), https://www.federalreserve.gov/releases/lbr/20221231 [https://perma.cc/MZR9-XJ9R]. In addition to firm-specific engagement, Gordon also suggests institutional investors could adopt portfolio-wide policies that favor more specific disclosures regarding a company’s exposure to areas of systemic risk, such as through supporting private and quasi-regulatory efforts to provide more uniform disclosure standards on climate change risk. Gordon, supra note 84, at 661. Even here, however, the goal would be to facilitate better pricing of a company’s securities to reflect a company’s exposure to systemic risk. Yet to the extent markets can better price a firm’s exposure to a particular type of systemic risk, this simply ensures investors will be compensated for bearing this form of nondiversifiable risk.

ii.  Incentives

Consider now the implications of the foregoing analysis for the incentives that firm managers have to pursue the PVM objective. The long-term value of the firm’s own shares and the pecuniary portfolio externalities produced by the firm are far more important components of the PVM objective function than the technological portfolio externalities produced by the firm. One reason for this is that there exist social institutions, such as environmental regulation, designed to internalize technological externalities of corporate activity. While these institutions are certainly imperfect, they do substantially limit technological externalities. Another reason is that only a fraction of corporate technological externalities actually falls on other companies’ securities, as we explained above. As a result, when managers are considering investing in a new project, typically the primary effect it has on investors’ portfolios is through its implications for the company’s own value. As well, pecuniary externalities are likely to be far more important to its shareholders than technological externalities for the reasons discussed above. Note that the ordering of these three components of the PVM objective function in terms of their importance to investors mirrors their ordering in terms of the information available to managers.

Incentivizing firm managers to incorporate technological externalities into their decision-making under the PVM approach thus poses a similar problem to that of incentivizing them to consider shareholder social preferences under the SSP approach. The most productive use of managers’ scarce time and attention, in terms of improving the PVM objective function, is in working to increase the cash flows to the firm’s own shares and to competing public companies. As a result, we think it likely that diversified shareholders would want managers to focus their limited time and attention on those outcomes. Diverting their attention to addressing technological portfolio externalities would likely be counterproductive for the value of shareholders’ portfolios, given their relatively small role in the PVM objective function and the relatively limited information firm managers have about them. The optimal incentive contract for managers under the PVM approach would thus focus squarely on the long-term value component of the objective function and put little to no weight on technological externalities.179In the absence of antitrust laws, the optimal incentive contract might also seek to encourage managers to create pecuniary externalities by, for example, colluding with the firm’s competitors. Reforms that aim to induce managers to incorporate portfolio effects into their decision-making are likely counterproductive for both diversified portfolio returns and for social welfare.

These considerations help explain why institutional investors have refrained from pushing managers of high carbon-emitting firms to slash emissions in the name of maximizing the value of other portfolio firms, as one might expect if investors truly wanted firms to adopt a PVM perspective. On the contrary, to the extent investors evaluate the impact of climate change on portfolio value maximization, they typically focus on the implications of climate change for each firm’s long-term value and in particular on transition risks, such as the costs a firm will face as governments seek to rein in carbon emissions and the investment opportunities these efforts will produce.180See, e.g., BlackRock, Climate-Related Risk and the Energy Transition 1 (2023), https://www.blackrock.com/corporate/literature/publication/blk-commentary-climate-risk-and-energy-transition.pdf [https://perma.cc/C69L-ZXJQ] (“While companies in various sectors and geographies may be affected differently by climate change, the energy transition is an investment factor that we expect to be material for many companies and economies around the globe. Within this context, and as stewards of our clients’ assets, we engage companies and encourage them to publish disclosures that help their investors understand how they identify and manage the material risks and opportunities related to climate change and the energy transition.” (endnote omitted)).

Indeed, the work of UNEP FI, which was established to advance methodologies for assessing the impact of climate change on the portfolios of institutional investors, is replete with this perspective. Using an investment portfolio consisting of 30,000 global securities, the report’s headline results indicate that investors in such a portfolio would face a 13.16% risk of loss due to transition risk, but low carbon-technology opportunities offset these costs by providing 10.74% of potential gains. To be sure, the report also estimated the aggregate physical losses to the portfolio arising from climate change to be 2.14%.181United Nations Env’t Programme Fin. Initiative, supra note 117, at 12. Yet even in this regard, the report cited investors as using these methods to engage with companies “to encourage greater climate risk resiliency”—in other words, to ensure companies are looking to maximize firm value in the face of these climate risks.182Id. at 78. Likewise, to the extent shareholder engagement at Big Oil firms has resulted in revised compensation plans to address climate change, the revised plans are uniformly designed to reward management for success in managing transition risk—a broad category of conduct that includes meeting greenhouse gas (“GHG”) emissions targets in anticipation of higher carbon costs as well as pursuing alternative energy technologies.183For instance, in 2021, Chevron approved the addition of an “Energy Transition” performance category to the Chevron Incentive Plan (“CIP”) scorecard in response to investor communications. Chevron Corp., 2022 Proxy Statement (Schedule 14A) 44 (Apr. 7, 2022). According to the company, the “new category will have a 10% weighting, and will measure Chevron’s progress in the areas of GHG management, renewable energy and carbon offsets, and low-carbon technologies.” Id. at 49. In addition to the 10% weight provided to this Energy Transition metric, the CIP determines annual awards based on three other areas: financial results (weighted 35%), capital management (weighted 30%), and operating and safety performance (weighted 25%). Id. at 45.

C.  Devolving Corporate Control to Shareholders

In the prior Section we took as given the current institutional arrangements that give the board of directors control over corporate policy. This model of corporate governance necessarily raises the challenges of how shareholders might convey their preferences to managers (whether to maximize portfolio value or pursue social preferences) as well as how to provide managers with incentives to pursue these preferences. As we have argued, these challenges are difficult—if not impossible—to overcome, so it is hardly surprising that some proponents of shareholder welfarism, from both the SSP and PVM strands, have proposed implementing the shift away from shareholder value maximization toward shareholder welfare maximization by simply giving shareholders much greater direct say in operational matters. This approach is perhaps most associated with two 2022 papers penned by Oliver Hart and Luigi Zingales,184See, e.g., Broccardo et al., supra note 78, at 3101; Oliver Hart & Luigi Zingales, The New Corporate Governance, 1 U. Chi. Bus. L. Rev. 195 (2022). but similar admonitions to provide shareholders with greater voice in corporate governance have long emanated from proponents of PVM.185See, e.g., Hawley & Williams, supra note 84, at 144 (proposing that the governance role of institutional investors should reflect the broader powers of ownership in a corporation, including ‘actively participating in its strategic direction’ ”); Wolf-Georg Ring, Investor Empowerment for Sustainability, 74 Rev. Econ. 21, 21 (2023) (“[F]or investor empowerment as the main tool towards achieving greater sustainability in capital markets” and grounding this “trust in institutional investors . . . in various recent developments both on the supply side and the demand side of financial markets, and also in the increasing tendency of institutional investors to engage in common ownership.”).

We therefore conclude our evaluation of shareholder welfarism by considering the extent to which devolving corporate control to shareholders might improve corporate conduct. Note that, under this implementation mechanism, the distinction between the SSP and PVM forms of shareholder welfarism becomes less significant: in exercising their control rights over a corporation, shareholders would be motivated by their full range of relevant preferences, including with respect to the value of the firm, the value of other securities in their portfolios, and their social preferences. As such, we refer collectively to scholars taking this particular approach to implementing either SSP or PVM as proponents of “shareholder welfarism.”

1.  The Economic Logic of Centralized Control

To begin, we note that adopting a more holistic understanding of shareholder interests, as urged by these proponents of shareholder welfarism, does not change the basic economic logic that originally gave rise to the centralized management of publicly traded corporations. Diversified shareholders generally lack the information and expertise needed to run the firm; this is why, under current institutional arrangements, corporate control is vested in an elected board of directors. Put simply, centralized management lets managers be managers and investors be investors, and that specialization of function has well-understood economic benefits. In our view, devolving operational decisions to shareholders of publicly traded corporations would make little economic sense and would result in worse corporate performance, not just in terms of shareholder value but even in shareholder welfare or social welfare terms.

2.  Determining Which Decisions to Devolve to Shareholders

To be sure, proponents of shareholder welfarism do not propose that all operational decisions be devolved to shareholders, presumably in large part because they recognize the value, indeed practical necessity, of a significant degree of centralization of control over public companies in professional managers. But what then determines which operational decisions are made by shareholders and which by managers? Hart and Zingales argue that, as a conceptual matter, shareholders be given a direct say only with respect to operational issues that implicate a social goal that the company has a comparative advantage in achieving.186Hart & Zingales, supra note 184, at 210. They offer as an example a case from 1984 when DuPont faced a choice between polluting the Ohio River or spending money to avoid doing so.187Id. at 210–11.

But identifying conceptually a class of decisions that should be delegated to shareholders is on its own not enough. One must also specify who decides on a day-to-day basis when a particular corporate decision meets the specified criteria for devolution to shareholders. One possibility is that management decides. We suspect, however, that such an arrangement would result in management rarely bringing matters to a shareholder vote, given the time and expense involved and the fact that shareholders are so poorly equipped to make such decisions. It is not clear why management would have any incentive to bring such votes, and enforcement of a legal obligation for them to do so would presumably entail suits brought by shareholders, in effect making shareholders the key actors in instigating these shareholder votes over corporate operations.

Accordingly, the only plausible approach is to let shareholders initiate such votes, perhaps with management having access to a legal procedure for refusing to bring the vote if it does not meet the specified legal criteria.188This is how Hart and Zingales propose to implement SSP. Id. at 215. This is how the process for putting precatory shareholder proposals on management’s proxy statement for the annual shareholder meeting generally works currently under Rule 14a-8. But consider the incentives of shareholders to initiate such interventions. Standard collective action problems would inhibit diversified individual shareholders from bearing the considerable costs of putting operational issues to a shareholder vote. Similarly, traditional asset managers likely have little incentive to bear the costs of intervening by sponsoring shareholder proposals.189See Gilson & Gordon, supra note 176, at 894.

Consistent with this analysis, existing evidence on precatory shareholder proposals on social issues shows they are proposed largely by what Roberto Tallarita calls “stockholder politics specialists”: policy advocacy organizations like As You Sow, socially responsible investment advisors like Domini Impact Investments, and public and union pension funds.190Roberto Tallarita, Stockholder Politics, 73 Hastings L.J. 1697, 1740–42 (2022). These specialists generally have particular social and political agendas that existing scholarly commentaries characterize as different from the interests of most of the shareholder base.191See, e.g., Susan W. Liebeler, A Proposal to Rescind the Shareholder Proposal Rule, 18 Ga. L. Rev. 425, 439 (1984); Roberta Romano, Public Pension Fund Activism in Corporate Governance Reconsidered, 93 Colum. L. Rev. 795, 807 (1993). It seems likely that these actors often make proposals designed not to push corporate managers to strike a trade-off desired by shareholders between firm value and shareholders’ other preferences (which would be consistent with the view taken by proponents of shareholder welfarism), but rather they make proposals aimed at advancing a particular political agenda. In line with that understanding, only 3.3% of shareholder proposals on social issues from 2010 to 2021 received majority shareholder support.192Tallarita, supra note 190, at 1719. This fraction increased dramatically at the end of the sample period, however, reaching 12.4% in 2019 and 19.2% in 2021. Id. at 1727. Specific categories of social proposals that have begun attracting majority shareholder support at greater rates include proposals on board diversity, climate-related proposals, and proposals on corporate political activity. EY Ctr. for Bd. Matters, Ernst & Young, What Boards Should Know About ESG Developments in the 2021 Proxy Season 3–4 (2021).

We would expect these same actors to be the primary proponents of shareholder proposals under the reforms urged under the shareholder welfarism view that would make shareholder proposals on operational issues binding. The key question is whether empowering these actors to initiate shareholder decisions that override management through binding shareholder resolutions on operational matters is likely, on net, to improve corporate behavior.

3.  The Nature of Shareholder Preferences over Operational Decisions

Consider now how shareholders would vote on proposals pertaining to operational decisions. In an influential article published in the Journal of Political Economy,193Broccardo et al., supra note 78, at 3101. which we will refer to as BHZ, Eleonora Broccardo, Oliver Hart, and Luigi Zingales develop a model of shareholder voting and derive a startling result: in voting over operational decisions that pose trade-offs between firm value and social concerns, diversified shareholders will ignore the implications of the decision for their own investment returns and instead view the decision exactly as a social planner would, making the decision on the basis of the net social benefits to society as a whole.194Id. at 3115. They thus show that, under their assumptions, if a majority of shares are held by investors who are even slightly socially responsible, letting shareholders decide on operational matters achieves the socially optimal outcome. If their model provides a good account of shareholder voting behavior, then devolving operational decision-making to shareholders would have enormous potential for improving corporate conduct. Specialist actors with various views on social issues implicated by corporate conduct could tee up a range of binding resolutions for shareholders to vote on, and shareholders would pass them if and only if they improve social welfare.

But BHZ’s stark result depends on a set of critical assumptions and seems to us implausible in practice. BHZ models investors’ utility from owning a stock as having two components: one stemming from their investment returns from the stock and an altruistic component stemming from how the company’s operations affect society.195Id. at 3113–14. BHZ assumes that, because any individual stock would make up a de minimis fraction of a perfectly diversified investor’s portfolio, such an investor would have no (or de minimis) concern about the effect of an operational decision on their own investment returns.196Id. at 3115. Of course, the assumption of perfectly diversified, atomistic shareholders is inconsistent with how many shares are held, but we put that objection to the side. On the other hand, BHZ assumes that diversification has no effect on the strength of an investor’s ethical concerns about the company’s behavior.197Mathematically, BHZ denotes the number of firms in a diversified portfolio as 𝑟 and uses a utility function in which the investment returns term is multiplied by 1/𝑟, but the social preferences term is not multiplied by 1/𝑟. As a result, in the limit as 𝑟 becomes very large, the investment-returns term goes to zero so that all that is left is the term representing the investor’s social preferences. Id. at 3115. This asymmetry in their treatment of the effects of diversification is the key behind their result that each investor would vote on operational decisions just like a social planner would.

A natural alternative model of investor psychology is from earlier work by Hart and Zingales in which they assumed that the level of responsibility that shareholders feel for corporate externalities scales with their holdings in the firm.198Hart & Zingales, supra note 71, at 253 n.14 (“We suppose that a consumer feels responsible for the share of social surplus corresponding to his shareholding in order to avoid a situation where the social surplus term overwhelms the profit term for a small shareholder.”). In mathematical terms, this is equivalent to changing the utility function in BHZ by multiplying the social preferences term as well as the investment returns term by 1/𝑟. Under that assumption, investors would vote on operational matters by trading off the effects of the decision on firm value and on social considerations, with the weight on social considerations depending on the strength of their social preferences (which would reflect their financial position in the firm), in much the same way as we characterized aggregate shareholder welfare in Section IV.A above. Which of these models best captures how investors would actually think about binding shareholder proposals on operational matters cannot be derived through purely deductive reasoning but rather is ultimately an empirical question, which we return to below.

A second key assumption of BHZ concerns the effect of diversification on investors’ incentives to become informed about votes. An individual investor’s probability of casting the pivotal vote that determines the outcome goes to zero as they become perfectly diversified, for the same basic reason that their interest in the returns on any particular company’s stock goes to zero. This latter effect of diversification plays a key role in BHZ’s analysis, as we have discussed, but with regard to the former, BHZ assumes that “shareholders will vote as if they were pivotal since this is the only case where their vote matters; in other words, they vote the outcome they would like to occur.”199Broccardo et al., supra note 78, at 3114. But a more consistent view about the effects of portfolio diversification is that there would be no reason for an individual investor to give a moment’s thought or attention to how to vote shares or to potential investment funds’ voting policies, because in the limit an individual shareholder has no effect on the world.200Cf. Brav et al., supra note 161, at 505 (finding a positive empirical relation between a retail investor’s ownership position in a company and the likelihood that the investor casts a ballot at the company’s annual shareholder meeting). The prediction of the model would then not be that each investor acts like a social planner but rather widespread rational investor apathy about shareholder votes and about how funds vote, even for socially minded investors.201And these objections do not exhaust the set of critical assumptions that BHZ relies on for their result. For example, their result also hinges on specific choices about the cost structure of the corporate action being voted on (“adopting a technology”). BHZ assumes that the action entails only fixed costs and has no effect on marginal costs. But if it were to increase firms’ marginal costs, then under perfect competition the result would only obtain if all firms adopted it at once. If some firms do not adopt, then the remaining dirty firms would win the entire market. In turn, in equilibrium consequentialist shareholders would no longer view adopting the technology as actually reducing the externality. Their additional assumption of fixed capacity constraints might avoid this problem to some extent, but that represents still another example of how, in our view, BHZ relies on very strong assumptions.

Perhaps the best evidence for evaluating the predictions of BHZ is from shareholder voting on a major class of operational decisions on which shareholders currently are given a binding vote: mergers. Corporate mergers implicate both investors’ investment returns as well as a range of social concerns, including those stemming from increased market power and with respect to the effect of the merger on various classes of firm stakeholders, such as employees and creditors. The model of BHZ predicts that investor voting on mergers would be based not on their own investment returns but rather on such social issues. In short, shareholders would vote for mergers only to the extent they improved social welfare and against mergers that impaired social welfare, regardless of the financial return shareholders could expect from the merger. It is, of course, a claim that calls into question the need for any oversight of mergers on public policy grounds (for example, through antitrust review) as this work would be accomplished through the shareholder vote.

Not surprisingly, this prediction is belied by the evidence: the main concern among shareholders in controversial merger votes is, to our knowledge, never about market power or the effects on other corporate constituencies but rather about the deal price. As an example, consider Michael Dell’s 2013 leveraged buyout of Dell, Inc. When originally proposed, the deal—like many management buyouts—attracted substantial shareholder opposition based on the concern that shareholders were being offered too low of a price, leading Michael Dell to sweeten the deal by offering a special dividend to shareholders.202See David Benoit & Sharon Terlep, Dell Reaches New Deal with Founder, Wall St. J. (Aug. 2, 2013, 7:34 PM ET), https://www.wsj.com/articles/SB100014241278873246359045786434912332027
54 [https://perma.cc/BJ8F-8S5T].
Deal price is a purely distributive concern that implicates investors’ returns; if shareholders cared only about the social welfare effect of a merger, this distributive concern would be irrelevant. It is difficult to reconcile the centrality of concerns about deal price in shareholder voting about mergers—as opposed to concerns about market power or treatment of other corporate constituencies—and BHZ’s model of voting on operational decisions. In contrast, this outcome is consistent with our analysis in Section IV.A above that the overwhelming driver of shareholder welfare under the SSP view is firm value, not shareholders’ social preferences.

4.  The Benefits of Devolving Control to Stockholders

What then would be the benefits, in terms of improved corporate conduct, of devolving control to stockholders? In our view they would be negligible, for the same basic reasons we gave in evaluating the objective functions under SSP and PVM and their feasibility for corporate managers in Sections IV.A and IV.B. We will not recapitulate all of those arguments here, but in short, the predominant consideration that would drive shareholder voting on operational matters would be firm value, not broader social concerns or portfolio externalities. To the extent shareholders’ social preferences did factor into their voting on operational matters, they would entail a form of stated preferences based on the limited information available to shareholders about the full consequences of the vote on a firm’s operations. As such, they would not serve as a reliable guide to shareholders’ revealed preferences about social issues or to social welfare.

While it might be hoped that such a devolution would at least facilitate low-hanging-fruit improvements to corporate behavior—changes that would attract widespread agreement in society—such issues are those that are most likely to be addressed already by law and public policy. Putting operational matters to a shareholder vote involves deploying a type of political mechanism—what Roberto Tallarita refers to as “stockholder politics”—as an alternative to traditional politics.203Tallarita, supra note 190, at 1701. But by our lights, stockholder politics is likely to be much less protective of broader social interests than traditional politics since corporate stockholders are a subset of the broader polity and this subset of voters owns the claims to the corporate profits that would have to be sacrificed in service of those broader interests.

5.  The Costs of Devolving Control to Stockholders

While the social benefits from devolving control to stockholders would be negligible, the social costs would likely be significant. Those costs would come in three main forms. First, allowing shareholders to propose binding resolutions on corporate conduct would result in substantial distraction of management, which would inevitably be drawn into defending corporate policies against social activists pushing for reforms. As we have emphasized previously, managers have a finite amount of time and attention so that this distraction would result in worse corporate performance over time. Second, devolving control to shareholders risks changes to corporate policy that are likely to reduce the well-being of shareholders and the broader society. That is, one cannot be confident that all successful shareholder interventions would ultimately be in shareholder interests, given the many layers of intermediation between beneficial owners and the shares as well as the limited amount of information shareholders would inevitably have about the full costs and benefits of a proposed change in a firm’s operations in this decision-making environment.204Zohar Goshen and Richard Squire term the costs that occur when investors exercise control “principal costs,” a play on “agency costs.” Zohar Goshen & Richard Squire, Principal Costs: A New Theory for Corporate Law and Governance, 117 Colum. L. Rev. 767, 771 (2017). Similarly, Iman Anabtawi argues that giving shareholders more power over operational matters would distort corporate decisions due to the influence of large shareholders with interests that conflict with shareholders’ interests as a class. Iman Anabtawi, Some Skepticism About Increasing Shareholder Power, 53 UCLA L. Rev. 561, 561 (2006). Finally, as other scholars have noted, turning to shareholder voting in hopes of regulating the production of technological externalities comes with troubling political implications. These include the possibility of chilling the perceived need for systematic legislation and regulation,205See Bebchuk & Tallarita, supra note 2, at 168–73. the effective weighting of shareholders’ policy preferences by their wealth,206Marcel Kahan & Edward B. Rock, Corporate Governance Welfarism, 15 J. Legal Analysis 108, 123 (2023). and the vesting of de facto regulatory power in the hands of a few unelected asset managers given the prevailing distribution of voting power in corporate elections.207See Condon, supra note 85, at 8 (“Beyond a mere tallying of positive and negative economic outcomes, the role of investor as private regulator should raise concerns about the compatibility of concentrated corporate control with democratic society—concerns dating back at least as far back as Adolf Berle and Gardiner Means.”); Dorothy S. Lund, Asset Managers as Regulator, 171 U. Pa. L. Rev. 77, 77–78 (2023) (arguing that asset managers effectively supply regulation on matters pertaining to social and environmental matters and highlighting the lack of democratic accountability and government oversight for their policymaking).

V.  THE FUTURE OF CSR IS ESV

Shareholder governance holds significant promise for improving corporate social responsibility. But this promise does not stem from any innovation in our basic understanding of shareholders’ interests along the lines of shareholder welfarism. Indeed, we have argued that changing the corporate objective in the ways urged by shareholder welfarism would fail to meaningfully improve corporate conduct and might even do the opposite. Rather, the ongoing promise of shareholder governance for CSR stems from the prospect of further reductions in certain agency costs and information problems based on the traditional corporate objective, long-term shareholder value. We suspect that there remain opportunities for corporate management to reform firm policies in ways that both increase shareholder value and improve the firm’s social performance, perhaps by addressing the information and incentive problems of ESV we have discussed. But ESV is often misunderstood in the law-and-economics literature. In this final part we begin by addressing those misconceptions and clarifying what we believe to be the most useful understanding of ESV. We then briefly describe an episode at ExxonMobil that illustrates recent innovations in the use of ESV arguments by market actors and the potential promise that ESV holds for advocates of CSR. We conclude this part by identifying a set of key questions about ESV that we think form an important research agenda for the field.

A.  Clarifying ESV as a Concept

Despite its surging popularity in the business world, ESV has received little sustained analysis in legal scholarship. What attention it has received from legal scholars largely reflects one or both of two misconceptions about ESV that we seek to clarify here.

First, some shareholder primacy theorists misconceive ESV as an alternative to traditional shareholder value as a corporate objective.208See, e.g., Bebchuk et al., supra note 42, at 732; Lund, supra note 9, at 94 (contrasting the “traditional” shareholder wealth maximization standard with the “enlightened shareholder value standard”). Relatedly, some CSR-oriented scholars treat ESV as a form of stakeholderism that ultimately requires corporate actions that sacrifice shareholder wealth to further stakeholder interests. Virginia Harper Ho, “Enlightened Shareholder Value”: Corporate Governance Beyond the Shareholder-Stakeholder Divide, 36 J. Corp. L. 59, 98 (2010) (“[I]t is in the cases . . . where market forces pressure firms away from social responsibility–that the contrast between shareholder wealth maximization and enlightened shareholder value is clearest. These are cases where a course of action that maximizes profits imposes negative externalities on stakeholders . . . . If permitted by law, such decisions are fully compatible with a shareholder wealth maximization approach. Under an ESV decision rule, in contrast, the firm must assess the potential impact on stakeholders. If a course of action is optimal only when the costs to stakeholders are ignored, then it should not be taken or the firm must absorb the costs.”). This is not what we refer to as ESV in this Article. For example, in a recent paper Lucian Bebchuk, Kobi Kastiel, and Roberto Tallarita examine “the view that corporations should replace their traditional purpose of shareholder value maximization (SV) with a standard commonly referred to as ‘enlightened shareholder value’ (ESV).”209Bebchuk et al., supra note 42, at 732. After arguing that SV and ESV are operationally equivalent, they conclude that “replacing SV with ESV should not be expected to produce benefits for either shareholders or society.”210Id. at 3.

But their framing of ESV as an alternative corporate objective is, in our view, a category mistake. ESV is not an alternative corporate objective. The enlightenment that ESV calls for involves not an adjustment of the corporate objective itself but rather in how to seek it. ESV is best understood as a reform agenda targeting a particular class of agency costs and information problems that harm not only shareholders but also other corporate stakeholders. Just as one might usefully analyze problems with the design of executive compensation as a distinctive manifestation of and contributor to managerial agency costs,211See, e.g., Lucian Bebchuk & Jesse Fried, Pay Without Performance 4-5 (2004). ESV theory identifies a particular class of agency and information problems worthy of study that might point to their own set of interventions.

Why have law-and-economics scholars instead viewed ESV as advancing an alternative corporate objective? This framing of ESV might stem in part from the grammatical structure of the label: “enlightened” is an adjective, modifying “shareholder value.” Another reason—suggested by Bebchuk and coauthors212Bebchuk et al., supra note 42, at 736.—is that some jurisdictions have added explicit language to corporate statutes highlighting the importance of operating in a socially responsible manner to the achievement of shareholder value. For example, the United Kingdom Companies Act provides

A director of a company must act in the way he considers, in good faith, would be most likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its [shareholders] as a whole, and in doing so have regard (amongst other matters) to— . . . 

(b) the interests of the company’s employees,

(c) the need to foster the company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others,

(d) the impact of the company’s operations on the community and the environment,

(e) the desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct.213Companies Act 2006, c. 46, § 172(1) (UK).

But such a provision does not change the corporate objective from maximizing shareholder value. Rather, we suspect that the existence of stakeholderism as a competing conception of corporate purpose may explain the perceived need to add explicit language endorsing such CSR considerations in pursuing long-term shareholder value. After all, many people believe in stakeholderism, which is indeed a fundamentally different understanding of ends, and not just means, of the corporate form. This leads to several phenomena that might in turn justify explicit acknowledgement of ESV considerations in corporate law.

First, when good faith managers sacrifice short-term profits to act more responsibly in ways that further shareholder value, they might be accused of being stakeholderists! Explicit legal endorsement of ESV can reassure all involved that engaging in CSR is often required to further shareholder value. Second, one could interpret explicit ESV legal language as limiting rather than permissive; it can make clear to corporate managers that they should pursue CSR only to the extent that it furthers shareholder value. This is what the Delaware Supreme Court did in the Revlon case (“A board may have regard for various constituencies in discharging its responsibilities, provided there are rationally related benefits accruing to the stockholders.”).214Revlon, Inc. v. MacAndrews & Forbes Holdings, Inc., 506 A.2d 173, 182 (Del. 1986). Finally, stakeholderists often propagate a caricature of shareholder value theory in which fat-cat capitalists squeeze every last penny out of workers and customers, pollute the environment at will, and otherwise act in outrageous ways all in pursuit of immediate profit.215See, e.g., Lynn Stout, The Shareholder Value Myth: How Putting Shareholders First Harms Investors, Corporations, and the Public vi, 3, 7, 11 (2012) (“Conventional shareholder value thinking . . . . causes companies to indulge in reckless, sociopathic, and socially irresponsible behavior . . . . In the quest to ‘unlock shareholder value’ [directors and executives] sell key assets, fire loyal employees, and ruthlessly squeeze the workforce that remains.”). Legal endorsement of ESV helps combat that distorted view of shareholder primacy.

A second misconception about ESV is that it is useless because the behavior of all the key actors in the corporate system is determined by their incentives and so ESV ideas cannot improve it. One version of this critique focuses on the significant extent to which existing corporate governance institutions already provide substantial incentives for management to maximize shareholder value, including through practices that also further stakeholder interests, which raises the question of whether there remain any such opportunities not yet exploited. As Elhauge puts it, “Agitating for corporations to engage in responsible conduct that increases their profits is a lot like saying there are twenty-dollar bills lying on the sidewalk.”216Elhauge, supra note 41, at 744–45.

Quite the contrary. For one, the mechanisms posited by ESV often involve substantial uncertainty as to how best to maximize long-term shareholder value.217Edmans, supra note 43, at 60. That uncertainty is in part a function of the long time horizon over which the firm will receive the ultimate financial benefits of socially responsible conduct. In contrast, the financial costs of such practices are typically both immediate and certain. As a result, there is no reason to think that all such positive NPV investments in social responsibility will be exploited. In many cases, firm managers will simply make mistakes in striking these uncertain intertemporal trade-offs. These mistakes, moreover, might be systematically biased toward social irresponsibility, given the asymmetry that poses certain, immediate costs against uncertain, future benefits of more responsible conduct.218To be clear, the existence of such a systematic bias is not self-evident, nor is it fundamental to our argument. All that is necessary to make ESV of interest is that there exist unrealized opportunities to reform corporate policy in ways that further both shareholder interests and CSR, not that there are more such cases than there are cases in which corporations engage in excessive CSR from a shareholder value perspective. More fundamentally, management might face conflicts of interest that produce agency costs in the form of inefficiently irresponsible corporate conduct.219Note that this can be the case even when there are other conflicts of interest that might result in management sometimes acting excessively responsibly from a shareholder value perspective. ESV as we define it focuses on eliminating inefficient corporate irresponsibility. One could imagine another reform agenda that focuses on eliminating inefficient corporate responsibility, which we might term “anti-stakeholderism.” In principle these two reform agendas need not be in conflict with one another. As we have explained, the ESV approach is best understood as largely involving concern about a genus of agency costs in the short-termism family.220See infra Section IV.B.1. The key conceptual challenge for ESV theory is thus not how to explain all the cash on the sidewalk but rather to identify governance reforms or other interventions that might realistically reduce these agency costs and produce more cash.

In that vein, a second version of this critique of ESV takes a glass-half-empty perspective on management incentives. For example, Bebchuk and his coauthors argue that, to the extent that managers fail to engage in shareholder-value-maximizing CSR due to incentive problems that lead to short-termism, ESV offers no way out. As they put it: “[A]s long as corporate leaders have short-term incentives, pontificating to them about the importance of taking into account long-term effects, either in general or with respect to stakeholders in particular, would not address short-termism problems.”221Bebchuk et al., supra note 42, at 748.

Their claim exemplifies what economists have termed the “determinacy paradox.”222Brendan O’Flaherty & Jagdish Bhagwati, Will Free Trade with Political Science Put Normative Economists Out of Work?, 9 Econ. & Pol. 207, 208 (1997). This problem arises when an analyst has a positive model of the actors in a system that generates predictions about how those actors will behave, but then nonetheless engages in normative arguments about how those actors should behave.223Id. at 208. If the analyst believes that the actors’ behavior is pinned down by the positive model, what exactly is the point of the normative arguments? That is the logical structure of Bebchuk and his coauthors’ critique, and it does indeed pose an important challenge for ESV theory.

But note that, as a preliminary matter, this basic challenge for ESV theory is shared by all normative arguments in corporate law scholarship. Economic analysis of corporate law relies on a rich set of positive models that explain the behavior of key actors in the system—officers, directors, shareholders, and the like. But in addition to all of their positive theorizing, corporate law scholars have a decidedly reformist bent. After diagnosing some set of pathologies in the corporate system, generally with the aid of a positive model, the typical scholarly article about corporate law then turns to reform proposals that aim to remedy the problem.224See, e.g., Lucian A. Bebchuk, The Case for Facilitating Competing Tender Offers, 95 Harv. L. Rev. 1028, 1030 (1982) (“[F]acilitating competing tender offers is desirable both to targets’ shareholders and to society.”); Lucian Arye Bebchuk, The Case for Increasing Shareholder Power, 118 Harv. L. Rev. 833, 837–38 (2005) (“Part III presents the case for giving shareholders the power not only to elect and replace directors, but also to initiate and adopt rules-of-the-game decisions to amend the corporate charter or to reincorporate in another jurisdiction . . . . [It] also provides empirical evidence of management’s ability to avoid rules-of-the-game changes that are viewed as value-enhancing by a majority of shareholders.”). But if all of the relevant decisionmakers’ behavior is pinned down by incentives, what is the point of this pontificating? If the positive model is right, then why would managers or directors, for example, care about the analyst’s normative arguments? This is a challenge even for normative arguments about what the law should be, since positive models in corporate law scholarship purport to explain even the content of corporate law itself, for example as the inevitable outcome of state competition for charters.225See, e.g., Roberta Romano, The State Competition Debate in Corporate Law, 8 Cardozo L. Rev. 709, 712–25 (1987) (reviewing positive models of state corporate law based on competition for corporate charters). The generality of this analytic challenge for normative arguments in corporate law scholarship has not previously been recognized.226In contrast this challenge has been discussed extensively in public law scholarship. See, e.g., Eric A. Posner & Adrian Vermeule, Inside or Outside the System?, 80 U. Chi. L. Rev. 1743, 1749 (2013) (arguing that public law scholarship commonly suffers from the determinacy paradox insofar that it combines “pessimism about diagnoses with unexplained optimism about solutions”).

Are all normative arguments about corporate governance hopeless then? Thankfully, no. The way out of the paradox is to identify some set of actors that might ultimately be persuaded by the normative argument. The ability to persuade an actor in turn typically requires that the actor have both something to learn and incentives that align to some degree with the recommendation.227O’Flaherty & Bhagwati, supra note 222, at 215. Rather than leading to normative nihilism, the determinacy paradox should instead discipline us as corporate law scholars to be more explicit about the audiences we have in mind for our normative arguments and to explain why—despite our rich positive models—those arguments command attention. We need an unmoved mover in the system who might be open to the normative argument in order for it to make a practical difference.

Two key audiences who often play that role in corporate law scholarship, more or less explicitly, are institutional investors and government officials. To give one illustrative example, consider Lucian Bebchuk and Jesse Fried’s incisive book on executive pay.228Bebchuk & Fried, supra note 211. They argue that a range of common practices in executive pay stem from, and contribute to, managerial agency costs.229Id. at 45–95. For this analysis to deliver a practically useful normative payoff, however, requires there to be an audience for their arguments that might be influenced in such a way that the design of executive compensation improves. The authors argue in part that “[t]his is an area in which the very recognition of problems may help alleviate them,” asserting that “[m]anagers’ ability to influence pay structures depends on the extent to which the resulting distortions are not too apparent to market participants—especially institutional investors.”230Id. at 12. But they also advocate policy changes that would shift power from boards to shareholders, arguing that

[f]or there to be changes in the allocation of power between management and shareholders, investors’ demand for them must be sufficient to outweigh management’s considerable ability to block reforms that chip away at its power and private benefits. This can happen only if investors and policymakers recognize the substantial costs that current arrangements impose—as well as the extent to which solving existing problems requires addressing the basic problem of board unaccountability. We hope that this book will contribute to such recognition.231Id. at 216. But at times the authors leave the identity of the policymaker being appealed to unspecified. See id. at 213. For example, after pointing out that “states seeking to attract incorporating and reincorporating firms have had incentives to give substantial weight to management preferences, even at the expense of shareholder interests,” the authors write,

Giving shareholders the power to initiate and approve by vote a proposal to reincorporate or to adopt a charter amendment could produce, in one bold stroke, a substantial improvement in the quality of corporate governance. Shareholder power to change governance arrangements would reduce the need for intervention from outside the firm by regulators, exchanges, or legislators.

Id. But the identity of the policymaker who they hope will do the “giving” is left unspecified. See id.

The determinacy paradox strikes us as easier to surmount for normative arguments in ESV theory than it typically is in corporate governance theory more generally. After all, ESV theory, by definition, pushes for reforms that are in the interests of both shareholders and other stakeholders so that multiple classes of actors in the system have interests that are to some degree aligned with the reform to corporate practice being urged and might therefore play a role in helping to bring it about.

Normative ESV arguments by academics, for example, might usefully target a range of audiences in the corporate system. Consider Alex Edmans’s 2020 book, Grow the Pie, which seems primarily aimed at teaching managers how focusing on the social value created by the firm is a surer path to shareholder value creation than seeking shareholder value directly.232Edmans, supra note 43, at 23–37. The book provides a lucid account of the relevant empirical literature on these issues that we suspect has important lessons for managers and independent directors. Institutional investors might also benefit from his analysis and be persuaded to adjust their approach to using ESG factors in their investment process. This could well be an area in which clearer recognition of the agency cost problems that deter managers from considering social value may help alleviate them, as Bebchuk and Fried assert about executive compensation.233Bebchuk & Fried, supra note 211, at 12. And to the extent that failures to exploit all opportunities to engage in CSR in ways that benefit stockholders stem from mistakes due to limited information, the potential for ESV arguments to make a difference is even more straightforward.

In sum, the Panglossian argument that nobody could possibly have a useful new idea along the lines of ESV because if it were incentive compatible to adopt a practice that improved CSR in ways that benefit shareholders, corporations would already be doing it, proves too much. As well, as a positive matter, the increase in the use by various actors in the corporate system of normative arguments about corporate practices that sound in ESV terms is by our lights a phenomenon worth studying rather than simply dismissing. Consider, for example, the ESV argument advanced by Blackrock’s Larry Fink in his 2022 Letter to CEOs: “In today’s globally interconnected world, a company must create value for and be valued by its full range of stakeholders in order to deliver long-term value for its shareholders.”234Fink, supra note 101. The audiences for this argument include independent directors, managers, and other investors.

More concretely, the 2021 activist intervention at ExxonMobil by the hedge fund Engine No. 1 similarly illustrates the potential promise ESV holds for CSR. In the spring of 2021, Engine No. 1 initiated a proxy fight based on a platform that was heavily critical of the Exxon’s failure to grapple with the reality of a rapidly decarbonizing world.235For the history of Engine No. 1’s proxy fight, see Jessica Camille Aguirre, The Little Hedge Fund Taking Down Big Oil, N.Y. Times Mag. (June 23, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/
06/23/magazine/exxon-mobil-engine-no-1-board.html [https://perma.cc/5N2J-CBFD]. From the start, Engine No. 1 emphasized the central importance of climate change and decarbonization for the campaign. As it stated in its opening salvo to Exxon, “It is clear . . . that the industry and the world it operates in are changing and that ExxonMobil must change as well.” Engine No. 1 LLC, Letter to the Board of Directors, Reenergize Exxon (Dec. 7, 2020), https://reenergizexom.com/materials/letter-to-the-board-of-directors [https://perma.cc/6R2G-32HP].
Critically, however, its central argument was that management’s failure to cut back on investment in oil production was bad for business, not just bad for the earth.236Exxon Mobil Corp., supra note 235. As the fund emphasized when it launched its campaign, the company’s total shareholder return over the past ten years had been -20%, compared to 277% for the S&P 500, and it also trailed its industry peers. Id. In its investor presentation, Engine No. 1 argued that the stock’s lackluster performance reflected a fundamental failure at the company to adjust its business strategy to account for long-term demand uncertainty for oil and gas. In particular, Exxon’s long-term business planning “centered narrowly on projections of oil and gas demand growth for decades,” see Exxon Mobil Corp., Proxy Statement (Schedule 14A) 21 (Mar. 15, 2021), leading it to pursue “aggressive capital expenditure plans to chase production growth” that have left “ExxonMobil far more exposed than peers to demand declines,” id. at 9. Additionally, Engine No.1 emphasized that the company’s “refusal to accept that fossil fuel demand may decline in decades to come has led to a failure to take even initial steps towards evolution.” Id. at 6. In this regard, Engine No. 1 excoriated the company for its “total reliance on [the] hope of carbon capture to preserve [its] business model,” id. at 21, which had caused the firm to lack any “credible plan to protect value in an energy transition,” id. at 14. This failure to grapple with transition risk was in contrast to its peers who “have shown it is possible to begin gradually diversifying – and embracing long-term total emissions reduction targets – while maintaining focus on core business profitability.” Id. at 27. However, with a stake amounting to a mere 0.02% of Exxon’s shares outstanding,237Matt Phillips, Exxon’s Board Defeat Signals the Rise of Social-Good Activists, N.Y. Times (June 9, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/06/09/business/exxon-mobil-engine-no1-activist.html [https://perma.cc/XM32-J3YY]. Engine No. 1 had to win the votes of other institutional investors in order to succeed. In this regard, it reflected precisely the type of challenge faced by proponents of ESV ideas: namely, how could it convince other investors that Exxon was somehow failing to see how its existing policies were destroying long-term shareholder value? Consistent with our analysis of the limits of ESV, the answer was through highlighting a lack of information238For instance, Engine No. 1 argued that the “[b]oard of ExxonMobil will be addressing the most important questions facing the energy industry for years to come,” Exxon Mobil Corp., supra note 235, at 73, but stunningly, not one of ExxonMobil’s independent directors had any prior energy industry experience, id. at 19 (“Prior to our campaign, ExxonMobil’s Board had no independent directors with [prior] energy experience.”). It was for this reason that Engine No. 1 advanced a director slate that could provide the expertise that it believed the “[b]oard has been missing – directors with diverse yet highly relevant backgrounds who have successfully tackled energy industry challenges and bring decades of experience in conventional and alternative forms of energy to help best position ExxonMobil for greater long-term value creation.” Id. at 73; see also FAQs, Reenergize Exxon https://reenergizexom.com/faqs [https://perma.cc/3SW5-FS9T] (“The four highly qualified, independent individuals we have identified can bring to the ExxonMobil Board much-needed experience in value-creating, transformational change in the energy sector.”). and a lack of incentives239For instance, Engine No. 1 criticized the company’s compensation plans for creating “misaligned incentives.” Exxon Mobile Corp., supra note 235, at 57. It also emphasized the inverse relationship between management compensation and stock performance, arguing that the “[d]isconnect results in part from compensation plans that can reward volumes over sustainable value.” Id. at 59. In contrast to its peers, Engine No. 1 noted that ExxonMobil provided little disclosure regarding how managers were held accountable for cost overruns. Id. Nor did the company follow its peers in utilizing a management scorecard with “well defined weights for metrics and targets” that were tied to energy transition risk. Id. at 60; see also id. at 70 (providing examples of “many peer compensation metrics [that] have evolved to incentivize management to create value by looking at the energy transition as an opportunity”). Instead, the company often resorted to “ad hoc” changes to its compensation plans to encourage investment. Id. at 60. As a result, Engine No. 1 argued, “In the same way that ExxonMobil’s changes to incentive plans to reward production led to a focus on growth even as returns declined, we believe the lack of material energy transition metrics could discourage a focus on the future.” Id. at 70. among Exxon’s management. In the end, its message resonated with a critical audience of institutional investors,240Phillips, supra note 237 (“The tiny firm wouldn’t have had a chance were it not for an unusual twist: the support of some of Exxon’s biggest institutional investors.”). Many of these investors expressly acknowledged the ESV-oriented arguments advanced by Engine No. 1. For instance, in statements explaining their support for the dissident board candidates, institutional investors concurred with Engine No. 1’s critique of the company’s performance, particularly its approach to capital allocation, and its “long-term financial underperformance” relative to its industry peers. Cal. Pub. Emp.’s Ret. Sys., SEC Shareowner Alert – Notice of Exempt Solicitation (Form PX14A6G) 1 (May 10, 2021); State St. Glob. Advisors, 2021 Proxy Contest: Exxon Mobil Corporation (XOM) 1 (2021). Investors also expressed concern about the “board dynamics” highlighted by Engine No. 1, particularly its lack of information, with Vanguard highlighting “concerns about the lack of energy sector expertise in its boardroom,” Vanguard Grp., Inc., Voting Insights: A Proxy Contest and Shareholder Proposals Related to Material Risk Oversight at ExxonMobil 2 (2021), https://corporate.
vanguard.com/content/dam/corp/advocate/investment-stewardship/pdf/perspectives-and-commentary/
Exxon_1663547_052021.pdf [https://perma.cc/JH6Z-5DLT], and BlackRock stating the board would benefit from “the addition of diverse energy experience,” BlackRock, Vote Bulletin: ExxonMobil Corporation 4 (2021), https://www.blackrock.com/corporate/literature/press-release/blk-vote-bulletin-exxon-may-2021.pdf [https://perma.cc/DRT4-VPA5]. The incentives argument was also referenced, though not as explicitly as in Engine No. 1’s critique, with Vanguard alluding to “questions about board independence” that it had raised with Exxon for a number of years. Vanguard Grp., Inc., supra, at 2. Several investors also commented on Exxon’s failure to plan adequately for the energy transition and the long-term value of Exxon. For example, in its statement, BlackRock noted that “Exxon and its Board need to further assess the company’s strategy and board expertise against the possibility that demand for fossil fuels may decline rapidly in the coming decades,” adding that the company’s “current reluctance to do so presents a corporate governance issue that has the potential to undermine the company’s long-term financial sustainability.” BlackRock, supra, at 3. Likewise, Vanguard explained that it grounded its “assessment on how any changes to the board’s composition would affect [Exxon’s] ability to oversee risk and strategy and ultimately lead to outcomes in the best interest of long-term shareholders.” Vanguard Grp., Inc., supra, at 2.
allowing Engine No. 1 to win a contested director election to place three new directors on the board of ExxonMobil.

To be clear, we are not arguing that Engine No. 1 was correct in its critique of Exxon’s management on shareholder value grounds. Exxon’s management heavily disputed that claim, and we remain agnostic. Our claim instead is that the intervention was framed in ESV terms, and the key deciders—large institutional investors—appear to have evaluated Engine No. 1’s candidates based on shareholder value considerations.

B.  A Research Agenda for ESV

We conclude by briefly outlining a set of research questions about ESV that we think would shed light on the ultimate scope for further improvements to CSR through ESV-motivated reforms and that we hope future scholarship will address.

First, how big is the gap between perfect ESV behavior (that is, fully realizing all opportunities to further stakeholder interests that also benefit shareholders) and actual corporate behavior with respect to various social issues? In some areas it may be that calls for reforms to corporate practices, even though ostensibly based on ESV considerations, are actually better understood as stakeholderist in nature. It may be that public policy is a better tool for responding to those cases than appeals for CSR. But in other areas there may be substantial scope for further improvements to corporate practice on ESV grounds.

Second, what are the main reasons that corporations fail to realize ESV opportunities? Investigating past episodes of reform to corporate conduct might reveal the extent to which such failures stem from lack of information versus incentive conflicts. For example, has recent empirical research documenting the firm value generated by treating workers well241See Edmans, Does the Stock Market Fully Vale Intangibles?, supra note 62, at 623; Edmans, The Link Between Job Satisfaction and Firm Value, supra note 62, at 9–11. led to the spread of such practices in the corporate world? Diagnosing the underlying causes of failure to engage in CSR in ways that benefit shareholders might in turn provide insights into how to intervene in the system to improve corporate performance.

Third, and relatedly, what are the contours of the ESV reform agenda with regard to interventions and corporate governance reforms that might improve CSR in ways that further shareholders’ interests? For example, to what extent do governance reforms intended to encourage longer time horizons in management decision-making affect CSR behavior? How can executive compensation arrangements advance ESV considerations? Do popular ESV-oriented interventions—such as enhanced climate disclosures, creating board risk oversight or “sustainability” committees,242Lynn S. Paine, Sustainability in the Boardroom, Harv. Bus. Rev., July–Aug. 2014, at 88; Lisa M. Fairfax, Board Committee Charters and ESG Accountability, 12 Harv. Bus. L. Rev. 371, 386–95 (2022). and appointing independent directors with broader experiences—actually affect CSR decision-making?

Fourth, who exactly are the key actors who might be persuaded by ESV arguments for reform to corporate practices? To what extent are managers, independent directors, and institutional investors persuadable on different ESV issues to act to further such reforms?

CONCLUSION

At the turn of the twenty-first century, leading commentators announced an “end of history for corporate law,” declaring that “[t]here is no longer any serious competitor to the view that corporate law should principally strive to increase long-term shareholder value.”243Henry Hansmann & Reinier Kraakman, The End of History for Corporate Law, 89 Geo. L.J. 439, 439 (2000). Yet the two decades since have witnessed continued developments in corporate law theory and practice that seek to find new pathways for generating more socially responsible corporate behavior. These include new shareholder-centric perspectives that go beyond shareholder value and focus managers instead on more holistic conceptions of shareholder welfare. And even within the traditional paradigm of shareholder wealth maximization, promising innovations abound, including in ways that might improve broader social outcomes. All of these developments suggest to us that the history of corporate law has not yet been fully written, and in this Article, we have tried to assess aspects of this latest chapter. Despite the seeming appeal of conceptualizing shareholder interests in broader terms, on closer examination shareholder welfarism offers little hope for improved corporate conduct. Rather, for those seeking to promote corporate social responsibility, the way forward is through a more thoroughgoing, dare we say enlightened, pursuit of shareholder value.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 417

Download

* W.A. Franke Professor of Law and Business, Stanford Law School.

† Robert B. McKay Professor of Law, New York University School of Law. For helpful comments and discussions, we are grateful to Emiliano Catan, John Donohue, Alex Edmans, Jill Fisch, Stavros Gadinis, Jeff Gordon, Oliver Hart, Marcel Kahan, Louis Kaplow, Lewis Kornhauser, Zach Liscow, Dorothy Lund, Veronica Martinez, Curtis Milhaupt, Michael Ohlrogge, Frank Partnoy, Elizabeth Pollman, Ed Rock, Roberta Romano, Holger Spamann, Michael Simkovic, Jeff Strnad, Anne Tucker, Luigi Zingales, Jonathon Zytnick, and seminar participants at Columbia Law School, Cornell Law School, Duke University School of Law, Fordham University School of Law, Georgetown University Law Center, Harvard Law School, Hebrew University, NYU School of Law, Stanford Law School, University of Michigan Law School, USC Gould School of Law, the UC Berkeley/Duke Organizations and Social Impact Conference, and the Corporate Law Academic Workshop Series. Ginger Hervey provided outstanding research assistance.

The Discriminatory Religion Clauses

The Supreme Court’s decision in Carson v. Makin is the third in a trilogy of cases dramatically upending the meaning of the First Amendment’s Religion Clauses. Beginning with Trinity Lutheran v. Comer in 2017 and followed by Espinoza v. Montana Department of Revenue in 2020, the Court has moved forward with an aggressive project of transforming the Religion Clauses into a broad anti-religious-discrimination clause. In this paper, I trace this doctrinal devolution and argue that the Court’s novel reinterpretation is deeply misguided. By design, the Religion Clauses require discrimination—religion is to be treated differently from non-religion in a broad range of state action. The contemporary Supreme Court, however, has inverted this most basic insight. The Court’s new Religion Clause jurisprudence is also on a collision course with its burgeoning government speech doctrine. This doctrine recognizes that in a democratic polity, every policy choice entails paths not chosen. Government must be able to select its own message, and in turn, discriminate against those messages it wishes not to communicate, tempered by accountability at the ballot box. Granted, to say that discrimination is sometimes required under the Religion Clauses and the Government Speech Doctrine is not to say discrimination against religion is always constitutional. Protections against objectionable discrimination remain as vital as ever. The Court’s public forum doctrine, for example, protects free expression of religion from content-based discrimination when the government itself is not speaking. The heart of the Court’s recent Religion Clause decisions, however, is a jurisprudentially backward constitutional mandate that government actively subsidize religious speech to avoid a Religion Clause “discrimination” claim. It is a command that government express ideas it may not wish to express. The Court’s reimagining of the Religion Clauses is inconsistent with the First Amendment’s original meaning, potentially harmful to both government and religion, and in direct tension with the Government Speech Doctrine.

 

What a difference five years makes. In 2017, I feared that the Court was “lead[ing] us . . . to a place where separation of church and state is a constitutional slogan, not a constitutional commitment.” Today, the Court leads us to a place where separation of church and state becomes a constitutional violation.

—Justice Sonia Sotomayor1Carson v. Makin, 142 S. Ct. 1987, 2014 (2022) (Sotomayor, J., dissenting).

INTRODUCTION

The Religion Clauses of the First Amendment require discrimination. Such an assertion may appear counterintuitive in an era prone to viewing subjects of controversy through a lens of equality, but by their very terms the Free Exercise Clause and the Establishment Clause demand that religion be treated differently from other objects of government attention. Today, however, the Supreme Court tells us a different story. Despite the clear language in the Constitution, the Court’s most recent jurisprudence suggests that the religion clauses do something very different than what the words chosen by their framers would suggest.

Beginning in 2017, the Court moved forward with an aggressive project of transforming the Religion Clauses into a broad anti-religious discrimination clause. In this paper, I trace this doctrinal misadventure and argue that the Court’s novel reinterpretation is deeply misguided. This approach, I contend, is precisely backwards. The Religion Clauses are not the Equal Protection Clause. The Court’s conflation of the Religion Clauses with anti-discrimination principles directly contravenes the design and intended function of this critical part of the First Amendment. It is also antithetical to a core principle of popular sovereignty: that a state—and hence, the people—must be able to choose its own priorities and be held accountable for the choices it makes, a key premise underlying the Court’s government speech doctrine.

There are many reasons to find fault in Constitutional doctrine. But whether it is substantive due process and the meaning of the word “liberty” in the Fourteenth Amendment or the right to keep and bear arms in the Second Amendment, such critiques typically boil down to this: the Court is either reading too far into the language of the Constitution or not far enough. It is either finding more meaning then is there, or too little. With the Court’s most recent turn in its religion clause jurisprudence something very different has occurred. Instead of going too far or not far enough, the Court has effectively inverted the very purpose of the Religion Clauses. These clauses, as designed by framers with an understanding of the weighty historical role religion has played in society and governance, carve out religion for a uniquely nuanced, one-of-a-kind treatment. Religion is special. It receives an unusual and distinctive protection from government intervention and is subjected to unusual and distinctive limitations on government support. In between these two constitutional poles established by the Religion Clauses, governments have discretion to make religion-related policy choices. But the unique Janus-faced design of the Religion Clauses sends a clear message: the Constitution requires that religion be treated differently.

Up until 2017, critics of the Court’s religion clause jurisprudence generally fell into the standard camps. They argued, for example, that the Court was restricting too much government activity that “respect[s] an establishment of religion,” as Justice Stewart did in his dissent in Engel v. Vitale addressing a nondenominational school prayer.2Engel v. Vitale, 370 U.S. 421, 444–50 (1962) (Stewart, J., dissenting). Such an exercise, to Stewart, simply did not rise to the level of establishing an “official religion.”3Id. at 450 (Stewart, J., dissenting). Other critics have argued that the Court was not capacious enough in defining what it means to “prohibit” the free exercise of religion, such as Justice Brennan’s dissent in Braunfeld v. Brown, in which he asserted that making a religious practice “economically disadvantageous” should be a sufficient free exercise claim.4Braunfeld v. Brown, 366 U.S. 599, 616 (1961). These cases turned on the unique status of religion––and the extent to which government was treating it differently, as required by the Constitution. And in some contemporary cases, it is still taking this approach, moving the needle much more aggressively than in the past, siding with critics who have supported expansive, and distinctive “free exercise” protection.5See Kennedy v. Bremerton Sch. Dist. 142 S. Ct. 2407 (2022). But as of 2017, the Court also started asking an entirely different, and contradictory question. Inexplicably, differential treatment of religion went from a Constitutional mandate to a Constitutional infraction. 

The first sixteen words of the U.S. Constitution’s First Amendment are straight forward: “Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof . . . .”6U.S. Const. amend. I. The constitutional historian Leonard Levy has asserted that “Nowhere in the making of the Bill of Rights was the original intent and meaning clearer than in the case of religious freedom.”7Leonard W. Levy, The Establishment Clause: Religion and the First Amendment xv (1986). On its face this language prohibits the federal government from making or enforcing laws that do either of two independent things: respect an establishment of religion or prohibit the free exercise of religion. For over three-quarters of a century, this language has been understood to have been incorporated by the Fourteenth Amendment, and thus to apply with equal vigor to the states as to the federal government.8See Cantwell v. Connecticut, 310 U.S. 296 (1940).

In addition to defining precisely what is included in the category of laws “respecting an establishment of religion” or “prohibiting the free exercise,”9Philip B. Kurland, The Origins of the Religion Clauses of the Constitution, 27 Wm. & Mary L. Rev. 839, 856 (1986) (quoting U.S. Const. amend. I, cl. 1). the key interpretive challenge of these two clauses has been their inherent tension. In devising the unique structure of the religion clauses (or, we might say religion clause, singular, to emphasize the interdependence of the anti-establishment and free exercise principles) the framers left behind a distinctive jurisprudential task for courts, incomparable to any other part of the Constitution. What is required or implicitly encouraged by one clause might appear to be prohibited by the other––and in between there may be a zone—what the Court has long referred to as a “play in the joints”10Walz v. Tax Comm’n, 397 U.S. 664, 669 (1970).—where a government may, but is not required, to advance the interests of free exercise or anti-establishment without being prohibited from doing so by the countervailing clause.

The precise contours of the religion clauses continue to be worked out. The drafting history of the religion clauses—particularly, the meaning the framers intended to give to an “establishment of religion”—leaves us with gaping holes in our understanding.11Levy, supra note 7, at 84. One notable area of disagreement in the late twentieth century, for example, has been the debate among jurists and scholars as to whether establishment demands so-called strict separation between church and state or mere nonpreferentialism, that is, not preferring one sect or religion over another.12David Reiss, Jefferson and Madison as Icons in Judicial History: A Study of Religion Clause Jurisprudence, 61 Md. L. Rev. 94, 126 (2002). Various justices on the Supreme Court have long presented differing framings of history in their Religion Clause jurisprudence, confirming that the historical “record does not speak in one voice.”13Id. at 144. But regardless of where one falls in these debates, and however “religion” may be defined, one thing seemingly remained a constant: the religion clauses of the First Amendment single out a thing called “religion” for disparate treatment. While the debate was not definitively settled over precisely where the lines of impermissible establishment or prohibition on free exercise should be drawn, what was clear was that the Constitution established unique lines for religion, prohibiting both governmental favoritism as well as active suppression.

This idiosyncratic Constitutional status of religion vis-à-vis government, which may be seen as a form of mandatory discrimination, is grounded in a set of founding-era philosophical beliefs about the need to protect religion from government and government from religion. As Thomas Jefferson wrote in an 1802 letter to the Danbury Baptist Association, the First Amendment “buil[t] a wall of separation between Church & State.”14Thomas Jefferson’s Letter to the Danbury Baptists (Jan. 1, 1802), https://www.
loc.gov/loc/lcib/9806/danpre.html [https://perma.cc/2D4H-5ZGJ].
And while some scholars have disputed the significance of Jefferson’s famed “wall of separation” metaphor, in 1947 the Supreme Court affirmed Jefferson’s reading in forceful terms. It did not merely agree that “[t]he First Amendment has erected a wall between church and state,” 15Everson v. Bd. of Educ., 330 U.S. 1, 18 (1947). it emphasized that the “wall must be kept high and impregnable.”16Id.

 In 2022 however, the Court issued an opinion that was nothing short of radical. For the Religion Clauses, it was a world turned upside-down. This is not to say that changes had not been on the horizon. Before the recent seismic leap, the Court’s religion jurisprudence had been on a steady retreat from the Jeffersonian vision, particularly as we passed into the new millennium. But Carson v. Makin, capping off a trio of cases that began in 2017, was of a different magnitude.

 Thomas Jefferson’s “wall of separation” between church and state has gone from a route impeded by a barrier “high and impregnable” twenty-five years ago, to one riddled with easily breached fissures shortly thereafter, to an obstruction not merely demolished but replaced and paved over by a wide road—with a shuttle bus travelers are compelled to ride and a fare they are compelled to pay. In Carson the Court did not merely backtrack from its longstanding prohibition on the expenditure of government funds on sectarian schooling; it held, for the first time, that the Free Exercise Clause prohibits a state from not using taxpayer money to fund religious education.17Carson v. Makin, 142 S. Ct. 1987, 2010 (2022). A government, in other words, may be constitutionally obligated to do, what for most of the Court’s jurisprudential history addressing the religion clauses it had been forbidden from doing: paying for religious education.

This was so despite the glaring objection that such funding directly conflicts with a straight-forward, textual reading of the Constitution’s prohibition of any law “respecting an establishment of religion.”18U.S. Const. amend. I. Government may be required to utilize taxpayer funds to pay for religious education in spite of the strong belief of the First Amendment’s framers “that no person, either believer or non-believer, should be taxed to support a religious institution of any kind.”19Everson, 330 U.S. at 12. Government may be compelled to provide an affirmative benefit to religion, despite an absence of evidence that it is in fact “prohibiting” a religion’s free exercise. Indeed, a state may be required to pay for religious education even in the face of its own strong policy reasons for not doing so. How did this happen? And what is the constitutional basis for this revolutionary reformulation?

Carson v. Makin and the two cases leading up to its holding transformed the Free Exercise Clause into an anti-religious-discrimination clause. The Religion Clauses however, were designed to produce the very opposite result, to ensure that religion was treated differently. Religion receives special treatment in the Constitution, precisely because the framers appreciated its unique power. Religion has the ability to inspire, to shape humankind’s deepest and most intimate sense of meaning and well-being, to establish and frame social obligations that supersede or conflict with civic commitments, and to ignite wars, social instability, and bloodshed. In the words of Roger Williams, the theologian and founder of Rhode Island whose religious advocacy for separating church and state left an indelible imprint during America’s colonial era, “[t]he blood of so many hundred thousand souls of Protestants and papists, spilled in the wars of present and former ages for their respective consciences, is not required nor accepted by Jesus Christ the Prince of Peace.”20Mark A. Graber, Foreword: Our Paradoxical Religion Clauses, 69 Md. L. Rev. 8, 9 (2009) (quoting Roger Williams, The Bloudy Tenent of Persecution for Cause of Conscience 1 (Edward Bean Underhill ed., The Society 1848) (1644)).

While a vast sphere of human activity is open to government control, establishing an array of rules determining, for example, the boundaries of criminal and civil conduct, Williams emphasized that religion is different. “God requires not a uniformity of religion to be enacted and enforced in any civil state; which enforced uniformity, sooner or later, is the greatest occasion of civil war, ravishing of conscience . . . .”21Id. at 10. According to historian Leonard Levy, James Madison believed that state “[e]stablishments produced bigotry and persecution, defiled religion, corrupted government, and ended in spiritual and political tyranny.”22Levy, supra note 7, at 55. It was clear that religion, in short, must receive special treatment in its relation to the state.

Carson, however, tells us that this is all wrong. Religion is instead to be treated the same as other human endeavors—at least, for certain purposes. Instead of standing as a mandate for distinctive treatment of religion, the newly reconfigured twenty-first century Religion Clauses, prohibit distinctive treatment. How did the Court justify such a profound—and some might say bizarre—reversal? One explanation is that the Court was drawing on the post-Civil War legacy of the Fourteenth Amendment and modern-America’s strong ethic of opposing inequality and discrimination in its many forms.

Perhaps some justices were also responding to an underlying feeling that religious adherents are looked down upon by societal elites and had not been invited onto the equality train with the same gusto as other identity groups; perhaps this jurisprudential turn was their chance at a ticket. Justice Scalia made such feelings clear in a 2004 dissent when he complained that

[o]ne need not delve too far into modern popular culture to perceive a trendy disdain for deep religious conviction. In an era when the Court is so quick to come to the aid of other disfavored groups, . . . its indifference [to those who dedicate their lives to the ministry], which involves a form of discrimination to which the Constitution actually speaks, is exceptional.23Locke v. Davey, 540 U.S. 712, 733 (2004) (Scalia, J., dissenting).

 An aggrieved Justice Thomas, in his recent Espinoza concurrence, points the finger directly at other justices, lamenting that “this Court has an unfortunate tendency to prefer certain constitutional rights over others . . . The Free Exercise Clause . . . rests on the lowest rung . . . .”24Espinoza v. Mont. Dep’t of Revenue, 140 S. Ct. 2246, 2267 (2020) (Thomas, J., concurring).

It is possible that the Court is taking its cues from grievances such as these. But whatever the motive, the Court had decided, without acknowledging that it was doing so, to completely reimagine the Religion Clauses. In the Carson trio the First Amendment’s religion clauses are framed, not as they have been traditionally construed, as granting religion a unique constitutional status, but as a demand that religion effectively be placed on the same plane as everything else. Granted, this insistence on anti-religious discrimination is not evenly applied. As we shall discuss further, its flattening of the religion clauses is selective. In other contexts, the Court—in the very same term it decided Carson—concluded that a state employee, while acting within his official duties, has special rights of religious expression and practice that he would not possess outside of the religious sphere.25See Kennedy v. Bremerton Sch. Dist. 142 S. Ct. 2407 (2022).

I.  WHY DISCRIMINATION?

Although it may not be commonly acknowledged, government is in the discrimination business. It discriminates every time it “establish[es] Justice, insure[s] domestic Tranquility, provide[s] for the common defence, promote[s] the general Welfare, and secure[s] the Blessings of Liberty.”26U.S. Const. pmbl. All of these ends, eloquently laid out by the founding fathers in the Preamble of the U.S. Constitution, necessarily require America’s government of “we the people” to make choices. There are many routes to realizing, maintaining, and even defining domestic tranquility, the general welfare, and core liberties. And for every policy choice, there are paths not chosen. In a world of scarce resources and fierce disputes over how to allocate those resources to best achieve societal goals, government must not merely decide how much to allocate to particular goals, but which goals are worthy of its energies in the first place.

In a functional and sustainable democracy, this process of discrimination ideally keeps a polity on a trajectory of responsiveness and improvement. Government discrimination allows the state to make discerning choices that take into account an array of complex interests and counter-interests. It allows for action rather than paralysis in light of the needs and pressures coming from a multitude of directions, the often overwhelming and conflicting demands that are part and parcel of having to accommodate a large, diverse, and pluralistic population. Government discrimination in a working democracy means that hard choices will be made; costs will be weighed against benefits. But ultimately, if democracy is functioning in its ideal form, these choices will generally reflect societal values, interests, and goals, while helping correct for the errors of the past as they become evident.

Being “discriminating” thus may be associated with thoughtful, careful, decision-making. And indeed, the Constitution itself not only invites relatively open-ended policy-based discrimination rooted in democratic deliberation, but the document in many places calls for particular kinds of discrimination. It tells us in Article II that we must discriminate against those who are not “natural born” when choosing a president.27U.S. Const. art. II, § 1. While the federal government has the power to “lay and collect Taxes,”28U.S. Const. art. I, § 8, cl. 1. certain kinds of taxes are explicitly verboten (or “discriminated against”) such as tariffs “laid on Articles exported from any State.”29U.S. Const. art. I, § 9, cl. 5. A similar form of discrimination characterizes the Religion Clauses of the First Amendment; religion is explicitly designated as a subject of government regulation to be treated differently from non-religion in a broad range of state action.

Granted, this was not the case under the initial conception devised at the 1787 Constitutional Convention in Philadelphia. The framers’ original notion was one in which the federal government was to be inherently limited to powers enumerated in Article I. Since regulation or establishment of religion was not explicitly included among these powers, a discriminatory carve-out for religion was thought to be superfluous. A bill of rights, including such special treatment for religion, was initially deemed unnecessary because as Madison explained, “[t]here is not a shadow of right in the general government to intermeddle with religion.”303 Jonathan Elliot, The Debates in the Several State Conventions on the Adoption of the Federal Constitution 330 (2d ed. 1836). Other founding era notables however, remained skeptical. Many states conditioned their support of the new charter on a pledge to make the implicit, explicit.31 Steven D. Smith, The Religion Clauses in Constitutional Scholarship, 74 Notre Dame L. Rev. 1033, 1038 (1999). Madison was ultimately persuaded of the merits of this alternative view held by many Anti-Federalists. He became concerned that

under the clause of the constitution, which gave power to congress to make all laws necessary and proper to carry into execution the constitution, and the laws made under it, [congress may be] enabled . . . to make laws of such a nature as might infringe the rights of conscience, or establish a national religion . . . .32Id. at 1039 (quoting James Madison).

Madison realized that even under a regime of limited government in which federal powers are circumscribed by their enumeration in Article I, the government may use its lawful powers in ways yet unanticipated––and that this exertion of power may bleed into religious establishment or the freedom of individual exercise. Because the constitutional structure that limited government power could not be relied upon as the sole guarantor that church and state would be confined to separate spheres, as with other discrete topics, insurance in the form of the Bill of Rights was deemed expedient. And with religion, the remedy was especially distinctive. The two clauses of the First Amendment do not merely single out religion, but do so in an unusual Janus-faced manner suited to the sui generous dilemma that plagued the history of church-state relations. As Justice Robert Jackson explained, “the Constitution sets up [a difference] between religion and almost every other subject matter of legislation, a difference which goes to the very root of religious freedom . . . .”33Everson v. Bd. of Educ., 330 U.S. 1, 26 (1947) (Jackson, J., dissenting).

Religion-related practices receive special discriminatory free exercise benefits exempting them from targeted restrictive governmental regulation that in non-religious spheres would constitute an ordinary part of democratic governance. A wide array of behaviors are targeted by government for distinctive kinds of punishment, prohibition, or penalty, but actions that relate to religion—unlike these other realms of behavior—may not be targeted. They receive a free pass from the Free Exercise Clause of the First Amendment. At the same time that government is generally free to choose to partner with, endorse or incorporate a diverse range of philosophical worldviews, values, or private institutions into its operations, religion may not be among them. Religion is uniquely burdened by the Establishment Clause’s distinctive prohibition on intermingling religion and government.

The two religion clauses simultaneously work together and are at odds with one another. On one hand, they may be said to serve similar ends. “An establishment, Madison argued, ‘violated the free exercise of religion’ and would ‘subvert public liberty.’ ”34Levy, supra note 7, at 168. On the other, they appear in direct tension, one seeming to facilitate religious practice by specially prohibiting government interference and the other seeming to discourage religious practice by specially withholding government largess. The clauses both demand unique benefits for, and impose distinctive burdens on, religion––and sometimes these simultaneous constitutional commands overlap, producing puzzling and uncertain results. It is this apparent paradox that set the stage for a peculiar species of constitutional doctrine, an anomalous and sensitive area of jurisprudence with one common baseline: religion must be treated differently.

II.  DEFINING DISCRIMINATION

The Britannica Dictionary defines “discriminating” as “able to recognize the difference between things that are of good quality and those that are not.”35Discriminating, Britannica Dictionary, https://www.britannica.com/dictionary/

discriminating [https://perma.cc/5UN5-LKX3].
However, discrimination is a word with more than one definition. Discrimination may simply describe the act of “recogniz[ing] a difference between things.”36Discriminate, Britannica Dictionary, https://www.britannica.com/dictionary/discriminate [https://perma.cc/46AX-56WV]. Today, the word “discrimination” is commonly understood as a pejorative. A country founded on egalitarian ideals, with a shamefully inegalitarian past and a present in which identity politics are paramount, has given the word “discrimination” toxic properties. This contemporary understanding aligns with another definition, courtesy of Oxford: to “discriminate” is “to treat one person or group worse/better than another in an unfair way.”37Discriminate, Oxford Learner’s Dictionary, https://www.oxfordlearnersdictionaries.
com/us/definition/english/discriminate [https://perma.cc/PBJ3-LR48].

The First Amendment demands that government treat religion in ways that are arguably both “worse” and “better” than the treatment of other subjects garnering the government’s attention. However, such differential treatment is arguably the epitome of “fairness,” that is if one believes applying clearly stated rules of the U.S. Constitution with principled consistency may generally be understood to be a paradigmatic example of “fairness.” Thus, this latter––pejorative––definition is inapposite to the religion clauses. Yet, merely attaching the word “discrimination” to any government action—whether it be in a political speech, a New York Times op-ed, a Fox News commentary, or a Supreme Court opinion—casts reflexive doubt on that act’s legitimacy. Thus, the irony: use of the phrase “government discrimination against religion”—a constitutional mandate serving the interests of both government and religion—will likely strike the average listener as a nefarious wrong.

There are of course many forms of discrimination that are rightfully prohibited by the Fourteenth Amendment, such as invidious differential treatment based on an individual’s race, gender, or sexual orientation. Other forms of identity-based discrimination, including discrimination rooted in religious animus, may be precluded by statutory anti-discrimination laws. However, the existence of unfair or unjust forms of discrimination—that in some cases are forbidden by the Constitution—should not be used to create the misleading impression that the vital government discrimination required by aspects of the First Amendment is in fact an inherent evil that must be stamped out. Acknowledging that parts of the Constitution require or permit some forms of discrimination does not detract from the continued need (or ability under the law) to combat bigotry.

Granted, in certain contexts, evidence that a government is “discriminating” against or in favor of a particular religion may expose a potential Religion Clause violation. But this is not because the clauses contain a general anti-discrimination principle comparable to the Equal Protection Clause or statutory anti-discrimination law, rather, it is because they demand religion be treated differently from other objects of governmental attention.38See, e.g., Est. of Thornton v. Caldor, 472 U.S. 703 (1985). With other government action, the default is that a democratic state generally must be able to make discriminating distinctions in its policy and enforcement choices.

Discrimination is a baseline for an effective governance. It is the stuff of democratic and legal contestation. Thus, for purposes of this article, I will generally use discrimination in its non-pejorative form—as a mere act of recognizing distinctions between different classes of things resulting in some form of differential treatment. Yes, “discrimination” can be unjust or unfair. “Anti-discrimination” laws and the scrutiny courts apply to invidious discrimination under the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment have long been directed at such unjust forms of discrimination. However, discrimination can also suggest a kind of discernment that is more typically lauded—such as the ability to distinguish a Matisse or a rigorous scientific study at a top research university from the work produced by a seventh grader in their art or science class. In between the extremes there is enormous room to debate as to whether particular distinctions drawn and differences applied are beneficial or harmful, unfair or justified. And, the Court had historically made such “breathing room” between the discrimination required (or merely allowed) under the Free Exercise Clause and the discrimination required (or merely allowed) under the Establishment Clause, a central component of its religion clause jurisprudence.39See, e.g., Walz v. Tax Comm’n, 397 U.S. 664, 669 (1970).

Nonetheless, words are powerful things. They can be used to manipulate, as well as elucidate. Unfortunately, conflating various definitions of “discrimination,” which is all too common today, may serve the former end. A casual use of the word may create the false impression that particular differential treatment is morally or normatively suspect, when in fact it may be socially desirable––or even a legal requirement. Regretfully, the Supreme Court has gotten in on the act. The Religion Clauses of the First Amendment, very much unlike the Equal Protection Clause, mandate discrimination. Yet, as we shall see, recent religion jurisprudence has mischaracterized “discrimination” as a Constitutional wrong, instead of a Constitutional imperative.

III.  HOW WE GOT HERE: THE LOCKE DISSENT FORESHADOWS A NEW FIRST AMENDMENT

A state may have free reign when it comes to establishing an official state bird, flower, or song, but the Establishment Clause insists that religion is different. That same state may not establish Buddhism or Zoroastrianism or Christianity as its official religion. And the Constitution commands not merely that government shall “make no law respecting an establishment of religion,” it may not prohibit “the free exercise thereof” either.40U.S. Const. amend. I. The state, in the guise of its police powers, may regulate, prohibit, punish, and penalize a full spectrum of human behavior, unless that behavior it is targeting constitutes “an exercise of religion.” While political and constitutional theorists may debate the reasons for this mandatory discrimination––many, including Madison, suggest it serves both the interests of the government and the respective religion that may not be established by the government.41Reiss, supra note 12, at 103. While one might debate the extent and nature of the qualitative benefits Madison foresaw, it is “discrimination” loud and clear.

The Court acknowledged this plain reading of the First Amendment as recently as 2004 in a decision by then Chief Justice Rehnquist. He pointed out, in the context of potential state funding for religious training, that the First Amendment’s unique approach to religion “find[s] no counterpart with respect to other callings or professions. That a State would deal differently with religious education for the ministry than with education for other callings [in other words, that it would discriminate] is a product of these views, not evidence of hostility toward religion.”42Locke v. Davey, 540 U.S. 712, 721 (2004). It was not surprising that his opinion allowing for a selective government scholarship program that excluded theological training read like an exercise in constitutional common sense, with just two dissenters. After all, it had only been two years since the Court, in a controversial 5–4 Establishment Clause decision, first allowed a school voucher program that provided tuition aid to private religious schools to stand.43Zelman v. Simmons-Harris, 536 U.S. 639 (2002).

However, beginning with Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia v. Comer in 2017, followed by Espinoza v. Montana Department of Revenue in 2020, and most recently, in Carson v. Makin in 2022, the Court radically inverted this natural and widely accepted reading of the Religion Clauses. Admittedly, this novel interpretation of the religion clauses did not appear out of the ether. In that same case in which Chief Justice Rehnquist issued his short ten-page majority opinion rejecting the free exercise inspired demand that the State of Washington pay for a student’s post-secondary religious schooling, Justices Scalia and Thomas dissented and articulated the view that would become the approach of a Court majority beginning in 2017.44Locke, 540 U.S. at 726–34.

For many decades prior to this decision, the Court had interpreted the Establishment Clause as an outright bar on state funding of religious exercise.45Carson v. Makin, 142 S. Ct. 1987, 2012 (2022). However, beginning in the late 1990s, with the case of Agostini v. Felton,46Agostini v. Felton, 521 U.S. 203 (1997).and culminating in Zelman v. Simmons-Harris in 2002, the Court orchestrated what Professor Nelson Tebbe has called a “contemporary turnabout” in its antiestablishment law.47Nelson Tebbe, Excluding Religion, 156 U. Pa. L. Rev. 1263, 1265 (2008). Indirect aid to parents for vouchers to pay for religious education, and even some direct aid to religious institutions, was now a constitutional policy option for legislators across the nation.48Id. at 1266. 

With Zelman, the Court’s religion jurisprudence had just jumped from a world in which government funding of religious education had been presumed to be unconstitutional under the Establishment Clause, to one in which a closely divided Court tenuously held that it was permitted under certain narrow circumstances. In Locke, two dissenters, just two years later, were arguing that such funding was not merely allowed, but required under the Free Exercise Clause, foreshadowing the even more radical changes that were soon to come. Effectively, these two dissenters were arguing—in contravention of the well-established conventional textual reading—that rather than requiring religion be treated differently, the religion clauses instead imposed a broad anti-discrimination mandate. In just a decade and a half, this trial run of the anti-religious-discrimination Free Exercise Clause would transform into the majority view on the Court.

Here was the dissenters’ proposed statement of the rule: “When the State makes a public benefit generally available, that benefit becomes a part of the baseline against which burdens on religion are measured; and when the State withholds that benefit from some individuals solely on the basis of religion, it violates the Free Exercise Clause . . . .”49Locke, 540 U.S. at 726–27 (Scalia J., dissenting). The logic might run as follows: “[P]rohibiting the free exercise” of religion under the First Amendment involves imposing some form of “burden” on such exercise. After all, a “prohibition” imposed by a savvy public official seeking to harm or diminish religion would not typically come in the form of a straight-forward law banning a particular religion or religiosity outright; the more strategically astute approach would be a law that indirectly makes certain elements of a religious practice more difficult, or impossible. Laws with an indirect impact on religion may burden religion. The question then becomes, how do we determine whether there has been such a “burden?” It would seem that to the Locke dissenters, if a “generally available” public benefit is not available to all, we may deem those to whom it is not available, “burdened.”

The dissent utilizes an unexpected dose of post-modern relativistic logic that puts government in the foreground. Their reasoning effectively suggests that it is outside forces—in this case the government—that establish reality for religious practitioners. A burden may be inflicted on religion not just by virtue of what government does to religion, but by virtue of what government does elsewhere. It is as if the dissenters were looking to Article III’s demand that compensation of federal judges “not be diminished during their Continuance in Office,”50U.S. Const. art. III. and reasoning that a change in tax law reducing the mortgage interest deduction is unconstitutional because it makes purchasing a home for a judge more expensive, thereby “diminishing” the relative value of their compensation. The baseline for judging whether free exercise has been burdened is not the unique, longstanding, and deeply rooted practices of the particular religion affected by the government action (or inaction), it is government policy and the relative benefits it provides to various other societal actors. With this peculiar logical maneuver, a constitutional provision that on its face demands religion be treated differently—and protected in ways that other life philosophies or practices are not—is inverted to become one that prohibits religion from being treated differently.

At the same time, the dissent begs the question, what does “generally available” mean? Clearly, all public benefits are subject to rules dictating who is, and who is not eligible. A scholarship fund for post-secondary education will presumably not be available to five-year-olds, nor to those who wish to self-educate in isolation in the woods. The concept of “general availability” requires some sort of limiting principle. If “generally available” simply means that the public benefit at issue is offered in accordance with a relatively fixed non-discretionary rule for some category or categories of non-religious purposes or beneficiaries, this anti-religious-discrimination principle would have virtually limitless application. Considering the ubiquity of government in modern society, it would be an invitation for courts to mandate government-funded religion in virtually all spheres of public life. 

For most of the jurisprudential history of the religion clauses, the Court’s primary challenge, considering the inherent tension between the Establishment and the Free Exercise Clause, has been to craft doctrines determining when, and how much discrimination is required. Must religion be discriminated against when public funds incidentally benefit religious institutions in a way that is comparable to how other (secular) institutions benefit, or only when the funds exclusively target and support a particular religion? Must an anti-discrimination law be discriminatorily applied, exempting hiring and firing decisions by religious organizations from the anti-discrimination mandates that otherwise would apply?51See, e.g., Hosanna-Tabor Evangelical Lutheran Church & Sch. v. Equal Emp. Opportunity Comm’n, 565 U.S. 171 (2012). If so, must such discriminatory exemption apply to just religious ministers, or to all employees of a religious organization? These are the sorts of questions the Court previously asked: to what extent, in what manner, and in what settings do the differential treatment rules of the religion clauses apply to religious organizations and practitioners? The two Locke dissenters inverted the doctrinal question in Religion Clause cases, reframing them as an anti-discrimination mandate.

To critique the dissenter’s approach is not to deny that a violation of the Free Exercise Clause may involve discrimination against a religion or a religious practitioner. A legal ban on Rosary Beads would both arguably prohibit the free exercise of religion for practicing Catholics and at the same time discriminate against Roman Catholicism, treating it differently from other religious practices and secular owners of beaded jewelry. A straight-forward reading of the Free Exercise Clause however, would suggest that it is the prohibition on religious exercise and not the differential treatment that constitutes the constitutional infraction.

 As the Supreme Court has itself emphasized, in the Free Exercise Clause, “[t]he crucial word . . . is ‘prohibit’: ‘For the Free Exercise Clause is written in terms of what the government cannot do to the individual, not in terms of what the individual can exact from the government.’ ”52Lyng v. Nw. Indian Cemetery Protective Ass’n, 485 U.S. 439, 451 (1988). Not only is there no evidence of a general anti-discrimination principle in the text of the Free Exercise Clause, as mentioned earlier, there is an explicit pro-discrimination principle. That is, when a broad legal restriction impacts both religious and non-religious actors, it may be that as to those affected religious individuals “free” religious “exercise” is literally being “prohibited,” entitling them, but not the non-religious affected individuals, to a discriminatory exemption from the law.

Granted, the Court has not been consistent on the question of required accommodations under the Free Exercise Clause. In a 1972 case addressing a state’s compulsory high school education law that was at odds with the practices of a particular religious community, the Court concluded that the Free Exercise Clause demands an exemption.53Wisconsin v. Yoder, 406 U.S. 205 (1972). In contrast, the 1990 case of Employment Division v. Smith suggested that such required differential treatment under the Free Exercise Clause should be construed narrowly.54Emp. Div. v. Smith, 494 U.S. 872 (1990). Then in 2012, a unanimous Court—citing both the Free Exercise and Establishment Clause—concluded that religious institutions are entitled to a ministerial exemption that allows them to fire a teacher of secular and theological subjects, even if such firing would otherwise contravene applicable anti-discrimination law.55Hosanna-Tabor, 565 U.S. at 171. The Court explained that “imposing an unwanted minister . . . infringes the Free Exercise Clause, which protects a religious group’s right to shape its own faith and mission through its appointments.”56Id. at 188.

Regardless of the uneven application over the years, the pro-discrimination implications of the Free Exercise Clause are clear. As O’Connor points out in her Smith concurrence, “A person who is barred from engaging in religiously motivated conduct is barred from freely exercising his religion . . . regardless of whether the law prohibits the conduct only when engaged in for religious reasons, only by members of that religion, or by all persons.”57Smith, 494 U.S. at 893 (O’Connor J., concurring). The free exercise remedy, if it is to apply, would only benefit the religious practitioner—freeing him or her up from an otherwise application restriction—while leaving non-religious individuals burdened. It would, in other words, discriminate between religion and non-religion, treating them differently.

The new anti-religious-discrimination interpretation, in contrast, ignores these basic mechanics of the religion clauses. Scalia’s dissenting opinion in Locke is riddled with surprisingly sloppy reasoning. To support his reading of the Religion Clauses, he draws on an analogy to racial discrimination, yet fails to mention that the Court’s jurisprudence there is rooted in an entirely different part of the Constitution, with completely different language, structure and purpose.58Locke v. Davey, 540 U.S. 712, 728 (2004). The Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment provides that “No state shall . . . deny to any person within its jurisdiction the equal protection of the laws.”59U.S. Const. amend. XIV, § 1. It was not designed with the doctrinally formidable Janus-faced structure (and resulting built-in tension) of the religion clauses—which has led the Court to acknowledge a “play in the joints” between impermissible laws “respecting an establishment of religion” and unconstitutional measures “prohibiting” religion’s “free exercise.”60Walz v. Tax Comm’n, 397 U.S. 664, 669 (1970).

In between the two clauses, in other words, there must be some room for laws that promote anti-establishment values but do not violate free exercise, and vice-versa. This is because laws aimed at avoiding establishment—in the direct sense—will almost invariably diminish free exercise; and laws intended to promote free exercise inevitably move toward establishment. It is a conundrum by design, built upon the Framers understanding of the precarious balance needed to maintain a safe buffer between church and state. The boundaries established by Court doctrine on either side necessitate judicial intervention into matters of religion that are not required of other spheres of government action. Yet, completely disregarding this unique structure of the religion clauses, Scalia instead drew a direct analogy to equal protection. To drive home his point, he argued that “A municipality hiring public contractors may not discriminate against blacks or in favor of them; it cannot discriminate a little bit each way and then plead ‘play in the joints’ when haled into court.”61Locke, 540 U.S. at 728 (Scalia, J., dissenting). But unlike the Equal Protection Clause this is precisely what the religion clauses require––discrimination—a delicate dance between anti-establishment and free exercise in which religion is given special treatment on both ends.

History is riddled with religious wars and instability. The Framers’ innovative formulation in the First Amendment was an attempt to protect the new nation from this same fate. Including only an Establishment Clause would have risked a government so intent on divorcing itself from religion that it would end up stymieing it—generating resentment and potentially violent revolt from passionate religious adherents who felt their free exercise was being choked. Include only a Free Exercise Clause and the danger for government and religion falls on the opposite end of the spectrum; a government openly facilitates and becomes intertwined with religious practice risking its politicization, and the perception (and likely reality) that the state is choosing favorites. Bitterness and backlash among those sects not granted politically favored status would naturally result. As an integrated whole, the two religion clauses were a Goldilocks solution.

As Professor Steven D. Smith observes, “[t]he words . . . ‘establishment of religion’ [and] ‘free exercise’—served to define the substantive area over which Congress was disclaiming jurisdiction.”62Smith, supra note 31, at 1045. It was that simple. There is nothing in the First Amendment demanding that if non-religious governmental benefits are distributed, religious institutions should be entitled to equivalent goodies. Quite the contrary. The Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment and the Religion Clauses of the First Amendment are not the same.

IV.  THE RISE OF “NEUTRALITY”

How then to explain the dissenters’ conflation of principles from these two very different amendments in the Constitution—the Religion Clauses in the First Amendment and the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth? It would seem that Scalia in his Locke dissent was drawing on the “neutrality” principle rooted in certain of the Court’s Establishment Clause decisions. In the seminal 1947 decision Everson v. Board of Education the Court upheld New Jersey’s reimbursement of bus transportation costs to parents sending their children to private schools, including those with a religious affiliation.63Everson v. Bd. of Educ., 330 U.S. 1, 3 (1947). The Everson Court recounted the context in which the Framers’ drafted the religion clauses, stressing that early American settlers sought to escape the compulsion in Europe that they financially support churches favored by the government.64Id. at 8. It emphasized—and included in full in the appendix—James Madison’s Memorial and Remonstrance, a tract written in opposition to a Virginia law that would have imposed a tax on its residents to support the established church.65Id. at 11–12.

Despite ultimately rejecting the Establishment Clause challenge, the Everson Court insisted that “New Jersey cannot consistently with the ‘establishment of religion’ clause of the First Amendment contribute tax-raised funds to the support of an institution which teaches the tenets and faith of any church.”66Id. at 16. It simply found that here, “[t]he State contributes no money to the schools. It does not support them. Its legislation, as applied, does no more than provide a general program to help parents get their children, regardless of their religion, safely and expeditiously to and from accredited schools.”67Id. at 18. Under these circumstances the state was “a neutral in its relations with groups of religious believers and non-believers,”68Id. at 17–18 (emphasis added). not unlike if it were providing police assistance for children crossing the street––some of whom happen to be traveling to or from a religious school.

“Neutrality,” in other words, was a way of distinguishing innocuous general welfare laws that just happen to have, among their many beneficiaries, religious individuals or institutions, from those constitutionally problematic laws that “respect an establishment of religion” by using taxpayer funds for targeted support of religion. If anything, neutrality as used in Everson is about understanding that religion must be treated differently, that while government has broad discretionary power to single-out and benefit all-sorts of respective groups or individuals through the policy distinctions it makes, the one exception is religion. The existence of neutrality (that is, that benefits are provided without regard to the religious status of the beneficiaries) provides support for the conclusion that it is not the kind of law that unconstitutionally respects an establishment of religion. Neutrality suggests that government is not targeting religion qua religion for a specific benefit in violation of the Establishment Clause.

 Neutrality was the principle that Scalia seemed to rely upon when he drew an analogy to equal protection in his Locke dissent, explaining that “[i]f the Religion Clauses demand neutrality, we must enforce them, in hard cases as well as easy ones.”69Locke v. Davey, 540 U.S. 712, 728 (2004) (Scalia, J., dissenting). But, as we have seen, the “neutrality” of Everson is nothing like the general anti-religious discrimination rule the Locke dissenters portray it to be. The fact that the Court has turned to neutrality as a consideration in particular Establishment Clause settings does not transform the Religion Clauses more broadly, and particularly the Free Exercise Clause, into sweeping prohibition of religious discrimination.

The neutrality principle laid out in Everson is one evidentiary standard, among many, for determining whether or not a particular state may be targeting religion in a manner that is inconsistent with the Establishment Clause. Indeed, it is a method of determining when discrimination may be constitutionally required. Considering the fact that most policy choices by government will have some effect on some religious actors, neutrality is simply a device for separating the wheat from the chaff. By providing reimbursement of transportation costs for all schoolchildren—attending secular and religious schools alike—a state is no doubt promoting free exercise of religion. It is making it more affordable for religious parents to freely exercise their religion by educating their children at the religious school of their choice. The question then becomes: under these circumstances does the other religion clause demand discrimination, mandating that religion be treated differently and be denied, unlike the secular schools, this benefit?

Neutrality may be a useful tool in some establishment cases, but it is one that the Court has used only when appropriate, and not with consistency. Indeed, illustrating just how far the Court has moved on religion clause issues, we might observe that Everson itself was a closely contested 5–4 decision. Four dissenters were not convinced that a state should be allowed under the Establishment Clause, as part of a neutral public service program available to all parents, to reimburse families for the cost of sending their children to religiously affiliated schools.

The Locke dissent never explains why, by laying out a standard of “neutrality” in a narrow Establishment Clause context, Everson should now be understood to impose an equality rule under the Free Exercise Clause—requiring the Court to mandate, what in Everson, it just barely allowed. As we shall explore further, while establishment and free exercise may represent two ends of a tension rod, respectively they impose distinct kinds of constraints on government. Scalia, in his Locke dissent, conflates establishment and free exercise.

Justice Gorsuch utilized this conflation to profound effect in his 2022 majority decision in Kennedy v. Bremerton School District.70Kennedy v. Bremerton Sch. Dist. 142 S .Ct. 2407 (2022). There he analyzed a public prayer by a public school coach at a public school event as largely a free exercise issue—whereas in the past the issue would almost certainly have been framed along Establishment Clause lines as an unconstitutional instance of a government official injecting his religion into a school-sanctioned activity. As the smoking gun, Gorsuch points out that “[b]y its own admission, the District sought to restrict [the coach’s] actions at least in part because of their religious character.”71Id. at 2422. It sought to prohibit actions “appearing to a reasonable observer to endorse . . . prayer.”72Id. This was the “gotcha” moment to Justice Gorsuch; a conscientious choice by a school district to comply with the separation of church and state principles articulated in the Establishment Clause becomes damning evidence of a violation of neutrality under the Free Exercise Clause. This is a Religion Clause world turned upside-down.

In Kennedy the Court effectively overruled, indeed inverted, its Establishment Clause precedents recognizing an endorsement test.73Id. at 2427. Public endorsement of religion by government went from prohibited, to prohibited to prohibit. This blowtorch to the Court’s previous jurisprudence, however, cannot alter the fact that the First Amendment, by its very terms, demands discrimination; a state may for legitimate policy purposes designate taxpayer funds to a specific circus school, driver’s education school, agricultural school, or most any other school it deems worthy, except if it is targeting religious education. As we shall discuss in the next Section, consistent with the government speech doctrine, a state has largely unconstrained discretion to choose its own policies and policy messages, except with regard to religion.

V.  THE EMERGING GOVERNMENT SPEECH DOCTRINE

There is some irony in this new muddying of the Religion Clause waters, as the Court has in recent years also moved toward clarification of another part of the First Amendment, one that resonates in the free exercise context: the government speech doctrine. The Free Speech Clause has over time come to incorporate a kind of anti-discrimination principle of its own. Despite reading as a simple across-the-board prohibition that “Congress shall make no law . . . abridging the freedom speech,”74U.S. Const. amend. I. modern free speech case law has come to the realization that the most potent threats to expression come in the form of laws that specifically target (or “discriminate” against) particular content or viewpoints. After all, virtually all laws could be said to impact expression; whether it is blocking traffic on an eight-lane highway, setting private property ablaze, or assaulting a police officer in front of the nation’s capital, if human behavior is observable, it may be framed as expressive. Broad exemptions from criminal and civil accountability merely because the harmful behavior at issue happens to be observable would be intolerable; this was clearly not what the framers of the First Amendment had in mind.

The protection of free expression must have some limiting principle. Thus, the Court has come to differentiate between state attempts to silence particular ideas or ideologies from mere content-neutral “time place or manner” restrictions or regulations directed at harmful behavior that incidentally affects expression. Under the Supreme Court’s free speech doctrine, the former discriminatory treatment of certain content or viewpoints is subjected to a much higher level of judicial scrutiny than the latter—neutral regulations that may in some sense be said to inhibit expression, but without regard to content or viewpoint.75See, e.g., Reed v. Town of Gilbert, 576 U.S. 155, 172–73 (2015). As the end of the twentieth century approached, the Court began to explicitly come to terms with the inverse principle. When it is the government that is doing the speaking, it must have the ability to discriminate.

In a sense, like religion under the Establishment and Free Exercise clauses, “government speech” under the free speech clause is different. It is a democratic imperative that government be able to discriminate in the ideas it conveys. Government must have the ability to choose its own message. It is the culmination of its messages and expressive actions, after all, for which the people hold government to account at the ballot box. Government “speaks” by, among other things, subsidizing particular activities, employing individuals to propagate particular messages, or installing monuments that convey certain ideas.76See Rust v. Sullivan, 500 U.S. 173, 192–93 (1991); Pleasant Grove City v. Summum, 555 U.S. 460, 460 (2009). This is, by its very nature, an exclusionary activity.

As the government chooses to spread one message, it necessarily declines to communicate others. It discriminates based on content or viewpoint. As a new administration takes the helm in response to a shift in voter sentiments, a government will likely change its message. A city government might remove a statue of Robert E. Lee from a public park. It might replace that statue with one depicting the civil rights triumphs of Martin Luther King, Jr. A group of Civil War reenactors may object. However, their recourse is not in a First Amendment that guarantees them a right to have the government send the message they want it to send. It is the political process. The Court made this point succinctly in a 1991 case that would come to be described as the first in a series of cases that form the government speech doctrine.77Helen Norton, The Government’s Speech and the Constitution 32–34 (Alexander Tsesis ed., 2019).

Rust v. Sullivan involved a government program that appropriated public funds for certain family-planning services.78Rust, 500 U.S. at 178. In so doing, Title X of the Family Health Service Act stipulated that none of the allocated funds were to be used in programs that included abortion as a family-planning method.79Id. As a plain-vanilla First Amendment free speech issue, one might assume that the government could not prohibit a counselor or physician from merely discussing a legal abortion as a medical option. Such discriminatory censorship directed at particular content might seem, on the most basic level, antithetical to core First Amendment principles. However, when it is the government that is speaking—as is arguably the case with a government program intended to promote certain goals but not others—the First Amendment prohibition on content or viewpoint-based discrimination is flipped on its head. We expect an anti-abortion administration to “be discriminating” when it comes to the messages it chooses to send about this volatile issue, just as pro-abortion rights voters would expect elected officials who run on a prochoice platform to propagate government speech that facilitates, rather than inhibits, the right to choose. To drive home its point, the Court in Rust provided this example: “When Congress established a National Endowment for Democracy to encourage other countries to adopt democratic principles, . . . it was not constitutionally required to fund a program to encourage competing lines of political philosophy such as communism and fascism.”80Id. at 194.

Thus, if we return to the Court’s anti-discriminatory religion clause innovation, we can see another glaring tension. Even before this current Supreme Court’s most recent Religion Clause turnabout mandating certain government expenditures on religion, some had expressed concern that the growing prominence of the government speech doctrine might diminish previously viable Establishment Clause challenges—because of their potential framing as government speech.81Carol Nackenoff, The Dueling First Amendments: Government as Funder, as Speaker, and the Establishment Clause, 69 Md. L. Rev. 132, 147–48 (2009). But under the Court’s new regime, the anti-religious-discrimination doctrine and the government speech doctrine are on a collision course. A constitutional mandate that government subsidize religious speech to avoid a free exercise “discrimination” claim (just because such subsidy is also available to certain non-religious recipients), is a command that it express ideas it may not want to express, using taxpayer money. It is counter-majoritarian, and directly contradicts the principle underlying the government speech doctrine. In Rust, the Court reiterated the common sense conclusion that “[t]he Government can, without violating the Constitution, selectively fund a program to encourage certain activities it believes to be in the public interest, without at the same time funding an alternative program which seeks to deal with the problem in another way.”82Rust, 500 U.S. at 193. It turns out, however, that this is not the case; that is, at least according to the Court’s novel anti-discriminatory religion clause doctrine.

One might respond, however, as pointed out earlier, that religion is different. Might there be something about religion that would justify a diversion from the otherwise applicable government speech principle? Could it be that this difference merits an exception from the intuitive notion that a government—as a representative of “we the people”—should be able to choose which policies or messages to propagate, and which messages not to endorse, or simply not expend taxpayer resources on? The Constitution, after all, already carves out certain areas in which simple majoritarian politics will not do, requiring instead a super majority for policy change. Fifty-one percent of the population, in other words, cannot do away with probable cause; the Constitution would have to be amended.

One might argue, for instance, that as a fundamental constitutional right, the free exercise of religion should be exempt from the baseline government speech rule. This is quite similar to what was argued by the dissenters in Rust. They pointed to the fact that the right to choose abortion under the “liberty” guarantee in the Fifth Amendment was (at the time) a fundamental constitutional right. As such, selective discrimination against the expression of certain medically pertinent information facilitating that freedom of choice, even under the auspices of a government program, was unconstitutional.83Id. at 216.

 The Court, however, rejected this argument. It also left little room to doubt the basis of this rejection. Citing Regan v. Taxation with Representation, a decision in which the Court upheld a narrowly selective subsidy for lobbying by certain types of organizations, it explained that a “legislature’s decision not to subsidize the exercise of a fundamental right does not infringe the right.”84Id. at 193. Thus, it would seem that the fundamental constitutional rights argument cannot explain the Court’s new anti-religious-discrimination doctrine. The Court’s government speech precedents directly conflict with today’s Court’s characterization of a failure to fund religious education as a “penalty” imposed on that religion.85Espinoza v. Mont. Dep’t of Revenue, 140 S. Ct. 2246, 2255 (2020).

VI.  THE RADICAL TRINITY

If a jurisprudential entrepreneur were on the lookout for an ideal test case to sell a radical reformulation of the Court’s approach to the religion clauses, the facts of Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia v. Comer would certainly fit the bill. On the surface, this case about the re-surfacing of children’s playgrounds in Missouri involved a highly sympathetic petitioner and addressed relatively un-weighty issues of church and state. To promote recycling and benefit children in low income areas, the state government allocated funds on a competitive basis to help nonprofit daycare centers replace older, harder playground surfaces with ones made from recycled tires.86Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Comer, 582 U.S. 449, 454–55 (2017). Unfortunately for Trinity Lutheran Church, it discovered that its preschool and daycare center were ineligible.87Id. Article I, Section 7 of the Missouri Constitution provided that “no money shall ever be taken from the public treasury, directly or indirectly, in aid of any church, sect or denomination of religion.”88Id at 455. Missouri categorically disqualified religious organizations from receiving grants under the program.89Id.

Although the District Court did not mention the government speech doctrine by name, it upheld the Missouri program using reasoning consistent with the doctrine’s underlying principles. It drew an analogy to a case upholding a state’s “mere” choice not to fund a particular “category of instruction,”90Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Pauley, 976 F.Supp.2d 1137, 1148 (W.D. Mo. 2013). suggesting that it was within Missouri’s discretion to determine the scope of its programs. This includes the choice not to subsidize playgrounds run by religious institutions with public money. In concisely rejecting a free expression argument, the District Court dismissed any notion that the program was designed as an “open forum” for speech.91Id. at 1157.

Consistent with the pro-discrimination implications of the religion clauses, it pointed to the state’s “antiestablishment” interests in preventing religious organizations from receiving government funds.92Id. at 1148. Even if Missouri was not required to promote this interest to the extent it did––prohibiting any receipt of funds by religious organizations––significant “play in the joints” exists between what is prohibited by the Establishment Clause and what is required by Free Exercise.93Id. at 1147. The District Court reasoned that Missouri’s more robust prohibition (what we might certainly call “discrimination” against religion), supports the antiestablishment values built into the religion clauses.94Id. at 1148. Indeed, according to the Court, it would be patently “illogical” to presume that a choice not to fund religion to avoid potential entanglement with government necessarily reflects a hostility toward religion.95Id. The District Court emphasized that the grant here would be paid directly to the religious organization, making the antiestablishment concerns even more compelling than programs designed to sever the direct link between government aid and religious institutions by putting the choice to spend in the hands of private individuals.96Id. at 1152.

The Eighth Circuit affirmed the District Court decision, characterizing the appellant as “seek[ing] an unprecedented ruling—that a state constitution violates the First Amendment . . . if it bars the grant of public funds to a church.”97Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Pauley, 788 F.3d 779, 783 (8th Cir. 2015). In no uncertain terms, it rejected the notion that a state could be compelled to provide taxpayer funds directly to a church: “No Supreme Court case” it explained, “has granted such relief.”98Id. at 784. Moving to an approach in which every generally available public benefit becomes a baseline in which we might scrutinize the denial of comparable benefits to religious actors, would, according to the Circuit Court, constitute “a logical constitutional leap.”99Id. at 785. It would fundamentally recast the Free Exercise Clause from a provision that demands religion be treated differently, to one that prohibits discrimination against it. It would require a repudiation of decades of precedent, and of our foundational understanding of how the religion clauses were to function. In blunt terms, the Circuit Court conceded that “only the Supreme Court can make that leap.”100Id.

But the Supreme Court had indeed changed. Beginning with this unassuming little case about playground surfaces, it was poised to make just such an unprecedented and radical shift in its religion clause jurisprudence. Granted, Chief Justice Roberts, in his majority opinion that overruled the Eighth Circuit in Trinity Lutheran, did not frame his decision in this way. Roberts has developed a reputation for strategic incrementalism, in which the seeds of what will eventually blossom into highly consequential doctrinal change are planted in unassuming soil.101Linda Greenhouse, Justice on the Brink: The Death of Ruth Bader Ginsburg, the Rise of Amy Coney Barrett, and Twelve Months that Transformed the Supreme Court 219 (2021). However, the Trinity Lutheran dissenters did not mince words. Emphasizing the high-stakes of this seemingly low-stakes decision, Justice Sotomayor tells us that “[t]his case is about nothing less than the relationship between religious institutions and the civil government . . . [t]he Court today profoundly changes that relationship.”102Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Comer, 582 U.S. 449, 471–72 (2017) (Sotomayor, J., dissenting).

Roberts’s analysis begins by setting the stage for the Court’s new Free Exercise non-discrimination principle. He cites as a broad rule the rationale of a narrow Free Exercise decision that happened to involve targeted discrimination against a particular religious sect. Granted, the language in the 1993 case Church of the Lukumi Babalu Aye, Inc. v. City of Hialeah103Church of the Lukumi Babalu Aye, Inc. v. City of Hialeah, 508 U.S. 520 (1993).  gave Roberts a good deal to work with. Although the decision was centrally about, as Justice Kennedy explained in the second sentence of the opinion, the “fundamental nonpersecution principle of the First Amendment,”104Id. at 523. it was peppered with the ominous suggestion that impermissible religious discrimination was afoot. However, there is no reason to conclude that the mere relevance of discrimination in this case would convert the religion clauses into a general anti-discrimination rule. Here discrimination simply served as evidence that this particular law should be understood as an unconstitutional prohibition of the free exercise of religion. Like the neutrality principle discussed above, the discriminatory nature of the law was highlighted to demonstrate that things were not as they seemed; a law that may have appeared neutral on its face, was in fact targeting a particular religion’s practices, and thus, quite literally, prohibiting “free exercise” of that religion.

The dilemma with the religion clauses, as with free speech, is that there will necessarily be a vast number of laws aimed at addressing a wide range of social ills that have the subsidiary effect of in-part “prohibiting” the free exercise of particular religions (or “abridging” expressive activity). And the Court has never taken the position, for understandable reasons, that all such laws are unenforceable as to religious practitioners (or to those whose actions are, in part, “expressive”). As Justice Scalia opined, in a country of vast religious diversity, adopting a rule that would strictly scrutinize any neutral, generally applicable law that somehow could be said to intrude on a religious practice would be “courting anarchy.”105Emp. Div. v. Smith, 494 U.S. 872, 888 (1990). The doctrinal parameters of whether, and when, a religious exemption may be required under such circumstances continue to evolve. However, it is clear that laws advancing legitimate, non-religion-related policy ends that incidentally impact the free exercise of certain religious actors are not automatically deemed constitutionally suspect.

No doubt, in drafting the First Amendment the framers sought to prohibit the type of targeted religious persecution that was all too common in the old world.106Babalu, 508 U.S. at 532. But again, the concern was that government not prohibit free exercise through persecution, not that it refrain from treating religion differently from other subjects (something that it is required to do under a straight-forward reading of the text of the First Amendment). Government persecution might be achieved through direct measures that leave little ambiguity as to the intended objective. However, a government intent on punishing, stigmatizing, or driving away an unpopular religious minority might also use non-religion-related policy justifications as a pretext for doing so. It may craft laws that are intended to impede the practices of certain religious believers but justify those laws on legitimate non-religion-related public policy grounds. Or, a legislature might truly have mixed motives. Determining whether or not there has been a free exercise violation under such circumstances may prove difficult. Thus, in this context, identifying “discrimination” may become a vital tool in sussing out whether intentional religious suppression, or a mere side effect of an unrelated policy goal, is occurring.

Preventing animal cruelty was the stated policy goal in Church of Lukumi Babalu. Upon investigation however, this facially legitimate objective was found to have been a front for religious animus. The case involved four ordinances in the south Florida city of Hialeah. Together, they prohibited certain forms of animal sacrifice, a practice associated with the Santeria religion.107Id. at 524–28. The ordinances were apparently spurred on by the imminent prospect of a Santeria church opening in Hialeah and the hostility and discomfort many residents and city council members held toward Santeria and its traditional practices.108Id. at 541–42.

The city argued that its ban on animal sacrifice was justifiable on non-religious grounds. It cited not just protecting animals from cruel treatment, as mentioned above, but also the health risks involved, the emotional injury to children that might result from witnessing such killings, and the interest in restricting slaughter to particular areas of the city.109Id. at 529–30. The narrow ban however, was carefully crafted to exclude virtually all animal killing other than religious sacrifice, and even within this category it exempted kosher slaughter.110Id. at 535–36. The Court concluded that “Santeria alone was the exclusive legislative concern. . . . [K]illings that are no more necessary or humane in almost all other circumstances are unpunished.”111Id. at 536. This was, as Justice Souter pointed out in his concurrence, “a rare example of a law actually aimed at suppressing religious exercise.”112Id. at 564 (Souter, J., concurring).

The Court unanimously struck down the ordinances as a violation of the Free Exercise Clause.113Id. at 546. It was from this unexceptional holding in Church of Lukumi Babalu—prohibiting a legal ban directly targeting practices that were a clear element of the sect’s religious exercise—that the Court in Trinity Lutheran extracts from the Free Exercise Clause a strikingly broad anti- religious-discrimination rule. The new rule requires taxpayer money be used to facilitate the religious mission of an organization—that is, if such funds are available to secular organizations.

Granted, the Church of Lukumi Babalu Court identified, through a close examination of the text of the ordinances at issue and the broader social context, blatantly discriminatory treatment targeting particular practices of a particular religious group. And at times, Kennedy used language to emphasize the significance of such unequal treatment, for example, when he stated that “[a]t a minimum, the protections of the Free Exercise Clause pertain if the law at issue discriminates against some or all religious beliefs or regulates or prohibits conduct because it is undertaken for religious reasons.”114Id. at 532. In this context, this observation simply points out that a restriction on free exercise that is specifically directed toward a particular religion or religious practice is a First Amendment red flag. Such a law presents a sharp contrast to generally applicable laws that affect, and are directed toward, religious and non-religious actors alike. The fact of “discrimination,” in other words, helps courts home in on the most egregious and likely unconstitutional prohibitions on free exercise. Nothing in the decision, however, would suggest that it is the “discrimination” that is the free exercise offense, nor that unconstitutional “discrimination” should be interpreted to encompass a mere choice by a government not to provide financial support to particular religious organizations.

Indeed, Roberts’s reliance upon Church of Lukumi Babalu is particularly curious considering that it was issued just two years after Rust v. Sullivan. As discussed above, this is the seminal government speech case in which the Court explicitly affirmed a government’s power to discriminate—to be selective and make substantive distinctions as to the programs it chooses to fund or not fund.115See supra Part V. What is Chief Justice Roberts’s response to this apparent contradiction? He tells us that “Trinity Lutheran is not claiming any entitlement to a subsidy. It is asserting a right to participate in a government benefit program without having to disavow its religious character.”116Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Comer, 582 U.S. 449, 451 (2017).

But how is claiming a right to receive government largess by “participat[ing] in a government benefit program” that one is not qualified to participate in, anything but an assertion of an “entitlement to a subsidy?”117Id. The Chief Justice’s artful reframing and rephrasing of Trinity Lutheran’s argument does not alter the fundamental facts. After this decision the government in Missouri is required to use taxpayer money to subsidize what on policy grounds it does not wish to subsidize. The Chief’s attempt to sugarcoat its radical decision notwithstanding, the unelected Supreme Court is telling an elected government how it must legislate and allocate its resources—a command that is in direct conflict with its own government speech doctrine.

The only other ostensibly on-point case cited by the Trinity Lutheran Court as support for its innovative religion clause non-discrimination rule was the 1978 plurality opinion in McDaniel v. Paty.118McDaniel v. Paty, 435 U.S. 618 (1978). Under the Tennessee Constitution, clergy were disqualified from serving as state legislators, and thereby not permitted to serve as delegates to a state constitutional convention.119Id. at 620–21. The Supreme Court struck down the exclusion on Free Exercise grounds. The plurality explained that this exclusion of ministers from state legislatures was a practice that was implemented in seven of the original thirteen States. It was instituted “primarily to assure the success of a new political experiment, the separation of church and state.”120Id. at 622.

However, the notion that clergy members should ipso facto be excluded from legislative positions remained controversial. This was so despite the fact that the First Amendment did not at the time apply to the states (it would not be explicitly incorporated until well after the ratification of the Fourteenth Amendment in 1868). Even James Madison, “the greatest advocate for the separation of state and church” 121Andrew L. Seidel, The Founding Myth: Why Christian Nationalism Is Un-American 37 (2019). and primary drafter of the Constitution’s religion clauses suggested (in contrast with Thomas Jefferson’s initial position) that disqualification resembled a kind of unjust punishment reserved for those who happened to choose religious professions.122McDaniel, 435 U.S. at 624. To Madison, the exclusion itself might even constitute a breach of the church-state separation, in that religion was to be exempted “from the cognizance of Civil power.”123Id. at 624. One can thus see the parallel Roberts was attempting to draw with Trinity Lutheran—a law that was arguably “punishing” a playground operator, denying it the opportunity to benefit from a recycled tire resurfacing program, merely due to its religious affiliation.

However, with the help of the government speech doctrine, the distinction between Trinity Lutheran and McDaniel becomes immediately clear. A policy choice as to how the government will use taxpayer dollars—what kinds of interests or schools or playgrounds it will support—is fundamentally different from a law that makes distinctions as to who may legislate in the first place. The former represents a choice as to the policy message the government will communicate, a democratic imperative; the latter represents a choice to exclude certain voices from the possibility of being a part of that government, an anti-democratic exclusion. To suggest that the right to run for office in a democracy is a mere government “benefit” comparable to a government program that helps fund playground resurfacing124Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Comer, 582 U.S. 449, 462 (2017). is to demean a core element of representative democracy. It conflates the ability to select a representative with the naturally selective product of representative democracy; it degrades them both by suggesting that a democracy-affirming Court intervention to prevent limitations on who we may choose as a representative is somehow analogous to a democracy-inhibiting limitation on a government to make policy choices.

McDaniel was also grounded in an individual right to practice one’s religion. The Court explained that “the right to the free exercise of religion unquestionably encompasses the right to preach, proselyte, and perform other similar religious functions, or, in other words, to be a minister of the type McDaniel was found to be.”125McDaniel, 435 U.S. at 626. McDaniel’s right to free exercise was being conditioned upon his surrender of democratic political participation, the choice to run for office. His desire to serve as a delegate to a state constitutional convention was not a request to have the state subsidize his religious activity, except to the extent than any government employee’s private activities might be said to be subsidized by a state salary.

Trinity Lutheran in contrast, involved not an individual’s rights, but the rights of a collective entity. It described its Child Learning Center’s mission as “provid[ing] a safe, clean, and attractive school facility in conjunction with an educational program structured to allow a child to grow spiritually.”126Trinity Lutheran, 582 U.S. at 455. Trinity Lutheran, in other words, was seeking state tax dollars to advance its religious goals as a collective entity. The loss by Trinity Lutheran of the opportunity to participate in a subsidized playground surface program was nothing like the Hobson’s choice that confronted McDaniel. He was not seeking support from the government for his religious works. For McDaniel, under the Tennessee law he was forced to either forfeit his right to fully participate as a citizen or refrain from free religious exercise. 

Chief Justice Roberts finds commonality in McDaniel and Trinity Lutheran, emphasizing the status-based nature of the discrimination in both cases.127Id. at 459. He characterized the policy in Missouri as “expressly discriminat[ing] against otherwise eligible recipients by disqualifying them from a public benefit solely because of their religious character.”128Id. at 462. The McDaniel Court similarly stressed the unique way the law in Tennessee disqualified the petitioner from office “because of his status as a ‘minister’ or ‘priest.’ ”129McDaniel, 435 U.S. at 627. And indeed, the Court has in recent years frequently conflated the individual and the collective; but there can be good reason to acknowledge the differences between the two.

At the heart of classical liberalism is a respect for the individual. The notion that status-based individual deprivations are particularly repugnant is found in many parts of the Constitution itself—whether it is the prohibition on Bills of Attainder,130U.S. Const. art. I, § 9, cl. 3. the demand that “no religious Test shall ever be required as a Qualification to any Office or public Trust under the United States,”131U.S. Const. art. VI. or that the right to vote shall not be denied “on account of race, color, or previous condition of servitude”132U.S. Const. amend. XV. in the Fifteenth Amendment. Although the Court has extended many individual rights in the Constitution to collective entities, there is reason to be skeptical that the same set of concerns applies here.

Tennessee justified its disqualification of a certain category of individuals from elective office on the basis of the “leadership role” and “full time” promotion of “religious objectives” of those who choose to be ministers and priests.133McDaniel, 435 U.S. at 634–35. Citing its goal of maintaining the separation of church and state, the state emphasized its concern that the religious commitments of ministers and priests would at times interfere with their duties as a state legislator.134Id. at 645. Implicit in the plurality decision rejecting this rationale is the understanding that human beings are more than just their chosen avocation. A “unique disability” imposed on an individual because they “exhibit a defined level of intensity of involvement in protected religious activity”135Id. at 632. is, quite simply, highly distinguishable from differential treatment of legal entities based upon their respective, narrowly defined legal purpose.

Nonetheless, the Trinity Lutheran Court finds the organization’s status-based disqualification from the recycled tire playground surface program to be relevant, and sufficiently analogous to the disqualification from office faced by McDaniel. As a result, the Court found Trinity Lutheran merited a similar legal outcome. The Court’s focus on the status-based nature of the religious discrimination at issue also served to distinguish Trinity Lutheran from the 2004 decision Locke v. Davey, the seemingly on-point precedent discussed previously in which the Supreme Court reached the opposite conclusion.

In Locke the Supreme Court upheld a scholarship program in Washington State that, although available for a full range of postsecondary education degrees, stipulated funds could not be used by students “pursuing a degree in devotional theology.”136Locke v. Davey, 540 U.S. 712, 715 (2004). Roberts reasoned that in Locke the student was not denied the benefit of the program on the basis of his religious status, as was true of Trinity Lutheran, but “because of what he proposed to do—use the funds to prepare for the ministry.”137Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Comer, 582 U.S. 449, 464 (2017). Thus, for the Trinity Lutheran Court, the distinction between religious discrimination based on religious “status” and religious “use” appeared to be determinative.

The silver lining of deciding to have the opinion turn on this questionable analogy between the status-based discrimination against the individual minister in McDaniel and the collective religious institution in Trinity Lutheran, is that it established a rule that would, in theory, still allow for government to make crucial policy distinctions consistent with the government speech doctrine. As long as the government is not declining to spend on the basis of religious status, a government might still decline to draw on finite state resources to fund religious action. A government might conclude, for example, that spending on such religious “use” would be unwise, have benefits that are unsupported by evidence, reflect objectives inconsistent with the state’s current policy goals, or simply on balance represent a less weighty spending priority than other competing governmental aims.

This “status” versus “use” distinction, however, would not have staying power. Locke would ultimately be narrowed dramatically, largely relegated to doctrinal irrelevance. In Trinity Lutheran the status/use test was thrown into question in a concurrence by Justices Gorsuch and Thomas. Gorsuch, foreshadowing the Court’s eventual path in Carson, would have distinguished the contradictory outcome in Locke on the basis of its narrow exclusion of scholarship funds for devotional theology and the “long tradition against the use of public funds for training of the clergy.”138Id. at 470 (Gorsuch, J., concurring). For Gorsuch, not only was the status/use distinction likely to be difficult to apply in practice, but it was also irrelevant for the purposes of First Amendment free exercise. The reason? To Gorsuch, “that Clause guarantees the free exercise of religion, not just the right to inward belief.”139Id. at 469.

But this is clearly incorrect. The language of the Free Exercise Clause does suggest a “guarantee.” It no more “guarantees” free exercise than the Free Speech Clause “guarantees” free speech or the Second Amendment “guarantees” that each citizen will be supplied with her own private arsenal. It merely prevents the state from interfering with or “prohibiting,” such freedom. Free exercise of religion may be hampered by friends or family, a wide range of private actors, or the free market itself. Practicing one’s religion may be time consuming, expensive, embarrassing, or stigmatizing. Indeed, it is precisely this kind of interpretive line-blurring of the Free Exercise Clause by Gorsuch that the government speech doctrine rejected when it came to the Free Speech Clause. One is not “guaranteed” an equal opportunity to have the government promote your message of x just because it has chosen to run a public service announcement promoting y.

VII.  ESPINOZA AND THE TRINITY LUTHERAN AFTERMATH

Just three years later in Espinoza v. Montana Department of Revenue the Court broadened the applicability of this fallacious reading. The Montana Constitution included a provision that barred government aid to religious schools.140Espinoza v. Mont. Dep’t of Revenue, 140 S. Ct. 2246, 2251 (2020). Under this “no-aid” provision that the State’s Supreme Court had rejected, a private school tuition assistance program that would have granted “a tax credit to anyone who donates to certain organizations that in turn award scholarships to selected students.”141Id. In Espinoza, building on the newly invented anti-religious discrimination principle, the U.S. Supreme Court struck down this provision in the Montana Constitution.

Like Trinity Lutheran, it homed in on the status/use distinction to explain why the analogous Locke holding should not apply.142Id. at 2255–57. The Court emphasized that although both Espinoza and Locke addressed government scholarship funds used for religious education, the Montana Constitution prohibited all aid to sectarian schools simply by virtue of their being religious (that is, status) whereas the program in Locke excluded, specifically, just religious training (that is, use).143Id. at 2257. This case, the Court explained, “turns expressly on religious status and not religious use.”144Id. at 2256. It even took the time to refute claims that Montana’s Constitution was in fact about preventing “use” for religious education, responding that “[s]tatus-based discrimination remains status based even if one of its goals or effects is preventing religious organizations from putting aid to religious uses.”145Id. It asserted that “status-based discrimination is subject to ‘the strictest scrutiny.’ ”146Id. at 2257. Thus, a reasonable reading of the Court’s opinion would conclude that the status versus use distinction was central to this doctrine.

At the same time that it repeatedly emphasized its significance, however, the Court seemed to be readying itself to discard this distinction in the near future. It provided the caveat that “[n]one of this is meant to suggest that we agree . . . that some lesser degree of scrutiny applies to discrimination against religious uses of government aid.”147Id. Why then raise this distinction in the first place? As mentioned earlier, Trinity Lutheran was framed as a narrow decision addressing an even narrower, idiosyncratic, and relatively low-stakes set of facts. Allaying fears that it was anything broader than this, Trinity Lutheran’s footnote three had read: “This case involves express discrimination based on religious identity with respect to playground resurfacing. We do not address religious uses of funding or other forms of discrimination.”148Trinity Lutheran Church of Columbia, Inc. v. Comer, 582 U.S. 449, 465 n.3 (2017). Reliance on this status/use distinction, as well as the inclusion of this qualifying footnote, likely contributed to a majority that was able to bring along two justices (Breyer and Kagan) who shortly thereafter would pull away, dissenting in Espinoza and Carson.

Once the critical break with the religion clause precedent was achieved, like Lucy and Charlie Brown, the Chief Justice quickly pulled that football. It turns out Trinity Lutheran was no minor decision at all. In Carson, decided two years after Espinoza, the Court was clear that it was in fact Locke that was the minor decision. Leaving little ambiguity, Roberts asserted that “Locke cannot be read beyond its narrow focus on vocational religious degrees.”149Carson v. Makin, 142 S. Ct. 1987, 2002 (2022). Thus, just a short five-year time span had passed between Trinity Lutheran—adopting the status/use device as a central means of justifying its jarring divergence from Locke—and Carson—effectively retracting it. The unfortunate implication is that the status/use distinction served merely as a short-term results-oriented expedient—the proverbial camel’s nose that could push its way, ever so slightly, under the tent—facilitating the Court’s radical transformation of the Religion Clauses. 

In Espinoza, the Court repeatedly stressed the completely inapposite, but rhetorically powerful pejorative conception of “discrimination” to justify its holding, explaining that the Constitution “condemns discrimination against religious schools and the families whose children attend them.”150Espinoza, 140 S. Ct. at 2262. But even more than Trinity Lutheran, both Espinoza and Carson address a species of governmental action that is inevitably, and necessarily, grounded in discrimination—the state’s choices about education. It is indeed difficult to imagine a more consequential sphere of government speech than the fine-grained discretion involved when a democratically elected government chooses the ideas, ideals, knowledge, and values to impart to future generations. No question, this is most apparent in the field of public education, where states and localities are in the position of determining every last detail of a curriculum. But, unless it is establishing an open public forum, there is no reason to believe that it is less relevant when a state decides which educational alternatives it will choose to subsidize, and which it will not. Such choices are a direct manifestation of the will of the people as exercised by their elected representatives.

Indeed, the only limitation on this foundational majoritarian precept that it is “the people” who decide (indirectly, through elections) on the substance of public education and private educational subsidies, is when it is overridden by the Constitution itself, which, of course, requires a supermajority to overrule.151See Epperson v. Arkansas, 393 U.S. 97, 107 (1968). And one of the most notable examples of this can be found in the requirement of religious discrimination—that religion is subject to differential treatment—in the First Amendment. This requirement of religious discrimination in public education is well established in Court precedent.

In Epperson v. Arkansas, the Court confirmed that the religion clauses carve out an exception to the general and broad discretion a state has over its schools’ curricula.152Id. at 104–05. Under Arkansas law, public schools were prohibited from “teach[ing] the theory or doctrine that mankind ascended or descended from a lower order of animals.”153Id. at 98–99. The clear motivation behind the law was to thwart teaching that conflicted with the biblical account of the origin of life.154Id. at 109. Although the Court expressed a general reluctance to involve the judiciary in questions of educational policy, it was unequivocal that “the First Amendment does not permit the State to require that teaching and learning must be tailored to the principles or prohibitions of any religious sect or dogma.”155Id. at 106. The Court reaffirmed this reading in the 1987 decision Edwards v. Aguillard.156Edwards v. Aguillard, 482 U.S. 578, 594 (1987). This well-established understanding of the religion clauses, that educational choices which are otherwise within the discretion of state and local government must be judicially curtailed due to their religious nature, was not just contradicted, but inverted by Espinoza and Carson. The problem with “Montana’s no-aid provision” explains the Espinoza majority, is that it “bars religious schools from public benefits solely because of the religious character of the schools.”157Espinoza v. Mont. Dep’t of Revenue, 140 S. Ct. 2246, 2255 (2020).

Indeed, not only is the Court converting a constitutional principle that has always required differential treatment of religion into an anti-religious-discrimination rule, but government inaction—not doing what it was formerly required not to do by a conventional reading of the First Amendment—is understood as potentially coercive. As the Court explains, “[t]he Free Exercise Clause protects against even ‘indirect coercion,’ and a State ‘punishe[s] the free exercise of religion’ by disqualifying the religious from government aid . . . .”158Id. at 2256. Roberts, in other words, is taking Scalia’s Locke dissent logic one step further: not providing a government benefit is not just a relative “burden” on religion, it is a coercive punishment. Government benefits are so alluring that Jefferson’s separation of church and state is itself unconstitutional. The wall of separation is coercive because the church on one side will see the bag of goodies on the other side and feel compelled to un-church itself––to shed its religious identity so it too can get a hold of those benefits.

VIII.  THE ASYMMETRIC AND INTERDEPENDENT RELIGION CLAUSES

The Alice in Wonderland feel of the Court’s logic may be dizzying. But it is the built-in tension between the two religion clauses that makes the Court’s startling logical backflips possible. The Court is effectively borrowing concepts culled from one side of its religion clause decisions and lending them to the other. Since the two clauses were designed to pull in two different directions and operate in fundamentally different ways, predictably, the results are perverse.

While “neutrality” is drawn from Everson, “coercion” can be found in decisions such as 1992’s Lee v. Weisman. In that case, a student made an Establishment Clause challenge to a public school practice of inviting clergy members to give nondenominational prayers at graduation ceremonies. Although a passionate concurrence by Justices Blackmun, Stevens, and O’Connor argued for a more robust separationist rationale, the majority nonetheless struck down the policy, asserting that “at a minimum, the Constitution guarantees that government may not coerce anyone to support or participate in religion or its exercise.”159Lee v. Weisman, 505 U.S. 577, 587 (1992). Students, in other words, would feel peer pressure to conform to, and perhaps participate in, the religious exercise. This anti-coercion principle was firmly rooted in the Court’s Establishment Clause jurisprudence; the Court’s sights were set on identifying those types of government actions that cross the unconstitutional line of “respecting an establishment of religion.”

The Lee Court acknowledged that attendance at the ceremony was technically voluntary, but in the eyes of most students, it was a crucial rite of passage.160Id. at 594–95. The Court explained that “[i]t is a tenet of the First Amendment that the State cannot require one of its citizens to forfeit his or her rights and benefits as the price of resisting conformance to state-sponsored religious practice.”161Id. at 596. The Court in Espinoza and Carson takes this Establishment Clause principle, and applies it as if it were about free exercise. This is a mistake. These two clauses may work in tandem, but they function differently, as their disparate textual construction clearly suggests. The latter simply prevents the government from actively interfering with or “prohibiting” religious practice, whereas the former involves the thornier question of what it may mean for a law to “respect” an establishment of religion. As constitutional historian Leonard Levy explains, “Congress can pass laws regulating and even abridging the free exercise of religion without prohibiting it altogether.”162Levy, supra note 7. And not only does the Court, with little theoretical justification, blithely transfer an Establishment Clause test to a free exercise issue, it quietly alters its relative rigor.

As this concept of “coercion” is understood to be ever more capacious on the Free Exercise side of the ledger, including the “indirect” coercion of merely not having one’s religiously informed policy preferences fulfilled, the meaning of Establishment Clause coercion gets appreciably narrower. In Kennedy v. Bremerton School District, decided just one week after Carson, the Court appeared untroubled by establishment concerns because there was “no evidence” that, during a public prayer by an influential school employee at a public school event, “students [were] directly coerced to pray with [the coach].”163Kennedy v. Bremerton Sch. Dist. 142 S. Ct. 2407, 2419 (2022) (emphasis added). Thus, in the free exercise context, it would appear that a highly tenuous, and certainly debatable “indirect” form of coercion is sufficient to impose a constitutional demand that taxpayer money be used to fund private religion. At the same time, a popular football coach publicly praying “under the bright lights” of a stadium full of spectators,164Id. at 2439 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). while “on duty,”165Id. at 2437 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). and implicitly inviting student participation, was not a “direct” enough form of coercion to constitute an Establishment Clause violation. This coach had “made multiple media appearances to publicize his plans to pray at the 50-yard line,”166Id. at 2437 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). and was someone from whom students might naturally seek favorable treatment such as extra playing time and recommendation letters167Id. at 2443 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting).. . Justice Sotomayor, in dissent, characterizes this newly watered down establishment test as “a nearly toothless version of the coercion analysis.”168Id. at 2434 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). The effect is to invert the very meaning of the religion clauses, taking what would have been an unconstitutional violation of the Establishment Clause under the Court’s precedents—the injection of religion into the public schools—and transforming it into a constitutional requirement under the Free Exercise Clause.169Id. at 2441 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting).

Considering the ubiquity of both law and religion, and the fact that most policy will interact with religion in a multitude of ways, the task of drawing the establishment line is arguably much more difficult and subtle than drawing the free exercise line. On its face, the text of the Free Exercise Clause—a simple ban on governments prohibiting the free exercise of religion—would not seem to support a reading that demands active promotion by government of religion to preempt indirect coercion of religious believers who might feel left out. On its face, the Free Exercise Clause requires answering just two questions: First, how is a particular religion practiced, or exercised? Second, does the law at issue in fact prohibit that religion or its individual practitioners from practicing in such manner? The text of the Establishment Clause, in contrast, suggests that any state activity associated with, or part of a regime of, government establishment, should be subject to judicial scrutiny. The word “respecting” gives the Establishment Clause a degree of play that that the word “prohibiting” in the Free Exercise Clause does not.

As with all constitutional language, textual analysis allows for a range of plausible interpretations; the meaning given to both the word “prohibiting” and “respecting” is not fixed and will naturally be context dependent. As Randy Barnett explains, “[a]lthough most words are potentially vague, we do not face a problem of vagueness until a word needs to be applied to an object that may or may not fall within its penumbra.”170Randy E. Barnett, Interpretation and Construction, 34 Harv. J.L. & Pub. Pol’y 65, 68–69 (2011). The Janus-faced nature of the religion clauses—pushing in two different directions at the same time—heightens the interpretive challenge. Any doctrinal test by the Court that attempts to put flesh on the bones of the purportedly vague language in one religion clause, what Barnett refers to as a process of constitutional “construction,”171Id. at 69. must remain cognizant of its potential interaction with, impact on, or inconsistency with, the other clause. The Court’s insight of a “play in the joints”—a necessary degree of governmental discretion in enacting policies that promote the principles of one clause without violating the other—is consistent with this penumbral overlap.

Nonetheless, under many factual circumstances the same test simply cannot apply simultaneously under both the Establishment Clause and Free Exercise Clause without producing irreconcilable outcomes. The coercion test, so casually transferred from establishment to free exercise in Espinoza provides an example. The prayer in Lee is a violation of the Establishment Clause’s anti-coercion principle, but under the logic of Espinoza a constitutionally repaired, prayer-free graduation ceremony would be unconstitutionally coercive to religious students under the Free Exercise Clause by depriving them of a government benefit available to secular students. A free exercise anti-coercion rule would suggest that due to this deprivation, religious students would be indirectly coerced to either give up the benefit of publicly funded education and pay to attend a private religious school or relinquish their ability to partake in a religious graduation ceremony.

James Madison emphasized the importance of separation for the good of both government and religion, seeing it as a way of “[guarding against a] tendency to a usurpation on one side or the other, or to a corrupting coalition or alliance between them . . . .”172Geoffrey R. Stone, Louis Michael Seidman, Cass R. Sunstein, Mark V. Tushnet & Pamela S. Karlan, Constitutional Law 1438 (8th ed. 2018) (quoting James Madison). Roger Williams focused primarily on the way separation protects the church from control by the state.173Id. Yet, the majority in Espinoza dismisses this concern in just a few short paragraphs. Inverting historical reality, it treats Montana’s claim that “the no-aid provision promotes religious freedom”174Espinoza v. Mont. Dep’t of Revenue, 140 S. Ct. 2246, 2261 (2020). as the novel view, and its own recent invention of the anti-discrimination religion clauses as the constitutional baseline.

Consistent with an understanding that extends back hundreds of years, the state argued that “the no-aid provision protects the religious liberty of taxpayers by ensuring that their taxes are not directed to religious organizations, and it safeguards the freedom of religious organizations by keeping the government out of their operations.”175Id. at 2260. As if this deeply-rooted Madisonian understanding were a fringe perspective, the Court dismissed allowing an “infringement of First Amendment rights” on the basis of what it characterized as “a State’s alternative view.”176Id. But this is no “alternative view.” The dangers of the politicization of religion, the resentments taxpayer funding of religious institutions may engender, and the pressure governmental oversight and regulation would naturally place on the church, were not lost on the founders.

Effectively dismissing this wisdom in a single paragraph, the Court justifies its decision by emphasizing how its prior cases have allowed programs that provide aid to religious organizations where “attenuated by private choices.”177Id. at 2261. It then goes on to conflate freedom from government interference—these “private choices” that are rightfully protected under the Free Exercise Clause—and a right to non-discriminatory government benefits—which is, to the contrary, in direct tension with a traditional understanding and reading of the religion clauses. It achieves this slight-of-hand by citing for support its precedents that have “long recognized the rights of parents to direct ‘the religious upbringing’ of their children.”178Id. Of course, the freedom to opt-out of a majoritarian government program never implied a right to demand that the government offer an alternative version of that program that is tailored to one’s particular tastes.

Yet, in Carson v. Makin this is precisely what the Court requires of the state of Maine. The program at issue there, as discussed previously, differed from Espinoza in that it had limited its applicability based on the substance of the educational content of a school rather than its religious status. The Maine tuition assistance program was available to parents wishing to send their children to private schools in sparsely populated areas of the state where local government does not operate its own secondary school. Funds were ineligible however, if the desired school “promotes a particular faith and presents academic material through . . . that faith.”179Carson v. Makin, 142 S. Ct. 1987, 2001 (2022). The state explained that the private school option was designed to offer a “rough equivalent” of the secular public schools available in more populous parts of the state. The Carson family, however, wanted to send their daughter to a private school with a “Christian worldview [that] aligns with their sincerely held religious beliefs.”180Id. at 1994. Under the Court’s new anti-religious discrimination reading, the state was now required to use taxpayer funds to accommodate the family’s religious tastes.

IX.  THE DEMISE OF THE STATUS/USE DISTINCTION

Unless a majoritarian democracy is structured to require unanimity, it is inescapable that some minority of the population will be unhappy with the substantive policy choices the government makes. As Alexander Tsesis has pointed out, “[there are] disagreements about the wisdom of myriad government programs, policies, statutes, and priorities.”181Alexander Tsesis, Government Speech and the Establishment Clause, 2022 U. Ill. L. Rev. 1761, 1771 (2022). A distinct policy choice to fund only private schools with an evidence-based curriculum, is, of course, bound to displease those who prefer a faith-based approach to education. However, a state may have many legitimate policy reasons for declining to fund religious education, and these reasons may be independent of a desire to adhere to a “stricter separation of church and state than the Federal Constitution requires.”182Carson, 142 S. Ct. at 1997. Most obviously, a government may conclude that an epistemological approach grounded in faith is in tension with a commitment to the scientific method. Its reasoning, in other words, may relate directly to its judgment as to how it will best fulfill its educational mission. The Court acknowledges that only private schools that “meet certain basic requirements” were eligible to receive the funds under Maine’s program.183Id. at 1993. Yet, somehow, four pages later, the Court characterizes it as “a neutral benefit program,” seemingly forgetting that the state established detailed criteria laying out just what attributes schools must have if it is to fund them.184Id. at 1997.

With Carson, the Court thus ratchets up its novel anti-religious-discrimination interpretation of the religion clauses to include substantive as well as status-based distinctions. As the Court explains, “the prohibition on status-based discrimination under the Free Exercise Clause is not a permission to engage in use-based discrimination.”185Id. at 2001. The former was at least arguably one step further removed from the kind of policy discretion essential for responsive democratic judgment––a discretion that informs the Court’s own government speech doctrine. In theory, status-based distinctions are also potentially indicative of a substance-free animus or discriminatory impulse against religion. But “use-based discrimination,” as the Court puts it, is just ordinary lawmaking. As preeminent constitutional historian Leonard Levy unequivocally concluded, “the fact is that no framer believed that the United States had or should have power to legislate on the subject of religion.”186Levy, supra note 7, at 121–22. Yet, perversely, under the Court’s new anti-religious-discrimination doctrine, states now must do so. As of 2022, the substantive educational content a state chooses not to expend its resources on is subject to the Court’s intrusive new religion clause rule.

Although those who want their children to receive a faith-based education are by no means precluded from making this choice, according to the Court the mere fact that they must pay for such education themselves (while the choice to utilize a secular private school would be supported by the state) exerts coercive pressure on their choice.187Carson, 142 S. Ct. at 1996. A failure to fund faith-based approaches to education does not just result in the natural disappointment felt by those in a democracy whose policy preferences do not go completely fulfilled, such failure to spend “ ‘penalizes the free exercise’ of religion.”188Id. at 1997. The implications of this conceptualization are quite stunning. The Supreme Court is effectively depriving democratic governments of their discretion to determine their spending priorities in one of the most consequential and democratically hard-fought domains: public education.

X.  THE LIMITING PRINCIPLE PROBLEM

Now, some might be inclined to see the concerns above as alarmist. Carson, after all, addresses just one case-specific state program. However, it is difficult to see the stopping point of the Court’s logic. The Court’s novel anti-religious discrimination rule lacks a limiting principle. In Trinity Lutheran, Roberts seemed at least mildly attuned to this potential concern by emphasizing the purportedly status-based nature of the discrimination. But, consistent with the Chief’s camel’s-nose-under-the-tent approach to doctrinal change, after Carson, any government program might become the next target of an allegation that it is discriminating against religion, and therefore violating the Free Exercise Clause. Under the Court’s newly expansive anti-religious-discrimination rule in Carson, simply not offering a comparable religion-based alternative to any secular state benefit presents a potential constitutional infraction. What might the future portend under such a regime? We might anticipate a kind of constitutionally mandated menu-based governance in which state resources must be shared equally among religious and non-religious options.

For religion, this vision may ultimately prove to be self-defeating. Government resources are limited, as is the tolerance of the populace for ever higher taxes. Constitutionally mandated religious alternatives will become costly and will ultimately be subjected to the same type of politicized, compromise-laden, and messy process that is at the heart of all spending decisions in a democratic polity. As a constitutionally imposed unfunded mandate, religion would lose its prized independence.

Granted, the anti-religious-discrimination impulse is understandable. As mentioned, the new anti-religious-discrimination Free Exercise principle is no doubt rooted to some extent in a broader concern that religion, religious belief, and religious practitioners have been unfairly mistreated and disparaged by a secular society. However, those who would like to see an expanded role for religion in the public sphere, even those who support taxpayer subsidies of religion in certain areas, may ultimately find themselves deeply troubled by the ultimate consequences of the slippery-slope the Court has erected. The Court’s radical re-interpretation of the religion clauses may prove self-defeating, for government and religion. Without a limiting principle, it cannot be contained.

XI.  THE PUBLIC FORUM DOCTRINE TO THE RESCUE

All of this is not to say that there is no place for a constitutional principle prohibiting, in some contexts, discrimination against religion. Just because the religion clauses demand the opposite, does not mean there are not other settings in which religion may be protected from government. The Free Exercise Clause, most obviously, protects religion by forbidding targeted prohibitions on free exercise. But those who would like to see a greater presence of religion in the public sphere have an alternative constitutional hook to grasp. Another First Amendment doctrine, derived from the Free Speech Clause, does include an anti-discrimination rule that serves to protect against forms of religious discrimination.

The public forum doctrine prohibits the government from imposing viewpoints, and sometimes content-based, discrimination on private speech; and the Court has concluded that this restriction extends to religious expression.189See Lamb’s Chapel v. Ctr. Moriches Union Free Sch. Dist., 508 U.S. 384 (1993); Rosenberger v. Rector & Visitors of Univ. of Va., 515 U.S. 819 (1995). The Court reminded us most recently of this principle in Shurtleff v. City of Boston. The case involved a government program that over time allowed hundreds of private groups to fly their flags outside of Boston’s city hall. The city, however, denied such opportunity to a Christian group. In ruling against Boston on free speech grounds, the Court explained that “[w]hen a government does not speak for itself, it may not exclude speech based on ‘religious viewpoint’; doing so ‘constitutes impermissible viewpoint discrimination.’ ”190Shurtleff v. City of Boston, 142 S. Ct. 1583, 1593 (2022).

If the government speech doctrine can be said to be pro-discrimination—rooted in the understanding that a democratically accountable government must have the ability to be selective as to what policy messages it will, or will not, send—its cousin, the public forum doctrine, forbids discrimination in government-owned, funded, or controlled forums. Once a government opens property or a program up to the broader public, establishing a public forum—or to a select portion of the public for more circumscribed purposes, establishing what the Court has called a “limited” public forum—it may not discriminate on the basis of “content” (or merely “viewpoint” where the public forum is limited).191See, e.g., McCullen v. Coakley, 573 U.S. 464 (2014); Christian Legal Soc’y v. Martinez, 561 U.S. 661 (2010). Government speech and public fora may be conceived as two poles on opposite ends of a single continuum, with government having almost complete control over what is or is not expressed on the government speech end and minimal power to restrict or dictate expression on the other.192See Wayne Batchis, The Government Speech-Forum Continuum: A New First Amendment Paradigm and Its Application to Academic Freedom, 75 N.Y.U. Ann. Surv. Am. L. 33 (2019). The critical point is that the public forum doctrine, unlike the Court’s new anti-religious-discrimination rule, has a clear limiting principle: a government program must fall within the definition of a public forum (or limited public forum) for religion to receive protection from discrimination. Otherwise, a policy choice, and any messages associated with it—unless, of course, it “prohibits” or “respects an establishment of religion”—would be treated as government speech.

Thus Justice Thomas, in his Espinoza concurrence, begs the question when he criticizes the “strict separation” approach to the religion clauses for the way it would ostensibly remove “the entire subject of religion from the realm of permissible governmental activity . . . operat[ing] as a type of content-based restriction . . . .”193Espinoza v. Mont. Dep’t of Revenue, 140 S. Ct. 2246, 2266 (2020) (Thomas, J., concurring). Religion would not be banished from the public sphere under the traditional, straight-forward reading of the First Amendment advocated in this article; the impact of the Religion Clauses would simply turn on whether or not the government itself is speaking or whether its “activity” was creating a public forum. As the Court has repeatedly reaffirmed, government speech is all about content-based restrictions on speech—both the discriminating choices government makes as to what messages it will or will not devote its resources to, and the structural boundaries enshrined in the Constitution that may similarly shape, limit, or direct its expressive choices. A public forum, on the other hand, does demand that the government avoid content or viewpoint-based discrimination.

Indeed, this is where a misguided concurrence by Justice Kavanaugh in Shurtleff gets it so wrong. He seeks to supplement the majority’s opinion by emphasizing that a government does not merely violate the Establishment Clause by treating religion equally to other government beneficiaries. Equal (favorable) treatment of religion by government is permissible under certain circumstances in accordance with both the public forum doctrine and the “play in the joints” religion clause principle long accepted by the Court.194See supra note 61and accompanying text. But in startlingly broad terms, Kavanaugh goes on to assert that “a government violates the Constitution when (as here) it excludes religious persons, organizations, or speech because of religion from public programs, benefits, facilities, and the like.”195Shurtleff, 142 S. Ct. at 1594 (Kavanaugh, J., concurring). Confined to public fora, such a statement of the rule may be true; but outside of these confines, such a rule would impose constitutionally illimitable unfunded expressive mandates on governments, potentially violating anti-establishment principles and the core premise of the government speech doctrine along the way.  

In contrast, drawing a boundary between a public forum—where religious expression would be protected from discrimination—and government speech—where government would have the option and sometimes obligation to discriminate against religious messages––is remarkably consistent with the inherent tension built into the Religion Clauses. It brings the First Amendment full circle, connecting the Speech and Religion Clauses in a logically coherent way. Governments may establish public fora to facilitate private speech, as governments have a rich and important history of doing, whether it is a public park, the after-hours use of public facilities for associational meetings, or a public university’s student organization program. These are venues that may be owned and maintained by the state, but as public forums, the speech that occurs there is protected and not presumed to represent the government’s voice. As a result, such expression, even if overtly religious, is unlikely to raise traditional Establishment Clause concerns; it is unlikely to generate the impression of government endorsement or to have a coercive effect. Government, in other words, would be free to facilitate free exercise values in a way that is cognizant of Establishment Clause values, while at the same time acting consistently with free speech doctrine.

CONCLUSION

The Supreme Court’s decision in Carson v. Makin is the third in a trilogy of cases dramatically upending the meaning of the First Amendment’s Religion Clauses. Beginning with Trinity Lutheran in 2017, and followed by Espinoza in 2020, the Court has moved forward with an aggressive project of transforming the Religion Clauses into a broad anti-religious-discrimination clause. In this paper, I traced this doctrinal devolution and argued that the Court’s novel reinterpretation is deeply misguided.

By design, the Religion Clauses require discrimination—religion is to be treated differently from non-religion in a broad range of state action. The Establishment Clause targets religion specifically by prohibiting laws that intermingle government with religion in an impermissible manner—whereas intermingling government with other philosophies, worldviews, institutions, or sets of values is a perfectly ordinary and generally acceptable aspect of policymaking. The Free Exercise Clause likewise forbids government interference with religious practice—whereas government is certainly free to, and is indeed expected to, interfere with a vast range of non-religion related conduct deemed to violate criminal and civil law. Religion, in short, is different. The contemporary Supreme Court, however, has inverted this most basic insight.

The Court’s new Religion Clause jurisprudence is also on a collision course with its burgeoning government speech doctrine. That doctrine recognizes that in a democratic polity, every policy choice entails paths not chosen. Government must be able to select its own message, and in turn, discriminate against those messages it wishes not to communicate. While there are some exceptions to the rule—specifically, the boundaries set by the Constitution itself—the default is governmental discretion, tempered only by accountability at the ballot box. Thus, the Religion Clauses, in conjunction with the government speech doctrine, mandate that government either be free to speak with its own voice when it is acting within the “play in the joints” in between the two clauses, or treat religion distinctly—to discriminate—when required to do so under the Constitutional mandate of establishment or free exercise.

To say that discrimination is required under the Free Exercise or Establishment Clause is not to say discrimination against religion is always constitutional. Outside of the Religion Clauses, other protections against objectionable discrimination remain. The Court’s public forum doctrine, for example, protects free expression of religion from content-based discrimination when the government itself is not speaking. Adverse or favored treatment by government targeting religion generally, particular religious sects, or particular religious practices, may be impermissible. But when it comes to the Religion Clauses, these are circumstances in which the discrimination provides evidence that the government is either prohibiting free exercise or making a law respecting an establishment of religion. The discrimination itself is not the Constitutional offense. Acting as if it is, is highly misleading. The Religion Clauses provide nothing like the broad anti-discrimination mandate today’s Court imputes to them. They demand the opposite.

The heart of the Court’s recent trilogy of cases—from Trinity Lutheran v. Comer to Carson v. Makin—is a constitutional mandate that government subsidize religious speech to avoid a Religion Clause “discrimination” claim. It is a command that government express ideas it may not wish to express. The Court’s reimagining of its Religion Clauses jurisprudence is inconsistent with the First Amendment’s original meaning, anti-democratic, and in direct tension with the government speech doctrine.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 367

Download

* J.D., PhD.; Professor and Director of Legal Studies, University of Delaware, Department of Political Science and International Relations.

Regressive White-Collar Crime

Fraud is one of the most prosecuted crimes in the United States, yet scholarly and journalistic discourse about fraud and other financial crimes tends to focus on the absence of so-called “white-collar” prosecutions against wealthy executives. This Article complicates that familiar narrative. It contains the first nationwide account of how the United States actually prosecutes financial crime. It shows—contrary to dominant academic and public discourse—that the government prosecutes an enormous number of people for financial crimes and that these prosecutions disproportionately involve the least advantaged U.S. residents accused of low-level offenses. This empirical account directly contradicts the aspiration advanced by the FBI and Department of Justice that federal prosecution ought to be reserved for only the most egregious and sophisticated financial crimes. This Articles argues, in other words, that the term “white-collar crime” is a misnomer.

To build this empirical foundation, the Article uses comprehensive data of the roughly two million federal criminal cases prosecuted over the last three decades matched to county-level population data from the U.S. Census. It demonstrates the history, geography, and inequality that characterize federal financial crime cases, which include myriad crimes such as identity theft, mail and wire fraud, public benefits fraud, and tax fraud, to name just a few. It shows that financial crime defendants are disproportionately low-income and Black, and that this overrepresentation is not only a nationwide pattern, but also a pattern in nearly every federal district in the United States. What’s more, the financial crimes prosecuted against these overrepresented defendants are on average the least serious. This Article ends by exploring how formal law and policy, structural incentives, and individual biases could easily create a prosecutorial regime for financial crime that reinforces inequality based on race, gender, and wealth.

INTRODUCTION

Fraud is an old crime. It can be found in criminal codes around the world for as long as the historical record exists. The Code of Hammurabi, composed around 1750 B.C.E. in Ancient Babylon, included several provisions outlawing various forms of fraud with punishments including death.1Martha T. Roth, Laws of Hammurabi, in Law Collections from Mesopotamia and Asia Minor 82–84, 105, 130 ¶¶ 9, 11, 126, 265 (Piotr Michalowski ed., 1997). As Alice Ristroph has noted, the second-lowest level of Hell in Dante’s fourteenth-century Inferno is reserved for people who perpetrate fraud, treating them more harshly than those who engage in physical violence.2Alice Ristroph, Criminal Law in the Shadow of Violence, 62 Ala. L. Rev. 571, 620–21 (2011) (quoting Dante, The Inferno, Canto XI, 23–29). On the other hand, fraud and financial crimes are capable of causing significant physical harm and, for that reason, some resist labeling white-collar crime as “non-violent.” See, e.g., Miriam Saxon, Subcomm. on Crime of the Comm. on the Judiciary, 95th Cong., 2d. Sess., White Collar Crime: The Problem and the Federal Response 4 (Comm. Print 1978) (“[P]articularly in those many instances of economic crime in which hundreds or thousands of people are affected, the harm to society can frequently be described as violent.”). According to the United States Supreme Court, “fraud has consistently been regarded as such a contaminating component in any crime that American courts have, without exception, included such crimes within the scope of moral turpitude.”3Jordan v. De George, 341 U.S. 223, 229 (1951).

Our state­ and federal criminal codes define myriad kinds of frauds, which comprise the majority of what we call “financial crimes” or “white-collar crimes.” Every year, tens of thousands of U.S. residents are convicted of financial crimes, most of them frauds.4See infra Section I.B.1. Yet, financial crime rarely surfaces in public discussion about how substantive criminal law fuels mass and unequal incarceration in the United States.

Instead, the terms “financial crime” and “white-collar crime” usually conjure up images of a rich banker on Wall Street or an elite executive in a powerful multinational corporation who is able to escape prosecution.5See Samuel W. Buell, “White Collar” Crimes, in The Oxford Handbook of Criminal Law 839 (Markus D. Dubber & Tatjana Hörnle eds., 2014) (noting public discussion of white-collar crime tracks a definition that includes bankers, “Wall Street,” or “corporate America,” as well as “professionals and other service providers and gatekeepers, such as lawyer and accountants, who are integral to the corporate world”). This imagery is fueled by an academic and popular discourse that tends to equate financial crime with the executive class and emphasizes the absence of prosecutions against wealthy people. For example, in recent years, much journalistic coverage of financial crime has focused on explaining why so few people and no companies were convicted of a crime connected to the financial crisis of 2008.6See, e.g., Miriam Baer, Myths and Misunderstandings in White-Collar Crime 108 (2023) (“Commentators simply cannot fathom why federal prosecutors were unable to mount cases against the architects of the subprime crisis, a crisis that is commonly described as one big scam.”); Jesse Eisinger, The Chickenshit Club: Why the Justice Department Fails to Prosecute Executives (2017); Patrick Radden Keefe, Why Corrupt Bankers Avoid Jail, New Yorker (July 31, 2017), https://www.newyorker.com/magazine/2017/07/31/why-corrupt-bankers-avoid-jail [https://perma.cc/QU8K-2UUX]; Michael Winston, Why Have No CEOs Been Punished for the Financial Crisis?, The Hill (Dec. 8, 2016, 6:10 PM), https://thehill.com/blogs/pundits-blog/finance/309544-why-have-no-ceos-been-punished-for-the-financial-crisis [https://perma.cc/4SWK-HFGA]; William D. Cohan, A Clue to the Scarcity of Financial Crisis Prosecutions, N.Y. Times (July 21, 2016), https://www.nytimes.com/2016/07/22/business/dealbook/a-clue-to-the-scarcity-of-financial-crisis-prosecutions.html? [https://perma.cc/8DTA-JKK3]; William D. Cohan, How Wall Street’s Bankers Stayed Out of Jail, Atlantic (Sept. 2015), https://www.theatlantic.com/magazine/archive/2015/09/how-wall-streets-bankers-stayed-out-of-jail/399368 [https://perma.cc/P3BD-7BYU]. Similarly, much academic scholarship about financial crime attempts to document and explain the causes and consequences of the U.S. Department of Justice’s (“DOJ”) routine policy of declining or deferring prosecution of financial crimes committed by or within large companies.7See, e.g., W. Robert Thomas, Incapacitating Criminal Corporations, 72 Vand. L. Rev. 905 (2019); Nick Werle, Note, Prosecuting Corporate Crime When Firms Are Too Big to Jail: Investigation, Deterrence, and Judicial Review, 128 Yale L. J. 1366 (2019); Mihailis E. Diamantis, Clockwork Corporations: A Character Theory of Corporate Punishment, 103 Iowa L. Rev. 507 (2018); Brandon L. Garrett, Too Big to Jail: How Prosecutors Compromise with Corporations (2014); Jennifer Arlen, Prosecuting Beyond the Rule of Law: Corporate Mandates Imposed Through Deferred Prosecution Agreements, 8 J. Legal Analysis 191 (2016); Jennifer Arlen & Marcel Kahan, Corporate Governance Regulation Through Nonprosecution, 84 U. Chi. L. Rev. 323 (2017). But see Samuel W. Buell, Is the White Collar Offender Privileged?, 63 Duke L. J. 823, 824–25 (2014) (questioning the validity of the popular belief that the American criminal system favors corporate offenders). This Article argues that this popular conception of financial crime is inaccurate.

The popular imagery surrounding white-collar crime is also kindled by prosecutors themselves. For decades, the DOJ has repeatedly and publicly touted its focus on fraud prosecutions that hold corporate executives and corporations accountable as opposed to poor and middle-class people. Prosecuting business executives, according to Attorney General Merrick Garland, is “essential to Americans’ trust in the rule of law.”8Attorney General Merrick B. Garland, Remarks to the ABA Institute on White Collar Crime (Mar. 3, 2022) (transcript available at https://www.justice.gov/opa/speech/attorney-general-merrick-b-garland-delivers-remarks-aba-institute-white-collar-crime [https://perma.cc/V9MT-8FU3]). That is because “the rule of law requires that there not be one rule for the powerful and another for the powerless; one rule for the rich and another for the poor.”9Id. Numerous attorneys general have made similar statements.10For example, in 2002, Attorney General John Ashcroft compared corporate fraud with the September 11th attacks. While those attacks were an assault on freedom “from abroad,” corporate fraud, according to Ashcroft, was an assault on freedom “from within.” Attorney General John Ashcroft, Enforcing the Law, Restoring Trust, Defending Freedom, Remarks to the Corporate Fraud/Responsibility Conference (Sept. 27, 2002) (transcript of remarks as prepared at https://www.justice.gov/archive/ag/speeches/2002/092702agremarkscorporatefraudconference.htm [https://perma.cc/P5RZ-SBT2]). In a 2014 speech about corporate crime, Attorney General Eric Holder boasted that DOJ charged more white-collar defendants between 2009 and 2013 than during any previous five-year period going back to at least 1994. Attorney General Eric Holder, Remarks on Financial Fraud Prosecutions at NYU School of Law (Sept. 17, 2014) (transcript available at https://www.justice.gov/opa/speech/attorney-general-holder-remarks-financial-fraud-prosecutions-nyu-school-law [https://perma.cc/HA2A-QFBK]). This prosecutorial discourse risks creating the false impression that financial crime is primarily committed by the most wealthy and privileged Americans and, perhaps as a result, is leniently, if ever, punished. The reality, as this Article shows, is the opposite.

In short, this Article shows that our prevailing conception of financial crime is, at best, incomplete and, at worst, wrong. It argues that scholarly and public discourse around financial crime, which focuses on the absence of “white-collar” prosecutions (that is, prosecutions of members of the wealthy executive class), paints an inaccurate picture of how financial crime is prosecuted. The United States does, in fact, prosecute a huge number of people for financial crimes—thousands per year. But these defendants are for the most part not wealthy executives. Instead, financial crime prosecutions disproportionately involve people who are low-income and people who are Black. This Article suggests that financial crime is in this way unexceptional in an American criminal system that otherwise consistently reflects class- and race-based inequality.11This Article thus suggests that the notion “carceral exceptionalism” in the context of white-collar crime is misguided. See Benjamin Levin, Mens Rea Reform and Its Discontents, 109 J. Crim. L. & Criminology 491, 548-57 (2019) (identifying “carceral exceptionalism” as the phenomenon in which “scholars and advocates on the left” favor “the full force of the carceral state” for certain “exceptional” defendants).

With data on the roughly two million federal criminal cases prosecuted since the early 1990s matched with county-level Census data, this Article is the first comprehensive study of all federal financial crime prosecutions.12As described in Section I.C, others explored similar questions in a series of studies produced in the 1980s through early 2000s known as the “Yale Studies.” The Yale Studies focused on 210 white-collar defendants prosecuted in seven federal district courts. See infra notes 112–116 and accompanying text. This Article demonstrates that, like all federal criminal defendants, the people convicted of financial crimes have fewer resources than the average U.S. adult. Financial crime defendants have attained less formal education than average and frequently rely on appointed counsel. Federal judges waive the fines of roughly eighty-six percent of federal financial crime defendants due to the defendant’s inability to pay. In other words, the median fine in a federal white-collar prosecution is $0.

This Article also shows that financial crimes are not prosecuted at equal rates across the U.S. population. Women are prosecuted at higher rates for financial crimes than for other types of federal crimes.13See infra Appendix Table A.3 (noting that women make up roughly thirty percent of federal financial crime defendants and roughly fourteen percent of all federal criminal defendants). The same is true in state courts, as Kaaryn Gustafson and others have pointed out.14See Kaaryn S. Gustafson, Cheating Welfare: Public Assistance and the Criminalization of Poverty 7 (2011) (pointing out that prosecutions of fraud are “unusual” in that they are more frequently prosecuted against women than other types of crimes); see also Brian A. Reaves, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Bureau of Just. Stat., Felony Defendants in Large Urban Counties, 2009 – Statistical Tables 5 (2013), https://bjs.ojp.gov/content/pub/pdf/fdluc09.pdf [https://perma.cc/C74Y-LETR] (“In 2009, the most frequently charged offenses among female felony defendants were fraud (37%), forgery (34%), and larceny/theft (31%).”). Financial crime prosecutions are also unequal by race. Black women are especially likely to be prosecuted for financial crimes and are prosecuted at roughly three times the per capita rate as Hispanic and non-Hispanic White women.15See infra Appendix Table A.3. The same is true for Black men, who are prosecuted at roughly three times the rate as Hispanic and non-Hispanic White men.16Id.

This analysis is especially important for understanding racial inequalities among female defendants. Black women are more likely to be convicted of a financial crime than any other type of federal crime.17This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. The data used in this paper is available for download at Stephanie Holmes Didwania, Data for “Regressive White-Collar Crime, Nw. Univ. (2024), https://doi.org/10.21985/n2-gav7-wt94 [hereinafter Didwania, Data]. This has been true every year since 1994—as far back as reliable federal criminal case data goes.18Id. The same is not true of any other race-gender group of defendants.19Id. Like Black women, non-Hispanic White women and non-Hispanic women of another race are prosecuted for financial crimes more than any other type of crime. Unlike Black women, however, this has not been the case every year for women who are not Black.

This Article also shows it is not the case that the defendants most overrepresented in financial crime cases (that is, low-income defendants and Black defendants) commit the most severe or complex financial crimes. The opposite is true. I argue that these prosecutorial patterns could easily stem from a combination of formal law and policy, individual biases, and systemic incentives.

A muddled view of how financial crime is prosecuted has meaningful consequences. Maybe because financial crime (often stylized as “white-collar” crime) is viewed as a pursuit of the elite, there seems to be little appetite for leniency toward those convicted of financial crimes on either side of the political aisle. As Benjamin Levin and Kate Levine write, “prosecuting some imagined class of bankers or executives remains very popular with many liberal, left, and progressive commentators.”20Benjamin Levin & Kate Levine, Redistributing Justice, Colum. L. Rev. 26 (forthcoming 2024). See also Douglas Husak, The Price of Criminal Law Skepticism: Ten Functions of the Criminal Law, 23 New Crim. L. Rev. 27, 51-52 (2020) (“Even those members of the public who tend to agree that the criminal justice system punishes too many persons with too much severity can be heard to complain when leniency is afforded to . . . white collar criminals.”). Along these lines, President Biden’s clemency efforts have almost exclusively—and in some cases explicitly—focused on people serving sentences for drug trafficking or possession.21For example, in September 2021, the Biden administration invited federal prisoners to apply for clemency if they had been released home under the pandemic relief bill and had four years or less remaining on their sentences. The invitation was limited, however, to people who had been convicted of drug crimes. Sam Stein, Biden Starts Clemency Process for Inmates Released due to Covid Conditions, Politico (Sept. 13, 2021, 1:17 PM), https://www.politico.com/news/2021/09/13/biden-clemency-covid-inmates-511658 [https://perma.cc/N93A-GUEM]. In April 2022, Biden took his first formal clemency actions as President, granting three pardons and seventy-five commutations. Press Release, White House, Clemency Recipient List (Apr. 26, 2022), https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/statements-releases/2022/04/26/clemency-recipient-list [https://perma.cc/6RQG-NGMV]. Of the seventy-eight clemency recipients, all but one had been convicted of drug crimes. Id. In October 2022, Biden announced a pardon of all prior federal convictions of marijuana possession. Press Release, White House, Statement from President Biden on Marijuana Reform (Oct. 6, 2022), https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/statements-releases/2022/10/06/statement-from-president-biden-on-marijuana-reform [https://perma.cc/3X8W-U2UE].

Not only has the Biden administration essentially excluded white-collar prisoners from its clemency efforts, but Attorney General Merrick Garland has also emphasized that cracking down on white-collar crime is one of DOJ’s top priorities.22Garland, supra note 8. In a March 2022 speech describing this white-collar initiative, then-Assistant Attorney General for the Criminal Division Kenneth A. Polite, Jr. echoed the idea that white-collar crime is not punished harshly enough, telling the audience, “When we talk about drug dealing and violence, we all have no problem conjuring notions of accountability for the criminal actors. But the sheer mention of individual accountability in white-collar cases was, and is, received as a shockwave in our practice.”23Assistant Attorney General Kenneth A. Polite, Jr., Justice Department Keynote at the ABA Institute on White Collar Crime (Mar. 3, 2022) (transcript of remarks as prepared for delivery at https://www.justice.gov/opa/speech/assistant-attorney-general-kenneth-polite-jr-delivers-justice-department-keynote-aba [https://perma.cc/L8UU-FFBB]). This Article cautions that directing more resources toward prosecuting white-collar crime could perpetuate class- and race-based inequalities rather than mitigate them.24This Article thus supports the argument advanced by Benjamin Levin and Kate Levine that those on the progressive left who hope the criminal system will work as a tool of progressive redistribution is unlikely to succeed. Levin & Levine, supra note 20, at 37–38 (forthcoming 2024) (arguing that “institutions of the punitive state are inherently regressive and are antithetical to the egalitarian vision articulated by many of the commentators who have embraced redistributive carceral projects”)

The federal criminal system is a worthy site to study the regressive prosecution of white-collar crime even though most criminal defendants in the United States are prosecuted in state courts.25In 2020—the last year for which data was available—around 1.2 million people were under the legal jurisdiction of a state or federal correctional authority. Within this population, eighty-seven percent of the people were under state jurisdiction and thirteen percent were under federal jurisdiction. This calculation excludes people held in local jails. See E. Ann Carson, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Bureau of Just. Stat., Prisoners in 2020 – Statistical Tables 7 (2021). This Article focuses on the federal system for two reasons. First, the federal criminal system is important in its own right. The federal government incarcerates more people than any state and federal prisoners on average serve longer sentences than state prisoners.26Id. at 7–8 (showing that the federal prisoner population was 152,156 in 2020 and the jurisdiction with the second-largest prisoner population (Texas) imprisoned 135,906 people in 2020). The median time served in state prison for prisoners released in 2018 was 1.3 years. Danielle Kaeble, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Bureau of Just. Stat., Time Served in State Prison, 2018 1 (2021). By contrast, the median federal sentence in the 1994–2019 period was two years. Federal criminal defendants must serve at least eighty-five percent of their sentence, so even accounting for good time credit, the median time served for federal prisoners over this period was at least 1.7 years. 18 U.S.C. § 3624(b)(1) (providing that federal prisoners serving more than 1 year in prison can get credit towards their sentence of 54 days per year if they display “exemplary compliance with institutional disciplinary regulations”). Fraud—the most common financial crime—is itself the third-most prosecuted type of federal crime after drug trafficking and immigration offenses.27This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17. Indeed, even as federal prosecutions of other types of crimes have exploded, fraud alone has constituted around 10 percent or more of the federal felony docket since the early 1990s.28Id.

Second, as described in Section I.B, federal officials repeatedly emphasize that it is their goal to prosecute the most egregious and complex financial crimes. Because state courts have concurrent jurisdiction over many financial crimes, DOJ and FBI can in theory focus their efforts on complex investigations. DOJ and FBI routinely tout their partnerships with other federal agencies to detect and prosecute sophisticated financial crimes. It seems unlikely that state prosecutors are doing better than the federal government at prosecuting complex financial crimes with fewer investigative resources. For this reason, prosecuting serious financial crime is often viewed as a federal project.29See Daniel C. Richman & William J. Stuntz, Al Capone’s Revenge: An Essay on the Political Economy of Pretextual Prosecution, 105 Colum. L. Rev. 583, 601–02 (2005).

Indeed, many observers rightly view the complexity of serious financial crimes as an impediment to prosecution. Criminal investigations can take years; relevant documents can number in the millions; trials can take months.30See, e.g., Press Release, U.S. Dep’t. of Just., Federal Jury Convicts Former Enron Chief Executives Ken Lay, Jeff Skilling on Fraud, Conspiracy, and Related Charges (May 25, 2006), https://www.justice.gov/archive/opa/pr/2006/May/06_crm_328.html [https://perma.cc/9UYY-Y7LE] (noting that the trial of Enron executives Kenneth Lay and Jeffrey Skilling took fifty-six days). This Article’s primary goal is not to determine whether the federal government has chosen the best balance in prosecuting the cases that it does, but rather to bring to light the fact that most financial crime cases are modest ones that disproportionately impact people with the fewest advantages.

This Article’s analysis advances in four steps. Part I traces the history of financial crime and shows how, for centuries, rich and powerful people have escaped prosecution for financial crimes while people who are poor and middle-class have been prosecuted. Section I.B describes how federal financial crime cases are prosecuted today and provides examples of four such cases. Section I.C argues that most scholarly and public discourse around financial crime overlooks the types of financial criminal cases that are most routinely prosecuted in U.S. courts.

Part II presents the bulk of the empirical analysis. It shows persistent income, gender, and race gaps in financial crime prosecutions that disfavor defendants who are low-income, male, and Black. Part III offers many possible explanations for the results. It groups these explanations into four categories. First, Section III.A considers but rules out the possibility that people who are overrepresented commit the most serious financial crimes. Second, Section III.B describes how systemic and structural conditions create a system in which prosecutors are motivated to prosecute the cases they view as most winnable. Third, Section III.C describes ways that formal criminal law and policies could lead prosecutors to focus their efforts on simplistic, low-level financial crimes. As one example, it shows how federal laws governing restitution benefit defendants with more resources. Finally, Section III.D describes how biases on the part of actors in the criminal system could contribute to inequality.

Part IV concludes. It argues that the findings provide vital context for understanding how financial crime is prosecuted in the United States and challenges the popular notion that financial crime is under-prosecuted.

I.  PROSECUTING FINANCIAL CRIME

This Part broadly traces the history of financial crime prosecution. As described in Section I.A, the United States has a long history of prosecuting poor and middle-class people for financial crimes. (Part II shows that this pattern continues through today, despite repeated statements to the contrary by modern prosecutors). Section I.B describes how the federal government has prosecuted fraud since the 1990s and presents four archetypical examples of federal financial crime cases, to which I return throughout the Article. Section I.C explains how this Article contributes to the existing literature on federal financial crime, which largely avoids discussing the relatively low-level cases that pervade the federal criminal system.

A.  Early Prosecutions and the Concept of “White-Collar” Crime

Most financial crimes are frauds.31Other financial crimes include embezzlement, antitrust violations, and counterfeiting. See infra Sections I.B (explaining how the FBI categorizes white-collar crime), II.A (explaining how the U.S. Sentencing Commission categorizes white-collar crime), and II.B, Table 1 (showing that fraud makes up almost eighty percent of cases in the data). For centuries and up to present day, Anglo-American legal systems have tolerated frauds committed by the rich and powerful while systematically prosecuting poor and middle-class people for fraud offenses.32See, e.g., Emily Kadens, The Persistent Limits of Fraud Prevention in Historical Perspective, 118 Nw. U. L. Rev. 167, 173-79 (2023) (describing challenges in efforts during the Middle Ages to regulate fraud in consumer markets). But wealthy people have always committed fraud and other financial crimes even if they went unpunished. For example, the term “robber barons” originated to describe medieval English nobles who engaged in extortion.33Barbara A. Hanawalt, Fur-Collar Crime: The Pattern of Crime Among the Fourteenth-Century English Nobility, 8 J. Soc. Hist. 1, 1 (1975). The title of Hanawalt’s article refers to legislation by King Edward III of England that only permitted noble families to wear minever fur. See id. at 2. As historian Barbara Hanawalt describes, “kings and barons [of medieval England] both assumed that a certain amount of criminal activity was involved in being a noble and that it would be tolerated as long as it did not become excessive.”34Id. at 2; see id. at 3, 15 n.9 (reporting that 14 out of around 10,500 felony indictments in the fourteenth century involved members of the nobility). Although medieval English nobles engaged in “widespread extortion,” they were rarely criminally prosecuted.35Id. at 2–3 (noting that “the kings could use a number of informal and indirect means to control the illegal activities of their barons without bringing them into common criminal courts”); see also Kadens, supra note 32, at 168 (“Fraud is not, as it is sometimes assumed, a creature of modern capitalism, industrialization, the spread of complex financial systems, or the development of the corporation. On the contrary, many of the same types of frauds that we see today have existed throughout the history of organized society.”).

In other words, society saw financial crimes committed by the elite as part of the social fabric. Fraud was thus considered what observers would come to call a “street crime,” meaning it was viewed as a crime when committed by poor or middle-class people. For example, one of early America’s most infamous fraudsters—Charles Ponzi—was a poor immigrant from Italy who worked as a dishwasher, waiter, and bank teller before launching the eponymous scheme that would eventually result in his arrest, conviction of federal mail fraud, and a seven-year prison sentence.36Sewell Chan, A Look Back at Charles Ponzi the Schemer, N.Y. Times (Dec. 15, 2008, 12:53 PM), https://archive.nytimes.com/cityroom.blogs.nytimes.com/2008/12/15/ponzi-the-schemer-evoked-once-again [https://perma.cc/L842-PRXA]. Despite eventually amassing enormous wealth through his pyramid scheme, Ponzi was never a member of the elite.37Id. (quoting Mitchell Zuckoff describing, “[Ponzi] had his nose pressed against the glass . . . . He was not linked with Wall Street and New York, though he had dreams of being like Rockefeller”).

Meanwhile, as centuries went on, the term “robber barons” adapted to refer to business magnates of the nineteenth century who monopolized industries, corrupted government, engaged in unethical business practices, and exploited workers and investors.38See Hal Bridges, The Robber Baron Concept in American History, 32 Bus. Hist. Rev. 1, 1 (1958). Like the medieval robber barons whose criminal activity was ignored by the King,39See supra note 33 and accompanying text. the robber barons of the 1800s were also rarely prosecuted.40Lawrence M. Friedman, Crime and Punishment in American History 290 (1993) (“[T]here was a certain lack of zeal for punishing business behavior [before the 1930s].”) (cited in Eisinger, supra note 6 at 59).

By the early twentieth century and spurred by the Great Depression, the public and federal government grew increasingly interested in regulating markets and prosecuting members of the upper classes. During this era, Congress passed antitrust laws and laws regulating Wall Street.41Congress passed the Sherman Act in 1890, the Federal Trade Commission Act (creating the FTC) in 1914, and the Clayton Act in 1914. The Antitrust Laws, Fed. Trade Comm’n, https://www.ftc.gov/advice-guidance/competition-guidance/guide-antitrust-laws/antitrust-laws [https://perma.cc/JZ6J-S5TT]. As the Federal Trade Commission describes, “[w]ith some revisions, these are the three core federal antitrust laws still in effect today.” Id. Following the stock market crash of 1929, Congress in 1934 created the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) to restore confidence in the stock market and enforce securities laws.42Securities Exchange Act of 1934, Pub. L. No. 73-291, 48 Stat. 881 (creating the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission and requiring stock exchanges to register with the federal government).

Scholars and the public needed an entirely new phrase—“white-collar crime”—to recognize that fraud committed by members of the elite was crime. Recognizing that members of the upper class engaged in enormous amounts of unpunished financial crime, sociologist Edwin Sutherland coined the term “white-collar crime” in his 1939 presidential address to the American Sociological Society.43Edwin H. Sutherland, White-Collar Criminality, 5 Am. Socio. Rev. 1, 1–2, n.1 (1940) (Thirty-Fourth Annual Presidential Address delivered at Philadelphia, Pa., Dec. 27, 1939). Sutherland went on to write a book by a similar name. Edwin H. Sutherland, White Collar Crime (1949).

Sutherland defined a “white-collar crime” as “a crime committed by a person of respectability and high social status in the course of his occupation.”44Sutherland, White Collar Crime, supra note 43, at 7. Sutherland’s basic thesis was that the academic methods by which crime was understood and measured at the time were invalid because “they have not included vast areas of criminal behavior of persons not in the lower class.”45Sutherland, White-Collar Criminality, supra note 43, at 2.

Sutherland critiqued the academic criminological community for focusing too heavily on “street crimes” perpetrated by “low status” people and for being insufficiently interested in crimes committed by people in “high status” occupations. As an example, Sutherland explained, “The ‘robber barons’ of the last half of the nineteenth century were white-collar criminals, as practically everyone now agrees.”46Id. Sutherland warned, however,

The present-day white-collar criminals . . . are more suave and deceptive than the “robber barons” . . . . Their criminality has been demonstrated again and again in the investigations of land offices, railways, insurance, munitions, banking, public utilities, stock exchanges, the oil industry, real estate, reorganization committees, receiverships, bankruptcies, and politics. Individual cases of such criminality are reported frequently, and in many periods more important crime news may be found on the financial pages of newspapers than on the front pages.47Id.

Beginning in the mid-twentieth century, the federal government began to articulate and attempt to carry out a new vision of white-collar prosecution. In the 1970s the SEC created its first enforcement division to uncover fraud.48Harwell Wells, The Securities and Exchange Commission’s Enforcement Division: A
History, Temple 10-Q, https://www2.law.temple.edu/10q/the-securities-and-exchange-commissions-enforcement-division-a-history [https://perma.cc/C8HF-X9MS].
In 1977, Congress passed the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act which outlawed bribery of foreign officials principally by large U.S. companies.49Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977, Pub. L. No. 95-213, 91 Stat. 1494. In the 1980s, DOJ prosecuted over 1,000 cases associated with the savings and loan crisis, including some top executives at major banks.50Kitty Calavita, Henry N. Pontell & Robert H. Tillman, Big Money Crime: Fraud and Politics in the Savings and Loan Crisis 28 (1997) (“By the spring of 1992, in excess of one thousand defendants had been formally charged in major savings and loan cases, with a conviction rate of 91 percent . . . .”). During this time, as some observers noted, “Many U.S. Attorneys’ Offices . . . restructured their offices in order to develop and prosecute a large number of cases of white-collar crime.”51Kenneth Mann, Stanton Wheeler & Austin Sarat, Sentencing the White-Collar Offender, 17 Am. Crim. L. Rev. 479, 480 n.3 (1980); see also Elizabeth Hinton, From the War on Poverty to the War on Crime: The Making of Mass Incarceration in America 24 (2016) (noting that FBI crime data during the 1960s and 1970s “emphasized street crime to the exclusion of organized and white-collar crime”). The next subsection describes the mechanics of this modern era of federal enforcement of financial crime.

B.  Modern Fraud Prosecutions: 1990s Through Present

Efforts to differentiate financial crime committed by the elite from financial crime committed by poor or middle-class people were short-lived. Today, the term “white-collar” crime eludes easy definition.52Stuart P. Green, The Concept of White Collar Crime in Law and Legal Theory, 8 Buff. Crim. L. Rev. 1, 2 (2004) (claiming that “the meaning of white collar crime . . . is deeply contested. . . . [but d]espite its fundamental awkwardness, the term ‘white collar crime’ is now so deeply embedded within our legal, moral, and social science vocabularies that it could hardly be abandoned”). Scholars, journalists, and public officials often use the term as in its original definition—to refer to financial crimes committed by wealthy people in the course of business activity,53See infra note 111 and accompanying text. as exemplified by Ralph Nader’s pithy description of white-collar crime as “crime in the suites,” rather than “crime in the streets.”54Ralph Nader, White Collar Fraud; America’s Crime Without Criminals, N.Y Times, May 19, 1985 (§ 3), at 3, https://www.nytimes.com/1985/05/19/business/white-collar-fraud-america-s-crime-without-criminals.html [https://perma.cc/E7DE-SZQS].

However, official definitions of the term “white-collar” crime typically do not refer to the social status or occupation of those who perpetrate it, but rather, to the type of criminal behavior committed by the defendant.55The FBI explains that it would be impractical for the FBI to report white-collar crime statistics based on the offender’s socioeconomic status because that data is not available in the Uniform Crime Reports. See Cynthia Barnett, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Fed. Bureau of Investigation, The Measurement of White-Collar Crime Using Uniform Crime Reporting (UCR) Data 1 (2000) (“Although it is acceptable to use socioeconomic characteristics of the offender to define white-collar crime, it is impossible to measure white-collar crime with UCR data if the working definition revolves around the type of offender. There are no socioeconomic or occupational indicators of the offender in the data.”). The FBI, for example, defines “white-collar crime” as “those illegal acts which are characterized by deceit, concealment, or violation of trust and which are not dependent upon the application or threat of physical force or violence.”56Id. The National Incident-Based Reporting System (“NIBRS”), which compiles data on crimes reported to law enforcement, classifies the following crimes as white-collar crimes: fraud, bribery, counterfeiting/forgery, embezzlement, and writing bad checks.57Id. at 2.

This Article roughly follows the NIBRS definition but uses the term financial crime because, as this Article shows, the term white-collar crime is a misnomer. I define a crime as a financial crime if it is categorized as an antitrust violation, bribery, counterfeiting, forgery, fraud, or tax offense.58See infra Section II.A (describing how the data is constructed). Since the mid-1990s, the federal government has prosecuted around 10,000 financial crimes per year, most of them frauds.59See infra Appendix Figure A.1. The statistics presented in the Article show the same patterns when the data is restricted to fraud cases. Until fiscal year 2018, the U.S. Sentencing Commission reported separately whether a defendant’s offense of conviction was a fraud, larceny, or embezzlement. Beginning in 2018, however, the U.S. Sentencing Commission began combining these three types of crime into one category in the data. To make the data consistent throughout, I combined the three categories together under the label “financial crime” in the years prior to 2018. This section describes in broad terms how the federal government prosecutes and talks about financial crime.

1.  The Statutory Landscape

Federal law today defines many types of financial crimes, most of which are contained in Chapter 47 of Title 18 of the United States Code. The most commonly prosecuted federal financial crimes are embezzlement of public money, mail and wire fraud, bank fraud, and tax fraud.60See infra Appendix Table A.1. Congress has repeatedly expanded the scope of federal financial criminal law and, over the years 1994 to 2019, federal defendants were prosecuted for violations of many different types of fraud.61See id.

Federal prosecutors use mail fraud (and its sister crime, wire fraud) particularly expansively. The original mail fraud statute prohibited the use of the mails to advance “any scheme or artifice to defraud.”62Act of June 8, 1872, Pub. L. No. 42-335, § 301, 17 Stat. 283, 323 (revising, consolidating, and amending the statutes relating to the Post Office Department). Congress has expanded the mail fraud statute several times since its original passage. Mail fraud is now defined in 18 U.S.C. § 1341. The original purpose of the statute was to protect the U.S. Postal Service from being used to commit fraud. Mail was the “first communications network in the United States,”63Anuj C. Desai, Wiretapping Before the Wires: The Post Office and the Birth of Communications Privacy, 60 Stan. L. Rev. 553, 553 (2007). and in 1870 the U.S. Postal Service enjoyed a natural monopoly over mail delivery.64See id. at 573. Perhaps because the mail was so widely used, “[o]ver time, the mail fraud statute came to be viewed as a stop-gap provision that provides a ‘first line of defense’ to combat innovative frauds until Congress could enact more specific legislation.”65Peter J. Henning, Maybe It Should Just Be Called Federal Fraud: The Changing Nature of the Mail Fraud Statute, 36 B.C. L. Rev. 435, 437 (1995).

In 1995, Peter Henning contended that “the mail fraud statute has become the primary provision to extend federal jurisdiction to crimes traditionally prosecuted only at the state and local level.”66Id. Today nearly all frauds use mail, telephone, radio, or the Internet in some way, giving the federal government the ability to prosecute almost any fraud it chooses. Federal prosecutors exercise enormous discretion in deciding which fraud crimes to prosecute, and the resulting prosecutions therefore reflect decisions by prosecutors and law enforcement agents about which cases to prioritize.

Although there are many federal financial crimes, their defining characteristic is that they involve dishonesty. To this end, most financial crimes include mens rea elements that require the government to specifically prove the defendant’s deceitful intent.67Some observers point out that financial crime’s traditionally high mental state requirements have, to some extent, been eroded with theories of, for example, willful blindness or reckless regard for falsity. Baer, supra note 6, at 30-31 (2023). For example, the mail fraud statute requires proof that the defendant devised or intended a “scheme or artifice to defraud.”6818 U.S.C. § 1341. Health care fraud similarly requires proof that the defendant knowingly and willfully executed “a scheme or artifice . . . to defraud any health care benefit program” or to obtain, “by means of false or fraudulent pretenses, . . . any of the money or property owned by, or under the custody or control of, any health care benefit program.”69Id. § 1347 (a)(1)–(2).

Despite this common element, the financial crimes that are prosecuted vary widely on many grounds. Victims of financial crimes can be individuals, organizations, or the government. Some financial crimes have a single concrete victim, others have many, and yet others have no concrete victim (like insider trading). Some financial crimes involve wrongdoing that is also investigated and enforced by the government through civil proceedings (such as securities fraud or tax fraud), while others have no regulatory counterpart (such as embezzlement). The next section broadly describes how federal prosecutors and agents investigate and bring financial crime cases.

2.  Federal Prosecutions in Practice

Nearly all federal financial crime prosecutions are brought by prosecutors who work in the ninety-three U.S. Attorney’s Offices (“USAOs”). Each USAO is associated with exactly one of the 94 geographically distinct federal district courts, with one exception.70The District of Guam and the District of the Northern Mariana Islands share a USAO. Every USAO is led by a U.S. Attorney, who is appointed by the President. The prosecutors who work in USAOs are called Assistant United States Attorneys (“AUSAs”).

Although USAOs must follow centralized policies dictated by DOJ leadership, they for the most part work independently, prosecuting crimes that occur within their jurisdictions. Most prosecutorial decisions (such as the decision to bring criminal charges) are subject to little judicial oversight and courts are “hesitant to examine the decision whether to prosecute.”71Wayte v. United States, 470 U.S. 598, 608 (1985). As a result, prosecutors enjoy broad discretion in deciding how to carry out their work.72See Stephanos Bibas, Prosecutorial Regulations Versus Prosecutorial Accountability, 157 U. Pa. L. Rev. 959, 959 (2009) (“Few regulations bind or even guide prosecutorial discretion, and fewer still work well.”); William J. Stuntz, The Pathological Politics of Criminal Law, 100 Mich. L. Rev. 505, 506 (2001) (describing prosecutors as “the criminal justice system’s real lawmakers”). In theory, a defendant can challenge their prosecution on the ground that it was brought selectively—that is, based on a prohibited consideration such as the defendant’s race or religion. See Oyler v. Boles, 368 U.S. 448, 456 (1962). In practice, however, selective prosecution challenges virtually never succeed. See Richard H. McAdams, Race and Selective Prosecution: Discovering the Pitfalls of Armstrong, 73 Chi.-Kent L. Rev. 605, 615–16 (1998) (noting that since 1886 there has been only one published case dismissing a criminal charge based on racially selective prosecution). But see Alison Siegler & William Admussen, Discovering Racial Discrimination by the Police, 115 Nw. U. L. Rev. 987, 987 (2021) (describing how federal courts can and should lower the discovery standards for defendants alleging racial discrimination by the police).

Despite limited oversight from the courts, individual prosecutors are subject to other forms of workplace oversight. AUSAs are governed by the Justice Manual, which contains detailed rules for how individual prosecutors should exercise their discretion. For example, the Manual dictates that charging decisions should be reviewed by supervisors and specifies that “[a]ll but the most routine indictments should be accompanied by a prosecution memorandum that identifies the charging options supported by the evidence and the law and explains the charging decision[s] therein.”73U.S. Dep’t of Just., Just. Manual § 9-27.300 (2023).

The Manual also expresses a nationwide policy that federal prosecutors should usually charge “the most serious offense that is encompassed by the defendant’s conduct and that is likely to result in a sustainable conviction.”74Id. However, the Manual leaves room for an AUSA to deviate from this policy by also considering “whether the consequences of those charges for sentencing would yield a result that is proportional to the seriousness of the defendant’s conduct, and whether the charge achieves [the] purposes of the criminal law.”75Id.

Given these policies, how do prosecutors decide which cases to charge? The answer is complicated and varied, but much legal and sociolegal scholarship has shown the perhaps unremarkable phenomenon that prosecutors seem to like to bring cases they think they can win.76See Brandon Hasbrouck, The Just Prosecutor, 99 Wash. & Lee U. L. Rev. 627, 632 (2021) (“The adversary system derails many prosecutors, including progressive prosecutors, and turns them into win-seekers instead of neutral agents of justice.”); Rachel E. Barkow, Institutional Design and the Policing of Prosecutors: Lessons from Administrative Law, 61 Stan. L. Rev. 869, 883 (2009) (suggesting that prosecutors “may feel the need to be able to point to a record of convictions and long sentences if they want to be promoted or to land high-powered jobs outside the government” and prefer to “keep up [their] conviction rate”); Tracey L. Meares, Rewards for Good Behavior: Influencing Prosecutorial Discretion and Conduct with Financial Incentives, 64 Fordham L. Rev. 851, 867 (1995) (“A prosecutor will naturally select the stronger cases to charge.”). But see Richard T. Boylan, What Do Prosecutors Maximize? Evidence from the Careers of U.S. Attorneys, 7 Am. L. & Econ. Rev 379, 379 (2005) (finding that “conviction rates do not appear to affect the careers of U.S. attorneys”). This is because obtaining convictions is often a metric for promotion and advancement.77Stephanos Bibas, Plea Bargaining Outside the Shadow of Trial, 117 Harv. L. Rev. 2463, 2471 (2004) (“[P]rosecutors want to ensure convictions . . . . Favorable win-loss statistics boost prosecutors’ egos, their esteem, their praise by colleagues, and their prospects for promotion and career advancement.”). Winning cases is also important for appropriations. As Lauren Ouziel describes,

U.S. Attorney’s Offices, after all, need money, and federal funds are not forthcoming—either from Congress in the first instance or Main Justice in the subsequent allocation—without some measure of demonstrated performance. For federal prosecutors, the relevant performance metrics are defendants charged and convicted. Both of these metrics determine the lump sum congressional appropriation for all ninety-three U.S. Attorneys’ Offices across the country, while individual offices’ caseloads largely determine the allocation of those funds among the offices. In short, case volume and prosecutorial success dictate a U.S. Attorney’s Office’s budget allocation.78Lauren M. Ouziel, Ambition and Fruition in Federal Criminal Law: A Case Study, 103 Va. L. Rev. 1077, 1108–09 (2017) (citing U.S. Dep’t of Justice, U.S. Attorneys, FY 2014 Performance Budget Congressional Submission 1, 15; Dep’t of Justice, Office of Inspector Gen., Audit Div., Audit Report 09-03, Resource Management of United States Attorneys’ Offices 7–10 (Nov. 2008)).

After a person is convicted of a federal crime, federal judges sentence them. At sentencing, a judge can impose fines or imprisonment or both on a defendant, and some scholars have pointed out that fines are imposed more frequently in financial crime prosecutions than in other federal prosecutions.79Max Schanzenbach & Michael L. Yaeger, Prison Time, Fines, and Federal White-Collar Criminals: The Anatomy of a Racial Disparity, 96 J. Crim. L. & Criminology 757, 768 (2006). Some have theorized that fines are more appropriate for defendants convicted of financial crimes because their crimes are more deterrable.80See, e.g., Stephanos Bibas, White-Collar Plea Bargaining and Sentencing After Booker, 47 Wm. & Mary L. Rev. 721, 724 (2005) (“An economist would argue that if one increased the expected cost of white-collar crime by raising the expected penalty, white-collar crime would be unprofitable and would thus cease.”). Others, including Richard Posner, have argued that fines should be more widely used for the entire spectrum of crimes given the high costs of physical incarceration. See Richard A. Posner, Optimal Sentences for White-Collar Criminals, 17 Am. Crim. L. Rev. 409, 409–10 (1980) (arguing in favor of “the substitution, whenever possible, of the fine (or civil penalty) for the prison sentence as the punishment for crime”). But see Dorothy S. Lund & Natasha Sarin, Corporate Crime and Punishment: An Empirical Study, 100 Tex. L. Rev. 285, 285 (2021) (arguing that “enforcers are unlikely to achieve optimal deterrence using fines alone”); Jed S. Rakoff, The Financial Crisis: Why Have No High-Level Executives Been Prosecuted?, N.Y. Rev. Books (Jan. 9, 2014), https://www.nybooks.com/articles/2014/01/09/financial-crisis-why-no-executive-prosecutions [https://perma.cc/5BRX-UBAD] (arguing that fines are inadequate to change corporate behavior and that the threat of imprisonment against executives would be a more effective deterrent). Researchers have also argued that the prevalence of fines in financial crime sentencing reflects a fine/incarceration tradeoff, in which the greater a defendant’s ability to pay a fine, the less (if any) imprisonment is imposed at sentencing.81See Joel Waldfogel, Are Fines and Prison Terms Used Efficiently? Evidence on Federal Fraud Offenders, 39 J.L. & Econ. 107, 107 (1995).

The literature on white-collar crime’s fine/incarceration tradeoff might give the impression that fines are widespread in financial crime prosecutions, but this is not the case. Most federal financial crime defendants do not have any fines imposed in their cases. In the data, the median fine amount for a defendant convicted of a federal financial crime is $0.82See infra Table 1. A fine of just $500 represents the top thirteen percent of fines imposed among people convicted of financial crimes.83This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17. It is true that fines are more prevalent among financial crime defendants than others (a fine of $500 for a federal defendant convicted of a non-financial crime would represent the top nine percent of all fines imposed),84Id. but it is not the case that fines are widespread among those who are convicted of financial crimes. Instead, fines are much more relevant in cases involving corporate defendants. This is because corporations cannot be imprisoned, fines generate revenue, and prosecutors worry about the collateral consequences that criminal conviction can impose on large corporations.85For example, Mary Jo White, former U.S. Attorney for the Southern District of New York (and future SEC Chair) said in an interview, “[a]ny prosecutor hesitates before bringing an action against a company because of the fear that that company will go out of business.” Interview with Mary Jo White, Debevoise, New York, New York, 19 Corp. Crime Rep. (Dec. 12, 2005), https://www.corporatecrimereporter.com/news/200/category/sampleinterviews [https://perma.cc/MLL3-UCCM].

In addition to fines and imprisonment, convicted defendants will usually be ordered to pay restitution to any concrete victim. Restitution is different from a fine. A fine is a form of punishment imposed on a defendant and usually paid to the government prosecuting the case. Restitution is instead paid by the defendant to either the victim or a government restitution fund. Like the law in all states, federal law requires courts to order restitution in any case “in which an identifiable victim or victims has suffered a physical injury or pecuniary loss.”8618 U.S.C. § 3663A(c)(1)(B).

Unlike fines, most defendants convicted of a financial crime are ordered to pay some restitution. The median restitution amount ordered is around $6,000.87See infra Table 1. In contrast, for federal defendants convicted of non-financial crimes, fewer than ten percent are ordered to pay any restitution.88This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17.

The majority of defendants convicted of federal financial crimes are sentenced to prison. Sentences for financial crime defendants are lower than the average among other types of federal crimes. For federal criminal defendants convicted of financial crimes, the average sentence is around sixteen months.89See infra Table 1. For all other federal criminal defendants, the average sentence is fifty-three months.90This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17. This could reflect the fact that most financial crimes do not carry mandatory minimum penalty provisions.91The only type of financial crime that carries a mandatory minimum is identity theft. Aggravated identity theft includes a two-year mandatory minimum penalty. 18 U.S.C. § 1028A; see also An Overview of Mandatory Minimum Penalties in the Fed. Crim. Just. Sys. § 3 (U.S. Sent’g Comm’n 2017) (listing federal crimes that carry mandatory minimum penalties).

3.  Federal Financial Crime Archetypes

This subsection illustrates some of the kinds of financial crime cases the federal government prosecutes. It centers around four real-world examples of federal financial crimes, from least to most severe.92As Miriam Baer has pointed out, most federal fraud offenses are not statutorily graded the way other types of crimes are. See Miriam H. Baer, Sorting Out White-Collar Crime, 97 Tex. L. Rev. 225, 228 (2018). Instead, a federal fraud’s severity is largely driven by the dollar amount of loss, as dictated by § 2B1.1 of the United States Sentencing Guidelines. See id. at 250 (“Because the federal criminal code declines to differentiate fraud up front—either by amount, mens rea, or degree of risk—whatever sorting there is of fraud offenses takes place at sentencing.”). These cases exemplify nationwide patterns that this Article reports and explores in Part II, and this Article returns to these examples throughout.

In Case A, a man who is a citizen of Mexico used a social security number belonging to another person to secure employment and attend a job orientation training with a local company.93Press Release, U.S. Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District of Louisiana, Mexican National Sentenced for Illegally Using a Social Security Number Belonging to Another Person (Oct. 12, 2022), https://www.justice.gov/usao-edla/pr/mexican-national-sentenced-illegally-using-social-security-number-belonging-another [https://perma.cc/4DMK-8C7S]. The man was prosecuted in the Eastern District of Louisiana and was ultimately convicted of violating 18 U.S.C. § 408(a)(7)(b), which makes it a crime to fraudulently use another person’s social security number. The man was sentenced to one year of probation.

In Case B, a man received Social Security and Department of Defense benefits intended for his late father for four years after his father’s death.94Press Release, U.S. Attorney’s Office for the Southern District of Ohio, Fifteenth Person Charged with Theft in Ongoing Social Security Benefits Fraud Investigation (Aug. 10, 2020), https://oig.ssa.gov/news-releases/2020-08-10-audits-and-investigations-investigations-aug4-oh-fifteenth-person-charged-social-security-fraud [https://perma.cc/5CFK-7JWP]. The man’s elderly father had moved in with the man in 2012.95Sentencing Memorandum of Defendant Napoleon Crawford at 2, United States v. Crawford, No. 1:20CR029 (S.D. Ohio Aug. 6, 2021). The man cared for his father for next four years, until his father’s death at age 92 in 2016.96Id. When the man began caring for his father in 2012, they joined bank accounts, into which his father’s benefits were deposited.97Id. After his father’s death, a death certificate was properly filed, but his late father’s benefit payments continued to be deposited into their joint bank account.98Id. Over the four years that followed his father’s death, the man collected $42,103 in Social Security benefits and $41,609 in Department of Defense benefits to which he was not entitled.99Press Release, supra note 94.

Case B was prosecuted in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Ohio. The man pled guilty to theft of public money. He was sentenced to eight months in prison and ordered to pay $83,712 in restitution to the Social Security Administration (“SSA”) and Department of Defense.100Id.

Case B was part of a federal initiative called the Social Security Administration Fraud Prosecution Project.101Id. The SSA Fraud Prosecution Project is a collaboration of the SSA Office of the Inspector General (“SSA OIG”) and DOJ.102Id. The investigation of Case B also involved employees of the Department of Defense Office of Inspector General, the Veteran’s Administration Office of Inspector General, the United States Office of Personnel Management Office of Inspector General, and the United States Secret Service.103Id. It appears that many federal agencies and employees devoted significant resources to bringing Case B and others like it.

In all, the SSA OIG reports that as a result of its audit program, it discovered dozens of instances of people collecting social security or veteran benefits intended for another person in Ohio, a state that has an adult population of more than eight million.104Id. See also Gustafson, supra note 14, at 57 (finding that in California, the state conducts biometric imaging (that is, fingerprinting) of all welfare applicants as a way to detect fraud and discovers around three people per month who have submitted a duplicate application). The SSA OIG investigation has led the USAO for the Southern District of Ohio to prosecute at least fifteen people in cases like Case B. The losses to SSA associated with these cases average just under $60,000 per defendant.105Id.

In Case C, a married couple owned and operated a company called Kingdom Connected Investments (“KCI”), which they advertised as a Christian organization.106Press Release, U.S. Attorney’s Office for the District of South Carolina, Married Greenville Business Owners Sentenced to More than Seventeen Total Years, Ordered to Pay More than $2.5 Million in Restitution for Defrauding Home Buyers and Sellers (Oct. 5, 2020), https://www.justice.gov/usao-sc/pr/married-greenville-business-owners-sentenced-more-seventeen-total-years-ordered-pay-more [https://perma.cc/SAN6-ZCTE]. KCI sought to pair clients who fell into two categories: (1) homeowners who owed more on their homes than the home was worth (that is, they were “underwater” on the home); and (2) potential homebuyers who did not have a high enough credit score to qualify for a conventional mortgage. KCI operated by matching homeowners (sellers) and buyers. KCI told the sellers they would transfer title of the home to KCI and take over the home’s mortgage payments, allowing the homeowners to get out of their underwater mortgage. KCI collected down payments from the buyers, telling them they were renting-to-own the home.

None of this was true. In reality, KCI never actually purchased the sellers’ homes, which meant each property still had an existing mortgage in the seller’s name(s) after the sellers thought they no longer owned the home. Rather than using the buyers’ down payments to pay the mortgages in full as promised, KCI used much of these down payments for personal use and to try to build their real estate business. Eventually, with the mortgages unpaid, nearly all the homes went into foreclosure and sold at auction. Many sellers learned that KCI had not actually purchased their home when they received foreclosure notices. Many of KCI’s buyers, who thought they were renting-to-own their homes, learned the truth when the home’s new owners sought to evict them. In all, KCI received $2.7 million from the buyers but only made $1.4 million in mortgage payments. Approximately 130 properties were involved in the scam, suggesting the average buyer lost around $20,000. Most sellers had their credit scores ruined by the foreclosures.

Case C was prosecuted in the U.S. District Court for the District of South Carolina. A federal jury found the defendants guilty of conspiracy to commit mail fraud and equity skimming after just ninety minutes of deliberation. The husband and wife were sentenced to seventy-eight and 136 months in prison, respectively, and ordered to pay $2,664,796.69 in restitution.

Case D will be familiar to many readers. JPMorgan Chase, a major U.S. bank, knowingly packaged shoddy mortgages into securities that did not meet its credit standards. JPMorgan Chase sold these securities to investors. A JPMorgan Chase manager (and attorney), Alayne Fleischmann, described JPMorgan Chase’s mortgage securities business as a “massive criminal securities fraud.”107Matt Taibbi, The $9 Billion Witness: Meet JPMorgan Chase’s Worst Nightmare, Rolling Stone (Nov. 6, 2014), https://www.rollingstone.com/politics/politics-news/the-9-billion-witness-meet-jpmorgan-chases-worst-nightmare-242414 [https://perma.cc/SWB2-6ARH?type=standard]. Before the 2008 crash, Fleischmann wrote a thirteen-page memo to her supervisor warning that the bank was improperly packaging bad mortgages into securities and selling them as investments. Fleischmann was fired and bankers at JPMorgan Chase continued in their scheme. Fleischmann eventually became a whistle-blower and provided detailed evidence about JPMorgan Chase’s wrongdoing to the SEC and federal prosecutors.

Unlike the defendants in Cases A, B, and C, the federal government never prosecuted either JPMorgan Chase the organization or any of its employees for their fraud. Chase instead agreed to a $13 billion settlement with federal and state agencies for wrongdoing during the crisis. As a publicly traded company, Chase paid the settlement with shareholders’ money and the settlement agreement did not name any bankers. A few weeks later, Chase’s CEO, Jamie Dimon, received a seventy-four percent raise, bringing his salary to $20 million per year.

C.  How We Talk About Financial Crime

Academic and journalistic writing about white collar crime tends to focus on cases like D.108See supra text accompanying note 7. It examines and seeks to understand the causes and consequences of a criminal system that is unwilling or unable to convict large firms and the people who lead them, even when those firms and people create staggering social harm and there is evidence that their conduct violates the criminal law. Much work in this area documents the DOJ’s increased use of deferred and non-prosecution agreements for companies engaged in corporate crime.109See, e.g., Arlen & Kahan, supra note 7; Veronica Root Martinez, The Government’s Prioritization of Information Over Sanction: Implications for Compliance, 83 L. & Contemp. Probs. 85, 85–87 (2020). Other work asks similar questions about individuals who hold positions of leadership in corporate organizations that commit crimes.110In this vein, some recent scholarship about white-collar crime committed by individuals has focused on a 2015 Memo from Deputy Attorney General Sally Quillian Yates (the “Yates Memo”) that outlines steps that federal prosecutors should take to “strengthen [the] pursuit of individual corporate wrongdoing.” Memorandum from Deputy Att’y Gen. Sally Quillian Yates to Assistant Att’ys Gen. & All U.S. Att’ys., Individual Accountability for Corporate Wrongdoing (Sept. 9, 2015) (on file with DOJ). For example, some have pointed out that even after the Yates Memo was promulgated, DOJ continued to enter deferred prosecution agreements with corporations without charging individuals. See, e.g., Paola C. Henry, Individual Accountability for Corporate Crimes After the Yates Memo: Deferred Prosecution Agreements & Criminal Justice Reform, 6 Am. U. Bus. L. Rev. 153, 160–161 (2016) (describing the post-Yates Memo case in which General Motors employees intentionally failed to disclose a safety defect in their ignition switches, which led to at least 124 deaths, but federal prosecutors entered a deferred prosecution agreement with GM without charging any individuals).

In contrast to much of the literature, this Article focuses instead on cases like A, B, and C, which represent the bread and butter of most federal financial criminal enforcement in the United States. Many scholarly examinations of federal white-collar crime characterize these cases as not white-collar crime. For example, Samuel Buell explains in his 2014 study of white-collar sentencing:

Many white collar offenses, maybe even most of them, are committed by pedestrian hucksters, scam artists, cheaters, and liars. Such persons have been among us for ages. This Article makes few claims about the treatment of this class of offenders—the home buyer who lies to obtain a mortgage, the taxpayer who cheats the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), the restaurant manager who bribes the health inspector, and their ilk. The discussion here responds to a public debate that does not often mention the small-time crook.111Buell, supra note 7, at 830–31 (2014); see also Mihailis E. Diamantis, White-Collar Showdown, 102 Iowa L. Rev. 320, 320 (2017) (“Not many people would rank white-collar criminals among the downtrodden of the criminal justice system.”); Darryl K. Brown, Street Crime, Corporate Crime, and the Contingency of Criminal Liability, 149 U. Pa. L. Rev. 1295, 1315 (2001) (“Painting with an overbroad brush, street offenders are outside the mainstream norms of society. More committed to subcultures or simply irrational, violent, or greedy, their crimes are clearly intentional. White-collar offenders, on the other hand, except for those white-collar crimes that plainly mimic street crimes—for example, embezzling from an employer is stealing and credit card or insurance fraud are just other forms of theft—are more reasonable, mainstream people.”). But see Pedro Gerson, Less is More?: Accountability for White-Collar Offenses Through an Abolitionist Framework, 2 Stet. Bus. L. Rev. 144, (noting that “[a]n important caveat to note at the outset is that [the author’s] definition of white-collar crime is significantly narrower than the one used by law enforcement, which focuses on the type of offenses and centers on crimes of ‘deceit, concealment or violation of trust’ without the use of force”); Benjamin Levin, Wage Theft Criminalization, 54 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 1429, 1483-84 (2021) (noting that the sorts of incidents reported in a 2000 FBI report tended to be low-level property crimes and frauds rather than “the dominant cultural (and legal) imagination of ‘white-collar crime’ ”); Daniel Richman, Federal White Collar Sentencing in the United States: A Work in Progress, 76 L. & Contemp. Probs. 53, 53 (2013) (“[C]rimes involving fraud, deceit, theft, embezzlement, insider trading, and other forms of deception . . . include[] a great many offenders and offenses of the middling sort.”); Posner, supra note 80, at 409–10 (using the term white-collar crime “to refer to the nonviolent crimes typically committed by either (1) well-to-do individuals or (2) associations, such as business corporations and labor unions, which are generally ‘well-to-do’ compared to the common criminal”).

This Article argues that when—as Buell notes—the public debate about white-collar crime excludes financial crimes committed by people who are not wealthy executives, the exclusion is not merely semantic. Using the term “white-collar crime” to only include prosecutions of elite people shields from public view the vast majority of prosecutions that happen under our financial criminal laws.

We have not always talked about financial crime this way. This Article provides updated and more comprehensive answers to some of the questions asked in a series of studies produced in the 1980s through early 2000s by Stanton Wheeler and others called the Yale Studies on White-Collar Crime (“Yale Studies”). In the final of four studies in this series, the authors analyzed the personal characteristics of those whom the authors characterized as federal white-collar defendants. Using a sample of roughly 210 white-collar defendants randomly sampled from seven federal district courts, the authors found that their sample of white-collar defendants “departs from common images of the typical white collar offender in that they are very similar to average or middle class Americans.”112David Weisburd, Elin Waring & Ellen Chayet, U.S. Dep’t of Just., White Collar Crime and Criminal Careers 2 (1993) (citing David Weisburd, Stanton Wheeler, Elin Waring & Nancy Bode, Crimes of the Middle Classes: White Collar Offenders in the Federal Courts (1991)). The seven districts studied were: the Central District of California, the Northern District of Georgia, the Northern District of Illinois, the District of Maryland, the Southern District of New York, the Northern District of Texas, and the Western District of Washington. Id. The authors also noted that their study found white-collar crimes to “have a much more mundane quality than those which are associated with white collar crime in the popular press,” noting that “the bulk of white collar crimes prosecuted in the federal courts are undramatic and maybe committed by people of relatively modest social status.”113Id. at 11.

The Yale study’s findings are similar but less extreme than the updated and more fulsome patterns this Article documents in Part II. This Article, for example, suggests that the average financial crime defendant is likely to have lower income than the average U.S. adult, whereas the authors of the Yale study find that “most white-collar offenders were from the middle class, that is, they were significantly above the poverty line, but they were not from the upper echelons of wealth and social status.”114David Weisburd, Stanton Wheeler, Elin Waring & Nancy Bode, Crimes of the Middle Classes: White Collar Offenders in the Federal Courts, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Off. of Just. Programs (1991), https://ojp.gov/ncjrs/virtual-library/abstracts/crimes-middle-classes-white-collar-offenders-federal-courts [https://perma.cc/VP9D-W3H4]. Part II also shows that Black people are disproportionately prosecuted for white-collar crimes, which the Yale study did not find.

A likely reason the nationwide findings presented in this Article suggest the federal financial criminal defendant population is even less advantaged than as suggested by the Yale study is that the Yale authors’ sample was not representative of all federal financial crime prosecutions. The authors explain that they chose seven districts “in part because some of them were known to have a significant amount of white-collar prosecution,”115Weisburd et al., supra note 112, at 16. and all of the chosen districts contain major U.S. cities. By focusing on districts with active and sophisticated white-collar dockets in large U.S. cities, the Yale study likely overrepresents the income of all federal financial crime defendants. It also uses a sample of federal financial crime defendants whose racial makeup (seventy-eight percent White) is different from what this Article observes in its nationwide analysis (forty-nine percent White).116Another possible explanation for this difference is that over time the federal government might have increasingly prosecuted low-income people for financial crimes. The Yale study considered defendants sentenced between 1976 and 1978; this Article considers defendants prosecuted in 1994 through 2019, so perhaps the federal government’s enforcement behavior changed in the sixteen years between our studies.

This Article also relates to Max Schanzenbach and Michael Yaeger’s 2006 examination of racial disparities in federal white-collar cases.117See Schanzenbach &Yaeger, supra note 79, at 758. Using regression analysis, Schanzenbach and Yaeger find that after controlling for many relevant defendant and case characteristics, Black and Hispanic defendants convicted of white-collar crimes receive longer prison sentences than do White defendants.118Id. at 790. They also find that a significant portion of this inequality can be explained by defendants’ ability to pay a fine, lending support to the idea that there is a fine/incarceration tradeoff in white-collar cases.119See id. at 792.

This Article fundamentally differs from Schanzenbach and Yaeger’s work because this Article is a descriptive analysis. Many studies—like Schanzenbach and Yaeger’s—estimate whether defendants within a criminal system appear to be treated differently for reasons they should not be (such as their race,120See, e.g., Crystal S. Yang, Free At Last? Judicial Discretion and Racial Disparities in Federal Sentencing, 44 J. Legal Stud. 75, 75 (2015). skin color,121See, e.g., Traci Burch, Skin Color and the Criminal Justice System: Beyond Black-White Disparities in Sentencing, 12 J. Empirical Legal Stud. 395, 395 (2015). gender,122See, e.g., Sonja B. Starr, Estimating Gender Disparities in Federal Criminal Cases, 17 Am. L. & Econ. Rev. 127, 127 (2015). or wealth123See, e.g., Christine S. Scott-Hayward & Henry F. Fradella, Punishing Poverty: How Bail and Pretrial Detention Fuel Inequalities in the Criminal Justice System 45 (2019).). In contrast, this Article does not seek to advance a causal claim about the sources of inequality. To that end, this Article does not compare the outcomes of federal financial crime defendants to each other; it compares the population of federal financial crime defendants to the underlying U.S. adult population. It then examines whether, where, and for how long these inequalities in who is prosecuted have existed. The next Part presents this empirical analysis.

II.  INEQUALITY IN FEDERAL FINANCIAL CRIME PROSECUTIOS

Between 1994 and 2019, 1.7 million defendants were convicted of federal crimes and sentenced under the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines.124This count does not reflect defendants who were convicted of offenses carrying a statutory maximum term of incarceration of six months or less (that is, petty misdemeanor cases), see U.S. Sent’g Guidelines Manual § 1B1.9 (U.S. Sent’g Comm’n 2021), which are typically handled by federal magistrate judges. 28 U.S.C. § 636(a)(4). Infra Part II. Around 15% of these defendants were convicted of financial crimes, making financial crime the third-most prosecuted type of federal crime over this period, following drug crime (35% of cases) and immigration crime (25% of cases).125This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17. Most defendants convicted of financial crimes were convicted of some type of fraud, and even counted alone, fraud is the third-most prosecuted type of federal offense.126Id.

This Part presents the first nationwide empirical analysis of federal financial crime cases. Section II.A explains how I constructed the data set. Section II.B presents summary information about federal financial crime cases. Sections II.C through II.E use sentencing data matched to county-level population data to examine inequality in who is prosecuted for federal financial crimes. Section II.C shows that people who are Black and low-income are overrepresented in financial crime prosecutions relative to the U.S. adult population, while people who are White and middle- to high-income are underrepresented. Section II.D shows that income and race gaps in the prosecution of financial crime have narrowed over the last few decades but remain significant. Section II.E documents differences in these inequality patterns across federal districts. It shows that USAOs in the Deep South prosecute female defendants at the highest rates. Because states in the Deep South have among the largest Black populations in the U.S., their more intensive prosecution of women for financial crimes drives the overrepresentation of Black women among financial crime defendants. Section II.E also shows that Black defendants are overrepresented in financial crime cases in nearly all federal districts, which demonstrates that the nationwide inequality patterns are not solely a function of different prosecutorial priorities between districts.

A.  Data

The descriptive analysis that follows presents two types of facts about federal financial crime prosecutions. First, it describes the scale of federal prosecution of financial crime. It answers questions like: How many people does the federal government prosecute for financial crimes per year? How does this number compare to prosecutions for other types of federal crimes? How has this number changed over time? Second, the analysis describes representation in federal prosecutions of financial crime. It answers questions like: Are low- or high-income people over- or underrepresented among federal defendants charged with financial crimes? Which, if any, racial or gender groups are over- or underrepresented? Does over- or under-representation vary over time? Does it vary between USAOs?

Answering these descriptive questions requires two types of data: data on federal criminal cases and data on the U.S. adult population. The dataset used in this Article includes quantitative data of the roughly 1.7 million federal defendants sentenced under the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines in fiscal years 1994 through 2019, matched at the district and year level to population data from the U.S. Census. I built the federal criminal case dataset by combining annual data files published by the U.S. Sentencing Commission (“Commission”).127The Commission data files are available for download from the U.S. Sentencing Commission website (fiscal years 2002–2021) and through the Inter-university Consortium for Political and Social Research (fiscal years 1987–2019). See Monitoring of Federal Criminal Sentences Series, Inter-university Consortium for Pol. and Soc. Rsch., https://www.icpsr.umich.edu/web/ICPSR/series/83 [https://perma.cc/8DN8-3EFT]; Commission Datafiles, U.S. Sent’g Comm’n, https://www.ussc.gov/research/datafiles/commission-datafiles [https://perma.cc/U2U7-NLYA]. To compute inequality statistics, I dropped from the dataset defendants whose race, Hispanic ethnicity, or gender information are reported as missing (roughly four percent of defendants).

The Commission data files include thousands of variables that describe federal criminal defendants and their cases. Critically for this project, the Commission data include a defendant’s self-reported race and Hispanic ethnicity, gender,128The Commission data uses a binary variable for gender (Male/Female), which the Codebook simply said “indicates the offender’s gender.” U.S. Sent’g Comm’n, Variable Codebook for Individual Offenders 31 (2013). For at least some of the 1994–2019 period, the Federal Bureau of Prisons’ Transgender Offender Manual indicated that an inmate’s gender identity, rather than their gender assigned at birth, be considered when recommending a housing facility, which suggests that transgendered prisoners are likely coded according to their gender identity rather than biological sex. See Daniel Politi, Trump Administration Gets Rid of Obama-Era Rules that Protected Transgender Inmates, Slate (May 13, 2018, 8:59 PM), https://slate.com/news-and-politics/2018/05/trump-administration-gets-rid-of-obama-era-rules-that-protected-transgender-inmates.html [https://perma.cc/PP8P-PPBH]. level of formal education, age, and the nature of the defendant’s prior criminal record. The Commission data also include variables that provide information about the subject of the defendant’s case, such as the type of offense (divided into thirty-five categories) and the statutes of conviction. The Commission data also include variables describing case outcomes, including details of the sentence imposed upon the defendant and their advisory sentencing range. Finally, the Commission data report the month, year, and federal district court in which the defendant was sentenced. These variables allow me to understand the geography and history of inequalities in federal financial crime prosecutions.

After building the Commission dataset, I merged it with county-level data published by the U.S. Census Bureau that describes the U.S. adult population (“Census Data”). The Census Data’s county-level intercensal population estimates include annual age-by-race-by-gender data of county populations.129See Annual County Resident Population Estimates by Age, Sex, Race, and Hispanic Origin: April 1, 2020 to July 1, 2019, (CC-EST2019-ALLDATA), U.S. Census Bureau, https://www.census.gov/data/tables/time-series/demo/popest/2010s-counties-detail.html [https://perma.cc/XEN9-83YG]; Intercensal Estimates of the Resident Population by Five-Year Age Groups, Sex, Race, and Hispanic Origin for Counties: April 1, 2000 to July 1, 2010, U.S. Census Bureau, https://www.census.gov/data/
datasets/time-series/demo/popest/intercensal-2000-2010-counties.html [https://perma.cc/XZ4R-FS93]; State and County Intercensal Datasets 1990–2000, U.S. Census Bureau, https://www.census.gov/data/datasets/time-series/demo/popest/intercensal-1990-2000-state-and-county-characteristics.html [https://perma.cc/9J3T-DNAA].
The Economic Research Service of the USDA publishes county-level educational attainment information of the adult population using data from the U.S. Census and American Community Survey.130See Educational Attainment for Adults Age 25 and Older for the U.S., States, and Counties, 1970–2020, USDA, Econ. Rsch. Serv., https://www.ers.usda.gov/data-products/county-level-data-sets/county-level-data-sets-download-data [https://perma.cc/7HBS-GZJ2]. Unlike population data, this data is not reported for every year. It is only reported for 1970, 1980, 1990, 2000, 2007–11 (five-year average), and 2016–2020 (five-year average). For this project, I use the data from 2007–2011 because it is closest to the midpoint of the study period (1994 to 2019).

After compiling the county-level Census Data, I aggregated it to the federal district level with a district‑to-county crosswalk file.131Mary Eschelbach Hansen, Jess Chen & Matthew Davis, United States District Court Boundary Shapefiles (1900–2000), Inter-univ. Consortium for Pol. & Soc. Res. (Mar. 2, 2015), https://doi.org/10.3886/E30468V1 [https://perma.cc/5NA7-94ZH]. This matched data allowed me to measure per capita prosecution rates between districts and to compare characteristics of the federal defendant population with the entire adult resident population over time and within each federal judicial district.

B.  Preliminary Descriptive Statistics of Federal Financial Crime Cases

Before examining inequality in federal financial crime cases, Table 1 presents descriptive statistics of these cases from the data. I define a case as a “financial crime” if the Commission data characterizes it as an antitrust, bribery, counterfeiting, forgery, fraud, embezzlement, larceny,132Although larceny is not typically considered a white-collar crime, I include it in my definition for consistency because in fiscal year 2018, the Commission data began combining fraud, embezzlement, and larceny into one offense category. Defendants coded as committing larceny crimes in years prior to 2018 were frequently convicted of fraud and embezzlement crimes. or tax crime.

The Commission data do not include a variable to characterize the victim(s) in the case, so I coded this variable based on the criminal statute under which the defendant was convicted. Based on the statute of conviction, I coded the case as involving one of these four victim types: (1) a government victim; (2) a private victim; (3) no concrete victim; or (4) an unknown victim. For example, a case in which the defendant is convicted of embezzling or stealing public money is coded as having a government victim.133See 18 U.S.C. § 641. A case in which the defendant is convicted of defrauding a bank is coded as having a private victim.134See id. § 1344. A case in which the defendant is convicted of making a false statement to a federal agent is coded as having no concrete victim.135See id. § 1001. A case in which a person is convicted of defrauding a health insurer is coded as having an unknown victim because a person can commit this crime by defrauding either a government insurer (like Medicare) or a private insurer.136See id. § 1347.  Appendix Table A.1 lists the statutory provisions for defendants convicted of the most common financial crimes and how they were coded.137A complete list of all statutory provisions and how they were coded is on file with the author and available by request.

Table 1 provides summary statistics of many variables about the defendants and their cases in the data. Column (1) of Table 1 presents averages for the variables across all 276,210 defendants convicted of financial crimes in the years 1994–2019. Columns (2) through (5) present averages for the same variables among defendants whose crimes involve the lowest losses (column (2)) through largest losses (column (5)).138The observations in columns (2) through (5) do not sum to 276,210 because the “loss amount” variable is only available beginning in 1999. Even beginning in 1999, around twenty percent of observations are missing an entry in this variable. Because the severity of financial crimes is (for the most part) increasing in loss amount, readers should think of moving across Table 1 from column (2) to column (5) as moving from less serious to more serious financial crimes.139It is important to note that when I use the term “loss,” throughout this Article, I mean the “dollar amount of loss for which the offender is held responsible,” which is how this variable is defined by the Commission. Commentary to the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines directs courts to consider “actual or intended loss,” and there appears to be a recent circuit split on the question of whether using intended loss is acceptable. Compare United States v. Gadson, 77 F.4th 16, 21–22 (1st Cir. 2023) (district court did not commit plain error by using intended loss to calculate bank-fraud defendant’s base offense level) with United States v. Banks, 55 F.4th 246, 248 (3d. Cir. 2022) (concluding that the Commission’s commentary that includes “intended loss” in the definition of “loss” should be afforded no weight). See also Baer, supra note 6, at 53 (criticizing the loss variable for encompassing intended loss).

Overall, Table 1 presents initial descriptive patterns that suggest regressive inequality in financial crime prosecutions. First, readers will notice that fraud makes up more than 80% of financial crime cases across all columns, making up 76.5% of low-level cases (column (2)) and 87.8% of high-level cases (column (5)). The median loss in a financial crime prosecution is just under $50,000, but it is $0 in the lowest quartile and nearly $850,000 in the highest. The median fine in all categories—even the most serious financial crimes—is $0.

Table 1 shows there are differences in the representation of defendants by race, gender, and income levels across the severity distribution. Black defendants and female defendants make up a smaller share of defendants in high-loss cases than in other types of cases. Specifically, Black defendants and female defendants each make up around 30–40% of defendants in low to medium-loss cases, but only around 25% of defendants in high-loss cases. Hispanic defendants are particularly overrepresented in low-loss cases. This could be because around half of Hispanic defendants convicted of financial crimes are not U.S. citizens, and among non-citizen defendants many are convicted of crimes that do not involve a concrete victim, such as making a false statement to federal officials or using a false social security number, as in Case A described in Section I.B.

The pattern is similar for education. Defendants who have not completed high school—who are likely to be those with the fewest resources—appear in low-level cases at much higher rates (28% of defendants) than they appear in high-loss cases (11% of defendants). The pattern for defendants who have college degrees—who are likely to be those with the most resources—is the opposite. College graduates make up 31% of defendants in high-loss cases and just 10% of defendants in low-loss cases.

Overall, Table 1 provides initial descriptive evidence of patterns that this Article explores in the next three subsections. It suggests that people who are likely to have the most advantages—people who are male, White, and have completed college—are more frequently prosecuted for more serious financial crimes than others. The rest of this Part examines inequality in the entire data, over time, and by geography.

Table 1.  Federal Financial Crime Prosecutions, 1994–2019
 

All Financial Crimes

(1)

Low Loss

(2)

Med-Low Loss

(3)

Med-High Loss

(4)

High Loss

(5)

Offense Characteristics
Antitrust0.0020.0030.0030.0030.003
Bribery0.0210.0260.0200.0150.015
Counterfeiting/Forgery0.0830.1890.1030.0490.021
Fraud0.8330.7650.8330.8320.878
Tax Offense0.0610.0180.0440.1050.083
Government Victim0.2460.3050.3150.2940.151
Private Victim0.4220.2980.4400.4550.540
No Concrete Victim0.0570.1420.0350.0200.008
Unknown Victim0.2760.2560.2100.2310.302
Loss (median in $)48,362020,802105,997847,375
Defendant Characteristics
Black0.2930.3020.3840.3240.237
Hispanic0.1470.1990.1140.1150.137
Other Race/Ethnicity0.0680.0640.0560.0580.065
White0.4920.4340.4460.5030.561
Male0.7020.6880.6100.6740.766
Less than HS0.1890.2820.2110.1570.106
HS Only0.3150.3560.3550.3080.248
Some College0.3100.2580.3160.3430.333
College Grad0.1860.1040.1180.1920.313
U.S. Citizen0.6690.6710.7400.7730.797
Retained Counsel0.3370.2180.2640.4080.562
Fines Waived0.8590.8270.9050.9090.920
Case Characteristics
Guidelines Mean (months)28.712.312.622.654.3
Any Incarceration0.5590.4910.4950.7020.863
Sentence (months)16.48.47.214.236.2
Below Guidelines0.4780.2360.4950.6110.599
In-Range0.4990.7300.4840.3690.383
Above Guidelines0.0210.0330.0190.0180.017
Fine (median in $)00000
Restitution (median in $)5,800011,42265,000429,968
Observations276,21043,15143,14643,22643,071
Note: All variables are coded as 0/1 unless otherwise noted. Guidelines and sentence length variables are capped at 470 months—the Commission’s assigned value for life sentences. Many variables are not reported in all years.

C.  Overall Inequality (All Districts, All Years)

This section begins by examining whether one can fairly say the government focuses its financial crime enforcement efforts on “white-collar” crime. It suggests the answer is no. It shows that low-income and Black defendants are disproportionately represented while higher-income and White defendants are underrepresented in federal financial crime cases relative to the U.S. population. It shows that this overrepresentation is particularly stark for Black women, who are underrepresented in federal criminal cases as a whole but overrepresented in financial crime prosecutions.

The Commission data do not provide information about a person’s income or wealth, so Figure 1 uses three proxies for a defendant’s financial means: the level of formal education attained by the defendant, whether the defendant’s fines were waived by the court based on the defendant’s inability to pay them, and whether the defendant retained paid counsel. Appendix Table A.2 presents the same results in table form.

Figure 1.  Proxies for Poverty in Federal Financial Crime Cases
 
Note: Educational attainment is only reported for defendants sentenced in fiscal years 1997 through 2019. Defense counsel type is only reported for defendants sentenced in fiscal years 1994 through 2003. Waived fines are reported for all years (1994 through 2019).

Figure 1 shows the averages for all federal financial crime defendants (dotted columns), for U.S. citizen financial crime defendants (solid columns), and for the U.S. adult population (striped columns). It reports the estimates separately for U.S. citizen-defendants because Census data, which is used to compute the averages across the U.S. adult population, chronically undercounts people who are not U.S. citizens.140U.S. Census Bureau, Counting the Hard to Count in a Census 1, 4 (July 2019) (listing “[m]igrants and minorities” as a population in the U.S. that is “hard-to-count,” which is defined as a population “for whom a real or perceived barrier exists to full and representative inclusion in the [Census] data collection process”). Despite this undercounting, the averages for U.S. citizen-defendants are very similar to the averages among all federal defendants.

As Figure 1 shows, nearly 20% of financial crime defendants did not graduate high school, which is true of only around 10% of U.S. adults. Around 30% of the U.S. adult population has a college degree, but less than 20% of federal financial crime defendants have one. Around 85% of federal financial crime defendants have their fines waived by the court. Put another way, only around 15% of federal financial crime defendants can afford to pay their fines. The majority (around two-thirds) of federal financial crime defendants rely on appointed counsel. These averages suggest that defendants convicted of financial crimes are likely to have a lot less income and wealth than the average U.S. adult.

Figure 2 displays race-gender representation in federal financial crime cases (solid columns) and all federal criminal cases (striped columns) over the years 1994 to 2019. Appendix Table A.3 presents the same results in table form. The horizontal line at y = 1 demarcates the boundary for whether a group is over- or under-represented in federal cases relative to their share of the U.S. adult population.141For each group, the column height represents the share of defendants in that group divided by the share of people in that group in the U.S. adult population over the period 1994–2019. For example, Black men make up roughly 18.8% of fraud defendants and roughly 5.5% of the U.S. adult population, so the height of their solid green column is (18.8/5.5) = 3.42. An alternative way to compute inequality would be to subtract rather than divide each defendant group’s representation from their representation in the U.S. adult population. When computed this way, the inequality patterns are similar but less extreme because the race-gender groups are not equally sized.

Figure 2 shows that, as many readers will already know, Black and Hispanic men are the most overrepresented groups in the federal criminal system (their striped columns extend the highest), while women who are not Black or Hispanic are the most underrepresented groups (their striped columns extend the lowest). Overall, there are five race-gender groups that are underrepresented relative to the adult population: women of all race and ethnicity groups and White men. Men who are not Black or Hispanic are prosecuted at rates closest to parity (their striped columns are the shortest), with White men slightly underrepresented and men who are another race slightly overrepresented.

For financial crimes, the pattern is different in a few notable ways. First, unlike in the entire federal defendant population, Black men and women are the most overrepresented groups in financial crime prosecutions, while White and Hispanic women are the most underrepresented groups. Black men are significantly more overrepresented in financial crime prosecutions than any other group (their solid column is much taller than any other solid column). Men who are not Black are also overrepresented in financial crime cases but to a much lesser extent than Black men.

Black women are overrepresented among financial crime defendants despite being underrepresented in the federal criminal defendant population. Women of all other race and ethnicity groups are underrepresented in financial crime prosecutions, just as they are in all federal prosecutions. These findings suggest that financial crime prosecutions are an important site of racial inequality in the federal criminal system and that this inequality uniquely burdens defendants who are Black.

Figure 2.  Race-Gender Representation in Federal Prosecutions, 1994–2019
 
Note: The y-axis is scaled such that a group that is x times overrepresented will have the same size column as a group that is x times underrepresented. BM=Non-Hispanic Black Men; BW=Non-Hispanic Black Women; HM=Hispanic Men; HW=Hispanic Women; OM=All Other Men (including Alaska Native, American Indian, Asian, Native Hawaiian, and Other Pacific Islander Men); OW=All Other Women (including Alaska Native, American Indian, Asian, Native Hawaiian, and Other Pacific Islander Women); WM=Non-Hispanic White Men; WW=Non-Hispanic White Women.

D.  Inequality in Financial Crime Prosecutions over Time

This section describes how the federal financial criminal caseload has changed over the past quarter century. It shows first that the annual number of financial crime prosecutions remained stable until 2015, when it began to decrease. Second, it shows that the caseload decline in 2015 did not coincide with any noticeable change in the education, gender, or race gaps that persist throughout the period. Third, it shows that since around 2008, Black defendants have been prosecuted at roughly three times the per capita rates that Hispanic, non-Hispanic White, and other defendants have been prosecuted for financial crimes. Beginning in 2008, defendants in all racial or ethnicity groups who are not Black were prosecuted at very similar per capita rates. Fourth, it shows that this race gap is larger but shrinking among female defendants and smaller but more stable among male defendants. Because most of the patterns I documented are stable over time, most of the figures that accompany this section are contained in the Appendix.

Before examining how inequality has changed over time, this section first considers how overall levels of financial crime prosecution have changed since the early 1990s. Appendix Figure A.1 plots the federal government’s criminal caseload for the three most-prosecuted types of crime: drug trafficking (dotted line); immigration (dashed line); and financial crime (solid line). As Figure A.1 reveals, the annual number of federal prosecutions of financial crime remained stable until it began to decline in 2015. On the other hand, financial crime as a share of all federal prosecutions has decreased over a longer period, but this is not due to a significant decrease in the number of financial crime cases; rather, it is a result of a steep rise in immigration-related prosecutions, which dilute financial crime’s share of all federal criminal cases.

It is possible that as the number of financial crime prosecutions decreased beginning in 2015, inequality in who is prosecuted for financial crimes also changed. Appendix Figure A.2 looks for changes in the average education levels of defendants prosecuted for financial crimes, while Figure 3 considers changes in the race and gender composition of the financial criminal defendant population over time. Figure A.2 studies defendants’ educational attainment because education proxies for a defendant’s income, which is not a variable that the Commission data reports.142See supra Section II.C.

Figure A.2 plots financial crime cases prosecuted against defendants who did not graduate high school, graduated high school but did not attend college, attended college but did not earn a bachelor’s degree, and earned a bachelor’s degree. Panel A, which plots the share of defendants in each category, shows that the educational composition of financial crime defendants remained largely stagnant over the 1997 to 2019 period.

Panel A suggests a small increase in the share of financial crime defendants who have attended or completed college and a small decrease among defendants who never attended any college over the same period. However, as Panel B reflects, these changes have not kept pace with the population, which has on average seen increased formal education over time. If anything, the education gap expanded over the period, as Panel B shows. Panel B plots the extent to which defendants in each educational group are over- or under-represented relative to the U.S. adult population. It shows that defendants who have not completed high school were prosecuted at higher rates in the late 2010s than in earlier parts of the period. Thus, Figure A.2 suggests that overall changes in the financial crime caseload over time did not benefit those with few resources; if anything, the opposite is true.

Financial crime also has a race and gender gap. As with nearly all types of crime, men are more likely to be prosecuted for financial crimes than women. Racial gaps in financial crime also persist among both male and female defendants. Figure 3 plots the per capita rates at which each race-gender group is prosecuted for financial crimes over the 1994–2019 period. To avoid cramming eight lines into one graph, Panel A plots the prosecution rates for female defendants and Panel B for male defendants. The panels are arranged side-by-side and scaled with the same y-axis so that readers can compare female and male defendants by looking across the panels. The y-axis measures the number of financial crime defendants in each race-gender group divided by the U.S. adult population of that race-gender group (then multiplied by 1000). Thus, a higher line indicates a higher rate of prosecution.

Figure 3.  Financial Crime Cases by Race, 1994–2019
A.  Female DefendantsB.  Male Defendants
  
Note: Each line represents the number of financial crime cases brought against defendants in the race-gender group, multiplied by 1,000 and divided by the U.S. adult population of that race-gender group. Race-gender groups are labeled as in Figure 2.

Figure 3 shows several facts about race and gender inequality in federal financial crime prosecutions. First, financial crime has a persistent gender gap. Men are prosecuted for financial crimes at higher per capita rates than women. Second, Figure 3 shows that Black men and women are prosecuted for financial crimes at the highest rates. Since 2008, there does not appear to be a significant race gap among any other race groups for either female or male defendants. Instead, Black adults are uniquely susceptible to prosecution for financial crimes.

Third, the racial gaps appear to narrow over time for women but not men. For female defendants, Panel A shows that prosecution rates among racial groups compressed over the 1994 to 2019 period. The data bears this pattern out: Black women comprised 38% of female financial crime defendants in 1994 and 32% in 2019.143This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17. For male defendants, Panel B shows less compression. The data also bears this pattern out: Black men comprised 25% of male financial crime defendants in 1994 and 27% in 2019.144Id. Over this period, Black men and Black women constituted between 5–7% of the U.S. adult population, so these changes cannot be attributed to significant changes in the composition of the underlying population.145In 1994, Black men made up 5% of the U.S. adult population and Black women made up 6%. In 2019, Black men made up 6% of the U.S. adult population and Black women made up 7%.

E.  Inequality in Financial Crime by Geography

The previous section showed that over the last three decades, financial crime cases have remained a significant portion of the federal criminal docket and that income, gender, and racial inequalities persist in these prosecutions. Among male and female defendants, Non-Hispanic Black people are prosecuted at roughly three times the per capita rate as all other defendants. People who did not complete high school are by far the most overrepresented group in financial crime cases, while those who have completed college are the only group that is significantly underrepresented.

But averages across the entire federal criminal system as presented in the previous sections obscure differences in how individual USAOs prosecute financial crime. For example, the previous sections showed that Black women and Black men are overrepresented in federal financial crime cases while White women are underrepresented, but one might wonder whether this is true in all federal districts in the United States. Variation over the entire country might reflect variation in underlying rates of financial crime, office priorities, or the individual attitudes of decisionmakers such as prosecutors and agents. This section measures and maps inequalities in financial crime prosecutions at the USAO level. Figure 4 begins by showing the intensity with which each USAO prosecutes financial crimes. Darker shading means a larger share of the district’s cases are financial crime cases.

Figure 4 shows that the districts that focus more heavily on fraud cases include large urban districts like the Central District of California (home to Los Angeles), the Northern District of Illinois (home to Chicago), and the Southern District of New York (home to Manhattan). In these USAOs, financial crime respectively constitutes 32.1%, 36.7% and 29.3% percent of all criminal cases. This finding is perhaps unsurprising because these districts encompass many major financial centers. The five districts that border Mexico have much less intense financial crime caseloads (less than 6% of all prosecutions in all five districts) because immigration cases dominate the federal criminal caseloads in those districts.146This observation is based on the author’s analysis of the data. See Didwania, Data, supra note 17. The five federal districts that border Mexico are the District of Arizona, the Southern District of California, the District of New Mexico, the Southern District of Texas, and the Western District of Texas. Together, the USAOs in these five districts prosecuted 32% of all federal criminal cases between 1994 and 2019. Id. In these USAOs, immigration cases made up 55% of the caseload. In the remaining 88 USAOs, immigration cases made up 10% of the caseload. Id. Figure 4 also shows that USAOs in Western states appear to prosecute financial crime less intensely than states in the Deep South147The term “Deep South” does not have a settled definition. Most definitions suggest the core states are Alabama, Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, and South Carolina, which is the definition used in this Article. and the Great Lakes Region.148The Great Lakes region includes Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Minnesota, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, and Wisconsin.

Figure 4.  Financial Crime Prosecution Intensity (All Years)
 
Note: This figure maps the share of each district’s criminal cases that are financial crime cases. Each shade represents an equal interval in the distribution. Lightest shading means roughly 2–11% of cases in the district are financial crime cases; second-lightest shading means 11–19% of cases are financial crime cases; second-darkest shading means 19–28% of cases are financial crime cases; and darkest shading means 28–37% of cases are financial crime cases.

Figure A.3 shows that districts in the Deep South, Alaska, and Oklahoma prosecute women for financial crimes at among the highest rates in the United States. Figure A.3 plots the intensity with which each district prosecutes women for financial crimes relative to men. Darker shading means female defendants make up a larger share of that USAO’s financial crime caseload. There are eight districts in which women constitute more than forty percent of financial crime defendants: the Southern, Middle, and Northern Districts of Alabama; the District of Alaska; the Middle District of Georgia; the Middle and Western Districts of Louisiana; and the Northern District of Oklahoma. By contrast, women make up the smallest portion of fraud defendants in New England and southwestern states. There are ten districts in which women make up less than twenty-five percent of fraud defendants: the Southern District of California, the District of Connecticut, the District of Massachusetts, the District of Minnesota, the District of New Hampshire, the District of New Jersey, the Eastern and Southern Districts of New York, the Eastern District of Pennsylvania, and the District of Rhode Island.

Prosecuting women for financial crimes at higher rates in the Deep South, Alaska, and Oklahoma compared with other jurisdictions is likely to create racial inequality among female defendants because the Deep South states have among the largest Black populations in the United States.149Over the 1994–2019 period, the states with the largest Black adult populations were Mississippi (34% of adults); Louisiana (30% of adults); Georgia (28% of adults); Maryland (28% of adults); South Carolina (27% of adults); and Alabama (24% of adults). Alaska and Oklahoma have among the largest Indigenous populations in the United States.

Figure 5 explores the geography of race and gender inequality in financial crime prosecutions. It depicts whether race-gender groups are over- or under-represented in financial crime prosecutions relative to their share of the U.S. adult population in each federal district. In Figure 5, districts filled in blue stripes mean the group is underrepresented (with darker shades of blue representing more underrepresentation). Districts filled in solid red mean the group is overrepresented (with darker shades of red representing more overrepresentation).

Panels A and B show that Black men are overrepresented in financial crime cases in every federal district, and Black women are overrepresented in all but six federal districts.150The six districts in which Black Women are underrepresented in financial crime cases relative to their share of the adult population are the District of Columbia, the Southern District of California, the Southern District of Florida, the District of New Jersey, the Eastern District of New York, and the Southern District of New York. In contrast, Panel H shows that White women are underrepresented in financial crime cases in every federal district. White men are overrepresented in roughly half of all districts, but in all districts, it is clear their representation is relatively close to parity because all of the districts have pale shading. These findings demonstrate that the racial inequalities documented across the full United States are generated at least in part by inequalities within—not just between—USAOs.

As in Figure 5, Figure 6 explores the geography of income inequality in financial crime prosecutions. As throughout, the defendant’s level of formal education is used as a proxy for income because the Commission data does not report information about a defendant’s income or wealth. Also, like Figure 5, Figure 6 uses red solid- blue striped shading to indicate whether defendants are over- or under-represented relative to the U.S. adult population. Districts shaded in blue stripes mean the group is underrepresented (with darker shades of blue representing more underrepresentation). Districts shaded in solid red mean the group is overrepresented (with darker shades of red representing more overrepresentation). The shading in Figure 6 uses the same red/blue scale as Figure 5 so readers can compare.

Figure 5.  Race-Gender Representation in Financial Crime Prosecutions
A.  Cases Against Black MenB.  Cases Against Black Women
  
C.  Cases Against Hispanic MenD.  Cases Against Hispanic Women
  
  
E.  Cases Against Men of Another RaceF.  Cases Against Women of Another Race
  
G.  Cases Against White MenH.  Cases Against White Women
  
Note: This figure maps the over- and under-representation of each race-gender group in the district’s financial crime cases. Districts shaded in striped (solid) fills prosecute the race-gender group at lower (higher) rates than the district’s population. Darker shading indicates larger disparity.
Figure 6.  Educational Representation in Financial Crime Prosecutions
A.  Cases Against Defendants with a College Degree
 
B.  Cases Against Defendants Without a High School Degree
 
Note: This figure maps the over- or under-representation of defendants in the district’s financial crime cases. Districts shaded in striped (solid) fill prosecute the education group at lower (higher) rates than the district’s population. Darker shading indicates larger disparity.

Figure 6 shows that defendants who have graduated from college—and are likely to be the wealthiest federal defendants—are underrepresented in financial crime prosecutions in every federal district in the United States, even those that prosecute the most complex and sophisticated financial crime (such as the Southern District of New York). In contrast, defendants who have not completed high school—and are likely to have the fewest resources—are overrepresented in nearly every district, although they are underrepresented in eleven districts.

The preceding discussion suggests that USAOs could significantly vary in the average severity of financial crimes they prosecute. Figure 7 investigates this theory and depicts the median loss associated with financial crime cases in each federal district. In other words, Figure 7 shows the severity of the average financial crime prosecution by each USAO. It shows significant variation in severity across USAOs.

Figure 7.  Median Loss Amount in Financial Crime Prosecutions (All Years)
 
Note: This figure maps the median loss in financial crime cases by USAO. Each shade represents an equal interval. Lightest shading means the median loss amount in financial crime cases is between $7,519 and $44,323; second-lightest shading means the median loss is between $44,323 and $81,127; second-darkest shading means the median loss is between $81,127 and $117,931; and darkest shading means the median loss is between $117,931 and $154,735.

Figure 7 shows that the most serious financial crimes are prosecuted in the Northeast (including the Eastern and Southern Districts of New York, and the Districts of Connecticut, Massachusetts, and Rhode Island), as well as a few scattered districts that are home to major U.S. cities (the Southern District of California, the Southern District of Florida, the Northern District of Georgia, the Northern District of Illinois, and the District of Minnesota). The least serious financial crimes are prosecuted in Southern and Great Plains states.

III.  EXPLAINING THE FINDINGS

Part II presented evidence of income, racial, and gender inequality in the prosecution of federal financial crimes. It showed that the federal prosecution of financial crime has a disparate impact, prosecuting low-income and Black people at higher rates than the rest of the U.S. adult population, while prosecuting college graduates and White people at lower rates than the rest of the adult population. Part II also showed that these inequality patterns have persisted since the 1990s and appear in every federal judicial district. This Part offers several potential explanations for the inequalities documented in Part II. It first examines differences in the reported offense conduct of financial crime defendants in different education, race, and gender groups. It shows that the defendant groups that are the most overrepresented are also prosecuted for, on average, the least serious financial crimes. It then describes how systemic incentives, formal law and policy, and individual biases could explain the Article’s findings. I do not attempt to definitively prove that any particular mechanism dominates. Instead, this Part is designed to present many possible explanations for the regressive nature of federal white-collar prosecution.

A.  Charged Offense Conduct

As a threshold matter, this section examines whether the federal financial crime cases brought against defendants of different education, race, and gender groups systematically differ in reported offense conduct. The DOJ and FBI routinely state that they prioritize prosecuting serious and sophisticated financial crimes. It could be that the groups that are most overrepresented in financial crime prosecutions also commit on average the most serious financial criminal offenses, and that overrepresentation is thus consistent with the federal government carrying out its stated priorities. This section considers but rejects that hypothesis.

To perform this analysis, this section considers three variables that capture offense conduct: (1) the offense severity (which primarily corresponds with the amount of monetary loss in financial crime cases); (2) whether the case involved illegal drugs; and (3) the average amount of aggravation computed in the case. I define the amount of aggravation as the amount by which the defendant’s base offense level was increased or decreased at sentencing on account of their offense characteristics.151The U.S. Sentencing Guidelines Manual identifies many offense characteristics that can increase or decrease the advisory sentencing range for a person convicted of a financial crime. For example, a person’s offense level will increase if their conduct “resulted in substantial financial hardship” to multiple victims, or if it involved damage to “property from a national cemetery or veterans’ memorial,” or if it involved the misappropriation of a trade secret, among other things, U.S. Sent’g Guidelines Manual §§ 2B1.1(b)(2)(B)–(C), 2B1.1(b)(5), 2B1.1(b)(14) (U.S. Sent’g Comm’n 2021). The aggravation measure can therefore be a positive or negative number. Figure 8 presents averages for each of these measures of offense conduct by defendants’ educational attainment. As before, I use the defendant’s level of formal education as a proxy for income because the Commission data do not include information about defendants’ income or wealth.

Figure 8.  Financial Crime Case Characteristics by Education Group
A.  Median Loss Amount in Financial Crime Cases
 
B.  Share of Financial Crime Cases Involving Drugs
 
C.  Average Aggravation in Financial Crime Cases
 
Note: Average aggregation is the average difference between defendants’ base and final offense levels.

Figure 8 suggests that financial crime defendants who have attained more formal education are prosecuted for financial crimes that are more serious than the financial crimes prosecuted against defendants with less formal education. The median loss amount for defendants without a high school diploma is just $18,500, while the median loss amount for defendants with a college degree is $168,276. The amount of aggravation in the offense is also increasing in formal education, as Panel C shows. In contrast, Panel B shows that the presence of illegal drugs in financial crime cases is roughly equal across all education groups.

Figure 9 plots the same three variables by defendant race-gender group. Figure 9 demonstrates that Black men and women—who Part II showed are prosecuted for financial crimes at the highest rates—do not commit the most serious financial crimes. Cases involving female defendants also tend to be less severe than those against male defendants. Median loss amounts for female financial crime defendants are lower than for male financial crime defendants in all racial groups except Hispanic defendants, in which loss amounts are roughly equal between male and female defendants. In all racial groups, female financial crime defendants are less likely to have drugs involved in their cases. Finally, financial crime cases against women involve fewer aggravating characteristics.

In all measures, financial crime cases brought against White men appear to be the most serious. They involve by far the largest losses—the median loss amount for financial crime prosecutions of White men is $80,150; for Black women and women who are not White, Hispanic, or Black, the amount is $29,520 and $29,416, respectively. Financial crime cases against White men are also the most likely to involve drugs and the largest average aggravation.

Given that differences in offense conduct do not appear to justify the inequalities documented in Part II, the remaining sections explore alternative explanations for the findings. The data do not allow me to disentangle whether the inequalities documented in this Article are created by intentional discrimination, subconscious bias, are a byproduct of systemic incentives that shape prosecutorial and investigative decisions about which cases to prioritize, or are some combination of all these (or other) reasons. Sections III.B, III.C, and III.D consider many explanations for the findings.

Figure 9.  Financial Crime Case Characteristics by Race-Gender Group
A.  Median Loss Amount in Financial Crime Case
 
B.  Share of Financial Crime Cases Involving Drugs
 
C.  Average Aggravation in Financial Crime Cases
 
Note: Race-gender groups are labeled as listed in Figure 2. Average aggregation is the average difference between defendants’ base and final offense levels.

B.  Systemic and Structural Explanations

In many areas of law, the government struggles to aggressively prosecute or pursue legal claims against sophisticated lawbreakers. This section focuses on systemic explanations for why federal prosecutors might focus on lower-level financial crime cases. It argues that complicated financial crimes are difficult to detect, hard to investigate, and burdensome to prove. As Jesse Eisinger put it, “Embezzlement is as easy to understand as purse snatching. But securities manipulation is a more abstract concept.”152Eisinger, supra note 6, at 59. The workplace realities that prosecutors and investigators confront could create the inequalities documented in Part II.

The inequalities in financial crime prosecutions might reflect structural realities that have been documented in many other settings. In an article examining how the federal government prosecutes drug crime, for example, Lauren Ouziel lays bare the “disconnect between [federal criminal] law’s ambition and fruition.”153Ouziel, supra note 78, at 1077. Ouziel shows that in federal drug prosecutions, the substantive criminal law is explicitly designed to target the most serious defendants—those whose crimes involve large quantities of illegal drugs and acts of physical violence, and those who have significant prior criminal records.154See id. at 1079. But despite this ambition, the federal government nonetheless prosecutes many defendants who do not fall into these categories.155See id. Ouziel argues that the pressure and incentives that federal prosecutors face in their work—among other things—contribute to this ambition/fruition divide.156See id. at 1110–11 (arguing that because it is difficult for the federal government to monitor prosecutors’ “performance” in enforcing federal drug laws, it turns to “proxies” such as arrests and seizures).

Examples of the ambition/fruition divide are not limited to the criminal setting. In the context of environmental enforcement, Nathan Atkinson shows that the Environmental Protection Agency (“EPA”) imposes fees on corporate pollution that are roughly one-fifth the size necessary to make polluting unprofitable ex ante.157Nathan Atkinson, Profiting from Pollution, 41 Yale J. Regul. 1, 5–6 (2023); see also Roy Shapira & Luigi Zingales, Is Pollution Value-Maximizing? The Dupont Case 1 (Nat’l Bureau of Econ. Rsch., Working Paper No. 23866, 2017) (showing that DuPont’s toxic pollution—which ultimately led to a roughly one billion-dollar judgment against the company—was a rational, profit-maximizing choice rather than the result of ignorance or poor governance). In another example, ProPublica journalists Paul Kiel and Jesse Eisinger showed a perhaps illogical disparity in the Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) enforcement efforts: taxpayers who receive the Earned Income Tax Credit (“EITC”)—mostly low-income wage earners—are audited at higher rates than households with much larger earnings.158Paul Kiel & Jesse Eisinger, Who’s More Likely to be Audited: A Person Making $20,000—or $400,000?, ProPublica (Dec. 12, 2018, 5:00 AM), https://www.propublica.org/article/earned-income-tax-credit-irs-audit-working-poor [https://perma.cc/5CF6-YGWB] (showing that in 2017, EITC recipients were audited at twice the rate of taxpayers with incomes between $200,000 and $500,000). Along the same lines, a county-level analysis by ProPublica’s Paul Kiel and Hannah Fresques found that America’s poorest counties are our most audited.159Paul Kiel & Hannah Fresques, Where in the U.S. Are You Most Likely to Be Audited by the IRS?, ProPublica (Apr. 1, 2019), https://projects.propublica.org/graphics/eitc-audit [https://perma.cc/DH7Q-ER5A]. Yet recent research shows that despite the lower costs to carry them out, IRS audits of low-income people yield less net revenue than audits of wealthy taxpayers at the top of the income distribution.160William C. Boning, Nathaniel Hendren, Ben Sprung-Keyser & Ellen Stuart, A Welfare Analysis of Tax Audits Across the Income Distribution 1 (Nat’l Bureau of Econ. Rsch., Working Paper No. 31376, 2023). IRS’s choice to focus much of its enforcement activity on EITC filers also contributes to racial inequality in audits.161This is because Black taxpayers are more likely to claim the EITC than non-Black taxpayers, EITC claimants are audited at high rates, and because among EITC recipients, Black taxpayers are more likely to be audited than non-Black taxpayers. See Hadi Elzayn, Evelyn Smith, Thomas Hertz, Arun Ramesh, Robin Fisher, Daniel E. Ho & Jacob Goldin, Measuring and Mitigating Racial Disparities in Tax Audits 3–4 (Stanford Inst. for Econ. Pol’y Rsch., Working Paper, 2023), https://dho.stanford.edu/
wp-content/uploads/IRS_Disparities.pdf [https://perma.cc/D8QN-W35Y] (analyzing around 150 million tax returns and estimating that Black taxpayers are audited at higher rates than non-Black taxpayers and that this difference is primarily driven by the difference in audit rates among taxpayers who claim the EITC). See generally Jeremy Bearer-Friend, Colorblind Tax Enforcement, 97 N.Y.U. L. Rev. 1 (2022) (arguing that IRS enforcement decisions are vulnerable to racial bias even though the IRS does not ask taxpayers to identify their race or ethnicity when they file tax returns).

Like the drug crime and IRS contexts, prosecutors and law enforcement agents working on financial crimes face incentives and constraints that likely lead them to focus their efforts on straightforward, uncomplicated, and winnable prosecutions.162See Stuntz, supra note 72, at 535 (“[Unelected line prosecutors] are likely to seek to make their jobs easier, to reduce or limit their workload where possible. That inclination means two things: limiting the number of cases on their dockets, and limiting the cost of the process per case.” (citation omitted)). Of course, what kinds of cases and defendants an agent or prosecutor thinks are “winnable” requires judgments that will be filtered through and reinforced by the agent or prosecutor’s individual biases, as described in Section III.D.

How do prosecutors decide which potential cases are winnable? They likely consider the evidentiary strength of their case, the resources necessary to investigate and prosecute the case, and how a jury is likely to view the case.163See Anna Offit, Prosecuting in the Shadow of the Jury, 113 Nw. U. L. Rev. 1071 (2019) (presenting ethnographic research showing that federal prosecutors think about how hypothetical jurors will view their cases when making investigative and plea bargaining decisions). These assessments are likely shaped by biases, as described in the next section.

All these factors—the strength of the evidence, the resources necessary to bring the case, and how a jury is likely to view the case—militate toward prosecuting low-level cases. As described in Sections I.B and III.C, a financial crime prosecution typically requires a prosecutor to prove beyond a reasonable doubt that the defendant intended to defraud someone. In simplistic cases, such as when an employee uses a company credit card to buy personal items, the evidence of fraud will often be straightforward and easily attainable: typically, the victim (the employer) will have records showing unauthorized purchases and can turn those records over to prosecutors.

In contrast, the task of building a case will be much more difficult in frauds for which there is no victim who can provide evidence of the fraud, such as when a fraud is carried out in a large corporate organization with many diffuse victims. As Miriam Baer describes, “[l]ife within corporate settings is remarkably compartmentalized and siloed. Information and responsibility fractures among multiple units and departments, allowing criminal targets to claim that the left hand did not know what the right hand was doing, or at very least, that an intent to harm or deceive was absent.”164Baer, supra note 6, at 110.

In such cases, the government will typically need to rely on a whistleblower for evidence and may have a hard time proving that any particular person involved had the requisite intent to defraud. Whistleblowers can be hard to recruit because, although they are occasionally rewarded for bringing wrongdoing to light, more often they are fired and struggle to find a new job in their industry.165William D. Cohan, High Risk but Little Reward for Whistle-Blowers, N.Y. Times (Mar. 26, 2015), https://www.nytimes.com/2015/03/27/business/dealbook/high-risk-but-little-reward-for-whistle-blowers.html [https://perma.cc/22RX-N2PG]; see also William D. Cohan, Wall St. Whistle-Blowers, Often Scorned, Get New Support, N.Y. Times (Feb. 11, 2016), https://www.nytimes.com/2016/02/12/business/dealbook/wall-st-whistle-blowers-often-scorned-get-new-support.html [https://perma.cc/ZHR4-XUYS] (describing an advocacy group, Bank Whistleblowers United, “that aims to improve the status of Wall Street whistle-blowers and change the way Wall Street is regulated”); Alexander I. Platt, The Whistleblower Industrial Complex, 40 Yale J. Regul. 688, 707–09 (2023). This is precisely what happened to Alayne Fleischmann, the whistleblower in Case D.166See Daniel C. Richman, Corporate Headhunting, 8 Harv. L. & Pol’y Rev. 265, 269 (2014) (describing likely difficulties in bringing criminal charges against individuals involved in the 2008 financial crisis). But see Miriam Baer, supra note, 6, at 15 (“[W]hite-collar crimes are not always as difficult to prove as some commentators suggest . . . . When the government feels like it, it mobilizes its extensive resources.”).

Second, building and bringing complex cases takes a lot of work and resources. It uses up prosecutors’ and investigators’ time. The more witnesses there are to interview, the more documents there are to review, and the more expertise is required to understand the fraud—all these tasks require a lot of resources. A straightforward case can move forward more quickly and easily.

Relatedly, the resource differences on each side of a criminal case can strain the government’s ability to prosecute. Charging a person who will hire a large law firm to represent them in defense will create a different resource dynamic than prosecuting a person who will rely on appointed counsel.167Of course, there are many talented attorneys who work as appointed counsel, but they do not have the same level of resources as a large law firm. Some research has found that attorneys who are retained rather than appointed appear to achieve better outcomes for their clients. See, e.g., Amanda Agan, Matthew Freedman & Emily Owens, Is Your Lawyer a Lemon? Incentives and Selection in the Public Provision of Criminal Defense, 103 Rev. Econ. & Stat. 294, 294 (2021) (finding worse outcomes for criminal defendants represented by appointed rather than retained counsel); Thomas H. Cohen, Who is Better at Defending Criminals? Does Type of Defense Attorney Matter in Terms of Producing Favorable Case Outcomes, 25 Crim. J. Pol’y Rev. 29, 29 (2014). Several studies also show that federal public defenders outperform Criminal Justice Act panel attorneys. Radha Iyengar, An Analysis of the Performance of Federal Indigent Defense Counsel 2 (Nat’l Bureau of Econ. Rsch., Working Paper No. 13187, 2007); see also Michael A. Roach, Indigent Defense Counsel, Attorney Quality, and Defendant Outcomes, 16 Am. L. & Econ. Rev. 577, 615 (2014). These resource differences could easily lead the federal government to disproportionately prosecute indigent defendants.

C.  Formal Law and Policy

The substantive laws and rules that define financial crimes and govern how they are prosecuted and sentenced favor sophisticated criminal lawbreakers in many ways. We see examples of this phenomenon in other contexts, too. For example, by far the largest source of theft in the United States is wage theft, which some researchers estimate accounts for more than $15 billion stolen every year.168David Cooper & Teresa Kroeger, Employers Steal Billions from Workers’ Paychecks Each Year, Econ. Pol’y Inst. (May 10, 2017), https://www.epi.org/publication/employers-steal-billions-from-workers-paychecks-each-year [https://perma.cc/K74Q-7Q92]. An employer commits wage theft when they do not pay an employee wages to which the employee is legally entitled, such as by paying less than the minimum wage, not paying required overtime wages, or asking employees to work “off the clock” before or after their shifts.169Ihna Mangundayao, Celine McNicholas, Margaret Poydock & Ali Sait, More than $3 Billion in Stolen Wages Recovered for Workers Between 2017 and 2020, Econ. Pol’y Inst. (Dec. 22, 2021), https://www.epi.org/publication/wage-theft-2021 [https://perma.cc/R7W4-ZBVY]. For a comprehensive examination of efforts to criminalize wage theft, see generally Levin, supra note 111. But wage theft is almost never prosecuted.170See Chris Opfer, Prosecutors Treating ‘Wage Theft’ as a Crime in These States, Bloomberg L. (June 26, 2018, 3:31 AM), https://news.bloomberglaw.com/daily-labor-report/prosecutors-treating-wage-theft-as-a-crime-in-these-states [https://perma.cc/4QSZ-RKX8] (noting that “[w]hen a business doesn’t pay workers minimum wages or overtime, it usually risks a government investigation or private lawsuit,” but that “[p]rosecutors in New York and California are starting to view wage violations as an actual crime more often, as opposed to a matter for civil courts”). The primary way that stolen wages are recovered is through civil actions brought by the U.S. Department of Labor’s Wage and Hour Division, state departments of labor, state attorneys general, and civil class actions. In contrast, larceny and auto theft each steal around $5 billion per year and robbery steals around $380 million.171Table 23: Offense Analysis, Number and Percent Change, 2018–2019, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Fed. Bureau of Investigation, 2019 Crime in the United States, https://ucr.fbi.gov/crime-in-the-u.s/2019/crime-in-the-u.s.-2019/tables/table-23 [https://perma.cc/2UTR-ZPPV]. Unlike wage theft, these crimes are frequently prosecuted.172According to FBI statistics, police clear around thirty-one percent of robberies, fourteen percent of auto thefts, and eighteen percent of larceny offenses. Table 25: Percent of Offenses Cleared by Arrest or Exceptional Means, by Population Group, 2019, U.S. Dep’t of Just., Fed. Bureau of Investigation, 2019 Crime in the United States, https://ucr.fbi.gov/crime-in-the-u.s/2019/crime-in-the-u.s.-2019/topic-pages/tables/table-25 [https://perma.cc/SNG9-GJNQ].

There are myriad ways that federal criminal law and formal policy similarly benefit sophisticated people who commit higher-value, more complex crimes. Here, I focus on two: the mens rea requirements of fraud statutes, and the way restitution is calculated and prioritized.

1.  Mens Rea Elements

As described in Section I.B, most financial crimes contain mens rea elements that require the government to prove the defendant’s intent to defraud. In a relatively straightforward fraud—such as Cases A, B, and C described in Section I.C—it is easy to see how a jury could view the defendants’ conduct and conclude that they intentionally deceived their victims. But in a complex fraud case involving many parties, such as Case D, proving a deceitful intent or scheme on the part of any particular participant could be very difficult for prosecutors.173Daniel Richman is more skeptical of claims that proving criminal intent is a significant hurdle to white-collar prosecutions in the context of the financial crisis, noting that mens rea elements “are far from trivial burdens, but prosecutors regularly meet them in any number of mundane white-collar cases.” Richman, supra note 166; see, e.g., Danielle Kurtzleben, Too Big to Jail: Why the Government Is Quick to Fine but Slow to Prosecute Big Corporations, Vox (July 13, 2015, 10:52 AM), https://www.vox.com/2014/11/16/7223367/corporate-prosecution-wall-street [https://perma.cc/N4AM-H57C] (quoting Brandon Garrett as explaining that in the aftermath of the 2008 financial crisis, prosecutors preferred to focus on “crimes that seem tangential to the crisis . . . . where it [was] easier to show that a small number of people had intent . . . versus some of the mortgage fraud, where there [were] sophisticated actors working with each other, where to show intent to defraud [prosecutors would] have to show that there [was] a clearly deceptive scheme that misled someone else”). As a result, complicated and sophisticated financial crimes—which Table 1 shows are more likely to be perpetrated by people who are high-income, male, and White—are likely much more difficult to prosecute.

2.  Restitution Calculations

The rules around restitution calculations also benefit defendants who commit complex crimes. As described in Section I.B, federal law (like the law in all states) requires courts to order restitution in any case “in which an identifiable victim or victims has suffered a physical injury or pecuniary loss.”17418 U.S.C. §§ 3663A(a)(1), 3663A(c)(1)(B).

One might imagine this means people who commit more complex, higher-value crimes will have to pay more restitution and could therefore be more desirable to prosecute from a prosecutor’s perspective. But this is not the case because the restitution statute contains two exceptions. First, it does not require restitution in cases in which “the number of identifiable victims is so large as to make restitution impracticable.”175Id. § 3663A(c)(3)(A). Second, it does not require restitution in cases in which “determining complex issues of fact related to the cause or amount of the victim’s losses would complicate or prolong the sentencing process to a degree that the need to provide restitution to any victim is outweighed by the burden on the sentencing process.”176Id. § 3663A(c)(3)(B). In other words, financial crimes that are more complex, for which losses are harder to calculate, and for which there are more victims are much less likely to involve restitution. Thus, even if JPMorgan Chase or any of its employees had been convicted of a crime in connection with the financial crisis, they would have had a strong argument that the statute did not require them to pay restitution. In contrast, the defendants in Cases B and C were ordered to pay restitution because their crimes were not complex enough to trigger a statutory exception.

3.  Restitution Policy

Notwithstanding the statutory exceptions, federal prosecutors and judges tend to be highly committed to ensuring as much restitution as possible for victims of financial crimes. For example, the federal sentencing statute instructs judges to consider “the need to provide restitution to any victims of the offense” when sentencing defendants.177Id. § 3553(a)(7). The Justice Manual tells prosecutors that when “determining whether it would be appropriate to enter into a plea agreement,” they should consider (among other factors) “[t]he interests of the victim, including any effect upon the victim’s right to restitution.”178U.S. Dep’t of Just., supra note 73, at § 9-27.420. Similarly, the Manual instructs prosecutors to “take[] into account the need for the defendant to provide restitution to any victims of the offense” when making sentencing recommendations.179Id. at § 9-27.730. Assistant Attorney General for the Criminal Division Kenneth A. Polite, Jr. described federal white-collar efforts in a recent speech, telling the audience, “[c]onsidering victims must be at the center of our white-collar cases. . . . Though we cannot always recover every cent, we deploy all tools at our disposal to restrain assets, obtain restitution, and when possible, repatriate assets for victims.”180Polite, supra note 23.

One consequence of prosecutors’ and judges’ desire to provide restitution to victims of financial crimes is that defendants with more resources can argue (either as a pitch to prosecutors before charging or to a judge at sentencing) that they should not be prosecuted or incarcerated because a criminal case or prison sentence will interrupt their ability to earn income to pay toward restitution. For example, a financial advisor convicted of fraud in the District of Massachusetts made this argument in his sentencing memo, writing:

If incarcerated, [the defendant] will not be able to contribute to restitution; he will lose his job and have to start all over upon his release. Whereas in his current position, where he has advanced to a management position in a relatively short amount of time, he will be able to contribute immediately toward a restitution award.181Def.’s Sentencing Mem. at 9, United States v. Cody, No. 17-CR-10291 (D. Mass. Mar. 9, 2019); see also, e.g., Def.’s Sentencing Mem. at 2, United States v. Luna, No. 19 CR 902-1 (N.D. Ill. Nov. 11, 2020) (noting that the defendant already paid some restitution to the victim, was working full-time in a new job and wanted to continue to repay the victim, and arguing that “paying the victim back is a goal the Court should consider in fashioning a non-custodial sentence” for the defendant).

Indeed, federal courts routinely justify low or probation-only sentences for financial crime defendants by stating their desire to allow the defendant to work and provide restitution.182See United States v. Menyweather, 447 F.3d 625, 634 (9th Cir. 2006) (affirming a probation-only sentence for a defendant convicted of fraud and observing “that the district court’s goal of obtaining restitution for the victims of Defendant’s offense . . . is better served by a non-incarcerated and employed defendant”); United States v. Bortnick, No. 03-CR-0414, 2006 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 11744, at *14, *19 (E.D. Pa. Mar. 15, 2006) (imposing a seven-day sentence to a defendant in an $8 million fraud case with a 51–63 month advisory Guidelines range because “[d]efendant owes a substantial amount of restitution, which he will be able to pay more easily if he is not subjected to a lengthy incarceration period”); United States v. Peterson, 363 F.Supp.2d 1060, 1063 (E.D. Wis. 2005) (imposing a one-day sentence so defendant would not lose his job and could pay restitution to the bank he defrauded). But see United States v. Mueffelman, 470 F.3d 33, 40 (1st Cir. 2006) (affirming a 27-month sentence despite the defendant’s argument that “anything beyond a probationary sentence would impair his ability to provide restitution for victims” and his promise to “earn $120,000–175,000 per year to pay toward restitution, with a friend promising to make up any short fall”). In one of the Yale Studies that surveyed federal district court judges about how they sentence white-collar defendants, one judge was asked about his decision not to impose a prison sentence on a person convicted of not reporting large amounts of income. The interviewer asked the judge, “[Y]ou must have considered sending him to a term in prison. What made you decide that that wasn’t appropriate in this case?” The judge responded,

Well, the restitution. There is half a million dollars back in the coffers that we wouldn’t have got if I had sent him to prison. He would have served his term, and there would have been no way of getting it, and eventually some day or other he would have gotten out of the country somehow or other and gotten that money. That was it.183Mann et al., supra note 51, at 492.

A defendant with fewer resources or without stable employment will have a harder time making this argument to a prosecutor, which could explain why wealthy defendants are less likely to be prosecuted for financial crimes.184Indeed, federal prosecutors often decline or defer prosecution of corporations for this reason. See supra notes 85, 109, 110 and accompanying text.

D. Bias

As described in Section I.B, federal investigative agencies and DOJ have nearly absolute discretion in deciding which cases to investigate and prosecute. Although individual agents and federal prosecutors might be constrained formally and informally by office policies and norms, there are almost no formal legal constraints on how enforcement agents decide which cases to investigate and how prosecutors decide which cases to pursue.185See supra note 71 and accompanying text. Wide discretion often allows decisionmakers to make discriminatory decisions, either consciously or subconsciously.

1. Stereotypes About Dishonesty

Deceit is the central characteristic of financial crime. Social psychologists have documented consistent stereotypes that associate honesty with social class, race, and gender in the United States. For example, literature in psychology finds that participants often view people of low socioeconomic status as lazy, incompetent, and prone to substance abuse, while viewing people of high socioeconomic status as more competent and intelligent.186Federica Durante & Susan T. Fiske, How Social-Class Stereotypes Maintain Inequality, 18 Current Op. Psych. 43, 43 (2017).

Stereotypes characterizing women—and, in particular, women of color—as dishonest are pervasive in the United States, which might explain why Black women are overrepresented among financial crime defendants despite being underrepresented in federal prosecutions overall. Women have long been viewed as dishonest in criminal cases,187See, e.g., Diana L. Payne, Kimberly A. Lonsway & Louise F. Fitzgerald, Rape Myth Acceptance: Exploration of Its Structure and Its Measurement Using the Illinois Rape Myth Acceptance Scale, 33 J. Rsch. Personality 27 (1999). and Marilyn Yarbrough and Crystal Bennett describe “a hierarchy when credibility issues arise in the courts. It is not only a simple hierarchy of men over women, but it is one where White women are found to be more credible than African American women.”188Marilyn Yarbrough & Crystal Bennett, Cassandra and the “Sistahs”: The Peculiar Treatment of African American Women in the Myth of Women as Liars, 3 J. Gender Race & Just. 625, 634 (2000) (citing Rosemary C. Hunter, Gender in Evidence: Masculine Norms vs. Feminist Reforms, 19 Harv. Women’s L.J. 127, 165 (1996)). The rhetoric and law of welfare reform in the 1990s also surfaced and magnified already prevalent gender- and race-based stereotypes about dishonesty. Gustafson, supra note 14, at 1 (“[W]hile welfare use has always carried the stigma of poverty, it now also bears the stigma of criminality.”); see also Julilly Kohler-Hausmann, Welfare Crises, Penal Solutions, and the Origins of the “Welfare Queen,” 41 J. Urb. Hist. 756, 757 (2015) (arguing that “opponents of welfare programs recruited the penal system to discredit public aid beneficiaries and administration”); Franklin D. Gilliam, Jr., The “Welfare Queen” Experiment: How Viewers React to Images of African-American Mothers on Welfare, Nieman Reports (June 15, 1999), https://niemanreports.org/articles/the-welfare-queen-experiment [https://perma.cc/3EX2-FLW3] (finding that when White subjects viewed a television story about welfare reform, they were more likely to believe that “welfare recipients cheat and defraud the system” when exposed to a segment that depicted a female benefits recipient as Black compared to one that depicted the female benefits recipient as White). And as Chan Tov McNamarah explains, “[S]kepticism of Black credibility is part of a larger, historically created space in which those who are deemed rational, reliable, and worthy of belief are White and male.”189Chan Tov McNamarah, White Caller Crime: Racialized Police Communication and Existing While Black, 24 Mich. J. Race & L. 335, 372 (2019) (citing Sheri Lynn Johnson, The Color of Truth: Race and the Assessment of Credibility, 1 Mich. J. Race & L. 261 (1996)); see also Kurtis Haut, Caleb Wohn, Victor Antony, Aidan Goldfarb, Melissa Welsh, Dillanie Sumanthiran, Ji-ze Jang, Md. Rafayet Ali & Ehsan Hoque, Could You Become More Credible by Being White? Assessing Impact of Race on Credibility with Deepfakes, ArXiv, Feb. 16, 2021, at 1, 1–2, https://arxiv.org/pdf/2102.08054.pdf [https://perma.cc/E9BJ-XQUG] (displaying Deepfake still photos and video clips that used the same audio but altered the speaker’s race and finding that speaker race had a negligible effect on credibility when presented as a static image but a statistically significant effect when presented as a video (with a White speaker viewed as more credible than a South Asian speaker)). These kinds of prejudices could affect how agents decide which people to investigate and prosecutors decide which cases to bring.

2.  In-Group Favoritism

Bennett Capers argues, “[T]o understand mass incarceration, we must not only understand overcriminalization and overenforcement in minority communities. We must also understand the role played by under-enforcement, and privilege, in nonminority communities.”190I. Bennett Capers, The Under-Policed, 51 Wake Forest L. Rev. 589, 609 (2016). Consciously or not, prosecutors and agents might be less willing to prosecute people with whom they have more in common, a phenomenon often referred to as “in-group favoritism.”

In-group favoritism occurs when a decision-maker gives preferential treatment to those who share a salient trait with the decision-maker, such as by being a member of their gender, racial, ethnic, or religious group.191Jim A.C. Everett, Nadira S. Faber & Molly Crockett, Preferences and Beliefs in Ingroup Favoritism, Frontiers Behav. Neuroscience, Feb. 13, 2015, at 1. In this subsection, I do not mean to rule out that conscious class-, gender-, or race-based bias is also a potential cause of the inequalities documented in Part II. For many years, there was a growing consensus that the majority of discrimination in the United States takes the form of in-group favoritism,192See, e.g., Anthony G. Greenwald & Thomas F. Pettigrew, With Malice Toward None and Charity for Some: Ingroup Favoritism Enables Discrimination, 69 Am. Psych. 669, 669 (2014); Linda Hamilton Krieger, Civil Rights Perestroika: Intergroup Relations After Affirmative Action, 86 Calif. L. Rev. 125 (1998). although in recent years overt racism and sexism have grown increasingly prevalent.193See, e.g., Charles R. Lawrence III, Implicit Bias in the Age of Trump, 133 Harv. L. Rev. 2304, 2311 (2020) (reviewing Jennifer L. Eberhardt, Biased: Uncovering the Hidden Prejudice that Shapes What We See, Think, and Do (2019)) (reflecting on the choice to review “a book about hidden bias when the active threat is self-proclaimed racists marching in the streets[] . . . . [and] when the President of the country was holding rallies and building walls to proclaim himself the protector of a white nation”); see also Griffin Edwards & Stephen Rushin, The Effect of President Trump’s Election on Hate Crimes (Jan. 2019) (working paper), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=3102652 [https://perma.cc/2J38-N6P6].

In-group favoritism is well-documented in the criminal system. In prior work, I showed that federal prosecutors exhibit gender-based in-group favoritism, treating defendants of their own gender relatively more leniently than other-gender defendants.194Stephanie Holmes Didwania, Gender Favoritism Among Criminal Prosecutors, 65 J.L. & Econ. 77, 77 (2022). CarlyWill Sloan has also shown that state-level prosecutors demonstrate race-based favoritism in prosecuting property crimes in New York County. CarlyWill Sloan, Racial Bias by Prosecutors: Evidence from Random Assignment (Jan. 10, 2022) (working paper), https://github.com/carlywillsloan/Prosecutors/blob/master/sloan_pros.pdf [https://perma.cc/7AZT-SF99]. New research suggests that firms risking prosecution appear to strategically leverage in-group favoritism to help improve negotiations with federal prosecutors.195Brian D. Feinstein, William R. Heaston & Guilherme Siqueira de Carvalho, In-Group Favoritism as Legal Strategy: Evidence from FCPA Settlements, 60 Am. Bus. L.J. 5 (2023). Other scholars have previously documented in-group favoritism among other actors in criminal legal systems, including judges196See, e.g., David S. Abrams, Marianne Bertrand & Sendhil Mullainathan, 41 J. Legal Stud. 347, 350 (2012) (finding that African American judges exhibit smaller racial disparities in sentencing than their White counterparts); Oren Gazal-Ayal & Raanan Sulitzeanu-Kenan, Let My People Go: Ethnic In-Group Bias in Judicial Decisions—Evidence from a Randomized Natural Experiment, 7 J. Empirical Legal Stud. 403, 403, 421 (2010) (finding that Arab and Jewish judges in Israel are less likely to detain defendants who share their ethnicity). But see Briggs Depew, Ozkan Eren & Naci Mocan, Judges, Juveniles, and In-Group Bias, 60 J.L. & Econ. 209, 209 (2017) (finding that judges exhibit “negative in-group bias” toward juvenile defendants of the judge’s race); Claire S.H. Lim, Bernardo S. Silveira & James M. Snyder, Jr., Do Judges’ Characteristics Matter? Ethnicity, Gender, and Partisanship in Texas State Trial Courts, 18 Am. L. & Econ. Rev. 302, 305 (2016) (finding that “matches between judges’ and defendants’ ethnicity, race, and gender . . . have negligible effects” on sentence length). and police officers.197See, e.g., Bocar A. Ba, Dean Knox, Jonathan Mummolo & Roman Rivera, The Role of Officer Race and Gender in Police-Civilian Interactions in Chicago, 371 Science 696, 696 (2021) (showing that “Hispanic and Black officers make far fewer stops and arrests and they use force less [often than White officers], especially against Black civilians”); John J. Donohue, III & Steven D. Levitt, The Impact of Race on Policing and Arrests, 44 J.L. & Econ. 367, 367 (2001) (finding that police departments with more minority officers are more likely to arrest White suspects, with little impact on the arrests of non-White suspects); Mark Hoekstra & CarlyWill Sloan, Does Race Matter for Police Use of Force? Evidence from 911 Calls, 112 Am. Econ. Rev. 827, 827 (2022) (finding that “White officers increase force much more than minority officers when dispatched to more minority neighborhoods”). As an important caveat, however, some research finds evidence of a phenomenon called the black-sheep effect, in which people punish in-group members more harshly than out-group members for bad behavior.198See José M. Marques, Vincent Y. Yzerbyt & Jacques-Philippe Leyens, The “Black Sheep Effect”: Extremity of Judgments Towards Ingroup Members as a Function of Group Identification, 18 Eur. J. Soc. Psych. 1 (1988); see also Depew et al., supra note 196, at 233 (finding in-group disfavoritism on the basis of race in juvenile sentencing).

Perhaps more than in other types of federal cases (most of which involve immigration, drugs, or firearm possession), prosecutors and federal agents might feel affinity for financial crime defendants who work as business professionals due to cultural or social proximity. This hypothesis is not new. Over 40 years ago, one of the Yale Studies described in Section I.B.2 surveyed federal district judges and found sentiment of in-group favoritism when judges were asked about sentencing white-collar defendants. For example, one federal judge described his views on sentencing white-collar defendants to prison this way:

I think the first sentence to a prison term for a person who up to now has lived and has surrounded himself with a family, that lives in terms of great respectability and community respect and so on, whether one likes to say this or not I think a term of imprisonment for such a person is probably a harsher, more painful sanction than it is for someone who grows up somewhere where people are always in and out of prison. There may be something racist about saying that, but I am saying what I think is true or perhaps needs to be laid out on the table and faced.199Mann et al., supra note 51, at 486–87.

The authors believe the judge’s previous comment is the result of increased empathy toward wealthy and professional class white-collar defendants.200Id. at 500.

The [judges’] interview responses repeatedly give evidence of the judges’ understanding, indeed sympathy, for the person whose position in society may be very much like their own. In places, the interviews exude the pain that judges feel in seeing the offender uprooted from his family, humiliated before his friends, and exposed to the degradation of imprisonment.

Id.; see also Bibas, supra note 80 (“[J]udges may prefer to look ex post at the sympathetic, white, educated offender who reminds judges of themselves and seems to pose no danger.”).
Indeed, in-group favoritism often takes the form of empathy toward in-group members, and, in experimental settings, people are often more likely to feel empathy in observing the pain of an in-group member compared to an out-group member.201See Mina Cikara, Emile G. Bruneau & Rebecca R. Saxe, Us and Them: Intergroup Failures of Empathy, 20 Current Directions in Psych. Sci. 149, 149 (2011); Jennifer N. Gutsell & Michael Inzlicht, Intergroup Differences in the Sharing of Emotive States: Neural Evidence of an Empathy Gap, 7 Soc. Cognition & Affective Neuroscience 596, 596 (2012); Xiaojing Xu, Xiangyu Zuo, Xiaoying Wang & Shihui Han, Do You Feel My Pain? Racial Group Membership Modulates Empathic Neural Responses, 29 J. Neuroscience 8525, 8525 (2009). It is plausible that prosecutors and FBI agents are more empathetic about the harms of federal prosecution when it comes to potential defendants with similar levels of formal education and wealth.

CONCLUSION

This Article has shown that, contrary to popular wisdom, financial crime is frequently prosecuted in the United States. Part II showed that federal financial crimes are prosecuted in ways that replicate inequalities that exist throughout American criminal law. Black men and women are more likely to be prosecuted for financial crimes than any other racial and gender group. Unlike the traditional view of white-collar crime, which posits that it is a form of crime largely perpetuated by economic elites, the findings also show that federal financial crime defendants are likely to have fewer resources than most U.S. adults.

Part III offered many explanations for these findings. It argued that systemic incentives, formal law and policy, and individual biases could all drive inequality. It also showed that the overrepresentation of Black and low-income defendants does not appear to be because these defendants commit the most egregious forms of financial crime (in fact, the opposite is true).

The inequalities documented in this paper are concerning because they seem to be overlooked. The intense focus on elite white-collar criminals—by the media, the academy, and the federal government itself—seems to at best not understand the realities of the system in which they are operating. This Article hopes to address this mistake.

APPENDIX

Figure A.1.  Federal Criminal Cases: Three Most Common Offense Types, 1994–2019
 
Note: This figure plots the number of cases sentenced each fiscal year between 1994 and 2019 for the three most commonly prosecuted types of federal crime: drug trafficking and possession, immigration, and financial crime.
Figure A.2.  Educational Attainment in Federal Financial Crime Cases Over Time
A.  Educational Attainment in Federal Financial Crime Cases
 
B.  Educational Attainment Representation in Federal Financial Crime Cases
 
Note: For each year, the “Representation Gap” in panel B is computed as the share of financial crime defendants in the educational group divided by the share of the U.S. adult population between the ages of 25 and 54 in that educational group.
Figure A.3.  Gender Inequality in Financial Crime Prosecutions (All Years) 
  
Note: This figure maps the share of each district’s financial crime cases that are prosecuted against women. Each shade represents an equal interval in the distribution. Lightest shading means roughly 15–22% of financial crime defendants in the district are women; second-lightest shading means 22–29% of financial crime defendants are women; second-darkest shading means 29–36% of financial crime defendants are women; and darkest shading means 36–43% of financial crime defendants are women. 
Table A.1.  Victim Coding: Most Prosecuted Financial Crimes
Crime (Short Description)StatuteShare of CasesVictim
Conspiracy or Defrauding the United States18 U.S.C. § 3710.185U
Embezzlement or Theft of Public Money18 U.S.C. § 6410.079G
Attempt or Conspiracy to §§ 1341‑4818 U.S.C. § 13490.074P
Bank fraud18 U.S.C. § 13440.073P
Wire fraud18 U.S.C. § 13430.072P
Mail fraud18 U.S.C. § 13410.065P
Tax Fraud26 U.S.C. § 72010.053G
False Statements to Federal Officials18 U.S.C. § 10010.050N
Counterfeiting18 U.S.C. § 4720.046P
Credit Card Fraud18 U.S.C. § 10290.046P
Identity Theft18 U.S.C. § 10280.044U
Mail Theft18 U.S.C. § 17080.031G
Accessory to a Crime18 U.S.C. § 20.027U
Social Security Fraud42 U.S.C. § 4080.021G
Embezzlement by Bank Employee18 U.S.C. § 6560.015P
Healthcare Fraud18 U.S.C. § 13470.015U
Conspiracy to Defraud the Government18 U.S.C. § 2860.013G
Note: This table reports how victim status was coded for the most prosecuted federal financial crimes. G=government victim; N=no victim; P=private victim; U=unknown victim. The table is restricted to crimes constituting at least one percent of charged cases. Many additional types of financial crimes were also coded, and a complete crosswalk is available from the author by request.
Table A.2.  Proxies for Poverty in Federal Fraud Prosecutions
 

% of Financial Crime Defs

(All)

% of Financial Crime Defs

(Citizens)

% of U.S. Adult Pop

(if applicable)

Less than HS18.8916.7811.09
High School Only31.4931.5929.43
Some College31.0232.2427.42
College Graduate18.6019.4032.06
Fines Waived85.8989.04
Retained Counsel33.7333.63
Observations276,210161,552 
Note: Computations are for federal defendants sentenced under the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines for financial crimes in fiscal years 1994–2019. U.S. adult population averages computed over the years 1994–2019.
Table A.3.  Race-Gender Representation in Federal Fraud Prosecutions
 % of Financial Crime Defs% of All Defs% of U.S. Adult Pop
Black Men18.6219.515.55
Hispanic Men10.8640.377.11
Another Race Men4.693.762.93
White Men36.0622.8232.89
All Men70.2386.4748.47
Black Women10.703.346.41
Hispanic Women3.854.266.97
Another Race Women2.080.923.29
White Women13.135.0134.86
All Women29.7713.5351.53
Observations276,2101,667,763 
Note: Computations are for federal defendants sentenced under the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines in fiscal years 1994–2019. U.S. adult population averages computed over the years 1994–2019.
97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 299

Download

* Associate Professor of Law, Northwestern Pritzker School of Law. I am grateful to Joshua Braver, Samuel Buell, Franciska Coleman, Brandon Garrett, Michael Gentithes, Ben Grunwald, Andrew Hammond, Paul Heaton, Carissa Hessick, Christine Jolls, Kay Levine, James Lindgren, Yair Listokin, Yaron Nili, Lauren Ouziel, Maria Ponomarenko, John Rappaport, Megan Stevenson, Neel Sukhatme, Kegon Teng Kok Tan, Nina Varsava, Lisa Washington, Ron Wright, as well as participants at the 2022 CrimFest Conference, the 2022 Chicagoland Junior Scholars Conference, the 2022 Empirical Criminal Law Roundtable, the 2023 Annual Meeting of the American Law and Economics Association, the 2023 Conference on Empirical Legal Studies, the 2023 Harvard/Stanford/Yale Junior Faculty Forum, the Larry E. Ribstein Law & Economics Workshop at George Mason University Antonin Scalia Law School, the Soshnick Colloquium on Law and Economics at Northwestern Pritzker School of Law, and the University of Wisconsin-Madison La Follette School of Public Affairs Seminar for thoughtful comments on this work. Thomas Gordon and Matthew Marcin provided excellent research assistance. Finally, I thank the fantastic student editors of the Southern California Law Review for their meticulous and insightful editorial assistance.